Specifications and Other Documents

Specifications and other documents

Whole Foods Market – Kennesaw, GA

Site Prepared by GreenbergFarrow 1300 Barrett Parkway 1430 West Peachtree Street Suite 500 Suite 200 Kennesaw, GA 30152 Atlanta, GA 30309 t: 404 601 4000 f: 404 601 3980

Issue/Revision Date GF Project Number 09/16/16 Permit 20150816.0 02/13/17 Bidding

INDEX-1 TABLE OF CONTENTS 02/13/17 20150922

SECTION INDEX - TABLE OF CONTENTS

WHOLE FOODS MARKET KENNESAW, GA GF PROJECT NO. 20150922.0 FEBRUARY 13, 2017

DIVISION 0 – OWNER REQUIREMENTS

Section REVINDEX 02/13/17 Table of Contents Section REV00100 02/13/17 Invitation to Bid Section REV00110 02/17/17 Project Dates Section REV00400 02/13/17 Bid Proposal Form

DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Section REV01100 02/13/17 Summary Section REV01140 02/13/17 Work Restrictions Section REV01200 02/13/17 Allowances Section REV01310 02/13/17 Project Management and Coordination Section REV01322 02/13/17 Photographic Documentation Section REV01330 02/13/17 Submittal Procedures Section REV01400 02/13/17 Quality Requirements Section REV01420 02/13/17 References Section REV01500 02/13/17 Temporary Facilities and Controls Section REV01600 02/13/17 Product Requirements Section REV01700 02/13/17 Execution Requirements Section REV01731 02/13/17 Cutting and Patching Section REV01741 02/13/17 Construction Waste Management and Disposal Section REV01770 02/13/17 Closeout Procedures Section REV01809 02/13/17 Testing for Indoor Air Quality Section REV01811 02/13/17 Sustainable Design Requirements Green Globes

DIVISION 2 – SITE WORK

Section REV02361 02/13/17 Termite Control

DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE

Section REV03300 02/13/17 Cast-In-Place Concrete Section REV03301 02/13/17 Concrete Mix Design Form Section REV03345 02/13/17 Concrete Finishes

DIVISION 4 – MASONRY - NOT USED

Section REV04602 02/13/17 Interior Thin Brick System

DIVISION 5 – METALS

Section REV05500 02/13/17 Metal Fabrications

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

TABLE OF CONTENTS INDEX-2 20150922 02/13/17

DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS

Section REV06105 02/13/17 Miscellaneous Carpentry Section REV06402 02/13/17 Interior Architectural Woodwork Section REV06650 02/13/17 Solid Polymer Countertops

DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

Section REV07210 02/13/17 Building Insulation Section REV07920 02/13/17 Joint Sealants

DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS

Section REV08110 02/13/17 Steel Doors and Frames Section REV08210 02/13/17 Wood Doors Section REV08311 02/13/17 Access Doors and Frames Section REV08350 02/13/17 Impact Doors Section REV08361 09/06/16 Sectional Overhead Doors Section REV08411 02/13/17 Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts Section REV08461 02/13/17 Automatic Sliding Entrance Doors Section REV08711 02/13/17 Door Hardware Section REV08800 02/13/17 Glazing

DIVISION 9 - FINISHES

Section REV09260 02/13/17 Gypsum Board Assemblies Section REV09310 02/13/17 Ceramic Tile Section REV09511 02/13/17 Acoustical Panel Ceilings Section REV09650 02/13/17 Resilient Floor Tile Section REV09651 02/13/17 Resilient Wall Base and Accessories Section REV09672 02/13/17 Resinous Flooring Section REV09900 02/13/17 Painting Section REV09985 02/13/17 Fiberglass Reinforced Panels

DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES

Section REV10160 02/13/17 Stainless Steel Toilet Partitions Section REV10170 02/13/17 Solid Plastic Toilet Compartments Section REV10520 02/13/17 Fire Protection Specialties Section REV10606 02/13/17 Chain Link Fences and Gates Section REV10801 02/13/17 Toilet and Bath Accessories

DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT – NOT USED

DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS

Section REV12484 02/13/17 Entrance Mats and Grids

DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

INDEX-3 TABLE OF CONTENTS 02/13/17 20150922

Section REV13900 02/13/17 Fire Suppression

DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS - NOT USED

DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL

Section REV15000 02/13/17 Heating, Ventilating and Air-Conditioning Section REV15400 02/13/17 Plumbing

DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL

Section REV16050 02/13/17 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods Section REV16060 02/13/17 Grounding and Bonding Section REV16075 02/13/17 Electrical Identification Section REV16411 02/13/17 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers Section REV16429 02/13/17 Integrated Electrical Panelboards Section REV16615 02/13/17 Emergency Electrical Generator Natural Gas and ATS

END OF SECTION

APPENDICES:

“Whole Foods Market #10590, Kennesaw, GA, Refrigeration Equipment Specifications”, prepared by ochsnerEFS, p.c. in Charlotte, NC and dated 02/13/17.

“Whole Foods Market #10590, Kennesaw, GA, Refrigeration Installation Specifications”, prepared by ochsnerEFS, p.c. in Charlotte, NC and dated 02/13/17.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

TABLE OF CONTENTS INDEX-4 20150922 02/13/17

Page left intentionally blank

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

00100-1 INVITATION TO BID 02/13/17 20150922

SECTION 00100 - INVITATION TO BID

You are hereby invited to submit bids for the work entitled:

WHOLE FOODS MARKET TENANT IMPROVEMENTS – KENNESAW, GA 1300 BARRETT PARKWAY, SUITE 500, KENNESAW, GA 30152

All bids will be received through email only as specified herein.

Please note that the bid documents contain proprietary information and shall not be used for any purposes other than the entitled project. Under no circumstances shall Bidder provide bidding documents to plan houses. Bidding documents are only to be provided to vendors and subcontractors that the Bidder is requested proposals from.

The Owner intends to enter into a contract with the successful bidder with “AIA A101 Whole Foods Lump Sum Master Services Agreement -2012 Long Form” and “AIA A201 Exhibit A Whole Foods Lump Sum Master General Conditions – 2012 Long Form”. Copies of these documents will be made upon request. Acceptance of the terms stated in these documents on the bid proposal form is required before bid will be reviewed.

Please review the Invitation to Bid and the Bid Proposal Form carefully and notify this office IMMEDIATELY if for some reason you are unable to comply with the Bid Procedure in any way.

Questions regarding the Bid Documents must be forwarded to the Architect of Record via email ([email protected] AND [email protected] ) no later than 5:00 PM on 02/28/17 in order that addenda information can be released to bidders in a timely fashion.

A pre-bid meeting is not scheduled to be held at the project site.

Bids will be opened privately. The Owner reserves the right to waive any and all bidding irregularities including the right to reject or accept any or all Bids. The Owner retains the right to delete, modify, or negotiate portions of the work.

The Bid Proposal shall be submitted in the Microsoft Excel format provided via email to the Whole Foods Construction Project Manager, Tom Patrick, [email protected] and to the Architect, Mitch Deutsch [email protected]

Upon Award of Contract, the successful Contractor shall complete the requirements of the Award as provided in the Invitation to Bidders, Addenda, Alternates and the Contract Documents.

A Benchmark/Milestone Construction Schedule in specification section 00110 Project Dates provides a basic overview of the proposed Schedule of Activities for the Project. This Schedule outlines the projected timeline for overall project completion and describes critical Benchmark/Milestone dates for the required coordination between the Owner and Contractor. The Contractor shall incorporate these Owner Critical Benchmark/Milestone dates in an overall Project Construction Schedule which shall be provided to Whole Foods Market with his Bid Proposal.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

INVITATION TO BID 00100-2 20150922 02/13/17

Please attach to your Bid Proposal Form responses to the following information requested by Whole Foods Market:

A. Relevant Experience:

1. List and describe supermarket project underway and/or completed by your firm within the past five (5) years. For each project listed, provide the following information: a. Project name and brief description including square footage of new and renovated areas. If on any of these projects you were part of a joint venture or partnership, identify the partner(s) and your specific role on the project. b. Original Contract Amount and Type (lump sum bid, negotiated GMP, design/build, etc.) and date completed. c. Project Manager and Field Superintendent assigned to the project.

B. Corporate and Financial Information:

1. Current bonding capacity and a compliance letter from your bonding company stating consent to provide 100% Payment and Performance Bonds, if required. If in the past five (5) years any surety company has refused to bond your firm on any project, please describe the circumstances and dates.

2. Has your firm, any of its parents or subsidiaries, or any of its predecessors past or present ever: a. Defaulted on or failed to complete a contract? b. Been involved in litigation or arbitration of any kind with an owner, subcontractor or supplier in the last three (3) years? If so, please describe each instance and the status or resolution thereof.

C. Project Personnel:

1. Provide resumes identifying all key individuals that would be a part of the construction team including the proposed project manager and proposed project superintendent.

END OF SECTION

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

00110-1 PROJECT DATES 02/13/17 20150922

SECTION 00110 - PROJECT DATES

Project Dates Whole Foods Market, Kennesaw, GA

BID SCHEDULE

• Documents issued in electronic form: 02/13/17

• E-mail Bids Due: 03/10/17 , no later than 11:00 am (EDT) E-mail Bids to: [email protected] [email protected]

The following dates are for Contractor scheduling purposes:

• Notice to Proceed (Tentative): 03/15/17

• Construction Start: 03/20/17

• Turnover (City Final CO in hand and stocking start): 09/25/17

• Grand Opening: 10/17/17

Please review the Invitation to Bid, Instructions to Bidders and the Bid Proposal Form carefully and notify the Architect IMMEDIATELY if for some reason you are unable to comply with the bid procedure in any way.

Questions about the bid documents must be forwarded to the Architect of Record by 02/28/17 at 5pm (EDT), in order that addenda can be released to bidders in a timely fashion.

END OF SECTION

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

PROJECT DATES 00110-2 20150922 02/13/17

Page left intentionally blank

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

BID PROPOSAL FORM 2/13/2017 WHOLE FOODS MARKET KENNESAW, GA 1300 BARRETT PARKWAY SUITE 500 KENNESAW GA 30152

HAVING READ THE SPECIFICATIONS AND EXAMINED THE DRAWINGS ENTITLED

WHOLE FOODS MARKET KENNESAW, GA 1300 BARRETT PARKWAY SUITE 500 KENNESAW GA 30152

DRAWING NOS :

DATED: AND ADDENDA NOS:

PREPARED BY: GREENBERGFARROW 1430 WEST PEACHTREE STREET SUITE 200 ATLANTA, GA 30309

THE UNDERSIGNED, BY SUBMITTAL OF THIS BID PROPOSAL, ACKNOWLEDGES ACCEPTANCE OF THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS STATED IN AIA A101 WHOLE FOODS LUMP SUM MASTER SERVICES AGREEMENT - 2012 LONG FORM AND AIA A201 EXHIBIT A WHOLE FOODS LUMP SUM MASTER GENERAL CONDITIONS 2012 LONG FORM

(company name)

FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF SAID PROJECT AND HAVING INSPECTED THE SITE FOR THE CONDITIONS AFFECTING AND GOVERNING THE CONSTRUCTION OF THE SAID PROJECT, THE UNDERSIGNED

(company name)

HEREBY PROPOSES TO FURNISH ALL LABOR, MATERIALS, TOOLS, EQUIPMENT, SUPERVISION AND SERVICES REQUIRED FOR THE COMPLETION OF THE WORK AS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS AND IN THE SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE FOLLOWING SUMS.

1. CSI COST DIVISION CATEGORY 1 SUPERVISION $ 1 BUILDING PERMITS $ 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS $ 1 ALLOWANCES $ 20,000 2 EARTHWORK $ 2 SURVEY $ 2 TERMITE TREATMENT $ 3 SOG GRAVEL BASE $ N/A 3 BUILDING CONCRETE $ 3 REBAR AND MESH $ 3 CONCRETE SEALER AND POLISHING $ 4 BRICK MASONRY $ 5 STRUCTURAL STEEL $ 5 MISCELLANEOUS METALS $ 5 STAINLESS STEEL (OUTSIDE OF ALLOWANCE) $ 6 ROUGH CARPENTRY $ 6 INTERIOR CARPENTRY $ 6 CASEWORK $ BID PROPOSAL FORM 2/13/2017 WHOLE FOODS MARKET KENNESAW, GA 1300 BARRETT PARKWAY SUITE 500 KENNESAW GA 30152

7 INSULATION $ 7 ROOFING AND FLASHING $ 7 WATERPROOFING AND CAULKING $ 8 DOORS AND HARDWARE $ 8 IMPACT DOORS $ 8 CURTAINWALL AND STOREFRONT $ 8 GLASS AND GLAZING $ 8 AUTOSLIDER DOORS $ 9 DRYWALL,SOFFITS AND CEILINGS $ 9 CERAMIC TILE INSTALLATION $ 9 EPOXY FLOORING $ 9 RESILIENT FLOORING $ 9 PAINTING AND WALLCOVERINGS $ 9 SOLID SURFACE COUNTERTOPS $ 10 TOILET PARTIITONS AND ACCESSORIES $ 10 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS $ 10 CHAIN LINK (INTERIOR) $ 11 FIXTURE INSTALLATION $ 12 ENTRANCE MATS $ 15 HVAC $ 15 PLUMBING $ 15 FIRE SPRINKLER $ 16 ELECTRICAL $ 16 FIRE ALARM $ OTHER (SPECIFY) $ OTHER (SPECIFY) $ OTHER (SPECIFY) $ OTHER (SPECIFY) $

CONTINGENCY $

SUB TOTAL $

FEE % $

PROJECT TOTAL $

2. SUGGESTED COST-SAVING ALTERNATIVES

ITEM DESCRIPTION DEDUCT

NO. 1 $

NO. 2 $

NO. 3 $

NO. 4 $ BID PROPOSAL FORM 2/13/2017 WHOLE FOODS MARKET KENNESAW, GA 1300 BARRETT PARKWAY SUITE 500 KENNESAW GA 30152

3. COST OF INSTALLING CONCRETE SLAB ON GRADE For the Owner's information only, provide total cost of furnishing and installing the concrete slab on grade inclusive of granular subbase, termiticide, fine grading, vapor retarder, layout, reinforcing, forming, placement, finishing, polishing, hardener application and joint caulking as broken down as follows:

Sub Bid 1 Sub bid 2 Layout/forming Reinforcing (materials only) Concrete (materials only) Placement/finishing Polishing Floor Joint Sealant Termite Treartment Granular subbase N/A N/A Dowel Baskets/Diamond Dowels/Vapor retarder TOTALS $ $ BID PROPOSAL FORM 2/13/2017 WHOLE FOODS MARKET KENNESAW, GA 1300 BARRETT PARKWAY SUITE 500 KENNESAW GA 30152

END OF BID FORM 01100-1 SUMMARY 02/13/17 20150922

SECTION 01100 - SUMMARY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. Project Identification: Project consists of tenant improvements to a newly constructed shell building for a new Whole Foods retail facility. 1. Project Location: 1300 Barrett Parkway, Suite 500, Kennesaw, GA 30152. 2. Owner: Whole Foods Market, Inc., 1180 Upper Hembree Road, Roswell, GA 30076.

B. Related/Other Work: 1. Refrigeration and energy management systems by Whole Foods or Whole Foods’ designated vendor/contractor are included in the work covered by the Contract Documents.

C. Project will be constructed under a general construction contract.

D. The term “Contractor” or “General Contractor”, as used throughout his Project Manual, shall mean the Contractor or the Contractor’s authorized representative. The term “Contractor” is further defined in the “General Conditions of the Contract for Construction”.

E. The term “Owner”, as used throughout his Project Manual, shall mean Whole Foods Market or the Whole Foods Market’s authorized representative. The term “Owner” is further defined in the “General Conditions of the Contract for Construction”.

F. Scope of cold storage and refrigeration work: 1. Work related to cold storage and refrigeration will be performed by a refrigeration contractor under separate contract to the Owner. Contractor shall coordinate cold storage and refrigeration work with other Work of this Contract; provide trenching and backfill, slab recesses, core drilling and final electrical connections to refrigeration needed for complete installation. Contractor shall provide quality control for cold storage and refrigeration. 2. For the Contractor’s information and for the purposes of coordination and quality control, the scope of refrigeration work under separate contract is defined as follows: a. Receive and set refrigerated cases and refrigerant fixtures. b. Receive and set walk-in coolers and freezers. c. Receive and set condensing units, condensers and evaporators. d. Supply materials necessary to complete a quality refrigeration installation e. Installation of refrigerant materials, including piping and condensate drain lines from cases and coils to hub drains (hub drains installed by GC). f. Installation of refrigerant piping for heat reclaim. g. Equipment start-up and adjustment. 3. Refrigerant Piping (under separate contract): a. All refrigeration piping, insulation and hangars. 4. The following scope of work is the responsibility of the General Contractor. a. Provide and install conductors for low-voltage control and alarm to each refrigerated case and cooler (conduit by Contractor). b. Contractor shall install lights provided under separate contract in walk-in coolers and freezers. Contractor shall provide wire and conduit as needed for lighting installation c. Light switches on walk-in coolers and freezers and light fixtures in door panels. d. Install wiring for fan switches at coolers and freezers

G. National Accounts: 1. Builder’s Hardware: a. Whole Foods Market has established a national account with InstaKey Security Systems for the final cores for all builders hardware. The contact is Frank L. “Fig” Newton III, InstaKey Security Systems, phone 800.316.5397 extension 110, [email protected] .

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

SUMMARY 01100-2 20150922 02/13/17

b. Contractor shall secure bid from InstaKey for furnishing the final cores for the builders hardware and include the cost of the cores and installation of the cores in his Proposal. Alternate firms or systems shall not be permitted.

1.02 FORMAT AND INTERPRETATION

A. General Requirements: In the case of an inconsistency between the Drawings and Specifications or within either document not clarified by Architect, the more specific provision will take precedence over the less specific; the more stringent will take precedence over the less stringent. Better quality or greater quantity of Work shall be provided in compliance with Architect’s interpretation.

B. Drawings: 1. Product notes on Drawings shall identify materials. Each product indicated is continuous throughout all parts of the Project where section or detail applies. 2. Sections and details show typical assemblies. 3. Attachments and accessories: a. Only major attachments and accessories are indicated on the Drawings and in Project Manual. b. Provide accessories and anchor, bolts, screws, nails and other fastenings needed to produce a complete assembly, fastened securely, functioning smoothly, weathertight and neat. 4. Provide completely materials indicated partially in order to avoid repetition. 5. Figured dimensions shall take precedence over scaled dimensions, unless figures are obviously in error. Scaling of dimensions, if done, is done at the Contractor’s own risk. 6. Should dimensions be inadvertently omitted, notify Architect and do not proceed without correct and complete information.

C. Project Manual: 1. Basis of organization and terminology shall be CSI MasterFormat , 1995 Edition. 2. Section titles shall not limit content of meaning of specification section, nor do they fully describe requirements specified therein. 3. Each specification section is subdivided into parts for uniformity and convenience; not to limit requirements of text. 4. Work specified in one section may be related to or dependent upon work specified in other sections. Cross reference paragraphs and “Related Sections” are general items included for the guidance of Project Manual users and are not intended to be all-inclusive. 5. Specification sections of Division 1 General Requirements govern the execution of all sections of specifications in the Project Manual. 6. Imperative language shall be used in the specifications. Requirements expressed imperatively shall be performed by the Contractor unless otherwise indicated. 7. For clarity of reading at certain locations, contrasting subjective language may be used to describe responsibilities which must be fulfilled indirectly by the Contractor or, when so noted, by others.

1.03 USE OF PREMISES

A. General: Contractor shall have full use of premises for construction operations, including use of Project site, during construction period. Contractor's use of premises is limited only by Owner's right to perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project.

1.04 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS

A. Separate Contract: Owner will award a separate contract for performance of certain construction operations at Project Site. Those operations will be conducted simultaneously with work under this Contract. This contract will include the following: 1. Millwork fabrication and installation (unless detailed on the drawings). 2. Refrigeration installation. 3. Exterior signage. 4. Interior décor and graphics.

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

01100-3 SUMMARY 02/13/17 20150922

5. Security and CCTV systems. 6. Sound system. 7. Data cabling and phone system.

B. Equipment responsibilities: The following equipment and who is responsible for providing and installing it is listed below. (Refer to the Equipment Manual and the Drawings for further information.) 1. Equipment provided by the Owner and installed by General Contractor: a. Customer Service and Accounting equipment by Owner. 1) Contractor shall provide electrical rough-in and conduits for data. b. Prep area compartment sinks (refer to Plumbing Fixture Schedule on Drawings). c. Prep area equipment. d. Stainless steel cabinets. e. Cart corrals. f. Checkstands. g. Kitchen pot hanging rack. h. All grocery gondolas and Sales Area shelving. 2. Equipment provided by Contractor and installed by Contractor: a. All toilet room plumbing fixtures and accessories as noted on the drawings. b. Closure panels for all perimeter cases and coolers, to walls. c. Closure panels at prep area exposed piping. 3. Equipment provided by Owner and installed by Owner or Owner’s dedicated subcontractor/vendor: a. All millwork except if detailed on drawings. b. Stockroom baler. c. Dumpster/trash compactors. d. Coolers and freezers: Contractor shall coordinate equipment installation, provide wiring and install all closure panels. e. Sound system. f. Interior décor, except as indicated on the drawings. g. All refrigerated cases. (Electrical and plumbing service and connection by Contractor.) h. All Sales Area displays; i.e., produce crate tables, roll bins, etc. i. Security system and CCTV system installed by Owner. (Contractor shall provide conduits with pull strings as required and power to CCTV and security system panels in MDF Room). j. Telephone and communication: (General Contractor to complete all conduit runs and rough-in work to meet telephone provider’s, i.e., AT&T, requirements). k. Office furniture systems. l. Case protection bollards.

C. Cooperate fully with separate contractors so work on those contracts may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract.

1.05 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS

A. The Work includes providing support systems to receive Owner’s equipment and mechanical/electrical connections. 1. Owner will arrange for and deliver necessary product data to the Contractor. 2. Owner will arrange and pay for delivery of Owner-furnished items. 3. Following delivery, the General Contractor shall inspect items delivered for damage. If damage observed, GC shall note such damage on bill of lading and inform WFM PM immediately of same. 4. Owner will arrange for manufacturer’s field services and for the delivery of manufacturer’s warranties to the appropriate contractor, if applicable. 5. The Contractor shall designate delivery dates of Owner-furnished items in the Contractor’s Construction Schedule and in conjunction with Owner’s delivery criteria. 6. The Contractor shall review product data provided and notify the Architect of any omissions, discrepancies and/or other problems. 7. The Contractor is responsible for receiving, handling and storing Owner-provided items at the site. 8. The Contractor is responsible for the labor to remove the protective film on all equipment provided by

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

SUMMARY 01100-4 20150922 02/13/17

the Owner. 9. The Contractor is responsible for protecting the Owner-furnished items from damage, including theft and damage from exposure to the elements. The Contractor shall repair or replace items damaged as a result of Contractor’s construction operations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION 01100

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

01140-1 WORK RESTRICTIONS 02/13/17 20150922

SECTION 01140 - WORK RESTRICTIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 USE OF PREMISES

A. Use of Site: Limit use of premises to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.

1. Limits: Confine constructions operations to areas indicated on the drawings and as approved by the local jurisdiction having authority. 2. Owner Occupancy: Allow for Owner occupancy of site. 3. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials.

a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances. b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on-site.

B. Use of Existing Building: Maintain existing building in a weather-tight condition throughout construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations. Protect building and its occupants during construction period.

C. Protection of floor slab: General Contractor and sub-contractors to only use scissor lifts with white wheels to prevent black marks on concrete slab and finished floors. Scissor lifts also to be furnished with “dia- pers” to prevent oil/gas spots. Should the slab be stained due to General Contractor’s activities, General Contractor shall be responsible to fully remove such all stains, marks or similar spots to Owner’s satisfaction at no cost to the Owner.

1.02 OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS

A. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner reserves the right to occupy and to place and install equipment in completed areas of building, before Substantial Completion, provided such occupancy does not interfere with completion of the Work. Such placement of equipment and partial occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work.

1. Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion for each specific portion of the Work to be occupied before Owner occupancy. 2. Obtain a Certificate of Occupancy from authorities having jurisdiction before Owner occupancy. 3. Before partial Owner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully operational, and required tests and inspections shall be successfully completed. On occupancy, Owner will provide, operate, and maintain mechanical and electrical systems serving occupied portions of building. 4. On occupancy, Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service for occupied portions of building.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION 01140

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

WORK RESTRICTIONS 01140-2 20150922 02/13/17

Page left intentionally blank

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

01200-1 ALLOWANCES 02/13/17 20150922

SECTION 01200 - ALLOWANCES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing allowances.

B. Types of allowances include the following:

1. Stainless steel sheet metal enclosures around fixtures and between fixtures and adjacent construction. The allowance DOES NOT include stainless steel items specifically noted on the drawings, including, but not limited to, stainless steel wall cladding, cased opening trim, corner guards and column wraps.

2. Furnishing and installation of sun control tinting film on inside surface of existing storefront.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Submit proposals for purchase of products or systems included in allowances, in the form specified for Change Orders.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Submit invoices or delivery slips to show actual quantities of materials delivered to the site for use in fulfillment of each allowance.

B. Submit time sheets and other documentation to show labor time and cost for installation of allowance items that include installation as part of the allowance.

C. Coordinate and process submittals for allowance items in same manner as for other portions of the Work.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate allowance items with other portions of the Work. Furnish templates as required to coordinate installation.

1.5 LUMP-SUM ALLOWANCES

A. Allowance shall include cost to Contractor of specific products and materials ordered by Owner or selected by Architect under allowance and shall include taxes, freight and delivery to Project site.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, Contractor's costs for receiving and handling at Project site, labor, installation, overhead and profit, and similar costs related to products and materials under allowance shall be included as part of the Contract Sum and not part of the allowance.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

ALLOWANCES 01200-2 20150922 02/13/17

1.6 ADJUSTMENT OF ALLOWANCES

A. Allowance Adjustment: To adjust allowance amounts, prepare a Change Order proposal based on the difference between purchase amount and the allowance, multiplied by final measurement of work-in- place where applicable. If applicable, include reasonable allowances for cutting losses, tolerances, mixing wastes, normal product imperfections, and similar margins.

1. Include installation costs in purchase amount only where indicated as part of the allowance. 2. If requested, prepare explanation and documentation to substantiate distribution of overhead costs and other margins claimed. 3. Submit substantiation of a change in scope of work, if any, claimed in Change Orders related to unit-cost allowances. 4. Owner reserves the right to establish the quantity of work-in-place by independent quantity survey, measure, or count.

B. Submit claims for increased costs because of a change in scope or nature of the allowance described in the Contract Documents, whether for the purchase order amount or Contractor's handling, labor, installation, overhead, and profit.

1. Do not include Contractor's or subcontractor's indirect expense in the Change Order cost amount unless it is clearly shown that the nature or extent of work has changed from what could have been foreseen from information in the Contract Documents. 2. No change to Contractor's indirect expense is permitted for selection of higher- or lower-priced materials or systems of the same scope and nature as originally indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine products covered by an allowance promptly on delivery for damage or defects. Return damaged or defective products to manufacturer for replacement.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate materials and their installation for each allowance with related materials and installations to ensure that each allowance item is completely integrated and interfaced with related work.

3.3 SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES

A. Allowance No. 1: $ 20,000.00 for stainless steel sheet metal enclosures.

END OF SECTION 01200

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

01310-1 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 02/13/17 20150922

SECTION 01310 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following:

1. General project coordination procedures. 2. Coordination Drawings. 3. Project meetings.

B. See Division 1 Section "Summary” for a general description of the Work, including but not limited to: 1. Work to be performed under separate contracts. 2. Work to be performed Owner’s designated vendor/subcontractor. 3. Contractor responsibility for receipt, handling, storage and protection of Owner-supplied items. 4. Coordination activities not specifically described in this Section.

1.03 COORDINATION

A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in various Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.

1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. 2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. 3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.

B. If necessary, prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings.

1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required.

C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Preparation of the Schedule of Values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. 6. Preinstallation conferences. 7. Project closeout activities.

1.04 PROJECT MEETINGS

A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise indicated.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310-2 20150922 02/13/17

1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times. 2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 3. Minutes: Record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within three (3) days of the meeting.

B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than fifteen (15) days after execution of the Agree- ment. Hold the conference at Project site or another convenient location. Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments.

1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; manufacturers; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:

a. Tentative construction schedule. b. Phasing. c. Critical work sequencing. d. Designation of responsible personnel. e. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. f. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. g. Distribution of the Contract Documents. h. Submittal procedures. i. Preparation of Record Documents. j. Use of the premises. k. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. l. Parking availability. m. Office, work, and storage areas. n. Equipment deliveries and priorities. o. First aid. p. Security. q. Progress cleaning. r. Working hours.

C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.

1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have pre- ceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect of scheduled meeting dates. 2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:

a. Contract Documents. b. Options. c. Related Change Orders. d. Purchases. e. Deliveries. f. Submittals. g. Review of mockups. h. Possible conflicts. i. Compatibility problems. j. Time schedules. k. Weather limitations.

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

01310-3 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 02/13/17 20150922

l. Manufacturer's written recommendations. m. Warranty requirements. n. Compatibility of materials. o. Acceptability of substrates. p. Temporary facilities and controls. q. Space and access limitations. r. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. s. Testing and inspecting requirements. t. Required performance results. u. Protection of construction and personnel.

3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements. 4. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.

D. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at regular intervals. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests.

1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project.

a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:

1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Status of submittals. 4) Deliveries. 5) Off-site fabrication. 6) Access. 7) Site utilization. 8) Temporary facilities and controls. 9) Work hours. 10) Hazards and risks. 11) Progress cleaning. 12) Quality and work standards. 13) Change Orders. 14) Documentation of information for payment requests.

3. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who should have been present. Include a brief summary, in narrative form, of progress since the previous meeting and report.

a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310-4 20150922 02/13/17

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION 01310

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

01322-1 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 02/13/17 20150922

SECTION 01322 - PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following: 1. Periodic construction photographs.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting digital media as Project Record Documents at Project closeout. 2. Division 1 Section “Sustainable Design Requirements - Green Globes” for digital media needed for documentation submission to GBI.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Key Plan: Submit key plan of Project site and building with notation of vantage points marked for location and direction of each photograph. Indicate elevation or story of construction. Include same label information as corresponding set of photographs.

B. Construction Photographs: Submit digital image electronic files of each photographic view within seven days of taking photographs. 1. On weekly basis, upload minimum of twelve (12) digital image electronic files to Whole Foods Market’s USGN web site. Identify the image with the following Information: a. Date photograph was taken if not date stamped by camera. b. Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point), and elevation or story of construction. c. Unique sequential identifier. 2. Submit digital images exactly as originally recorded in the digital camera, without alteration, manipulation, editing, or modifications using image-editing software. 3. Select vantage points to show status of construction and progress since last photographs were taken and on site stored materials.

C. Green Globes Photographs: Submit digital image electronic files of criteria items that General Contractor is required to produce for GBI-authorized Assessor. Submit to architect digital photographs of building materials that shall be protected from moisture as well as keep and stored off the ground.

1.03 COORDINATION

A. Auxiliary Services: Cooperate with photographer and provide auxiliary services requested, including access to Project site and use of temporary facilities, including temporary lighting required to produce clear, well-lit photographs without obscuring shadows.

1.04 USAGE RIGHTS

A. Obtain and transfer copyright usage rights from photographer to Owner for unlimited reproduction of photographic documentation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PHOTOGRAPHIC MEDIA

A. Digital Images: Provide images in uncompressed JPEG format, produced by a digital camera with minimum sensor size of 4.0 megapixels, and at an image resolution of not less than 1600 by 1200 pixels.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 01322-2 20150922 02/13/17

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS

A. General: Take photographs using the maximum range of depth of field, and that are in focus, to clearly show the Work. Photographs with blurry or out-of-focus areas will not be accepted. 1. Maintain key plan with each set of construction photographs that identifies each photographic location.

B. Additional Photographs: Architect may issue requests for additional photographs, in addition to periodic photographs specified 1. Circumstances that could require additional photographs include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Special events planned at Project site. b. Immediate follow-up when on-site events result in construction damage or losses. c. Photographs to be taken at fabrication locations away from Project site. d. Substantial Completion of a major phase or component of the Work. e. Extra record photographs at time of final acceptance. f. Owner's request for special publicity photographs.

END OF SECTION 01322

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

01330-1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 02/13/17 20150922

SECTION 01330 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting test and inspection reports. 2. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties. 3. Division 2 through 16 Sections (for individual submittal requirements).

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect's responsive action.

B. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architect's responsive action. Submit- tals may be rejected for not complying with requirements.

1.03 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. Required Submittals: 1. Review individual specification sections in Divisions 2 through 16 for specific submittal requirements. 2. Submit proposed list of submittals to Architect with completed Bid Proposal Form and other documents required for bid. 3. Do not submit shop drawings, product data, cut sheets, etc., not specifically required by individual specification sections unless otherwise required by Building Department, Independent Testing Agen- cy or other agency having jurisdiction over some part of the work. 4. Do not photocopy Construction Documents for use as submittals.

B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination.

a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.

C. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documen- tation" for list of submittals and time requirements for scheduled performance of related construction activities, but no later than ten (10) work days after commencement of the construction.

D. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. 1. Initial Review: Allow 15 work days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 2. If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. 3. Allow 15 work days for review of each resubmittal. 4. No extension of Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330-2 20150922 02/13/17

E. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. 1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 2. Provide a space approximately 4 by 5 inches on label or beside title block to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 3. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name and address of Architect. d. Name and address of Contractor. e. Name and address of subcontractor. f. Name and address of supplier. g. Name of manufacturer. h. Unique identifier, including revision identifier. i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. k. Other necessary identification.

F. Deviations: Highlight, encircle or otherwise specifically identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals.

G. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect ob- serves noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal. 1. Additional copies submitted for maintenance manuals will not be marked with action taken and will be returned.

H. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will return submittals, without review when received from sources other than Contractor. 1. Include Contractor’s certification stating that information submitted complies with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 2. Transmittal Form: Use CSI Form 12.1A.

I. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.

J. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating action taken by Architect in connection with construction.

1.04 CONTRACTOR’S USE OF ARCHITECT’S CADD FILES

A. General: At Contractor’s written request, copies of Architect’s CADD files may be provided to Contractor for Contractor’s use in connection with Project, subject to the following conditions: 1. Contractor requesting electronic files must complete a Document Release and Indemnity Form and pay any fees as indicated by same before electronic files will be provided.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections. 1. Number of copies: Submit one PDF copy by electronically uploading to Whole Foods Market’s construction web site (USGN), unless otherwise indicated. Retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document.

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

01330-3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 02/13/17 20150922

B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. 1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Manufacturer's written recommendations. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. c. Manufacturer's installation instructions. d. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. e. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. f. Printed performance curves. g. Operational range diagrams. h. Compliance with recognized trade association standards. i. Compliance with recognized testing agency standards.

C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. 1. Preparation: Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Dimensions. b. Identification of products. c. Fabrication and installation drawings. d. Roughing-in and setting diagrams. e. Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and control wiring. f. Shopwork manufacturing instructions. g. Templates and patterns. h. Schedules. i. Notation of coordination requirements. j. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. 2. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. 3. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 36 by 48 inches in when printed out in 1:1 scale.

D. Coordination drawings: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section “Project Management and Coor- dination”.

E. Samples: Prepare physical units of materials or products including the following. 1. Comply with the requirements of Division 1 Section “Quality Requirements” for mockups. 2. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.

a. Submit two (2) full sets of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected. 3. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection.

a. Number of Samples: Submit four (4) sets of Samples. Architect will retain three (3) sample sets; remainder will be returned.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330-4 20150922 02/13/17

1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated. 2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations.

F. Product Schedule or List: Prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form:

G. Delegated-design Submittal: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Quality Require- ments".

H. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation."

I. Application for Payment: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Payment Proce- dures."

J. Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures."

K. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Use CSI Form 1.5A.

2.02 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections. 1. Number of Copies: Submit one PDF copy by electronically uploading to Whole Foods Market’s construction web site (USGN), unless otherwise indicated. Architect will not return copies. 2. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Quality Re- quirements."

B. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Construc- tion Progress Documentation."

C. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.

D. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) and Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified.

E. Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.

F. Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required.

G. Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

01330-5 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 02/13/17 20150922

H. Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

I. Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

J. Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

K. Research/Evaluation Reports: Prepare written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements."

L. Preconstruction Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents.

M. Compatibility Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.

N. Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

O. Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and normal maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Op- eration and Maintenance Data."

P. Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Pro- vide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers.

Q. Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of manufacturer. Include the following, as applicable:

R. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative making report. 2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. 4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. 6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330-6 20150922 02/13/17

S. Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage.

T. Construction Photographs: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Photographic Doc- umentation."

U. Sustainability Submittals: Comply with requirements as specified in Divisions 2-12.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW

A. Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect.

B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.

3.02 ARCHITECT'S ACTION

A. General: 1. Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action. 2. Any submittal received that was based on photocopying Construction Documents will not be reviewed and will be returned without action.

B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, and post it on Whole Foods Market’s USGN web site. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken.

C. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will notify Contractor if it does not comply with requirements.

D. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded.

END OF SECTION 01330

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

01400-1 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 02/13/17 20150922

SECTION 01400 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control.

B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 1. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 2. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required by Architect, Owner or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section.

C. See Divisions 2 through 16 for specific test and inspection requirements.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements.

B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect.

C. Mockups: Full-size, physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are used to verify selections made under sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution, and to review construction, coordination, testing, or operation; they are not Samples.

D. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.

1.03 DELEGATED DESIGN

A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.

B. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400-2 20150922 02/13/17

B. Delegated-Design Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit a statement, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services.

C. Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports that include the following: 1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record of ambient conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and re-inspecting.

D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judg- ments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Pro- ject and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

D. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or products that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.

E. Specialists: Certain sections of the Specifications require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated. 1. Requirement for specialists shall not supersede building codes and regulations governing the Work.

F. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities. 1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7.

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

01400-3 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 02/13/17 20150922

2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program.

G. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

H. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work: 1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Notify Architect seven (7) days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed. 3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 4. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction. 5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. 6. Demolish and remove mockups when directed, unless otherwise indicated.

I. Finishes and furnishings shall meet Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Standards and International Organi- zation for Standardization (ISO) 14025, Environmental Product Declarations Type III Labels certification.

1.06 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services. 1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform. 2. Costs for retesting and re-inspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor and the Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order.

B. Contractor’s Responsibilities: Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required by authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality-control services. 2. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed. 3. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service. 4. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility. 5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct.

C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures."

D. Retesting/Re-inspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and re-inspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.

E. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of duties. Pro- vide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections. 1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400-4 20150922 02/13/17

2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are conducted. 3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements. 4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service through Contractor. 5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work. 6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.

F. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality- control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following: 1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency. 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site.

G. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. 1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.

H. Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a testing agency to conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner. 1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. 3. Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service to Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction. 4. Do not release, revoke, alter or increase the requirements of each test, inspection and similar quality control service through Contractor. 5. Do not perform any duties of the Contractor.

I. Survey of under-slab piping/conduit: 1. General Contractor will engage an independent third party surveying firm to survey and field verify the dimensioned locations for all under-slab piping, conduit, stub-ups, pits, etc are installed per the latest revised drawings. a. Intent: 1) Locate and document under slab utility stub ups, with the intent that anything that needs to be corrected can be identified prior to concrete being poured. b. Deliverable: An AutoCAD drawing locating: 1) Plumbing stub ups (color different than electrical), drawn to scale, and noted with text appropriately scaled (8”-12” scale text height). 2) Electrical stub ups (color different than plumbing), drawn to scale, and noted with text appropriately scaled (8”-12” scale text height). Use leader arrows as needed to accurately identify what text corresponds to what graphic. 3) Building columns, drawn to scale. 4) Inside face of exterior walls. 2. Submit Autocad file to Architect. 3. Upon receipt, comments will be provided within two full business days. 4. All discrepancies shall be corrected prior to pouring the floor slab.

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

01400-5 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 02/13/17 20150922

5. The same AutoCad file may be used for subsequent surveys, but each subsequent survey shall be provided on a separate layer and labeled as such. 6. See below for a portion a printout (reduced) of an acceptable survey:

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. 1. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching."

B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.

C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services.

END OF SECTION 01400

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400-6 20150922 02/13/17

Page left intentionally blank

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

01420-1 REFERENCES 02/13/17 20150922

SECTION 01420 - REFERENCES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.

B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract.

C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "approved," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed."

D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Speci- fications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated."

E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work.

F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations.

G. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.

H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.

I. “Installer”: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub- Subcontractor to perform a particular construction operation including installation, erection, application and similar operations. 1. Using a term such as “carpentry” does not imply that certain construction activities must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as “carpenter”. It also does not imply that the requirements specified apply exclusively to tradespeople of the corresponding generic name.

J. “Experience”: When used with an entity, “experienced” means having successfully completed a minimum of five (5) previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project, being familiar with the special requirements indicated and having complied with the requirements of the authorities having jurisdiction.

K. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

REFERENCES 01420-2 20150922 02/13/17

1.03 INDUSTRY STANDARDS

A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Docu- ments by reference.

B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Conflicting Requirements: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different but apparently equal to the Architect for a decision before proceeding. 1. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity of quality level shown on the drawings or specified in individual specification sections shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly withy the minimum quantity or quality specified or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum as appropriate for the context of the requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding.

D. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents.

1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source.

E. Abbreviations and Acronyms for Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web-site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) (800) 872-2253 Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (202) 272-0080 Available from Access Board www.access-board.gov

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION 01420

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

01500-1 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 02/13/17 20150922

SECTION 01500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities.

B. See Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning requirements.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Permanent Enclosure: As determined by Architect, permanent or temporary roofing is complete, insulated, and weathertight; exterior walls are insulated and weathertight; and all openings are closed with permanent construction or substantial temporary closures.

1.03 USE CHARGES

A. General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Owner's construction forces, Architect, occupants of Project, testing and inspection agencies, and personnel of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Temporary utility reports: Submit reports of tests, inspections, meter readings and similar procedures performed on temporary utilities.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Electric Service: 1. Comply with ANSI A10.6, NECA’s “Temporary Electrical Facilities” and NFPA 241. 2. Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.

B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.

1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Installer of each permanent service shall assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities.

B. Conditions of Use: The following conditions apply to use of temporary services and facilities by all parties engaged in the Work: 1. Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat. 2. Relocate temporary services and facilities as required by progress of the Work.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500-2 20150922 02/13/17

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. General: Provide new materials. Undamaged, previously-used materials in serviceable condition may be used if approved in writing and in advance by the Architect. Provide materials suitable for intended use.

B. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure of partially completed construction. Provide locking entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft or similar violation of facility security. 1. Storage: Where materials and equipment are stored and are of value or otherwise attractive for theft, provide a secure lockup. Enforce discipline in connection with the storage of material in and release of material from the lockup to minimize the opportunity for theft and vandalism.

C. Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements in Division 6 Section "Miscellaneous Carpentry."

D. Insulation: Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively.

E. Tarpaulins: Fire-resistive labeled with flame-spread rating of 15 or less.

F. Water: Potable.

2.02 EQUIPMENT

A. Field Offices: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading. 1. Provide one individual office for each member of the permanent staff. 2. Provide two conference rooms per field office unit; one small conference are and one meeting room large enough to seat permanent staff, Architect, Engineers, consultants, subcontractors, etc. 3. Within field-office, provide a dedicated office for Whole Foods Market Project Manager, wireless Internet access, desk, chair and lockable door. 4. Contractor is responsible for all purchase/rental costs and utility costs associated with field offices.

B. Fire Extinguishers: 1. Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures. 2. Comply with NFPA 10 and NFPA 241 for classification, extinguishing agent and size required by location and class of fire exposure.

C. Self-contained toilet units: Single-occupant units of chemical, aerated-recirculation or combustion type; vented and fully-enclosed with a glass-fiber-reinforced polyester shell or similar nonabsorbent material.

D. Drinking-water fixtures: Drinking-water fountains, including paper cup dispenser and supply. 1. Where power is accessible, provide electric water coolers to maintain dispensed water at 45 to 55 degrees F.

E. Heating equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent heating system, provide vented, self- contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control. 1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters or salamander-type heating units is prohibited. 2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled by a testing agency acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction and marked for intended use and type of fuel consumed.

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

01500-3 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 02/13/17 20150922

F. Electrical Outlets: Properly-configured, NEMA-polarized outlets to prevent insertion of 110V and 120V plugs into high-voltage outlets. Outlets shall be equipped with ground-fault circuit interrupters, reset buttons and pilot light.

G. Power Distribution System Circuits: Lighting circuits not exceeding 125VAC and 20A ratings may be nonmetallic, sheathed cable where run overhead, exposed for surveillance and permitted by authority having jurisdiction.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work.

B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.

3.02 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION

A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service. 1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services. 2. Provide adequate capacity at each stage of construction. Before temporary utility is available, provide trucked-in services. 3. Obtain easements to bring temporary utilities to Project Site where Owner’s existing easements cannot be used for that purpose.

B. Water Service: Use of Owner's existing water service facilities will be permitted, as long as facilities are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use. 1. Provide rubber hoses as necessary to serve Project site. 2. Where installations below an outlet might be damaged by spillage or leakage, provide a drip pan of suitable size to minimize water damage. Drain accumulated water promptly from pans.

C. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking-water fixtures. Comply with regulations and health codes for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. 1. Disposable Supplies: Provide toilet tissue, paper towels, paper cups, and similar disposable materials for each facility. Maintain adequate supply. Provide covered waste containers for disposal of used material. 2. Toilets: Install self-contained toilet units. Shield toilets to ensure privacy. 3. Drinking-Water Facilities: Provide bottled-water, drinking-water units. Where power is accessible, provide electric water coolers to maintain dispensed water temperature at 45 to 55 deg F (7.2 to 12.7 deg C).

D. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment from that specified that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. 1. Maintain a minimum temperature of 50 deg F (10 deg C) in permanently enclosed portions of building for normal construction activities, and 65 deg F (18.3 deg C) for finishing activities and areas where finished Work has been installed.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500-4 20150922 02/13/17

E. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment from that specified that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption.

F. Electric Power Service: Provide weatherproof, grounded electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics during construction period. Include meters, transformers, overload-protected disconnecting means, automatic ground-fault interrupters, and main distribution switchgear. 1. Install electric power service underground, unless overhead service must be used. 2. Install power distribution wiring overhead and rise vertically where least exposed to damage.

G. Electric Power Service: Use of Owner's existing electric power service will be permitted, as long as equipment is maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner.

H. Electric Distribution: Provide receptacle outlets adequate for connection of power tools and equipment. 1. Provide waterproof connectors to connect separate lengths of electrical power cords if single lengths will not reach areas where construction activities are in progress. Do not exceed safe length-voltage ratio.

I. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations and traffic conditions. 1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system. 2. Install exterior-yard site lighting that will provide adequate illumination for construction operations, traffic conditions, and signage visibility when the Work is being performed.

J. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service throughout construction period for common-use facilities used by all personnel engaged in construction activities. 1. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers, including a. Police and fire departments. b. Ambulance service. c. Contractor's home office. d. Architect's office. e. Engineers' offices. f. Owner's office. g. Principal subcontractors' field and home offices. 2. Provide voice-mail service on superintendent's telephone. 3. Provide a portable cellular telephone for superintendent's use in making and receiving telephone calls when away from field office.

3.03 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with the following: 1. Locate field offices, storage sheds, sanitary facilities, and other temporary construction and support facilities for easy access. 2. Provide incombustible construction for offices, shops, and sheds located within construction area or within 30 feet (9 m) of building lines. Comply with NFPA 241. 3. Maintain support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner.

B. Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Prepare Project identification and other signs in sizes indicated. Install signs where indicated to inform public and persons seeking entrance to Project. Do not permit installation of unauthorized signs.

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

01500-5 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 02/13/17 20150922

1. Engage an experienced sign painter to apply graphics for Project identification signs. Comply with details indicated. 2. Prepare temporary signs to provide directional information to construction personnel and visitors.

C. Waste Disposal Facilities: Comply with Division 1 Section "Construction Waste Management and Disposal.” 1. If required by authorities having jurisdiction, provide separate containers, clearly labeled, for each type of waste material to be deposited. 2. Develop a waste management plan for Work performed on Project. Indicate types of waste materials Project will produce and estimate quantities of each type. Provide detailed information for on-site waste storage and separation of recyclable materials. Provide information on destination of each type of waste material and means to be used to dispose of all waste materials.

D. Common-Use Field Office: Provide an insulated, weathertight, air-conditioned field office for use as a common facility by all personnel engaged in construction activities; of sufficient size to accommodate required office personnel and meetings of 10 persons at Project site. Keep office clean and orderly. 1. Furnish and equip offices as follows: a. Desk and four chairs, four-drawer file cabinet, a plan table, a plan rack, and bookcase. b. Provide a room of not less than 240 sq. ft. (22.5 sq. m) for Project meetings. Furnish room with conference table, 12 folding chairs, and 4-foot- (1.2-m-) square tack board. 2. Provide an electric heater with thermostat capable of maintaining a uniform indoor temperature of 68 deg F (20 deg C). Provide an air-conditioning unit capable of maintaining an indoor temperature of 72 deg F (23 deg C). 3. Provide fluorescent light fixtures capable of maintaining average illumination of 20 fc (215 lx) at desk height. Provide 110- to 120-V duplex outlets spaced at not more than 12-foot (4-m) intervals, 1 per wall in each room.

E. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment involved, including temporary utility services. Sheds may be open shelters or fully enclosed spaces within building or elsewhere on-site.

F. Existing Stair Usage: Use of Owner's existing stairs will be permitted, as long as stairs are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore stairs to condition existing before initial use. 1. Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect stairs and to maintain means of egress. If, despite such protection, stairs become damaged, restore damaged areas so no evidence remains of correction work.

3.04 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. Pest Control: Engage pest-control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial Completion. Obtain extended warranty for Owner. Perform control operations lawfully, using environmentally safe materials.

B. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security.

C. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.

D. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior. 1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, insulate temporary

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500-6 20150922 02/13/17

enclosures. 2. Vertical Openings: Close openings of 25 sq. ft. (2.3 sq. m) or less with plywood or similar materials. 3. Horizontal Openings: Close openings in floor or roof decks and horizontal surfaces with load-bearing, wood-framed construction. 4. Install tarpaulins securely using fire-retardant-treated wood framing and other materials.

E. Temporary Partitions: Provide floor-to-ceiling dustproof partitions to limit dust and dirt migration and to separate areas from fumes and noise. 1. Insulate partitions to provide noise protection to occupied areas. 2. Seal joints and perimeter. Equip partitions with dustproof doors and security locks. 3. Protect air-handling equipment. 4. Weather strip openings.

F. Temporary Fire Protection: Until fire-protection needs are supplied by permanent facilities, install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241. 1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas. 2. Provide fire extinguishers, installed on walls on mounting brackets, visible and accessible from space being served, with sign mounted above. a. Locate fire extinguishers where convenient and effective for their intended purpose; provide not less than one extinguisher on each floor at or near each usable stairwell. 3. Store combustible materials in containers in fire-safe locations. 4. Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers, fire hydrants, temporary fire-protection facilities, stairways, and other access routes for firefighting. Prohibit smoking in hazardous fire-exposure areas. 5. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition. 6. Permanent Fire Protection: At earliest feasible date in each area of Project, complete installation of permanent fire-protection facility, including connected services, and place into operation and use. Instruct key personnel on use of facilities. 7. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and first-aid fire-protection program for personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information. 8. Provide hoses for fire protection of sufficient length to reach construction areas. Hang hoses with a warning sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be removed. Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles.

G. Emergency Response Plan: 1. Provide a comprehensive emergency response plan that addresses the following, but not specifically limited to: a. Personnel accidents and injuries b. Natural disasters (i.e., floods, high winds) c. Chemical spills and explosions. d. Fire. 2. Coordinate all aspects of the emergency response plan with local emergency first responders. 3. Post emergency response plan in prominent and accessible location in temporary office, or if temporary office is not available, prominent and accessible location inside building. 4. Notify all site personnel of the existence of emergency response plan.

3.05 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL

A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.

B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. 1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

01500-7 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 02/13/17 20150922

facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage.

C. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs. 2. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures."

END OF SECTION 01500

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500-8 20150922 02/13/17

Page left intentionally blank

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

01600-1 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 02/13/17 20150922

SECTION 01600 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Pro- ject; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; product substitutions; and comparable products.

B. See Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties for Contract closeout.

C. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for warranties on products and installations specified to be warranted.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.

1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents. 2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility , except that products consisting of recycled-content materials are allowed, unless explicitly stated otherwise. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products.

B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: Where a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis of design," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of other named manufacturers.

C. Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.

D. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract Documents, either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide more rights for Owner.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product List: Submit a list, in tabular from, showing specified products. Include generic names of products required. Include manufacturer's name and proprietary product names for each product.

1. Coordinate product list with Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Submittals Schedule.

2. Completed List: Within 60 days after date of commencement of the Work, submit completed product list. Include a written explanation for omissions of data and for variations from Contract requirements. 3. Architect's Action: Architect will respond in writing within 15 days of receipt of completed product list. Architect's response will include a list of unacceptable product selections and a brief explanation of reasons for this action. Architect's response, or lack of response, does not constitute a waiver of requirement to comply with the Contract Documents.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600-2 20150922 02/13/17

B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Sub- mittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.

C. Substitution Requests: In cases where the individual Specification section specifically allows for substitutions, submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.

1. Substitution Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.1A. 2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable:

a. Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be provided. b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution. c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures. e. Samples, where applicable or requested. f. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners. g. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated. h. Research/evaluation reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. i. Detailed comparison of Contractor's Construction Schedule using proposed substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating lack of availability or delays in delivery. j. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. k. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated. l. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results.

3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within 7 days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request, or 7 days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.

a. Form of Acceptance: Change Order. b. Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, product selected shall be compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options.

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

01600-3 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 02/13/17 20150922

1.05 PRODUCT WARRANTIES

A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents.

B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution.

1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed. 2. Refer to Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties.

C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PRODUCT OPTIONS

A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are undamaged, and unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time of installation.

1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. 2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situa- tions on other projects. 3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. 4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection. 5. Where products are accompanied by the term "match sample," sample to be matched is Architect's. 6. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish "sali- ent characteristics" of products.

B. Product Selection Procedures: Procedures for product selection include the following:

1. Product: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Product" name a single product and manufacturer, provide the product named.

2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Manufacturer" or "Source" name single manufacturers or sources, provide a product by the manufacturer or from the source named that complies with requirements.

3. Products: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Products" introduce a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements.

4. Manufacturers: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Manufacturers" introduce a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. a. Substitutions WILL NOT be considered during bidding and/or negotiations.

5. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require matching an established Sample, select a product (and manufacturer) that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Ar- chitect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches satisfactorily.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600-4 20150922 02/13/17

6. Visual Selection Specification: a. Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected from manufacturer's colors, patterns, textures" or a similar phrase, select a product (and manufacturer) that complies with other specified requirements. b. Standard Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "standard range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, or texture from manufacturer's product line that does not include premium items. c. Full Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "full range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items.

2.02 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Timing: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 14 days after the Notice to Proceed. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion of Architect.

B. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

1. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations. 2. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents. 3. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. 4. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. 5. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's Construction Schedule. 6. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. 7. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. 8. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. 9. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION 01600

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

01700-1 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 02/13/17 20150922

SECTION 01700 - EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Construction layout. 2. Field engineering and surveying. 3. General installation of products. 4. Coordination of Owner-installed products. 5. Progress cleaning. 6. Starting and adjusting. 7. Protection of installed construction. 8. Correction of the Work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities, and other construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and verify the existence and location of mechanical and electrical systems and other construction affecting the Work.

1. Before construction, verify the location and points of connection of utility services.

B. Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations.

1. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. 2. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation. 3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

B. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings.

C. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for information to Architect. Include a detailed description of problem encountered, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. Submit requests on CSI Form 13.2A, "Request for Interpretation."

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700-2 20150922 02/13/17

3.03 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT

A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect promptly.

B. General:

1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project. 2. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain required dimensions. 3. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply. 4. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses. 5. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable tolerances.

C. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more locations.

D. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels. In- clude beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Ar- chitect.

3.04 FIELD ENGINEERING

A. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during construction operations.

B. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Project site, referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark.

1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents.

3.05 INSTALLATION

A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated.

1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated.

C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.

D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

01700-3 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 02/13/17 20150922

E. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work.

1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect. 2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.

F. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.

G. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous.

3.06 OWNER-INSTALLED PRODUCTS

A. Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction forces.

B. Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by Owner's construction forces.

1. Construction Schedule: Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction schedule for Owner's portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually agreeable timetable. Notify Owner if changes to schedule are required due to differences in actual construction progress. 2. Preinstallation Conferences: Include Owner's construction forces at preinstallation conferences covering portions of the Work that are to receive Owner's work. Attend preinstallation conferences conducted by Owner's construction forces if portions of the Work depend on Owner's construction.

3.07 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.

1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris. 2. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg C). 3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.

B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.

C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work.

1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire work area, as appropriate.

D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.

E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700-4 20150922 02/13/17

F. Waste Disposal: 1. Burying or burning waste materials on-site will not be permitted. 2. Washing waste materials down sewers will not be permitted. 3. Coordinate waste disposal with requirements of Section 01741, Construction Waste Management and Disposal.

G. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.

H. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects.

I. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.

3.08 STARTING AND ADJUSTING

A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.

B. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for proper operation.

C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

3.09 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.

3.10 CORRECTION OF THE WORK

A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching."

1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment.

B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition.

C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired without visible evidence of repair.

D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired.

E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces.

END OF SECTION 01700

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

01731-1 CUTTING AND PATCHING 02/13/17 20150922

SECTION 01731 - CUTTING AND PATCHING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching.

B. Related Sections: Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching individual parts of the Work.

C. Requirements in this Section apply to mechanical and electrical installations. See Divisions 15 and 16 for other requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching mechanical and electrical installations.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Cutting and Patching Proposal: Submit a proposal describing procedures at least 10 days before the time cutting and patching will be performed, requesting approval to proceed. Include the following information:

1. Extent: Describe cutting and patching, show how they will be performed, and indicate why they cannot be avoided. 2. Changes to In-Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building's appearance and other significant visual elements. 3. Products: List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform the Work. 4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed. 5. Utilities: List utilities that cutting and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List utilities that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate how long utilities will be disrupted. 6. Structural Elements: Where cutting and patching involve adding reinforcement to structural elements, submit details and engineering calculations showing integration of reinforcement with original structure. 7. Architect's Approval: Obtain approval of cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching. Approval does not waive right to later require removal and replacement of unsatisfactory work.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load- carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio.

B. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.

C. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.

1.04 WARRANTY

A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

CUTTING AND PATCHING 01731-2 20150922 02/13/17

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.

B. In-Place Materials: Use materials identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.

1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will match the visual and functional performance of in-place materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to be performed.

1. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with in-place finishes or primers. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut.

B. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations.

C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas.

D. Existing Services: Where existing services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or aban- doned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to minimize interruption to occupied areas.

3.03 PERFORMANCE

A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.

1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition.

B. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations.

1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. Existing Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete or Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill.

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

01731-3 CUTTING AND PATCHING 02/13/17 20150922

4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 2 Sections where required by cutting and patching operations. 5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting. 6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.

C. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections.

1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity of installation. 2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing.

3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. 4. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition.

D. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials.

END OF SECTION 01731

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

CUTTING AND PATCHING 01731-4 20150922 02/13/17

Page left intentionally blank

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

01741-1 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 02/13/17 20150922

SECTION 01741 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following: 1. Salvaging nonhazardous construction and demolition waste. 2. Recycling nonhazardous construction and demolition waste. 3. Disposing of nonhazardous construction and demolition waste.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes packaging.

B. Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or selective demolition operations.

C. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in preparation for reuse.

E. Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in another facility.

F. Salvage and Reuse: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent incorporation into the Work.

1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Achieve end-of-Project rates for salvage/recycling of 75 percent by weight of total nonhazardous solid waste generated by the Work. Facilitate recycling and salvage of materials.

1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Waste Management Plan: Submit plan with Proposal to Owner and final plan within fourteen (14) days of date established the Notice to Proceed.

1.05 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Waste Reduction Progress Reports: Concurrent with each Application for Payment, submit report. Include the following information:

1. Material category. 2. Generation point of waste. 3. Total quantity of waste in tons. 4. Quantity of waste salvaged, both estimated and actual in tons. 5. Quantity of waste recycled, both estimated and actual in tons. 6. Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) in tons. 7. Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) as a percentage of total waste.

B. Waste Reduction Calculations: Before request for Substantial Completion, submit calculated end-of- Project rates for salvage, recycling, and disposal as a percentage of total waste generated by the Work.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 01741-2 20150922 02/13/17

C. Records of Donations: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable waste donated to individuals and organizations. Indicate whether organization is tax exempt.

D. Records of Sales: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable waste sold to individuals and organizations. Indicate whether organization is tax exempt.

E. Recycling and Processing Facility Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of recyclable waste by recycling and processing facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices.

F. Landfill and Incinerator Disposal Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of waste by landfills and incinerator facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Waste Management Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination" and Division 1 Section “Sustainable Design Requirements - Green Globes.”

1.07 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN

A. General: Develop a waste management plan according to ASTM E 1609 and requirements of this Section. Plan shall consist of waste identification, waste reduction work plan, and cost/revenue analysis. Distinguish between demolition and construction waste. Indicate quantities by weight or volume, but use same units of measure throughout waste management plan.

B. Waste Identification: Indicate anticipated types and quantities of demolition and construction waste generated by the Work. Include estimated quantities and assumptions for estimates.

C. Waste Reduction Work Plan: List each type of waste and whether it will be salvaged, recycled, or disposed of in landfill or incinerator. Include points of waste generation, total quantity of each type of waste, quantity for each means of recovery, and handling and transportation procedures.

1. Salvaged Materials for Reuse: For materials that will be salvaged and reused in this Project, describe methods for preparing salvaged materials before incorporation into the Work. 2. Salvaged Materials for Sale: For materials that will be sold to individuals and organizations, include list of their names, addresses, and telephone numbers. 3. Salvaged Materials for Donation: For materials that will be donated to individuals and organizations, include list of their names, addresses, and telephone numbers. 4. Recycled Materials: Include list of local receivers and processors and type of recycled materials each will accept. Include names, addresses, and telephone numbers. 5. Disposed Materials: Indicate how and where materials will be disposed of. Include name, address, and telephone number of each landfill and incinerator facility. 6. Handling and Transportation Procedures: Include method that will be used for separating recyclable waste including sizes of containers, container labeling, and designated location on Project site where materials separation will be located.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS – NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PLAN IMPLEMENTATION

A. General: Implement approved waste management plan. Provide handling, containers, storage, signage, transportation, and other items as required to implement waste management plan during the entire duration of the Contract.

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

01741-3 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 02/13/17 20150922

B. Waste Management Coordinator: Engage a waste management coordinator to be responsible for implementing, monitoring, and reporting status of waste management work plan.

C. Training: Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste management procedures, as appropriate for the Work occurring at Project site.

1. Distribute waste management plan to everyone concerned within three (3) days of submittal return. 2. Distribute waste management plan to entities when they first begin work on-site. Review plan procedures and locations established for salvage, recycling, and disposal.

D. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.

1. Designate and label specific areas on Project site necessary for separating materials that are to be salvaged, recycled, reused, donated, and sold. 2. Comply with Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for controlling dust and dirt, environmental protection, and noise control.

3.02 SALVAGING DEMOLITION WASTE

A. Salvaged Items for Reuse in the Work:

1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until installation. 4. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 5. Install salvaged items to comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make items functional for use indicated.

B. Salvaged Items for Sale and Donation: Not permitted on Project site.

C. Salvaged Items for Owner's Use:

1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 4. Transport items to Owner's storage area as designated by Owner. 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.

3.03 RECYCLING DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION WASTE, GENERAL

A. General: Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on-site workers.

B. Recycling Incentives: Revenues, savings, rebates, tax credits, and other incentives received for recycling waste materials shall be shared equally by Owner and Contractor.

C. Procedures: Separate recyclable waste from other waste materials, trash, and debris. Separate recyclable waste by type at Project site to the maximum extent practical according to approved construction waste management plan. At Contractor’s option, waste may be co-mingled in single container, provided proper separation is accomplished at off-site recycling facility approved by Architect in advance.

1. Provide appropriately marked containers or bins for controlling recyclable waste until they are removed from Project site. Include list of acceptable and unacceptable materials at each container

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 01741-4 20150922 02/13/17

and bin.

a. Inspect containers and bins for contamination and remove contaminated materials if found.

2. Stockpile processed materials on-site without intermixing with other materials. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. 3. Stockpile materials away from construction area. 4. Store components off the ground and protect from the weather. 5. Remove recyclable waste off Owner's property and transport to recycling receiver or processor.

3.04 RECYCLING DEMOLITION WASTE

A. Concrete: Remove reinforcement and other metals from concrete and sort with other metals.

1. Pulverize concrete to maximum 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) size.

B. Masonry: Remove metal reinforcement, anchors, and ties from masonry and sort with other metals.

1. Pulverize masonry to maximum 3/4-inch (19-mm) size.

C. Wood Materials: Sort and stack members according to size, type, and length. Separate lumber, engineered wood products, panel products, and treated wood materials.

D. Metals: Separate metals by type.

3.05 RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE

A. Packaging:

1. Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging into flat sheets. Bundle and store in a dry location. 2. Polystyrene Packaging: Separate and bag materials. 3. Pallets: As much as possible, require deliveries using pallets to remove pallets from Project site. For pallets that remain on-site, break down pallets into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood. 4. Crates: Break down crates into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood.

B. Wood Materials: Sort and stack members according to size, type, and length. Separate lumber, engineered wood products, panel products, and treated wood materials.

1. Clean Cut-Offs of Lumber: Grind or chip into small pieces. 2. Clean Sawdust: Bag sawdust that does not contain painted or treated wood.

C. Gypsum Board: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets or in container and store in a dry location.

1. Clean Gypsum Board: Grind scraps of clean gypsum board using small mobile chipper or hammer mill. Screen out paper after grinding.

D. Concrete: Remove reinforcement and other metals from concrete and sort with other metals.

1. Pulverize concrete to maximum 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) size.

E. Masonry: Remove metal reinforcement, anchors, and ties from masonry and sort with other metals.

1. Pulverize masonry to maximum 3/4-inch (19-mm) size.

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

01741-5 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 02/13/17 20150922

F. Metals: Separate metals by type.

1. Structural Steel: Stack members according to size, type of member, and length. 2. Remove and dispose of bolts, nuts, washers, and other rough hardware.

G. Gypsum Board: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets or in container and store in a dry location. Remove edge trim and sort with other metals. Remove and dispose of fasteners.

H. Acoustical Ceiling Panels and Tile: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets and store in a dry location.

I. Metal Suspension System: Separate metal members including trim, and other metals from acoustical panels and tile and sort with other metals.

J. Ceramic Tile: Pulverize ceramic tile to maximum 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) size.

K. Piping: Reduce piping to straight lengths and store by type and size. Separate supports, hangers, valves, sprinklers, and other components by type and size.

L. Conduit: Reduce conduit to straight lengths and store by type and size.

3.06 DISPOSAL OF WASTE

A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of accumulate on- site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas.

B. Burning: Do not burn waste materials.

C. Disposal: Transport waste materials and dispose of at designated spoil areas on Owner's property.

END OF SECTION 01741

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 01741-6 20150922 02/13/17

Page left intentionally blank

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

01770-1 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 02/13/17 20150922

SECTION 01770 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Inspection procedures.

2. Warranties.

3. Final cleaning.

4. On-site service and technical support for a period of seven days starting from date of Grand Opening

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for requirements for Applications for Payment for Substantial and Final Completion.

2. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting Final Completion construction photographs and negatives.

3. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for the Work in those Sections.

1.02 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION (TURNOVER)

A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, (Turnover) Contractor shall complete the following:

1. Final Cleaning shall be fully completed in accordance with Paragraph 3.01 “Final Cleaning.”

2. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete.

3. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.

4. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents.

5. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner and Whole Foods Market unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.

6. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information.

7. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770-2 20150922 02/13/17

8. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions.

9. Complete startup testing of systems.

10. Submit test/adjust/balance records.

11. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements.

12. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities.

13. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance.

14. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.

15. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects.

B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request, Ar- chitect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Re-inspection: Request re-inspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.

2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion.

1.03 FINAL COMPLETION

A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final Completion, complete the following:

1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures."

2. Contractor shall complete all open items on the Turnover Punch no later than four (4) weeks after date of Grand Opening.

3. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected per Turnover Punch list, endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. a. At the request of Whole Foods Market. Architect and his Engineers may perform a follow up punch list to verify the completion of the Turnover Punch List. If Architect and/or Engineers observe any items that have not been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance, Whole Foods Market, at their sole discretion, may back-charge the Contractor for the Architect’s and/or Engineers’ expenses for the follow up punch list effort, including travel expenses and associated professional labor expenses.

4. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements.

5. Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty.

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

01770-3 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 02/13/17 20150922

6. Instruct Whole Foods Market’s personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems.

B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Re-inspection: Request re-inspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. Refer to Paragraph 1.03, a, 3, a, above.

1.04 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. General: Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Protect Project Record Doc- uments from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record Documents for Owner’s Project Manager’s and Architect’s reference during normal working hours.

B. Record Drawings: Maintain and submit one set black-line white prints of Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings.

1. Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether an individual or entity is installer, subcontractor or similar entity to prepare the marked-up Record Prints. a. Give particular attention to information or concealed elements that cannot be readily identified or recorded later. b. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations.

2. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of Work at the same location.

3. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, Change Order numbers, alternate numbers, revision numbers and similar identification where applicable.

4. Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation “PROJECT RECORD DRAWING” in a prominent location. Organize into manageable sets; bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets.

5. Distribution: a. Provide three sets of electronic copies (one to Architect and two to WFM) burned onto a CD or DVD. b. Upload .pdf’s on Whole Foods Market’s USGN web site under “Drawings>>As Builts/Close Out Documentation>>As Builts.” c. Provide bound one full size set of drawings, deliver to WFM in Roswell.

C. Record Specifications: Submit three (3) electronic copies (one to Architect and two to WFM) burned on a CD or DVD, including addenda and contract modifications. Mark copy to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in the Specifications, addenda and contract modifications.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products, materials and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.

2. Mark copy with proprietary name and model number of products, materials and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770-4 20150922 02/13/17

3. Note related Change Orders and Record Drawings where applicable.

D. Photographic Documentation: Provide three (3) copies (one to Architect and two to WFM) of all electronic photographic images burned onto CD or DVD

E. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sec- tions for miscellaneous record-keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous reports and identify each, ready for continued use and reference. Provide three sets of electronic copies (one to Architect and two to WFM) burned onto a CD or DVD.

1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating the operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem and piece of equipment not a part of a system. Include operation and maintenance data required in individual Specification Sections and as follows:

1. Operation Data: Include emergency instructions and procedures, system and equipment descriptions, operating procedures and sequence of operations.

2. Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer’s information, list of spare parts, maintenance procedures, maintenance schedules and service schedules for preventive and routine maintenance. Include copies of all warranties and bonds.

B. Organize operation and maintenance manuals into suitable sets of manageable size. Bind and index data in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders as thick as necessary to accommodate contents and with pockets inside the covers to receive oversize folded sheets. Identify each binder on front and spine with printed title “OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL”, Project Name and subject matter of contents.

C. Provide one set of hard copies to WFM and two sets of electronic copies (one to Architect and one to WFM) burned onto a CD or DVD.

1.06 WARRANTIES

A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated.

B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual.

1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper.

2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer.

3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor.

C. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

01770-5 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 02/13/17 20150922

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 FINAL CLEANING

A. General: Provide final cleaning prior to Date of Turnover.

1. Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each and every surface throughout entire building to be in completely dust-free condition.

2. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations.

3. Use cleaning products that comply with Green Seal's GS-37, or if GS-37 is not applicable, use products that comply with the California Code of Regulations maximum allowable VOC levels. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project:

1. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances.

2. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits.

3. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface.

4. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site.

5. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building.

6. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition.

7. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.

8. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.

9. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; shampoo if visible soil or stains remain.

10. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.

11. Remove labels that are not permanent.

12. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show evidence of repair or restoration.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770-6 20150922 02/13/17

13. Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and electrical nameplates.

14. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances.

15. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions.

16. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure.

17. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills.

18. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction.

19. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Replace burned- out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures.

20. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.

C. Pest Control: Engage an experienced, licensed exterminator to make a final inspection and rid Project of rodents, insects, and other pests. Prepare a report.

D. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully.

3.02 ON SITE SERVICE AND TECHNICAL SUPPORT FOR WEEK STARTING AT GRAND OPENING

A. Contractor, at no cost to Owner, shall arrange for technicians from electrical, mechanical and plumbing trades to be on-site at the store during all normal operation hours for a period of seven (7) days starting from the date of Grand Opening to immediately address any system performance and operational issues that may arise.

END OF SECTION 01770

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

01809-1 TESTING FOR INDOOR AIR QUALITY 02/13/17 20150922

SECTION 01809 - TESTING FOR INDOOR AIR QUALITY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, other Division-1 Specification sections, and specifications of materials mentioned in this section, apply to this section.

1.02 WORK INCLUDED:

A. General: This section provides (1) requirements Baseline lndoor Air Quality Testing (IAQ) for maximum indoor pollutant concentrations for acceptance of the facility, and (2) requirements for Independent Materials Testing of specific materials anticipated to have major impact on IAQ.

B. This section specifies procedures for testing specific construction materials for Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) performance to assure compliance with EPA's IAQ program. Materials have been identified for independent testing based on the following three criteria: (1) large volume of the material used in office space, (2) the space is occupied during normal working hours, and (3) materials are used in an area where there is recirculating air.

1.03 RELATED WORK:

A. Additional specifications for baseline testing for Indoor Air Quality are included in Section 15000 “Heating, Ventilation and Air-conditioning” under subsection “Air System Testing and Balancing."

B. Sequencing of installation of finish materials during construction to avoid IAQ contamination of building systems is specified in Section 01700 “Execution Requirements.”

C. Manufacturer's data shall be supplied for products, including content and outgassing of emissions as specified in Section 01811 “Sustainable Design Requirements - Green Globes.”

1.04 SUBMITTALS:

A. Baseline lAQ Testing: Submit a report for each test site specified for IAQ baseline testing as prescribed in Division 15 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing". Report on air concentrations of targeted pollutants as identified in Table 3.1 of this section.

B. Product Emissions Test Reports: Submit a report for each material emissions test performed. Test results will be reported in terms of emission factors that will be used by EPA to model indoor air concentrations. These reports and the modeling data prepared by EPA shall be maintained in the Materials Log Book specified in Division 1 "Environmental Impact of Materials."

1.05 OUALITY ASSURANCE:

A. All material tests shall be performed in accordance with ASTM D 5116, "Standard Guide for Small Scale Environmental Chamber Determinations of Organic Emissions from Indoor Materials/Products" (1990). Report results in accordance with Section 11 of the referenced ASTM Guide.

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

01809-2 TESTING FOR INDOOR AIR QUALITY 02/13/17 20150922

1.06 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING:

A. Identify, program, and schedule any product emissions testing well in advance of construction in a manner to prevent delays to the performance of the work of this Contract.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 BASELINE lAQ TESTING:

A. HVAC System Verification: To assure compliance with recognized standards for indoor air quality including ASHRAE Standard 62.1-2004, the Contractor's independent testing and balancing agency shall verify the performance of each HVAC system prior to IAQ testing, including space temperature and space humidity uniformity, outside air quantity, filter installation, drain pan operation, and any obvious contamination sources.

B. Indoor Air Quality Testing: Upon verification of HVAC system operation, the Contractor shall hire an independent contractor, subject to approval by the Contracting Officer's Representative, with a minimum of 5 years of experience in performing the types of testing specified herein, to test levels of indoor air contaminants for compliance with specified requirements. 1. Conduct baseline IAQ testing using testing protocols consistent with the United States Environmental Protection Agency Compendium of Methods for the Determination of air Pollutants in Indoor Air. 2. A test plan shall be submitted for the approval of the Contracting Officer's Representative. The plan shall specify procedures, times, instrumentation, and sampling methods that will be employed. 3. Perform IAQ testing for at least the minimum number of required sampling locations, determined as follows: For each portion of the building served by a separate ventilation system, the number of sampling points shall not be less than one per 25,000 sq. ft., or for each contiguous floor area, whichever is larger, and include areas with the least ventilation as calculated by Ventilation Rate Procedure of ASHRAE Standard 62.1-2004 and greatest presumed source strength as identified by Owner. Collect air samples on three consecutive days and average the results of each three-day test cycle to determine compliance or non-compliance of indoor air quality for each air handling zone tested. a. Verify areas to be tested with the Contracting Officer's Representative. Areas with 100% outside air ventilation rates such as laboratories are excluded from these testing requirements. The Contracting Officer's Representative is the sole judge of areas exempt from testing. 4. Perform IAQ testing following the completion of all interior construction activities and prior to occupancy. The building shall have all interior finishes installed including, but not limited to, millwork, doors, paint, carpet, and acoustic tiles. Perform testing prior to installation of furniture, workstation components, and casework. 5. Perform IAQ testing within the breathing zone, between 3’–0” and 6’–0” above the finished floor and over a minimum 4-hour period. 6. Collect air samples during normal occupied hours (prior to occupancy) with the building ventilation system starting at the daily normal start times and operated at the minimum outside air flow rate for the occupied mode throughout the duration of the air testing. 7. Sample and record outside air levels of formaldehyde and TVOC contaminants at three outside air locations (as determined by Owner) simultaneously with indoor tests to establish basis of comparison for these contaminant levels by averaging the three outdoor readings for each contaminant. 8. Perform airborne mold and mildew air sampling and speciation with simultaneous indoor and outdoor readings. a. Samples are to be collected using a 12 liter-per-minute pump and a 0.45 micron polycarbonate

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

01809-3 TESTING FOR INDOOR AIR QUALITY 02/13/17 20150922

filter, with a 4-hour duration for each sample. b. Speciation shall be done with DNA detection using the quantitative polymerase chain reaction (QPCR) method. To ensure that filters are not precontaminated with mold, a field blank filter cartridge shall be tested after every eighth sample is tested. 9. Acceptance of respective portions of the building by the Owner is subject to compliance with specified limits of indoor air quality contaminant levels.

C. Indoor air quality shall conform to the following standards and limits: 1. Formaldehyde: <20 microgram/m3 (16.3 ppb) 2. Sum of VOCs: <200 microgram/m3 3. Carbon Monoxide: Not to exceed 9 ppm 4. Carbon Dioxide: Not to exceed 800 ppm. 5. Other compounds found on the California Office of Environmental Health Hazard Assessment’s list of chronic inhalation Reference Exposure Levels (RELs) are not to exceed those levels, as published on: http://www.oehha.ca.gov/air/chronic_rels/AllChrels.html 6. Airborne Mold and Mildew: The species identified in indoor air cannot vary by more than 10% from those identified in the exterior samples.

D. Test Reports: Prepare test reports showing the results and location of each test, a summary of the HVAC operating conditions, and a listing of any discrepancies and recommendations for corrective actions, if required. 1. Include certification of test equipment calibration with each test report.

E. For each sampling point where the maximum concentration limits are exceeded, the Contractor is responsible for conducting additional flush-out with outside air and retesting the specific parameter(s) exceeded to indicate the requirements are achieved. Repeat procedure until all requirements have been met. When retesting non-complying building areas, take samples from the same locations as in the first test. Retesting shall be performed at no additional expense to the Government.

F. For each sampling point where the airborne mold and mildew indoor species distribution varies by more than 10% from exterior sampling speciation, Contractor shall identify the source of the mold and/or mildew and remediate with corrective action, then retest in accordance with section 3.1.B above until compliant results are attained.

G. In the event that any non-compliant test results occur, Contractor must provide a written report to the Owner describing the source(s) of the noncompliant condition(s) and the corrective action(s) implemented.

3.02 INDEPENDENT MATERIALS TESTING:

A. Materials That Must Be Tested: All materials listed below that are proposed for use on this project shall be tested for permanent, in-place Indoor Air Quality performance in accordance with requirements of these specifications. Results shall be furnished to the Contracting Officer's Representative. Materials meeting the criteria for independent testing are as follows: 1. Field applied paint systems on appropriate substrate. Paint primers and intermediate coats (if used) should be applied with a typical drying time allowed between coats (not to exceed 7 days). 2. Carpet including manufacturer's recommended adhesive. The carpet will be applied to the appropriate concrete flooring per manufacturer's instructions so that the testing is of the "carpet assembly." 3. Ceiling tile. 4. Any fireproofing material that may be exposed to indoor air, directly or in a plenum, applied to

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

01809-4 TESTING FOR INDOOR AIR QUALITY 02/13/17 20150922

appropriate substrate

B. Materials for Testing: Only test representative samples of actual products selected for use on this project. Tests of products generically and/or technically similar but produced by a manufacturer other than that of the product selected for use on this project is invalid.

C. Materials Testing and Evaluation Protocol: California Department of Health Services’ “Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers,” July 2004. available online: http://www.dhs.ca.gov/ps/deodc/ehlb/iaq/VOCS/

D. Performance Thresholds: All compounds detected that have chronic reference exposure levels listed in the California DHS Standard Practice document shall be analyzed and compared to the allowable concentration levels.

E. Materials Test Reports: Submit test reports to the Contracting Officer’s Representative. The report shall include raw emission levels, as well as the calculated resulting concentrations and the assumptions (loading, volume of space, ventilation rates) used to determine those resulting concentrations.

F. Product/Material Evaluation: All products/materials shown by testing to comply with emissions limits and other criteria specified in this section will be approved for use on this project subject to compliance with all other specified requirements of the Project Manual. Products/materials shown to exceed specified emission limits shall be discussed, test results interpreted, and a determination made as to alternative product uses or selections.

END OF SECTION 01809

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

01811-1 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS - GREEN GLOBES 02/13/17 20150922

SECTION 01811 - SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS - GREEN GLOBES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Unless otherwise shown or specified, the work shall conform to the following standards of Latest Edition of each publication: 1. ASHRAE/NIBS Guideline 0-2005: The Commissioning Process (including Annexes I, K and J). 2. ISO Standard 14040: Environmental Management-Life Cycle Assessment-Principles and Framework. 3. ISO Standard 14044: Environmental Management-Life Cycle Assessment-Requirements & Guidelines 4. ISO 14025: Environmental Product Declarations: Type III Labels. 5. ISO 21930: Sustainability in Building Construction-Environmental Declaration of Building Products. 6. EN 15840: 2013 Sustainability of Construction Works. 7. SMACNA’s Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. 8. NIBS Guideline 3-2006 (including Appendices, Annexes (M), Checklists). 9. ASHRAE Guideline 0-2005. 10. ASTM E1745 – 11, and/or CMHC Best Practice Guide. 11. GreenChill Best Practices Guideline Ensuring Leak-Tight Installations of Commercial Refrigeration Equipment.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general requirements and procedures for compliance with the Green Building Initiative's (GBI) "Green Globes for New Construction, Version 1.3," (hereafter, "Green Globes"). 1. Some Green Globes requirements depend on product selections and may not be specifically identified as Green Globes requirements. Compliance with Green Globes requirements may be used as one criterion to evaluate substitution requests and comparable product requests. 2. See GBI’s Green Globes website (http://www.thegbi.org/green-globes/new-construction.shtml) for additional information on New Construction green building program including the project checklist.

a. Some Green Globes requirements depend on Architect's design and other aspects of Project that are not part of the Work of the Contract.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Definitions that are a part of Green Globes apply to this Section.

B. REL: Recommended exposure limit.

1.04 MEETINGS

A. Pre-Construction Meeting: Conduct team meeting using online video interactive conference call or at Project Site (1300 Barrett Parkway, Suite 500, Kennesaw, GA 30152). Review Green Globes requirements and action plans for compliance with requirements. Document meeting minutes per criteria below.

B. 25% Completion Meeting (based on budget or schedule): Conduct team meeting using online video interactive conference call. Review Green Globes requirements and action plans for compliance with requirements. Document meeting minutes per criteria below.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS - GREEN GLOBES 01811-2 20150922 09/16/16

C. 50% Completion Meeting (based on budget or schedule): Conduct team meeting using online video interactive conference call. Review Green Globes requirements and action plans for compliance with requirements. Document meeting minutes per criteria below.

D. Substantial Completion Meeting (based on budget or schedule): Conduct conference at Project Site (1300 Barrett Parkway, Suite 500, Kennesaw, GA 30152). Review Green Globes requirements and action plans for compliance with requirements. Document meeting minutes per criteria below.

E. Document project meeting minutes and agenda. 1. Detail the project stage and which project members were in attendance.

a. Progress meeting agendas shall include the following: 1) Introduction of new team members to the overall sustainable strategies that have been incorporated into the project; 2) Review of established (and/or modified) performance goals; 3) Integration of language regarding performance goals and acceptable outcomes into project documents (plans and specifications); 4) Identification of missing requirements and establishment of required steps to correct; 5) Modification, if necessary, of established performance goals/requirements; 6) Establishment/tracking of responsibilities for gathering documentation; 7) Operations and maintenance training.

1.05 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Respond to questions and requests from Architect about Green Globes requirements that are the responsibility of Contractor, that depend on product selection or product qualities, or that depend on Contractor's procedures. Document responses as informational submittals.

B. Submit documentation to Architect so they can respond to questions and requests from GBI-authorized Assessor about Green Globes credits that are the responsibility of Contractor, that depend on product selection or product qualities, or that depend on Contractor's procedures until GBI-authorized Assessor has made its determination on Project's Green Globes certification application. 1. Document correspondence with Architect and GBI-authorized Assessor as informational submittals.

C. Environmental Management System: Document the following: 1. General Contractor's environmental policy. 2. Regulatory compliance and training. 3. Environmental risk assessment that shows sensitive environmental areas and ranks potential risks that may arise from the construction. 4. Environmental risk management strategies. 5. Environmental management roles, responsibilities, and reporting structure for the construction phase. 6. Site and work instructions for site personnel outlining environmental procedures during construction. 7. Environmental inspection checklists. 8. Records of compliance.

1.06 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit additional sustainable design submittals required by other Specification Sections.

B. Sustainable design submittals are in addition to other submittals. 1. If submitted item is identical to that submitted to comply with other requirements, include an additional copy with other submittal as a record copy of compliance with indicated Green Globes requirements instead of separate sustainable design submittal. Mark additional copy "Sustainable design submittal."

C. Sustainable Design Documentation Submittals:

Kennesaw, GA Permit Whole Foods Market

01811-3 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS - GREEN GLOBES 02/13/17 20150922

1. Environmental management system documents. 2. Environmental product declarations. 3. Third-party certifications based on multiple attribute standards. 4. Third-party-certified life-cycle product assessments. 5. Documentation complying with Section 01741 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal." 6. Product Data and laboratory test reports for adhesives and sealants indicating VOC content and compliance with requirements for low-emitting materials. 7. Product Data and laboratory test reports for paints indicating VOC content and compliance with requirements for low-emitting materials. 8. Laboratory test reports for flooring, insulation, acoustical ceilings, and wall coverings, indicating compliance with requirements for low-emitting materials. 9. Construction Indoor-Air-Quality (IAQ) management plan including the following: a. Product Data for temporary filtration media. b. Product Data for filtration media used during occupancy. c. Construction Documentation: Six photographs at each of three different times during the construction period, along with a brief description of the SMACNA approach employed, documenting implementation of IAQ management measures, such as protection of ducts and on- site stored or installed absorptive materials. 10. IAQ testing report from the testing and inspecting agency indicating results of IAQ testing and documentation that show compliance with IAQ testing procedures and requirements. 11. Coordinate with owner’s project representative on performance requirements for the following building systems: a. Mechanical/HVAC systems. b. Plumbing domestic hot water/hot water return systems. c. Temperature controls/Building Automation Systems (BAS). d. Lighting/daylighting systems and controls. e. Emergency power/power distribution systems. f. Specialty electrical systems (fire alarm, voice/data, etc.). g. Renewable energy systems, if applicable. h. Building envelope. i. Conveying systems (elevators, escalators, etc.), if applicable. j. Structural systems. k. Fire protection systems. l. Building interior systems. 12. Inspection reports from subcontractors involved in the building envelope construction including but not limited to roof membrane, flashing, roof & wall openings (doors/windows/skylights), foundation systems (vapor barrier & retarders/waterproofing/damp-proofing/drainage), exterior wall cladding (EIFS/masonry/aluminum framed glazing system), joint sealers, rainscreen wall cladding, continuous air barrier. Follow NIBS Guideline 3-2006 Appendixes checklist of project relative items. 13. Verification that remote commercial refrigeration system equipment was test prior to the building’s occupancy guaranteeing the system is leak tight.

1.07 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For Green Globes coordinator.

B. Project Materials Cost Data: Provide statement indicating total cost for materials used for Project. Costs exclude labor, overhead, and profit. Include breakout of costs for the following categories of items: 1. Plumbing. 2. Mechanical. 3. Electrical. 4. Specialty items such as elevators and equipment. 5. Wood-based construction materials.

C. Sustainable Design Action Plans: Provide preliminary submittals within 30 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed indicating how the following requirements will be met:

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS - GREEN GLOBES 01811-4 20150922 09/16/16

1. List of proposed products with environmental product declarations. 2. List of proposed products complying with requirements for multiple attribute standards. 3. List of proposed products complying with requirements for life-cycle product assessments. 4. General Contractor's environmental policy. 5. Waste management plan complying with Section 01741 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal." 6. Construction IAQ management plan.

D. Sustainable Design Progress Reports: Concurrent with each Application for Payment, submit reports comparing actual construction and purchasing activities with sustainable design action plans.

1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Green Globes Coordinator: Engage an experienced coordinator to coordinate Green Globes requirements. Green Globes coordinator may also serve as waste management coordinator. 1. Green Globes coordinator shall have previously coordinated at least one Green Globes project or coordinated at least one LEED certified building project.

1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Protect, deliver, store, and handle building materials made of organic material or those that could absorb moisture to prevent deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or corrosion, and to prevent collecting organic matter. 1. Building materials made of organic material (i.e. wood, plasterboard, drywall, acoustical ceiling tile, insulation) or those that could absorb moisture shall be protected in transit and at the construction site from contact with moisture and from collecting organic matter such as leaves, soil or insects. 2. Keep materials off the ground in a protected and isolated storage area. 3. Document (via digital photographs) protection of building materials and provide to architect.

B. Do not deliver or install materials made of organic material or those that could absorb moisture until construction operations that could damage them have been completed in installation areas.

C. Do not install interior walls, wood floors, and ceilings until the building envelope is weather-tight and has been permitted to dry.

D. Provide photographic documentation that building materials are protected in transit and at the site; provide photographic documentation that the building envelope was weather tight prior to interior work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Provide products and procedures necessary to comply with Green Globes requirements referenced in this Section. Although other Sections may specify some requirements that contribute to referenced Green Globes requirements, Contractor shall determine additional materials and procedures necessary to comply with Green Globes requirements indicated.

B. Building products documented in contract documents shall conform using Environmental Product Declarations (EPDs), and/or third-party certifications, and/or third-party verified product life cycle assessment towards meeting the following criteria requirements (percentage base upon cost): 1. At least 10 percent of interior fit-out materials and products (including finishes and furnishings) shall comply. Provide verified documents that report environmental data of products based on life cycle assessment (LCA) or third-party certification.

Kennesaw, GA Permit Whole Foods Market

01811-5 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS - GREEN GLOBES 02/13/17 20150922

2.02 LOW-EMITTING MATERIALS

A. Adhesives and Sealants: For field applications inside the building, adhesives and sealants shall comply with the following VOC content limits: 1. Wood Glues: 30 g/L. 2. Metal-to-Metal Adhesives: 30 g/L. 3. Adhesives for Porous Materials (except Wood): 50 g/L. 4. Subfloor Adhesives: 50 g/L. 5. Plastic Foam Adhesives: 50 g/L. 6. Carpet Adhesives: 50 g/L. 7. Carpet Pad Adhesives: 50 g/L. 8. VCT and Asphalt Tile Adhesives: 50 g/L. 9. Cove Base Adhesives: 50 g/L. 10. Gypsum Board and Panel Adhesives: 50 g/L. 11. Rubber Floor Adhesives: 60 g/L. 12. Ceramic Tile Adhesives: 65 g/L. 13. Multipurpose Construction Adhesives: 70 g/L. 14. Fiberglass Adhesives: 80 g/L. 15. Contact Adhesive: 80 g/L. 16. Structural Glazing Adhesives: 100 g/L. 17. Wood Flooring Adhesive: 100 g/L. 18. Single-Ply Roof Membrane Adhesive: 250 g/L. 19. Special-Purpose Contact Adhesive (Contact Adhesive that Is Used to Bond Melamine Covered Board, Metal, Unsupported Vinyl, Rubber, or Wood Veneer 1/16 Inch or Less in Thickness to Any Surface): 250 g/L. 20. Plastic Cement Welding Compounds: 250 g/L. 21. ABS Welding Compounds: 325 g/L. 22. CPVC Welding Compounds: 490 g/L. 23. PVC Welding Compounds: 510 g/L. 24. Adhesive Primer for Plastic: 550 g/L. 25. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L. 26. Nonmembrane Roof Sealants: 300 g/L. 27. Single-Ply Roof Membrane Sealants: 450 g/L. 28. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. 29. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 250 g/L. 30. Other Sealants: 420 g/L.

B. Adhesives and Sealants: For field applications inside the building, adhesives and sealants shall contain no more than half of the chronic REL of VOCs when tested according to the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." The building concentration of formaldehyde shall not exceed half of the indoor REL or 16.5 mcg/cu. m and that of acetaldehyde shall not exceed 9 mcg/cu. m.

C. Carpet and undercarpet adhesives shall comply with CRI's Green Label Plus testing program.

D. Paints: For field applications inside the building, wall paints shall comply with the following VOC content limits: 1. Latex Flat Paints: 50 g/L. 2. Latex Nonflat Paints: 150 g/L.

E. Paints: For field applications inside the building, wall paints shall contain no more than half of the chronic REL of VOCs when tested according to the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." The building concentration of formaldehyde shall not exceed half of the indoor REL or 33 mcg/cu. m and that of acetaldehyde shall not exceed 9 mcg/cu. m.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS - GREEN GLOBES 01811-6 20150922 09/16/16

F. Flooring and Other Interior Products: Flooring, floor coverings, insulation, acoustical ceilings, and wall coverings shall contain no more than half of the chronic REL of VOCs when tested according to the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." The building concentration of formaldehyde shall not exceed half of the indoor REL or 33 mcg/cu. m and that of acetaldehyde shall not exceed 9 mcg/cu. m.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 NONSMOKING BUILDING

A. Smoking is not permitted within the building or within 25 feet (8 m) of entrances, operable windows, or outdoor-air intakes. Signage should be posted to ensure that smoke is kept at least 25 feet away from building entrances, operable windows and outdoor air intakes for the building’s HVAC system.

3.02 CLEAN DIESEL PRACTICES

A. Comply with Green Globes requirements for clean diesel practices. 1. A vehicle “idling-reduction” directive. a. Limit idling to no more than 3 minutes. b. “No Idling” signage. 2. Use of clean fuels a. For example, ultra-low sulfur diesel (ULSD) fuel, biodiesel blends, liquid petroleum gas (LPG), compressed natural gas (CNG), and liquefied natural gas (LNG). 3. Engine upgrades that reduce emissions a. For example, diesel particulate filters (DPFs) diesel oxidation catalysts (DOCs), crankcase emission control devices, engine component upgrades. Does not apply where engines are equipped with after treatment technologies as part of their originally certified emission control system. 4. Engine maintenance records a. Proper engine maintenance is necessary for optimum fuel economy and extended engine life as well as to control emissions.

3.03 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT

A. Comply with Section 01741 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."

B. The contractor and hauler shall be track separately demolition waste from construction waste and that the demolition waste shall be separated into hazardous and non-hazardous materials. Salvaged materials, intended to be used on this project site or another, shall be kept separate from the recyclables for the hauler. Hazardous waste by-products of construction include paints, solvents, oils, lubricants, etc. A separate procedure should be developed for disposing and recycling of these wastes. The procedure shall conform to all federal, state, and local regulations.

3.04 INDOOR-AIR-QUALITY ASSESSMENT

A. Air-Quality Testing: 1. Conduct baseline IAQ testing, after construction ends and prior to occupancy, according to the EPA's "Testing for Indoor Air Quality - Section 01809." 2. Complete HVAC testing, adjusting, and balancing before beginning IAQ testing. 3. Indoor air shall comply with standards and limits in the EPA's "Testing for Indoor Air Quality - Section 01809." 4. For each sampling point where the maximum concentration limits are exceeded, take corrective action until requirements have been met. 5. For each sampling point where the airborne mold and mildew indoor species distribution varies by more than 10 percent from exterior sampling specification, identify the source of mold and/or mildew

Kennesaw, GA Permit Whole Foods Market

01811-7 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS - GREEN GLOBES 02/13/17 20150922

and remediate with corrective action, then retest until compliant results are attained. 6. If any noncompliant test results occur, provide a written report describing the source(s) of the noncompliant condition(s) and the corrective action(s) implemented.

3.05 CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES

A. Construction activities will be located in such a way to limit disturbance to site. 1. Construction activity should not extend beyond 40 ft. of the building footprint; and not beyond 5 ft. of parking lots, roadways, sidewalks, and utility right-of-ways. Exceptions apply where the intent of the construction activities is to specifically improve the natural integrity of the site e.g.: removing invasive plant species, replacing existing hardscapes with vegetation, restoring prairie or wetlands, or increasing on-site water retention by building rain gardens, swales, retention ponds, or berms. 2. Projects should restrict work in areas that are not part of the building footprint or associated ancillary spaces (parking lots, walkways, utility right-of-ways, etc.). This will prevent the project from disturbing any unnecessary spaces and topographies not associated with the project. The only exception is when the project will be modifying these areas for the betterment of the local environment.

B. General Contractor will implement the following best practices for tree protection during construction: 1. Tree protection barriers will enclose a minimum Tree Protection Zone (TPZ) around the trees and shrubs that are to be retained on the site. The fences must enclose an area equal to or greater than the minimum required Tree Protection Zone (TPZ) determined by the diameter of the tree or according to relevant municipally defined tree protection zone, whichever is more stringent. Diameter of the tree is measured at 5 ft. above the ground. 2. Root protection will be installed to protect tree roots from compaction during construction. Root protection should consist of a combination of filter fabric, clear crushed stone (half to three quarter inch diameter) placed in a layer 6 in. deep, and steel plating or other material. 3. Sediment control barriers will be provided where some fill or excavate will be temporarily located near a TPZ.

3.06 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES AND DOCUMENTS

A. Walk-through: Contracting Officer’s Representative shall arrange for a walk-through by to verify compliance with requirements. Cooperate with Contracting Officer’s Representative and GBI-authorized Assessor and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Provide access to the Work and incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate inspections.

B. Operations and Maintenance (O&M) Manual that contains descriptions and information on the continuous tasks related to the systems and to each piece of equipment, which are necessary to operate the building that have an impact on its surrounding environment and occupants. 1. For buildings pursuing Green Globes certification, the O&M manual should include at least 12 of the items listed below. Operating plans, policies, and protocols for a variety of building aspects should allow the building engineers and managers to run the building as it was designed, continually optimizing the efficiency, and reaping the benefits of the installed systems and prescribed practices. Coordinate with Contracting Officer’s Representative and owner’s Energy & Maintenance Manager as to the final twelve selections below that shall be included in the O&M Manual.

a. Engineered Building Systems ( 8 items ): 1) Calibration Strategy for Outdoor and Exhaust Air Dampers. 2) Schedule for HVAC and filter maintenance. 3) Cooling Tower Operating Maintenance. 4) Frost Mitigation Strategy for Ventilation Heat Recovery 5) Carbon Dioxide Monitoring Protocol 6) Carbon Monoxide Monitoring Protocol 7) Energy Metering Reporting Plan 8) Water Efficiency Measurement and Verification Plan

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS - GREEN GLOBES 01811-8 20150922 09/16/16

b. General Building ( 8 items ): 1) Food and Material Waste Reduction Plan 2) Waste Minimization Plan 3) General Housekeeping 4) Integrated Pest Management Plan 5) Chemical Management and Minimization Policy 6) Low-Impact Site and Green Building Exterior Management Plan 7) Site Maintenance Contract 8) Operating Schedule for all EPA WaterSense/Smart Water Application Technology (SWAT) smart controllers (ET or soil moisture sensors) and automatic rain shut off devices

END OF SECTION 01811

Kennesaw, GA Permit Whole Foods Market

02361-1 TERMITE CONTROL 02/13/17 20150922

SECTION 02361 - TERMITE CONTROL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes soil treatment for termite control.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Soil Treatment Application Report: After application of termiticide is completed, submit report for Owner's record information, including the following:

1. Date and time of application. 2. Moisture content of soil before application. 3. Brand name and manufacturer of termiticide. 4. Quantity of undiluted termiticide used. 5. Dilutions, methods, volumes, and rates of application used. 6. Areas of application. 7. Water source for application.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Applicator Qualifications: A specialist who is licensed according to regulations of authorities having jurisdiction to apply termite control treatment and products in jurisdiction where Project is located.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Formulate and apply termiticides according to the EPA-Registered Label.

1.04 WARRANTY

A. Soil Termiticide Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by Applicator and Contractor certifying that termite control work, consisting of applied soil termiticide treatment, will prevent infestation of subterranean termites. If subterranean termite activity or damage is discovered during warranty period, re-treat soil and repair or replace damage caused by termite infestation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 TERMITE CONTROL

A. Soil Treatment: Provide an EPA-registered termiticide complying with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, in an soluble or emulsible, concentrated formulation that dilutes with water or foaming agent. Use only soil treatment solutions that are not harmful to plants. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. American Cyanamid Co., Agricultural Products Group, Specialty Products Department. b. Bayer Corporation. c. DuPont. d. FMC Corporation, Agricultural Products Group. e. ICI Americas, Inc. f. Mobay Corporation.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

TERMITE CONTROL 02361-2 20150922 02/13/17

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. General: Remove all extraneous sources of wood cellulose and other edible materials such as wood debris, tree stumps and roots, stakes, formwork, and construction waste wood from soil within and around foundations.

3.02 APPLICATION, GENERAL

A. General: Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and with manufacturer's EPA-Registered Label for products.

3.03 APPLYING SOIL TREATMENT

A. Application: Apply soil treatment at the label volume and rate for the maximum termiticide concentration allowed for each specific use according to the product’s EPA-registered label. 1. Mix soil treatment termiticide solution to a uniform consistency. 2. Provide quantity required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum specified concentration of termiticide, according to manufacturer's EPA-Registered Label, to the following so that a continuous horizontal and vertical termiticidal barrier or treated zone is established around and under building construction. Distribute treatment evenly. 3. Slabs-on-Grade: Under ground-supported slab construction, including footings, building slabs, and attached slabs as an overall treatment. Treat soil materials before concrete footings and slabs are placed. 4. Foundations: Adjacent soil including soil along the entire inside perimeter of foundation walls, around plumbing pipes and electric conduit penetrating the slab, and around interior column footers and piers; also along the entire outside perimeter, from grade to bottom of footing. Avoid soil washout around footings. 5. Masonry: Treat voids. 6. Penetrations: At expansion joints, control joints, and areas where slabs will be penetrated.

B. Avoid disturbance of treated soil after application. Keep off treated areas until completely dry.

C. Protect termiticide solution, dispersed in treated soils and fills, from being diluted until ground-supported slabs are installed. Use waterproof barrier according to EPA-Registered Label instructions.

D. Post warning signs in areas of application.

E. Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation, grading, landscaping, or other construction activities following application.

END OF SECTION 02361

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

03300-1 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 02/13/17 20150922

SECTION 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. The extent of the work specified herein is shown on the drawings.

B. Include all labor, materials, and appliances, and perform all operations in connection with the installation of Concrete Work, and all related work incidental to the completion thereof, as shown on the drawings, complete, in strict accordance with the drawings, and as specified herein. Concrete work includes: 1. Concrete, reinforcing and formwork for grade beams, foundations, pilasters, slabs and sidewalks around building. 2. Installation of anchor bolts for steel columns, posts, and other anchored work, as may be required. 3. Grouting of column bases. 4. All anchor slots, sleeves, and other inserts, as required. 5. Shop drawings. 6. All other items required to make the work of this Section complete, including staking for layout of footings, building layout, excavation, backfilling, etc. 7. Testing-related services.

1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Unless otherwise shown or specified, the work shall conform to the following standards of the American Concrete Institute, Latest Edition of each publication: 1. ACI 117 Specification for Standard Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials. 2. ACI 211.1 Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight and Mass Concrete. 3. ACI 212.3R Chemical Admixtures in Concrete. 4. ACI 214R Evaluation of Strength Test Results of Concrete. 5. ACI 302.1R Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction. 6. ACI 304R Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete. 7. ACI 304.2R Placing Concrete by Pumping Methods. 8. ACI 305R Hot Weather Concreting. 9. ACI 306R Cold Weather Concreting. 10. ACI 306.1 Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting. 11. ACI 308R Standard Practice for Curing Concrete. 12. ACI 309R Guide for Consolidation of Concrete. 13. ACI 315R Manual of Engineering and Placing Drawing for Reinforced Concrete. 14. ACI 315 Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement. 15. ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete. 16. ACI 347 Guide to Formwork for Concrete.

B. Unless otherwise shown or specified, the work shall conform to the following standards of the Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, Latest Edition: 1. Manual of Standard Practice. 2. Placing Reinforcing Bars.

1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE

A. Concrete Finishes – See Section 03345

B. Joint Sealer – See Section 07920

C. Ceramic Tile - Section 09310

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-2 20150922 02/13/17

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Reinforcing steel shop drawings shall be provided, showing all details of construction, bending, and placing, completely dimensioned.

B. Sustainable Submittals: 1. Specify materials that contain in aggregate, a minimum weighted average of 20% postconsumer recycled content material.

C. List manufacturers and brand names for admixtures, curing compounds, control joints, and materials other than cement, aggregates and reinforcing. Include manufacturer's standard installation instructions and specifications.

D. All mix designs shall be proportioned in accordance with ACI 318-95/ 318R, Section 5.3, and submitted to the Architect of Record and Owner's independent testing lab for review a minimum of one (1) week prior to pouring, before any concrete is incorporated into the job. Mix designs shall be submitted to the Architect of Record for review on the Mix Design Submittal form appended to this section. Mix designs shall be specifically applicable to this project only. Do not submit design mixes not applicable to this project. Submittals shall state which items are to be used for each design mix, and at which areas. The laboratory shall verify that the proposed mix design conforms to ACI requirements regarding atmospheric conditions at the job site.

E. Review of submittals will cover general design only. In no case shall this review relieve the contractor of the responsibility for strength of concrete, general or detailed dimensions, quality or quantity of materials, or any other conditions, functions, performance, or guarantees required.

F. Portland Cement: Upon request, provide supplier's documentation of environmental policies to the Architect of Record.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. General: 1. The Owner will employ and pay for the services of an independent testing agency to provide testing and inspection of concrete work. The testing agency shall be licensed in the state where the structure is located and shall meet the requirements of "Recommended Practices for Inspection and Testing Agencies for Concrete, Steel, and Bituminous Materials as Used in Construction" (ASTM E329). All testing and inspection shall be performed under the supervision of an engineer registered in the state in which the project is located. 2. Concrete materials and operations shall be tested and inspected as the work progresses. Failure to detect any defective work or material shall not in any way prevent later rejection when such defect is discovered, nor shall it obligate the Owner's Representative to make final acceptance. 3. The testing agency shall report to the Architect of Record, the Owner, and the Contractor the results of all tests and inspections immediately after they have been performed. All test and inspection reports shall include the exact location in the work represented by the test. 4. The testing agency and its representatives are not authorized to revoke, alter, relax, enlarge upon, or waive any requirement of the contract documents, approve or accept any portion of the work, perform any duties of the Contractor, or be a party to the scheduling of work. 5. The contractor shall notify the testing agency and the Owner's Representative a minimum of 36 hours in advance of all concrete work, and all reasonable facilities shall be made available for technicians. 6. Records of inspection shall be kept available to the building official during progress of work and for two years after completion of the project. Records shall be preserved by the independent testing agency. 7. The testing agency shall notify the Owner, Architect of Record, and Contractor of any discrepancies found in this work. 8. Testing Agency shall distribute copies of all reports via email as follows: a. Two (2) copies to the Architect of Record. b. One (1) copy to the Structural Engineer of Record. c. Two (2) copies to the Contractor. d. One (1) copy to the Owner.

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

03300-3 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 02/13/17 20150922

e. One (1) copy to Concrete Supplier.

B. The testing agency shall conduct strength tests of the concrete during construction in accordance with the following procedures: 1. Secure composite samples in accordance with "Method of Sampling Fresh Concrete" (ASTM C172). Each sample shall be obtained from a different batch of concrete on a random basis, avoiding any selection of the test batch other than by a number selected at random before commencement of concrete placement. 2. Mold and cure three specimens from each sample in accordance with "Method of Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field" (ASTM C31). Any deviations from the requirements of this Standard shall be recorded in the test report. 3. Test specimens in accordance with "Method of Test for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens" (ASTM C39). Two specimens shall be tested at 28 days and one shall be tested at 7 days. The acceptance test results shall be the average of the strengths of the two specimens tested at 28 days. If one specimen in a test manifests evidence of improper sampling, molding, or testing, it shall be discarded and the strength of the remaining cylinder shall be considered the test result. Should both specimens in a test show any of the above defects, the entire test shall be discarded. 4. Make at least one strength test (3 cylinders) for each 100 cu. yd., or fraction thereof, for each mix design of concrete placed in any 1 day. 5. Determine slump of the concrete sample for each strength test, and whenever consistency of concrete appears to vary, using "Method of Test for Slump of Portland Cement Concrete" (ASTM C143). 6. Determine air content of normal weight concrete sample for each strength test in accordance with either "Method of Test for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method" (ASTM C231), "Method of Test for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method" (ASTM C173), or "Method of Test for Unit Weight, Yield, and Air Content (Gravimetric) of Concrete" (ASTM C138). 7. Determine temperature of concrete sample for each strength test. 8. Testing lab report should also include the laboratory number, date, plant, truck number, time batched, time sampled, time placed, mix design number, required strength, field modification to design, concrete admixtures, initial slump, and final slump if super plasticizer is used.

C. Testing: All floor flatness and elevation measurements shall be made at the owner's expense on each newly installed slab placement within 16 hours after completion of the final troweling operation. Ff tests shall be conducted by a factory certified technician in accordance with ASTM E 1155 (latest revision) using a fully downloading "F-meter" as manufactured by Allen Face & Company of Wilmington, NC. Results of all floor tolerance tests and elevation measurements, including formal notice of acceptance or rejection of the work, shall be provided to the contractor within 8 hours after testing. 1. Note: Weekends and holidays shall be ignored when computing specified testing and reporting deadlines. 2. Testing is not required for slabs at areas with floor drains (behind service cases, coolers, freezers, etc.).

D. Concrete and related materials shall meet Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Standards and International Organization for Standardization (ISO) 14025, Environmental Product Declarations Type III Labels certification.

E. Additional Air Content Tests for Troweled Floors: Also determine concrete air content and unit weight of first concrete delivery. If air content over 3.0% or unit weight is less than 2.0 pcy than theoretical weight, immediately notify Owner's Rep, General Contractor, Sub-contractor and concrete supplier.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C33.

B. Lightweight Aggregate: ASTM C330.

C. Fine aggregate: ASTM C33.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-4 20150922 02/13/17

D. Portland cement: ASTM C150, Type I or II

E. Fly Ash: ASTM C618 Type F or C, to supplant 12% of Portland cement by weight.

F. Water: Clear and free from injurious amounts of oil, acid, alkali, organic, or other deleterious matter. 1. Use recycled water, when available, in accordance with ASTM C94.

G. Admixtures: 1. Water reducing, retarding, and accelerating admixtures: ASTM C494, may be used at the contractor's option. 2. Air-entraining admixtures: ASTM C260, for all air- entrained concrete. 3. Maximum chloride ion due to admixtures shall not exceed 0.05% by weight. 4. The addition of calcium chloride is not permitted. 5. All admixtures shall be used in conformance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 6. Admixture Compatibility: When air-entraining admixtures, water-reducing admixtures, high range water- reducing admixtures, and non-corrosive accelerating admixtures are used in any combination, all products shall be from the same manufacturer, or the Ready-Mix concrete producer shall certify that they are compatible.

2.02 REINFORCEMENT MATERIALS

A. Reinforcing Steel Bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60, unless noted otherwise.

B. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A185.

C. Steel Wire: ASTM A82.

D. Metal Accessories: Include all spacers, ties, chairs, and other devices required to properly support and fasten reinforcing steel in place in accordance with the requirements of the "ACI Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforcing Concrete Structures."

2.03 FORM MATERIALS

A. Removable forms shall be wood, metal or other approved material.

B. Forms for unexposed concrete surfaces may be No. 2 common boards of dimension lumber of uniform thickness.

C. Earth cuts may be used for forms for footings if soil conditions permit.

D. Reusable forms shall be used to the greatest extent possible.

2.04 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Waterstops: Rubber or PVC waterstops.

B. Install Premolded Filler: Non-bituminous fiber type as per ASTM D1751.

C. Form Ties: Black iron snap ties with a minimum 1 inch breakback.

D. Form Releasing Agent: Non-staining.

E. Non-Shrink Grout: 1. Standard: Conforming to ASTM C1107 "Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Non-Shrink)." 2. Testing: Furnish test data from an independent laboratory indicating that the standard non-shrink grout,

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

03300-5 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 02/13/17 20150922

when placed at a fluid consistency, shall achieve 95% bearing under a 4" x 4" base plate, and the high flow grout, when placed at a fluid consistency, shall achieve 95% bearing under a 18" x 36" base plate. 3. Manufacturers: a. Euclid Chemical Co.: "Euco NS," "Euco Hi-Flow Grout." b. Master Builders: "Embeco 885" (non-catalyzed metallic), Masterflow 928, or Set Grout. c. Sika Corp: Sika grout 212. d. Burke: Non-ferrous, non-shrink grout.

F. Moisture/ Vapor Retarder: 1. Provide a Vapor Retarder having no less than 0.01 perms when tested in accordance with ASTM E-96; meeting or exceeding the requirements of ASTM E-1745, Class A; and wherein the vapor retarder component is no less than 15 mils thick in accordance with ACI 302.1R-04. 2. Vapor Retarder shall be installed between the concrete slab and the granular subbase to reduce vapor transmission through the slab. The vapor retarder shall be trimmed and sealed around columns and plumbing, refrigeration and electrical penetrations to keep the Retarder continuous. Use manufacturer's seam tape and Vapor Proofing Mastic products to properly connect sheet sections. 3. Provide 15 mil (minimum), reinforced membrane. Acceptable products and manufacturers are listed below. a. Stego Industries, LLC: “Stego Wrap 15 mil Class A” b. Reef Industries: “Griffolyn 15 mil Green” c. Raven Industries: “Vapor Block 15 mil” d. W.R. Meadows, Inc.: “Perminator 15 mil”

G. Waterstops: Waterstops shall be extruded polyvinyl chloride as manufactured by W. R. Meadows, Inc., W. R. Grace & Company, Construction Products Division, Williams Products, Inc., or approved equal. Size shall be 4" wide by 3/16" thick of the center bulb multi-rib type.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 CONCRETE PROPORTIONS

A. The specified compressive strength of the concrete, f'c, for each portion of the structure shall be as designated on the drawings. Strength requirements shall be based on 28-day compressive strength.

B. Concrete exposed to weather shall be air-entrained. Air content shall be between 4.5 and 7.5 percent. Additional Air entrainment for pumping raised concrete slabs is prohibited.

C. Slump of concrete shall not exceed 4" for slabs and 5” for all other concrete unless a high range water-reducing admixture is used. The slump of concrete prior to addition of a high range water-reducing admixture shall not exceed 4". The slump of concrete containing a high range water-reducing admixture shall not exceed 8".

D. The maximum size of coarse aggregate shall not be more than one-fifth of the narrowest dimension between sides of forms, more than one-third of the depth of slabs, or more than three-fourths of the minimum clear spacing between reinforcing bars.

E. Aggregates: 1. Coarse and Fine aggregate for the slab shall conform to the following combined gradation requirements: Sieve Size % Retained (on specified sieve) 1 1/2" 2 - 4 1" 8 - 18 3/4" 8 - 18 1/2" 8 - 18 3/8" 8 - 18 #4 8 - 18 #8 8 - 18 #16 8 - 18

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-6 20150922 02/13/17

#30 8 - 15 #50 2 - 15 2. Course Aggregates shall be size No. 57 or larger for all foundations and concrete not otherwise noted.

F. The minimum cement content of all concrete shall conform to the following: 1. For foundations and concrete not specified otherwise, specified minimum cement content (pounds per cubic yard): Compressive Strength Non-Air-Entrained Air-Entrained (psi) Concrete Concrete 3000 470 517 FOR ALL CONCRETE UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE

G. Concrete shall be proportioned by either the trial batch method or the field experience method. 1. Where the trial batch method is used, make three test cylinders for each trial batch. Break one cylinder at 7 days and two at 28 days to verify strength requirements. Adjust proportions to produce a design mix at least 1200 psi greater than the specified strength, f'c. Provide data and plotted points of curve as per paragraph 5.3.3 of ACI-318. 2. Where the field experience method is used, the required average compressive strength shall be determined in accordance with paragraph 5.3.2 of ACI 318. Documentation that proposed concrete proportions will produce an average compressive strength equal to or greater than the required average compressive strength shall consist of a field strength test record representing materials and proportions to be used for this project. A field strength test record shall consist of at least 10 consecutive tests encompassing a period of time of not less than 45 days, and made within the past 18 months.

H. Water/Cement Ratio: All concrete shall have a maximum water/cement ratio of 0.45.

3.02 FORMWORK

A. Forms shall be used wherever necessary to confine the concrete and shape it to the required dimensions. Forms shall have sufficient strength to withstand the pressure resulting from placement and vibration of the concrete, and shall have sufficient rigidity to maintain specified tolerances.

B. The design and engineering of the formwork, as well as its construction, shall be the responsibility of the contractor.

C. Forms shall be sufficiently tight to prevent loss of mortar from the concrete.

D. All exposed concrete corners shall have a 3/4" x 3/4" chamfer, except as otherwise noted.

E. Form ties shall be broken off 1" or more back from concrete surfaces. No wire or strap ties will be permitted. Ties shall be of sizes and weights required for pressures developed and installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

F. Forms for exposed surfaces shall be coated with non-staining releasing agent applied before the reinforcing steel is placed.

G. Forms shall not be disturbed until the concrete has adequately hardened. Care shall be taken to avoid spalling the concrete surfaces.

H. All surfaces of forms and embedded materials shall be cleaned of any accumulated mortar or grout from previous concreting, and of all other foreign material, before concrete is placed in them.

3.03 REINFORCEMENT

A. Fabrication: 1. Reinforcing steel shall be accurately fabricated to the dimensions shown.

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

03300-7 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 02/13/17 20150922

a. Bends shall conform to bend dimensions defined as standard in accordance with details in the ACI Detailing Manual 1988 (SP-66) and/or CRSI Manual of Standard Practice, unless otherwise shown. b. Bars shall be bent cold, and shall not be bent or straightened in a manner that will injure the material. c. Bars shall be fabricated within the tolerances shown in the ACI Detailing Manual 1988 (SP-66) and/or CRSI Manual of Standard Practice. 2. Welding as an aid to fabrication and/or installation will not be permitted, except as specifically shown on the drawings or as authorized by the Owner's Project Manager.

B. Placing: 1. Position reinforcement to 1/4" + in accordance with placement plans. 2. Unless noted otherwise, reinforcing shall be placed so that the minimum concrete cover shown on the drawings is provided. 3. It shall be the contractor's responsibility to ensure that the intended reinforcement location is maintained during concrete placement. Tie bars at intersections with soft steel wire. 4. Lap splices of reinforcing shall be as called for on the drawings. 5. Do no splicing at points of maximum stress. Lap all bars at all corners, and at abrupt changes in direction of walls. Provide steel dowels between grade beams and walls, structural slabs, columns, and elsewhere, as indicated on drawings and/or as conditions require. 6. Do not drive nails into wood forms to support reinforcement. 7. Provide two (2) No. 5 bars around all openings in slabs and concrete walls, and at all re-entrant corners in floor slabs. 8. Reinforcing bars partially embedded in concrete shall not be field bent.

C. Cleaning and Protection: 1. Protect reinforcement from excessive rusting or mechanical injury. Store on skids or otherwise maintain at least 6 inches above ground. 2. After bars are tied in place, take whatever precautions are necessary to protect bars from damage by construction equipment or careless workmen. Pay particular attention to bars projecting out of previously placed concrete. Damaged steel shall be replaced at no cost to Owner.

3.04 PRODUCTION OF CONCRETE

A. Ready-mixed concrete shall be batched, mixed and transported in accordance with ASTM C94. The ready-mixed concrete producer shall furnish duplicate delivery tickets, one for the Contractor and one given to the Independent Testing Agency, for each batch of concrete. The information provided on the delivery ticket shall include the quantities of all material batched, including the amount of free water in the aggregate. The quantity of water that can be added at the site without exceeding the maximum water cement ratio specified shall be noted on the delivery ticket.

B. For job mixed concrete, mixing shall be done in a batch mixer of approved type. The mixer shall be rotated at a speed recommended by the manufacturer, and mixing shall be continued for 1-1/2 minutes after all materials are in the drum. For batches larger than 1 cubic yard, mixing time shall be increased 15 seconds for each additional cubic yard or fraction thereof. All concrete shall be mixed until there is a uniform distribution of the materials, and shall be discharged completely before the mixer is recharged.

C. The independent testing agency shall have access at all times to the batching and mixing plant for sampling of materials and inspection of all work performed for this job.

D. In cold weather, the temperature of the concrete when delivered at the site of the work shall be at least 50° F, except that concrete for troweled floors shall be at least 60 o F and not more than 20 o F more than the temperature of the base or form.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-8 20150922 02/13/17

E. In hot weather the ingredients shall be cooled before mixing, or flake ice or well-crushed ice of a size that will melt completely during mixing may be substituted for all or part of the mixing water if low slump, flash set, or cold joints are encountered due to high temperature. When air temperature is between 80° F and 90° F, reduce maximum mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes. When air temperature exceeds 90° F, reduce maximum mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

3.05 PLACING

A. Preparation for Placing Concrete: 1. All bearing material shall be inspected by the geotechnical engineer prior to placement of concrete. The geotechnical engineer shall be the sole judge of the suitability of the bearing material. 2. Before concrete is placed, all debris and ice shall be removed from the spaces to be occupied by the concrete. Remove surplus form releasing agent from the contact face of forms. Forms and the reinforcement shall be thoroughly cleaned of ice or other coatings. 3. Water shall be removed from place of deposit before concrete is placed. Concrete shall not be placed on frozen ground. 4. Notify the Independent Testing Agency, Owner's Representative and all trades concerned sufficiently in advance of the scheduled time for concrete placement so as to permit installation of all required work by other trades. 5. Before placing concrete, all required embedded items, including dovetail anchor slots, anchors, inserts, curb angles, metal frames, fixtures, sleeves, drains, stair nosings, and accessory devices for Mechanical and Electrical installations, shall be properly located, accurately positioned and built into the construction, and maintained securely in place. 6. Build into construction all items furnished by the Owner and other trades. Provide all offsets, pockets, slabs, chases, and recesses as job conditions require. Thicken slabs as required to maintain the intended slab thickness at embedded items. 7. Set anchor bolts furnished under the Structural Steel Section of these specifications. 8. Place and properly support reinforcing steel.

B. Conveying: 1. Concrete shall be conveyed from the mixer to the place of final deposit by methods such as to prevent separation or loss of material. 2. Equipment for chuting, pumping and pneumatically conveying concrete shall be of such size and design as to insure a practically continuous flow of concrete at the delivery, without separation of material. 3. Provide runways or other means for wheeled equipment to convey concrete to point of deposit. Construct runways so that supports will not bear upon reinforcement or fresh concrete.

C. Depositing: 1. Concrete shall be deposited as nearly as practicable in its final position to avoid segregation due to rehandling or flowing. No concrete shall have a free fall of over three feet from truck, mixer, or buggies. The concreting shall be carried on at such a rate that the concrete is at all times plastic, and flows readily into the spaces between the bars. No concrete that has partially hardened or been contaminated by foreign materials shall be deposited in the work, nor shall retempered concrete be used. 2. When concreting is started, it shall be carried on as a continuous operation until the placing of the section is completed. 3. All concrete shall be thoroughly consolidated by mechanical vibrators during the placing operation, and shall be thoroughly worked around the reinforcement and embedded fixtures, and into the corners of the forms. Mechanical vibrators shall be applied directly to the concrete and used only under experienced supervision. Vibrators shall not be secured to forms or reinforcement. Compaction shall be carried on continuously with the placing of concrete. Keep a minimum of two vibrators on the job during concreting operations. 4. Protect adjacent surfaces from concrete drippings, spillage, and splashes. Hardened or partially hardened splashes, or accumulations of concrete on forms or reinforcement, shall be removed before the work proceeds. Clean all damaged surfaces immediately. 5. All conveyances shall be thoroughly cleaned at frequent intervals during the placing of the concrete. Before beginning a new run of concrete all hardened concrete and foreign materials shall be removed

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

03300-9 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 02/13/17 20150922

from the surfaces. 6. The superintendent or foreman in charge of concrete work shall mark on the drawings the time and date of the placing of the concrete in the batches from which concrete test cylinders are made shall also be recorded on these drawings. Such drawings shall be kept on file at the job until its completion, and shall be subject to the inspection of the Owner's Representative at all times.

3.06 SLABS

A. Preparation of subgrade for slabs on grade: 1. The subgrade shall be well drained and of adequate and uniform load bearing nature. 2. The subgrade shall be free of frost before concrete placing begins.

B. Edge forms and intermediate screed strips shall be set accurately to produce the designated elevations and contours of the finished surface, and shall be sufficiently strong to support vibrating screeds or roller pipe screeds. The concrete surface shall be aligned to the contours of screed strips by the use of strike-off templates or acceptable compacting type screeds.

C. Placement: 1. Mixing and placing shall be carefully coordinated with finishing. Concrete shall not be placed on the subgrade or forms more rapidly than it can be spread, straightedged, and darbied or bull floated. These operations must be performed before bleeding water has an opportunity to collect on the surface. 2. To obtain good surfaces and avoid cold joints, the size of finishing crews shall be planned with due regard for the effects of concrete temperature and atmospheric conditions on the rate of hardening of the concrete. 3. Concrete in slabs shall be thoroughly consolidated. Internal vibration shall be used along the bulkheads of slabs on grade. Consolidation of slabs shall be obtained with vibrating screeds, roller pipe screeds, internal vibrators, or other approved means.

3.07 CURING AND PROTECTION

A. Moisture loss from surfaces placed against wooden forms or metal forms exposed to heating by the sun shall be minimized by keeping the forms wet until they can be safely removed. After form removal, apply curing compound in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer. For any surface against which additional concrete or other material is to be bonded, unless it is proven that the curing compound will not prevent bond, positive measures shall be taken to remove it completely from areas to receive bonded applications.

B. Temperature, Wind, and Humidity: 1. Cold weather: When the mean daily outdoor temperature is less than 40° F, the temperature of the concrete shall be maintained at 50° F, and heating, covering, insulating, or housing the concrete work shall be made in advance of placement, and shall be adequate to maintain the required temperature without injury due to concentration of heat. Combustion heaters shall not be used during the first 24 hours unless precautions are taken to prevent exposure of the concrete to exhaust gases containing carbon dioxide. 2. Hot weather: When necessary, provision for wind-breaks, shading, fog spraying, sprinkling, ponding, or wet covering with a light colored material shall be made in advance of placement, and such protective measures shall be taken as quickly as the concrete hardening and finishing operations will allow. 3. Rate of temperature change: Changes in temperature of the air immediately adjacent to the concrete during and immediately following the curing period shall be kept as uniform as possible, and shall not exceed 5° F in any one hour, or 50° F in any 24-hour period.

C. Protection from mechanical injury: During the curing period, the concrete shall be protected from damaging mechanical disturbances, such as load stresses, heavy shock, and excessive vibration. All finished concrete surfaces shall be protected from damage by construction equipment, materials, or methods, by application of curing procedures, and by rain or running water. Self-supporting structures shall not be loaded in such a way as to overstress the concrete.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-10 20150922 02/13/17

3.08 PROTECTION OF WORK

A. Wheeled construction equipment used on any slab shall have tires that will not leave skid marks.

B. Wheeled equipment shall be diapered to prevent oil or other fluid leaks from staining the slab. Additionally, drop cloths shall be placed below any equipment that is parked on the slab on ground.

3.09 EVALUATION AND ACCEPTANCE OF CONCRETE

A. Test results for standard molded and standard cured test cylinders shall be evaluated separately for each specified concrete mix design. Such evaluation shall be valid only if tests have been conducted in accordance with the specifications.

B. For evaluation, each specified mix design shall be represented by at least five tests.

C. The strength level of the concrete will be considered satisfactory as long as the averages of all sets of three consecutive strength test results equal or exceed the specified strength, f'c, and no individual strength test result falls below the specified strength, f'c, by more than 500 psi. Should cylinder tests fail to meet these requirements, or if deficient construction is suspected by Owner's Representative, core tests may be required, and the cost of such tests shall be paid by the contractor.

D. Testing by impact hammer, sonoscope, or other non-destructive device may be used to determine relative strengths at various locations in the structure as an aid for selecting areas to be cored. Such tests shall not be used as a basis for acceptance or rejection.

E. Where core tests are required, cores of at least 2 inches in diameter shall be obtained and tested in accordance with "Methods of Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete" (ASTM C42). The cores shall be air dried (temperature 60º to 80 ºF, relative humidity less than 60 per cent) for 7 days before test, and shall be tested dry.

F. At least three representative cores shall be taken from each member or area of concrete in place that is considered potentially deficient. The location of cores shall be determined by the Owner's Project Manager so as to least impair the strength of the structure. If, before testing, one or more of the cores shows evidence of having been damaged subsequent to or during removal from the structure, it shall be replaced.

G. Concrete in the area represented by a core test will be considered adequate if the average strength of the cores is equal to at least 85 percent of, and if no single core is less than 75 percent of the specified strength, f'c.

H. Core holes shall be filled with low slump concrete or mortar.

3.10 ACCEPTANCE OF STRUCTURE

A. Completed concrete work meeting all applicable requirements will be accepted without qualification.

B. Completed concrete work that fails to meet one or more requirements, but that has been repaired to bring it into compliance, will be accepted without qualification.

C. Completed concrete work that fails to meet one or more requirements, and that cannot be brought into compliance, may be accepted or rejected by the Owner's Representative. In this event, modifications may be required to assure that remaining work complies with the requirements.

D. The cost of any additional tests or analysis, including additional architectural and engineering services, performed to prove the adequacy of the concrete work, shall be solely borne by the Contractor.

END OF SECTION

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

Concrete Floor Mix Design SUBMITTAL FORM

Project: WHOLE FOODS MARKET City: KENNESAW, GA General Contractor: Concrete Contractor: Compressive Strength @ 28 days: Flexural Strength @ 28 days: Use (describe): Design Mix Information

Please check one Based on Standard Deviation Analysis Trial Mix Test Data

Design Characteristics: Density pcf Strength psi (28 day) Air % specified

If trial mixes are used the Mix Design is proportioned to achieve f'cr = f'c + 1200 psi (1400 psi for strength higher than 5000 psi at 28 days)

MATERIALS Type/ Specific Absolute Source Gravity Weight/lb. Vol. cu.ft. Cement Fine Aggregate Fine Aggregate

Coarse Aggregate * 12.0 cu.ft. target Coarse Aggregate Coarse Aggregate Water Air (Entrapped) Fly Ash Other TOTAL 27.0 cu. ft. Water/Cement Ratio (lbs. water/lbs. cement) = NOTE : Previous experience indicates a water content of 275 lbs./cy. minimum for 2" - 3" slump for well graded combined aggregates with a top size of 1". ADMIXTURES Dosage Manufacturer oz/cwt Water Reducer High Range Water Reducer Non-Corrosive Accelerator Design Air and Tolerance Other

Slump before HRWR inches Slump after HRWR inches

CONCRETE FLOOR MIX DESIGN FORM Page 1 of 2 Standard Deviation Analysis (from experience records) of ______project. Test reports are from ______to ______. # of Test Cylinders Evaluated: Standard Deviation:

f'cr-f'c + 1.34s or f'cr = f'c + 2.33s - 500 (Refer to ACI 318 for increased deviation factor when less than 30 tests are available)

LABORATORY TEST DATA

Compressive Strength Age (days) Mix # 1 Mix #2 Mix #3 7 psi psi psi 7 psi psi psi 28 psi psi psi 28 average psi psi psi

REQUIRED ATTACHMENTS: Please Check Combined Aggregate Gradation Report Standard Deviation Analysis Summary or Trial Mixture Test Data Admixture Compatibility certification letter Letter and test data certifying that aggregates are not reactive when used with the proposed materials Letter certifying that aggregates will not cause pop-outs of other surface disruptions, for interior applications

Note : See Specification Section 03300 for combined gradation requirements

Concrete Producer:

Name:

Address:

Phone #:

Main Plant Location:

Miles from Project:

Secondary Plant Location:

Miles from Project:

Date:

CONCRETE FLOOR MIX DESIGN FORM Page 2 of 2 03345-1 CONCRETE FINISHES 02/13/17 20150922

SECTION 03345 - CONCRETE FINISHES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. The work under this heading shall include all labor, materials, appliances, and services necessary to complete concrete work and related work required by the drawings and/or as described under this heading.

1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Cast-in-Place Concrete, Section 03300.

B. Ceramic Tile, Section 09310.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Tolerances: 1. Comply with ACI 117/117R-06, published in the ACI unless noted otherwise.

2. Flatness and levelness: a. All slabs, except those with sloped floors and drains (i.e., at coolers and freezers and behind service cases) shall conform to the following tolerances, as measured in accordance with ASTM E1155-87.

Area Overall Local Ff Fl Ff Fl Interior slab on grade 40 30 27 20

b. All areas of slab on ground measuring below either or both the specified minimum local F- numbers shall be removed and replaced. If, after replacement, any slabs still fail to meet or exceed either of the specified overall F-numbers, the Contractor shall rebate to the Owner an amount equal to $1.00 times the total balance of square feet measuring below either of the specified overall F-numbers, in lieu of additional replacement, at the discretion of the Whole Foods Market Project Manager. c. Recessed slab at PT-1 flooring: Maximum allowable variation is 1/8” in 10 feet from the required plane, with no more than 1/16” variation in 24” when measured from the high points in the surface.

B. All liquid chemical products furnished in this section shall be VOC compliant for building location. 1. VOC Content: Curing and sealing compounds shall have a VOC content of 200 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

C. All liquid chemical sealant products furnished in this section shall be VOC compliant for building location. 1. VOC Content: Chemical sealant products shall have a VOC content of 100 g/L or less when calculated in accordance with South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule 1113.

D. A pre-construction placement conference shall be coordinated by the contractor to discuss the specifics of concrete placement for elevated floor slabs. The contractor shall confirm that he/she will meet the floor flatness and levelness requirements and maintain the slab thickness to meet the owner's satisfaction.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

CONCRETE FINISHES 03345-2 20150922 02/13/17

1. Discuss construction procedures (and methods and tools utilized in the procedures) for placing and finishing floor: a. Erection tolerances and pre-placement quality assurance (documenting steel framing elevations) b. Confirmation of concrete contractors with experience for placing and finishing elevated slabs of the same parameters as that of this project c. Spreading and consolidating concrete d. Strikeoff/ screeding (do not use wet screeds) e. Floating (bull floating, straightening, power floating, straightening) f. Troweling g. Saw cutting contraction joints h. Curing procedures (materials and length of curing time) i. Filling construction and contraction joints j. Testing and inspection requirements k. Slab elevation measurements (exact method and time of measurement to determine compliance), acceptance criteria and remedial measures if required. l. Provide shop drawing for review and approval with layout of construction and contraction joints prior to placement of elevated slab concrete and reinforcing. m. Discuss tolerances, review construction options, choose solutions before problems occur. Discuss the need to measure elevations and make adjustments to provide a flat and level floor.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit in accordance with Section 01300.

B. Submit shop drawings indicating locations of contraction and construction joints in slab on grade.

1.05 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Maintain temperature of concrete above 50° F for seven days after placing. Protect work against frost and rapid drying.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, fine aggregate, natural sand.

B. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type 1, or as otherwise noted on the Structural Drawings.

C. Water: Potable and free of chemicals affecting set of cement.

D. Bonding Compound: 1. Type: Polyvinyl acetate, rewettable. Use only in areas not subject to moisture. 2. Acceptable Compounds: a. Euclid Chemical Company: "Euco Weld." b. Larsen Company: "Weldcrete." c. Sika Chemical Corp.: "Sikadur 32 Hi-Mod." d. Sonneborn: "Sonocrete." e. W. R. Grace & Company: "Daraweld-C."

E. Epoxy Adhesive:

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

03345-3 CONCRETE FINISHES 02/13/17 20150922

1. Type: Two (2) component, 100% solids, 100% reactive compound, suitable for use on dry or damp surfaces. 2. Acceptable Adhesives: a. Euclid Chemical Company: "Euco Epoxy" #452, or #620. b. Sika Chemical Corp.: "Sikadur 32 Hi-Mod."

F. Polymer Patching Mortar: 1. Type: Free-flowing, pumpable cementitious coating. 2. Acceptable Mortar (horizontal): a. Euclid Chemical Company: "Euco Thin Coat." b. Sika Chemical Corp.: "Sikatop 121 Plus or 122 Plus." 3. Acceptable Mortars (vertical): a. Euclid Chemical Company: "Verticoat." b. Sika Chemical Corp.: "Sikatop 123 Plus."

G. Underlayment Compound: 1. Type: Free-flowing, self-leveling, pumpable cementitious base compound. 2. Acceptable Compounds: a. Euclid Chemical Company: "Flo-Top." b. Ardex Inc.: "K-15."

H. Bonding Admixture: 1. Type: Latex, non-rewettable type. 2. Acceptable Admixtures: a. Euclid Chemical Co.: "SBR Latex" or "Flex-con." b. W.R. Grace: "Daraweld C." c. Sonneborn: "Sonnecrete."

I. Expansion Joint material: See Section 03300.

J. Contraction (control) Joints for Slabs on Grade and Floor Slab: 1. Saw Cuts: Husqvarna Construction Products.: SOFF CUT blades, diameter as required for specified concrete depth. 2. Saw-cutting of slabs on grade should be performed before concrete starts to cool, as soon as the concrete surface is firm enough not to be torn or damaged by the blade, and before random drying- shrinkage cracks can form. For “Soff-Cut” early entry saw, the waiting period will typically vary from 1 hour in hot weather to 4 hours in cold weather after completing the finishing of the slab in that joint location.

K. Liquid Membrane Curing compound: 1. Type: ASTM C-309 2. "Cure-W" as manufactured by L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc., Omaha, NE, phone: (800) 362- 3331. 3. Use of Liquid Membrane Curing Compounds on floor surfaces requires an additional procedure to remove the film prior to installation of Chemical Hardener. Other floor finishes may required additional surface preparation to ensure proper adhesion to the concrete substrate. Consult finished floor schedule for floor finish compatibility that may restrict or prohibit the use of this product.

L. Hardening Compound: Hardening compound where noted on drawings for interior slabs shall be the following applied at a minimum rate of 200 square feet per gallon, applied five (5) days minimum after concreting or cement finishing: 1. Manufacturers: a. “Ashford Formula” as manufactured by Curecrete Chemical Company, Springville, UT. Contact Christine Tanner at (800) 998-5664. FAX: (801) 491-4804. 2. Warranty: Manufacturer shall provide twenty (20) year warranty that concrete surface shall be dense, hard and dust-proof. (See Section 01600 – “Product Requirements” for additional warranty

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

CONCRETE FINISHES 03345-4 20150922 02/13/17

information.)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 SURFACE CONDITION

A. Surface to receive bonding agent shall be structurally sound and clean of material that reduces bond.

3.02 PATCHING CONCRETE

A. Concrete will automatically be considered by the Architect of Record to be not in conformance with the intent of the Drawings and Specifications for the following reasons: 1. Concrete is not formed as shown on the Drawings, 2. Concrete is not in true alignment or level, 3. Concrete exhibits a defective surface by texture, color or, otherwise, 4. Concrete has defects that reduce the structural integrity of a member and/or members.

B. Areas requiring patching shall not exceed two sq. ft. per 1000 sq. ft. of surface area, and shall be widely dispersed. Areas showing excessive defects, as determined by Architect of Record, shall be removed and replaced.

C. Nonconforming concrete will be rejected by the Architect of Record, and shall be immediately removed and replaced with concrete that conforms to Contract requirements by Contractor, without a claim by the Contractor for additional cost.

D. Should the Architect of Record grant permission for the Contractor to attempt restoration of a defective area by patching, such permission shall not be considered a waiver of the right of the Architect of Record to require complete removal of the defective area if, in the opinion of the Architect of Record, the patching does not restore the quality and appearance of the concrete surface, or if patching does not provide the structural integrity required for the member or members.

E. After removing forms, inspect all concrete surfaces. Patch pour joints, voids, honeycombs, stone pockets, and other defective areas permitted by the Architect of Record to be patched, and all tie holes, except as otherwise noted. Chip away defective areas to a depth of not less than 1", with the edges perpendicular to the surface. Fill all depressions and tie holes with a mixture of similar proportions as the original concrete (deleting coarse aggregate). Wet concrete before filling.

F. With prior approval of the Architect of Record as to method and procedure, all repairs of defective areas shall conform to ACI 301, Chapter 9, except that the specified bonding compound must be used.

G. Apply a coat of the specified bonding compound to areas being patched. Prevent staining of exposed surfaces with bonding material. Apply bonding compound in accordance with manufacturer's directions.

H. Fill in area with selected mix, bringing to same level as original concrete. Brush out area to match surrounding work. Allow to cure.

I. The structural patching mortar may be used in lieu of the bonding compound, with prior approval of the Architect of Record, when color match of the adjacent concrete is not required.

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

03345-5 CONCRETE FINISHES 02/13/17 20150922

J. All structural repairs shall be made with prior approval of the Architect of Record as to method and procedure, using the specified epoxy adhesive and/or epoxy mortar. Where epoxy injection procedures must be used, an approved low viscosity epoxy made by one of the manufacturers previously specified shall be used.

K. Leveling of floors for subsequent finishes shall be achieved by use of the specified underlayment material.

3.03 FINISHES ON FORMED SURFACES

A. Finishing of Formed Surfaces: 1. Common finish shall be confined to concrete surfaces that will be covered by other construction, and that will not be visible, unless otherwise noted by Architect of Record. 2. Rubbed Finish shall include exposed concrete surfaces to produce a finish satisfactory to the Architect of Record.

B. Common Finish: 1. Common finish shall be produced by filling smoothly all tie holes, honeycomb, and other depressions, knocking off and removing burrs and form marks. Fins exceeding 1/4 inch in height shall be chipped off or rubbed off.

C. Rubbed Finish: 1. For smooth form finish, the form facing material shall produce a smooth, hard, uniform texture on the concrete. The arrangement of the facing material shall be orderly and symmetrical, with the number of seams kept to the practical minimum. 2. After removal of forms, carefully remove all concrete fins and laitance; rub smooth with Carborundum brick. In general, one rubbing with coarse stone should be sufficient for working uneven patched surface. Final rubbing with fine stone, if required, shall be after curing and immediately before cleaning. Removal of curing compound with mineral spirits may be required. 3. All exposed concrete surfaces that are not to be painted shall be cleaned as follows: Mix one part white Portland cement and 1 1/2 parts sand with water, to consistency of thick paint. Thoroughly wet surfaces and brush on grout uniformly, completely filling air bubbles and holes. Immediately flatten and vigorously scour with wood float. Finish and remove excess grout with sponge rubber float as soon as grout is stiff enough so as not to be pulled from holes and depressions. When thoroughly dry, remove visible dried grout film by vigorously rubbing with burlap. Entire cleaning operation for any area shall be completed the day it is started. The final finish shall be uniform in color and monolithic in appearance. 4. Concrete surfaces to be painted shall be cleaned to requirements of Painting Contractor.

3.04 FINISHES ON SLABS GENERAL

A. Floated Finish: 1. After the concrete has been placed, consolidated, struck off, and leveled, the concrete shall not be worked further until ready for floating. Floating with a hand float, or with a bladed power trowel equipped with float shoes, or with a powered disc float, shall begin when the water sheen has disappeared, and when surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit the operation. 2. During or after the first floating, planeness of surface shall be checked with a 10-ft. straight edge applied at not less than two different angles. All high spots shall be cut down and all low spots filed during this procedure, to produce a surface within the specified tolerance throughout. The slab shall than be refloated immediately to a uniform sandy texture.

B. Troweled Finish: 1. The surface shall first be finished as specified above. It shall be hand troweled. 2. The first troweling shall produce a smooth surface which is relatively free of defects, but which may

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

CONCRETE FINISHES 03345-6 20150922 02/13/17

still show some trowel marks. Additional troweling shall be done by hand after the surface has hardened sufficiently. 3. The final troweling shall be done when a ringing sound is produced as the trowel is moved over the surface. The surface shall be thoroughly consolidated by the hand troweling operations. 4. The finished surface shall be essentially free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance, and flat and level to within the specified tolerances. On surfaces intended to support floor coverings, any defects of sufficient magnitude to show through the floor covering shall be removed by grinding.

3.05 INTERIOR FLOOR SLABS

A. All interior floor slabs shall be placed as follows: 1. Screed floor slabs to even surface by use of straight edge and screeding strips. 2. Float surface of concrete with wood float in a manner to compact concrete and produce a surface free of depressions or ridges. Test for flatness or levelness, and correct as necessary by either removing excess, or by adding and compacting additional concrete. 3. End each placement with a wooden screed which shall not be removed until concrete sets. Construction Joint shall be full depth of slab, to prevent sloughing of concrete. 4. Prior to placing adjacent slabs, seal the outer 2 foot edge of the existing slab with a bond breaker, to prevent slurry from the screeding process from bonding to the existing slab. 5. Curing Interior Floor Slabs: See Curing and Protection.

B. All interior floor slabs shall be finished as follows: 1. Steel trowel finish with electrically operated trowelling machine having adjustable blades not less than 45" in diameter. 2. Minimum of three (3) trowellings are required, followed by hand trowelling, to produce a perfectly smooth glasslike surface. 3. Flatness and levelness per 1.03, A.2.

C. Polished Concrete Floor Treatment: Apply polished concrete finish system to cured and prepared slabs to comply with the following criteria: 1. Upon completion of polishing treatment, polished floors shall be tested for gloss levels using a Horiba IG-320 Gloss Checker with measurement angle set to 60 degrees. Gloss readings shall be taken at each of the following nine (9) test locations below with four (4) readings taken at each location. The overall average shall be a minimum of 55: a. Produce b. Meat c. Seafood d. Specialty e. Prepared Foods f. Bakery g. Grocery h. Whole Body i. Front End 2. Testing shall be performed with Contractor's equipment and may be observed by the Whole Foods Project Manager or general contractor’s representative. 3. Provide documentation on floor plan drawing indicating measured locations where tests were performed and keyed to accompanying table of numerical results.

D. Slip Resistant Verification: 1. Upon completion of polishing treatment, polished floor shall be tested for static coefficient of friction (SCOF) using American Slip Meter, Inc. ASM 725 or ASM 825 horizontal slip meter. SCOF readings shall be taken at each of the following nine (9) test locations below with four (4) readings taken at each location. The average of the four (4) readings at each location shall be a minimum SCOF of 0.5. The overall average shall be a minimum of 0.5: a. Produce

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

03345-7 CONCRETE FINISHES 02/13/17 20150922

b. Meat c. Seafood d. Specialty e. Prepared Foods f. Bakery g. Grocery h. Whole Body i. Front End 2. Testing shall be performed with Contractor's equipment and may be observed by the Whole Foods Project Manager or general contractor’s representative. 3. Provide documentation on floor plan drawing indicating measured locations where tests were performed and keyed to accompanying table of numerical results.

3.06 JOINTS

A. Construction Joints: 1. Provide construction joints as required by the drawings, specifications, and job conditions. Remove all laitance from joints prior to placing adjoining concrete. 2. Construction joints in slabs are intended to function as formed contraction joints. See drawings for details. Install joint sealant in joints in exposed concrete floors that do not receive floor coverings. 3. For construction joints in structural slab, see structural engineering drawings. Contractor shall submit location of construction joints to Architect for approval prior to slab construction.

B. Contraction Joints: 1. Install joint sealant in joints in exposed concrete floor slabs that do not receive floor coverings. Align control joint with joint in exterior building wall.

C. Isolation Joints: 1. Locate isolation joints at all columns, elsewhere as shown on the plans, or as job conditions require. 2. Premolded filler for isolation joints shall be 2" thick. 3. Apply joint sealant in joints in exposed concrete floors that are not to receive floor coverings.

3.07 CURING AND PROTECTION

A. General Requirements for Curing: Prevent surfaces of concrete from drying out in excessively cold or hot temperatures, or windy conditions. Maintain concrete without drying at a relatively constant temperature for the period of time necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete. Start curing process immediately following initial set of concrete.

B. Curing Interior Floor Slabs: 1. Contractor shall use the following methods approved in ACI 302.1R-04 Chapter 9.2 as a cure for interior floor slabs. a. Liquid Membrane-forming curing compound: Apply one (1) coat of specified curing compound immediately after final finishing, in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Do not allow material to puddle. Recoat any areas that have been subjected to heavy rainfall within three (3) hours after initial application. Contractor shall completely remove curing compound by means recommended by membrane-forming chemical manufacturer prior to installation of liquid hardener and finished flooring. Liquid Membrane shall not be used when it will adversely effect installation of finished flooring. b. CHEMICAL FLOOR HARDENERS ARE NOT ALLOWED AS CURING AGENT.

C. Apply Chemical Floor Hardener as Follows: 1. Prior to application of chemical floor hardener, completely remove curing compound, bond breakers, oils, waxes, dirt, dust and debris from slab. Slab shall be completely clean before application of

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

CONCRETE FINISHES 03345-8 20150922 02/13/17

hardener begins. 2. Apply chemical hardener to exposed interior slabs NOT indicated to receive an applied finish material (such as tile, linoleum, etc.) 3. Hot Weather: Apply Chemical Floor Hardener in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Avoid possible whiting by misting with water and then brooming the surface when the Chemical Floor Hardener has gelled and become slippery. Allow the surface to gel and become slippery a second time, and then use a broom and water to break up material before it can cook into the surface. Finally, completely flush the surface with water, and squeegee dry. 4. Cold Weather: Apply Chemical Floor Hardener in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Contractor shall extend time required to install Chemical Floor Hardener to compensate for the slower absorption of the material resulting from increased viscosity and a reduced porosity of the concrete surface in cold temperatures. 5. Final (“spiff”) coat: Apply an additional coat of chemical hardener (“spiff coat”) to concrete floors just prior to turn over to Owner for fixturing. Apply “spiff coat” in strict accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.

D. Cure formed surfaces of concrete, including undersides of supported slabs and other similar surfaces, by moist curing, with forms in place for full curing period or until forms are removed. If forms are removed, continue curing by methods specified above, as applicable.

E. Curing Unformed Surfaces: 1. Initially cure unformed surfaces, such as slabs, by application of the specified curing and sealing compound or specified curing and hardening compound. 2. Final cure unformed surfaces, unless otherwise specified, by any of the methods specified above, as applicable.

F. Contractor's attention is directed to the fact that experience shows the most critical time of curing to be from 3 to 4 hours after placing and 5 to 6 hours thereafter. It is extremely important, therefore, to prevent loss of moisture during this period, particularly when concrete is extremely vulnerable to shrinkage cracks.

G. During the period of curing, no traffic on, or loading of, the floors will be permitted.

H. Protect freshly placed concrete from damage due to water, falling objects, or traffic marring finish surface of concrete. Surfaces damaged due to lack of protective measures shall be removed and replaced with fresh concrete.

3.08 REPAIR OF SURFACE DEFECTS

A. Surface defects, including tie holes, shall be repaired immediately after form removal.

B. All honeycombed and other defective concrete shall be removed down to sound concrete. If chipping is necessary, the edges shall be perpendicular to the surface, or slightly undercut. No feather edges will be permitted. The area to be patched, and an area at least 6 inches wide surrounding it, shall be dampened to prevent absorption of water from the patching mortar. A bonding grout shall be prepared using a mix of approximately one (1) part cement to one (1) part fine sand passing a no. 300 mesh sieve, mixed to the consistency of thick cream, and then well brushed into the surface.

C. The patching mixture shall be made of the same materials in approximately the same proportions used for the concrete, except that the coarse aggregate shall be omitted and the mortar shall consist of not more than one (1) part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand by same loose volume. White Portland cement shall be substituted for a part of the Gray Portland cement on exposed concrete in order to produce a color matching the color of the surrounding concrete, as determined by a trail patch. The quantity of mixing water shall be not more than is necessary for handling and placing. The patching mortar shall be mixed in advance and allowed to stand, with frequent manipulation by a trowel, without addition of water, until it has reached the stiffest consistency that will permit placing.

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

03345-9 CONCRETE FINISHES 02/13/17 20150922

D. After surface water has evaporated from the area to be patched, the bond coat shall be well brushed into the surface. When the bond coat begins to lose the water sheen, the premixed patching mortar shall be applied. The mortar shall be thoroughly consolidated into place and struck off so as to leave the patch slightly higher than the surrounding surface. To permit initial shrinkage, it shall be left undisturbed for a least one (1) hour before being finally finished. The patched area shall be kept damp for seven (7) days. Metal tools shall not be used to finish a patch in a formed wall that will be exposed.

E. After being cleaned and thoroughly dampened, all tie holes shall be filled solid with patching mortar.

END OF SECTION

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

CONCRETE FINISHES 03345-10 20150922 02/13/17

Page left intentionally blank

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

04602-1 INTERIOR THIN BRICK SYSTEM 02/13/17 20150922

SECTION 04602 - INTERIOR THIN BRICK SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Thin Veneer Mortar.

B. Pointing Mortar.

C. Mortar Admixture.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. ANSI A108.1 - Installation of Ceramic Tile in the Wet-Set Method, with Portland Cement Mortar.

B. A108.1B - Installation of Ceramic Tile on a Cured Portland Cement Mortar Setting Bed with Dry-Set or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar

C. ANSI A108.11 - Interior Installation of Cementitious Backer Units.

D. ASTM C 91 - Standard Specification for Masonry Cement.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300.

B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods.

C. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two complete sets of color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns.

D. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size 6 inches (150 mm) square, representing actual product, color, and patterns.

E. Manufacturer's Certificates: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products of this section with minimum ten years documented experience.

B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five years documented experience.

C. Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up for evaluation of surface preparation techniques and application workmanship. 1. Locate mock-ups at locations and size directed by Architect. 2. Finish areas designated by Architect. 3. Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship and color is approved by Architect. 4. Refinish mock-up area as required to produce acceptable work. 5. Retain and maintain mock-ups during construction in undisturbed condition as a standard for judging

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

INTERIOR THIN BRICK SYSTEM 04602-2 20150922 02/13/17

completed unit of Work. 6. Obtain Architect's acceptance of mock-ups before start of final unit of Work.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use.

B. Prevent damage or contamination to materials by water, freezing, foreign matter and other causes.

C. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.

1.06 SEQUENCING

A. Ensure that locating templates and other information required for installation of products of this section are furnished to affected trades in time to prevent interruption of construction progress.

B. Ensure that products of this section are supplied to affected trades in time to prevent interruption of construction progress.

1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.

B. Environmental: Install mortar, set and point mortar when surfaces and ambient temperature is minimum 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) and maximum 90 degrees F (32 degrees C). Consult with manufacturer for specific requirements.

C. Do not install mortar, set or point masonry on exterior when inclement weather conditions are expected within 48 hours after work is completed unless properly protected.

D. Protection: Protect adjacent work surfaces during tile work. Close rooms or spaces to traffic of all types until mortar has set.

E. Safety: Observe the manufacturer's safety instructions including those pertaining to ventilation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturer for Thin Brick: 1. Old California Series as manufactured by McNear Brick and Block, P.O. Box 151380, San Rafael, CA

94915; Phone: 415.454.6811; FAX: 415.257.6353; www.mcnear.com . 2. Color: a. Whitehall. 3. Size: a. Stretcher units (modular): 7 5/8” x 2 1/4” x 5/8” thick b. Corner units (modular): 7 5/8” x 2 1/4” x 5/8” with 3 5/8” x 2 1/4" x 5/8” return face. 4. Substitutions: Not permitted.

B. Acceptable Manufacturer for Thin Brick Veneer Installation Products:

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

04602-3 INTERIOR THIN BRICK SYSTEM 02/13/17 20150922

1. Laticrete International, Inc., One Laticrete Park North, Bethany, CT; 1.800.243.4788; www.laticrete.com . 2. Substitutions: Not permitted.

2.02 THIN VENEER MORTAR

A. Thin Veneer Bonding Mortar: Laticrete Multipurpose Pro, Multi-purpose thin set mortar, polymer bagged cementitious thin set powder mixed with water. 1. Properties: a. Meets or exceeds ANSI A118.4 and ANSI A118.11.

B. Veneer Pointing Mortar: Laticrete Masonry Pointing Mortar is factory prepared, formulated from a blend of high strength Portland cement, graded aggregates and color fast pigments. 1. Meets or exceeds ANSI A118.6. 2. Protected by Laticrete 1776 Grout Enhancer with Microban Anti-Microbial to resist mold and mildew growth. 3. Color: 23 Antique White.

2.03 MORTAR ADMIXTURE

A. Masonry Mortar Admix: Latricrete 3701 Mortar for use with mortar to improve bond strength and increase tensile and compressive strength. 1. Properties: a. Meets ANSI A118.4.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.

B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.

B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.

C. General Surface Preparation: Surfaces must be structurally sound, clean, dry and free from grease, oil, dirt, curing compounds, sealers, adhesives and other contaminants that would prevent a good bond. Ambient temperature, surfaces and materials should be 50 to 100 degrees F (10 to 38 degrees C) for 72 hours. 1. Cement backerboard shall be used as a backing for direct application of mortar and thin brick.

D. Expansion Joints: Install expansion joints in accordance with ANSI/TCNA guidelines. Refer to TCNA EJ171. Expansion joints and cold joints should never be bridged with setting material and/or veneer. They must be brought through the work and filled with an appropriate elastomeric sealant.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Veneer Mortar:

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

INTERIOR THIN BRICK SYSTEM 04602-4 20150922 02/13/17

a. Mixing: Mix 5 qts (4.73 L) clean water per 50 lb (22.68 kg) bag of mortar. Mix material by hand or use a low 150 to 200 rpm speed 1/2 inch (13 mm) drill to achieve a smooth, paste-like consistency. Let the mixture slake or stand 5 to 10 minutes; stir again and use. Stir occasionally, but do not add more water. When properly mixed, troweled ridges will stand without slump. b. Application: 1) Use a properly sized notched trowel to ensure proper coverage behind the thin brick or tile veneer. Using the flat side of the trowel, apply a skim coat of mortar to the surface. With the notched side of the trowel held at a 45 degree angle, apply additional mortar to the surface, combing in one direction. 2) Press the thin brick or veneer firmly into place in a perpendicular motion across ridges, moving back and forth. The perpendicular motion flattens ridges and closes valleys, allowing maximum coverage. Back buttering is advised. Adjust the tile promptly and beat it in with a block and rubber mallet. 3) Periodically check the back to ensure proper adhesive coverage. Do not spread more material than can be tiled within 10 minutes or while material has a wet tack (sticky to the touch). If the material has skinned over (not sticky), re-comb with the notched trowel; if too dry, remove and replace the dry material with fresh material. c. Curing: Allow to cure 24 hours before pointing, depending upon temperature and humidity. d. Cleaning: Clean with water before the material dries.

B. Pointing Mortar: 1. Mixing: Mix 5 qt (4.7L) clean water to 50 lbs (22.68 kg) of Mortar. Mix with a trowel or low speed mixer to achieve a smooth, stiff consistency. Let the mixture stand (slake) for 5 minutes, and then remix and use. Periodically remix to keep the mixture workable, but do not add water, which can weaken the joint, cause color variation and possible cause shrinkage, cracks and pinholes. Discard mortar when it becomes too stiff to work. 2. Application: a. Lightly dampen absorptive, highly porous veneer with clean, cool water, but leave no standing water in the joints. Holding a rubber grout float at a 45 degree angle, completely fill the joints. b. For float applications: Holding the edge of the float at a 45 degree angle to spread the mortar uniformly into the joints and then at a 90 degree angle, remove excess grout. Do not spread more mortar than can be cleaned within 30 minutes of the mortar firming and use as little water as possible for grout cleanup. Using a striking or joint tool, strike the mortar joints to provide the desired finish. Remove excess mortar using a masonry brush or sponge. Do not over wash the mortar joint. c. For Mortar or grout bag application, bag the mortar into the joint. Once the mortar has become stiff in the joint, using a striking or joint tool, strike the mortar joints to provide the desired finish. Remove excess mortar using a masonry brush or sponge. Do not over wash the mortar joint. 3. Curing: Curing time is affected by ambient and surface temperatures and humidity. 4. Cleaning: Clean tools and hands with water before the material dries.

3.04 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products until completion of project.

B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

05500-1 METAL FABRICATIONS 02/13/17 20150922

SECTION 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Miscellaneous steel framing and supports. 2. Structural-steel door frames. 3. Miscellaneous steel trim. 4. Pipe bollards. 5. Sills. 6. Column protection covers. 7. Corner guards. 8. Protective wall covering. 9. Wire fencing. 10. Ladders. 11. Stainless steel wall panels (SS1). 12. Portable Queuing System. 13. Decorative wire mesh, perforated steel and decorative steel. 14. Decorative corbels.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.

B. Samples: 1. Provide two samples, 6” long, of all exposed mill finished decorative and structural steel trim, including but not limited to, trim angles at wainscot and columns, steel plates at wainscot, hanging rods and all connection hardware. 2. Samples shall be a true representation of the material to be installed on the project. 3. Do not purchase mill finished decorative and structural steel trim until samples have been approved by the Architect.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 METALS

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.

B. Recycled Content Requirement of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.

C. Ferrous Metals: 1. Steel Plates and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2. Steel Shapes: ASTM A 922/A 922M. 3. Stainless-Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 304. 4. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D. 5. Rolled-Stainless-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 793. 6. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold-formed steel tubing. 7. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless another weight is indicated or required by structural loads.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-2 20150922 02/13/17

8. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold-formed metal channels 1-5/8 by 1-5/8 inches (41 by 41 mm) with flange edges returned towards webs with 9/16 inch-wide slotted holes in webs at 2” o.c. Channels made from galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 653/ A 653M, structural quality, Grade 33 with G90 coating; 0.079-inch nominal thickness. 9. Cast Iron: a. ASTM A 47/A 47M, Grade 32510 malleable iron; or, b. ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30, unless another class is indicated or required by structural loads. 10. Concrete inserts: Threaded- or wedge-type, galvanized ferrous castings, either: a. ASTM A 47/A 47M, Grade 32510 malleable iron; or b. ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. c. Provide bolts, washers and shims as needed. d. Bolts, washers and shims shall be hot-dipped galvanized per ASTM A 153/A 153M.

D. Metals shall meet third-party ISO (International Organization for Standardization) 14025, Environmental Product Declarations (EPDs) Type III Labels certification.

2.02 PAINT

A. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: SSPC-Paint 20 organic Zinc-Rich Primer compatible with topcoat. 1. Benjamin Moore & Co.; Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer CM18/19. 2. Carboline Company; Carbozinc 621. 3. ICI Devoe Coatings; Catha-Coat 313. 4. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.; Aquapon Zinc-Rich Primer 97-670. 5. Tnemec Company, Inc.; Series 23 Enduratone.

B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel, complying with SSPC-Paint 20.

2.03 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Fasteners: Type 304 or 316 stainless steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, where built into exterior walls, of type, grade and class required.

B. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.

C. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Con- crete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi (20 MPa), unless otherwise indicated.

D. Adhesives and sealants: Use adhesives that have a VOC content of 30 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2.04 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Connections, general: Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. 1. Shear, cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs 2. Weld corners and seams continuously: Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. Remove welding flux immediately. 3. Fabricate joints, seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. 4. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts,

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

05500-3 METAL FABRICATIONS 02/13/17 20150922

unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.

B. Miscellaneous Framing and Supports: Fabricate steel framing and supports that are not a part of structural-steel framework from welded structural steel and as necessary to complete the Work. Cut, drill and tap units to receive hardware, hangers and similar items. 1. Where indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally-welded anchors at 24” o.c. 2. Fabricate steel girders for wood frame construction from continuous steel shapes. Where wood nailers are attached to girders with bolts or lag screws, drill holes at 24” o.c. 3. Fabricate steel pipe columns for supporting wood frames with steel baseplates and top plates welded to pipe with fillet welds the same size as pipe wall thickness.

C. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction retained by framing and supports. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hangers, and similar items.

D. Miscellaneous Steel Trim: Fabricate units with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed splices where possible. Fabricate cutouts, fittings, and anchorages. Coordinate assembly and installation with other work.

E. Pipe Bollards: Fabricate from Schedule 40 steel pipe.

F. Corner Protection Covers: 1. Front of House: a. Provide covers fabricated from minimum .0375” AISI Type 304 stainless steel sheet. Edges shall be bent continuously, ½” from edge and at a 15-degree angle, towards the column. All edges shall be dressed smooth. b. Size: 3-1/2” by 3-1/2 inch by height indicated. c. Mounting Method: Provide dimpled holes for using stainless steel fasteners to provide recessed fastener installation. d. Corner radius: 1/8”. 2. Back of House: a. Provide covers fabricated from minimum 0.0375” galvanized steel sheet. Edges shall be bent continuously, ½” from edge and at a 15-degree angle, towards the column. All edges shall be dressed smooth. b. Size: 3-1/2” by 3-1/2 inch by height indicated. c. Mounting Method: Provide dimpled holes for using stainless steel fasteners to provide recessed fastener installation. d. Corner radius: 1/8”.

G. Column Protection Covers: 1. Provide one piece covers fabricated from minimum .0375” AISI Type 304 stainless steel sheet. 2. Mounting Method: Double stick tape. Supplement installation with construction adhesive if required to provide tight and secure fit to column. 3. Corner radius: 1/8”.

H. Stainless Steel Wall Panels (SS-1): 1. Fabricate from minimum .050” AISI Type 304 stainless steel sheet.

I. Wire Fencing Fabric: 1. Fabric: 14 ga. welded wire in 2” x 4” pattern. 2. Finish: Class 1 galvanized zinc coating. 3. Height of fabric: 4 feet.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-4 20150922 02/13/17

2.05 PORTABLE QUEUING SYSTEM:

A. Portable Queuing System: 1. Specified Manufacturer: Crowd Control Store, A Division of Equicross, Inc.; 11451 US Highway 301 North, Suite 101, Thonotosassa, FL 33592; 866.715.6006; www.crowdcontrolstore.com. 2. Queuing System: Model 320 R (removable) portable stanchion system. a. Post construction: 2.5” diameter, 38” high post stainless steel post with stainless steel flange. b. Head: 3.5” diameter, satin chrome steel head with brushed finish with integral retracting nylon belt, color black. c. Floor socket: Stainless steel socket 4.25” deep with 5” diameter mounting flange.

2.06 DECORATIVE CORBELS AT CUSTOMER SERVICE:

A. Approved Manufacturer: Timeless Wrought Iron; Phone 800.957.1178; www.timelesswroughtiron.com

B. Product: Eclipse Wrought Iron Corbel, 3” wide, overall size 10” x 12”, finish aged bronze.

2.07 STEEL ELEMENTS AT MEAT SHOPPE (MT1)

A. Steel framing members: 1. Approved Manufacturer: a. Brandner Design, 34 Wildcat Way, Bozeman, MT 59718; Phone 406.582.9711; www.bradnerdesign.com b. Other specialty steel fabrication firms as approved by the Architect. 2. Product: a. Standard steel shapes with Rust Veil finish. b. Finish: Shop sealed with acrylic urethane clearcoat.

2.08 DECORATIVE STEEL ELEMENTS AT CHEESE ROOM (MT2 AND MT4)

A. Wire Panels: 1. Approved Manufacturer: McNichols Company; 1980 Shiloh Road NW, Building 6, #300, Kennesaw, GA 30144; 877.499.9559; www.mcnichols.com 2. Product: Wire mesh, rectangular welded, plain steel, cold rolled; opening size 2” x 1”; 0.1200” wire diameter; 84% open area, mill finish. 3. Finish: Field finish with clear sealer.

B. Steel framing members: 1. Approved Manufacturer: a. Brandner Design, 34 Wildcat Way, Bozeman, MT 59718; Phone 406.582.9711; www.bradnerdesign.com b. Other specialty steel fabrication firms as approved by the Architect. 2. Product: Standard steel shapes with Charcoal Steel finish.

2.09 WIRE MESH PANELS AT DAIRY COOLER (MT3)

A. Wire Panels: 1. Approved Manufacturer: McNichols Company; 1980 Shiloh Road NW, Building 6, #300, Kennesaw, GA 30144; 877.499.9559; www.mcnichols.com 2. Product: Mosaic 3310 Decorative Perforated Panel; plain steel, cold rolled, 20 gauge; 40% open area, mill finish, 36” high by varied length; provide 2” wide solid border for standoff fastener. 3. Finish: Field finish with clear sealer.

B. Standoffs: 1. Basis of Design Manufacturer: a. Fastenal Company; 3939 Royal Drive NW; Suite 113, Kennesaw, GA 30144; 770,499.0932;

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

05500-5 METAL FABRICATIONS 02/13/17 20150922

www.fastenal.com b. Similar products by other manufacturers will be considered for substitution. 2. Product: a. Standoff Base: 1” diameter by 1” length, clear anodized aluminum finish, 5/16”-18 thread, part number 1134270. b. Round Standoff Cap: Outer diameter ½”; clear anodized aluminum finish; 5/16”-18 thread; part number 11342814.

2.10 STEEL LADDERS/CAGES

A. Industry Standards: OSHA/ANSI A14.3 "Safety Code for Fixed Ladders" specifies the minimum design requirements for ladders.

B. Fabricate Ladders for locations shown, with dimensions, spacings, details and anchorages as required. Comply with requirements of OSHA/ANSI A14.3 except as otherwise shown or specified. 1. Unless otherwise shown, provide C5x9 channel for full height side rails with eased edges. 2. Ladder rungs; 3/4” diameter bars with permanent abrasive finish on top side of rung.

C. Weld ladder rungs to side rails and grind all welds smooth.

D. Support each ladder at top, mid point and bottom. Use welded or bolted steel brackets, designed for adequate support and anchorage.

2.11 FINISHES

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. 1. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M, as applicable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. General: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels. 1. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction. 2. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.

B. Bollards: 1. Anchor bollards in place with concrete footings. Support and brace bollards in position until concrete has cured. 2. Anchor to existing construction with postinstalled anchors and bolts. Provide four (4) ¾” anchors at each bollard and embed each anchor at least 4” into existing concrete.

C. Column Protection Covers: Install column covers with stainless steel pop rivets at 8” o.c. Turn lap joint towards nearest shelving or to rear of sales floor on exposed columns. All joints shall be smooth and free of projections.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-6 20150922 02/13/17

D. Sills: Install sills with stainless steel fasteners, tight to substrate and level.

E. Corner guards: Install corner guards plumb, tight to substrate, level and true to line without distortions. Seal all edges with sealant as specified in Division 7 Section “Joint Sealants”.

F. Case Guard Bollards: Install case guard bollards in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s written instructions.

G. Protective Wall Covering: Install protective wall covering with stainless steel fasteners, tight to substrate, level and true to line without distortions. Seal all edges with sealant as specified in Division 7 Section “Joint Sealants”.

H. Touch up surfaces and finishes after erection or installation: 1. Painted Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and touch up paint with same materials used for shop painting. 2. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.

END OF SECTION 05500

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

06105-1 MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY 02/13/17 20150922

SECTION 06105 - MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Miscellaneous lumber.

2. Utility shelving.

3. Plywood panels and sheathing at back of house areas.

B. All wood used for construction shall be fire retardant treated.

C. Related work:

1. See Division 6 Section “Interior Architectural Woodwork” for carpentry work related to trim, cabinets and countertops as well as quality assurance standards.

2. See drawings and individual specification sections for extent and type of concealed miscellaneous carpentry specified elsewhere.

1.02 Submittals:

A. Chain-of-custody certificates indicating that products specified to be made from certified wood comply with forest certification requirements. Include documentation that manufacturer is certified for chain of custody by either the Sustainable Forestry Initiative (SFI), CSA Sustainable Forest Management (SFM), Forestry Stewardship Council (FSC) or American Tree Farm System (AFS). Include statement indicating cost for each certified wood product.

1.03 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Coordination: Fit carpentry work to other work; scribe and cope as required for accurate fit. Correlate location of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds and similar supports to allow attachment of other work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Wood shall meet third -party ISO (International Organization for Standardization) 14025, Environmental Product Declarations (EPDs) Type III Labels certification.

2.02 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.

1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.

2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY 06105-2 20150922 02/13/17

3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.

4. Provide lumber with 19% maximum moisture content at time of dressing.

2.03 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with performance requirements in AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood).

B. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Use exterior type for all locations.

2.04 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER

A. Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following:

1. Plywood blocking and sheathing.

2. Blocking.

3. Nailers.

4. Furring.

5. Grounds.

6. Utility shelving.

B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Standard, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content of any species.

C. For exposed boards, provide lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content, of Eastern white pine, D Select (Quality) or Southern Pine C Finish, SPIB.

D. For concealed boards, provide lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species and grades:

1. Mixed southern pine, No. 2 grade; SPIB.

2. Eastern softwoods, No. 2 Common grade; NELMA.

2.05 PLYWOOD PANELS AND SHEATHING

A. Miscellaneous Concealed Plywood: Exposure 1 sheathing, Span Rating to suit framing in each location and thickness as indicated but not less than ½”.

B. Miscellaneous Exposed Plywood, i.e., at back of house spaces: DOC PS 1, A-D Interior, fire retardant treated, thickness as indicated but no less than ½”.

C. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Boards: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D Plugged, fire- retardant treated and thickness indicated, but not less than ½”.

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

06105-3 MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY 02/13/17 20150922

2.06 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Arti- cle for material and manufacture.

1. Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M.

B. Power-Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272.

C. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.

D. Screws for Fastening to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, except with wafer heads and reamer wings, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Discard units of material with defects which might impair quality of work, and units which are too small to use in fabricating work with minimum joints or optimum joint arrangement.

B. Set carpentry work to required levels and lines, with members plumb and true to line and cut and fitted.

C. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as shown and as required by recognized standards.

D. Countersink nail heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes.

E. Use common wire nails, except as otherwise indicated. Use finishing nails for finish work. Select fasteners of size that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting of wood; predrill as required.

END OF SECTION 06105

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY 06105-4 20150922 02/13/17

Page left intentionally blank

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

06402-1 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 02/13/17 20150922

SECTION 06402 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Standing and running trim. 2. Reclaimed wood for ceiling and wall finishes at sales area. 3. Dimensional lumber for ceiling and wall finishes at sales area.

B. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims and hanging strips unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation.

C. Related work: 1. See Division 6 Section “Miscellaneous Carpentry” for furring, shims, and hanging strips required for installing woodwork and concealed within other construction before architectural woodwork installation. 2. See drawings and individual specification sections for extent and type of concealed miscellaneous carpentry specified elsewhere.

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Submit qualifications for fabricator of woodwork.

B. Quality Standard: 1. Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" for grades of interior architectural woodwork indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. 2. Provide AWI Quality Certification Program labels or certificates indicating that woodwork complies with requirements of grades specified. 3. Southern Forest Products Association, SPIC Grading Rules. 4. American Tree Farm System (ATFS) – AFF Standard. 5. Canadian Standards Association (CSA) – Z809 Sustainable Forest Management Requirements and Guidance (SFM).

C. Wood and laminate shall meet third-party ISO (International Organization for Standardization) 14025, Environmental Product Declarations (EPDs) Type III Labels certification.

D. Mock-up for reclaimed material: Prepare a 4’ x 4’ mockup of each species of reclaimed wood. Mock-up shall appear exactly as the finished installation will appear. 1. Include type and spacing of fasteners proposed for use. 2. Use type of sealers and finishes proposed for use. 3. Include at least one cross grain joint. 4. Mock-up may be incorporated into finished work provided the Contractor obtains written approval from the Architect of Record and the Owner’s Representative. Contractor shall approved, in-place mockup from damage during the remainder of construction.

1.03 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. 1. Use of fabrication techniques or storage and handling methods not approved by the manufacturer will void product warranty.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402-2 20150922 02/13/17

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Certified Wood: Interior architectural woodwork shall be produced from wood obtained from forests certified from one of the following third party organizations: 1. SFI (Sustainable Forestry Initiative). 2. Sustainable Forestry Initiative Standard (SFIS). 3. SFC (Sustainable Forestry Council). 4. SFM (CSA Sustainable Forest Management). 5. ATFS (American Tree Farm System). 6. FSC (Forest Stewardship Council Standard).

B. Wood for Transparent Finish: As specified herein and indicated on drawings.

C. Wood Species for Opaque Finish: Eastern white pine, sugar pine, or western white pine, custom grade.

D. Wood Products: 1. Recycled Content of Medium-Density Fiberboard and Particleboard: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than ten (10) percent. 2. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde. 3. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2-Exterior Glue. 4. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, Medium Density Overlay.

E. Thermoset Decorative Overlay: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard finished with thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper complying with LMA SAT-1.

F. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or, if not indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard. 1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide high-pressure decorative laminates by one of the following: a. Formica Corporation. b. Nevamar Company, LLC; Decorative Products Div. c. Laminart. d. Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc.

G. Adhesives and sealants: Use adhesives that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

H. Reclaimed Wood Material: 1. Wood Material WD-1: a. “Barnwood Plank- Silver Gray” as supplied by Pioneer Millworks, 1180 Commercial Drive, Farmington, NY 14425; www.pioneermillworks.com ; phone 585.924.9770; contact Jered Slusser, [email protected] . b. No substitutions shall be permitted. c. Characteristics: 1) Color: As found surfaces range from silver-gray to brown with occasional dark gray/black boards. Ensure no painted boards (which may contain lead) are supplied. 2) Finish: Unfinished for field finishing with clear sealer. 3) Material: Solid plank panels. d. Specie: Unlimited mixture of heartwood and sapwood e. Nominal Size: a) Thickness: 3/4”. b) Widths: 6”. c) Length: Random lengths.

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

06402-3 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 02/13/17 20150922

f. Appearance: 1) Knots: Unlimited sound, tight knots are permitted, some surface defect from chipped/open knots. 2) Texture: Face of material will have varying textures ranging from rough-sawn to planed, to heavily weathered. The edges on premium siding will be ripped and show “bright wood.” As found siding will have natural edges 3) Holes: Nail, knot and bolt holes may be present as well as open knots. 4) Discoloration: Ferrous staining may be present and color and patina will vary 5) Checks: Allowed as long as boars will hold together for installation. 2. Wood Material WD-2: a. Characteristics: 1) Condition: Material from used/recycled/reconditioned wood pallets, structurally sound, and no major defects (i.e., excessive splits and/or gouges, excessively dirty). 2) Size: Length as required for installation conditions indicted on the drawings,” 3) Comply with following standards: a) ISPM 15 Export Specifications. b) Grocery Manufacturers Association (GMA). 3. Wood Material WD-3: a. Ash Tongue and Groove - Custom Black Finish” as supplied by Pioneer Millworks, 1180 Commercial Drive, Farmington, NY 14425; www.pioneermillworks.com ; phone 585.924.9770; contact Jered Slusser, [email protected] . b. No substitutions shall be permitted. c. Characteristics: 1) Color: No restriction on natural color variation. 2) Finish: Unfinished for field finishing with clear sealer. 3) Material: Solid plank panels with tongue and groove edges. d. Specie: Ash e. Nominal Size: 1) Thickness: 3/4”. 2) Widths: 6”. 3) Length: Random lengths. f. Appearance: 1) Knots: No limitation on sound knots. Surface defects resulting from chipped or broken knots will be present. 2) Texture: Re-sawing and milling removes all but infrequent saw marks and previous wear patterns. Very occasional overwood from natural variation in surface is possible. 3) Holes: Nail and other mechanical holes can be present and occasional reach 3/8” in diameter. Surface defects from insect tracks and pin holes will be present at times in heavy concentrations. 4) Discoloration: Ferrous staining from previous fasteners may be present. 5) Checks: Maximum allowed is 3/32”. 4. Wood Material WD-4: a. “Moonscape Light” as supplied by Terramai, 8400 Agate Road, White City, OR 97503; www.terramai.com; Phone 541.973.2301. b. No substitutions shall be permitted. c. Characteristics: 1) Color: Cool-toned, muted white with gray, sandy undertones. 2) Finish: Unfinished for field finishing with clear sealer. d. Nominal Size: 1) Thickness: 2”. 2) Widths: 2”. 3) Length: Random lengths. e. Appearance: 1) May include occasional unfiled nail and other holes, surface checking, insect scarring, tight, loose and missing knots and other signs of prior history and age. 5. Wood Material WD-5:

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402-4 20150922 02/13/17

a. “Moonscape Eclipse” as supplied by Terramai, 8400 Agate Road, White City, OR 97503; www.terramai.com; Phone 541.973.2301. b. No substitutions shall be permitted. c. Characteristics: 1) Color: Cool-toned, dark gray with black grain and character highlights. 2) Finish: Unfinished for field finishing with clear sealer. d. Nominal Size: 1) Thickness: 2”. 2) Widths: 2”. 3) Length: Random lengths. e. Appearance: 1) May include occasional unfiled nail and other holes, surface checking, insect scarring, tight, loose and missing knots and other signs of prior history and age. 6. Wood Material WD-7: a. “Ash Planks - Custom Grey Finish” as supplied by Pioneer Millworks, 1180 Commercial Drive, Farmington, NY 14425; www.pioneermillworks.com ; phone 585.924.9770; contact Jered Slusser, [email protected] . b. No substitutions shall be permitted. c. Characteristics: 1) Color: No restriction on natural color variation. 2) Finish: Prefinished in shop. 3) Material: Solid plank panels. d. Specie: Ash e. Nominal Size: 1) Thickness: 3/4”. 2) Widths: 6”. 3) Length: Random lengths. f. Appearance: 1) Knots: No limitation on sound knots. Surface defects resulting from chipped or broken knots will be present. 2) Texture: Re-sawing and milling removes all but infrequent saw marks and previous wear patterns. Very occasional overwood from natural variation in surface is possible. 3) Holes: Nail and other mechanical holes can be present and occasional reach 3/8” in diameter. Surface defects from insect tracks and pin holes will be present at times in heavy concentrations. 4) Discoloration: Ferrous staining from previous fasteners may be present. 5) Checks: Maximum allowed is 3/32”.

I. Architectural Grade Dimensional Lumber WD-6 (Roof Trusses at BBQ Venue): 1. Douglas Fir C and Better Grade, visually graded per ALSC Rules, in sizes as indicated on drawings. 2. Dimensional Lumber, in sizes as indicated on drawings. 3. Finish: Unfinished for field finishing with stain to match WD-7 and followed by field finishing with clear sealer.

J. Architectural Grade Dimensional Lumber WD-8: 1. Douglas Fir C and Better Grade, visually graded per ALSC Rules, in sizes as indicated on drawings. 2. Dimensional Lumber, in sizes as indicated on drawings. 3. Finish: Unfinished for field finishing with stain to match WD-7 and followed by field finishing with clear sealer.

2.02 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets, except for items specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware."

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

06402-5 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 02/13/17 20150922

B. Hardware Standard: Comply with BHMA A156.9 for items indicated by referencing BHMA numbers or items referenced to this standard.

C. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, self-closing.

D. Flush Pulls: BHMA A156.9, B02201.

E. Catches: Magnetic catches, BHMA A156.9, B03141.

F. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: BHMA A156.9, B04071; with shelf rests, B04081.

G. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9, B05091. 1. Standard Duty full-extension type; zinc-plated steel with steel ball-bearings, BHMA A156.9, B05091 and rated for the following loads. 2. Box Drawer Slides: 100 lbf. 3. Pencil Drawer Slides: 45 lbf.

H. Slides for Sliding Glass Doors: BHMA 156.9, B07063.

I. Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121.

J. Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041.

K. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated. 1. Satin Stainless Steel: BHMA 630.

2.03 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content.

2.04 FABRICATION

A. General: Complete fabrication, including assembly finishing, and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 1. Interior Woodwork Grade: Custom grade complying with the reference quality standard. 2. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. 3. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish. 4. For trim items wider than available lumber, use veneered construction. Do not glue for width. 5. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members, except for members with ends exposed in finished work. 6. Assemble casings in plant except where limitations of access to place of installation require field assembly.

B. Plastic-Laminate Cabinets: 1. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush overlay. 2. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate, Grade GP-28, 0.028- inch nominal thickness. 3. Materials for Semi-exposed Surfaces: Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: High-pressure decorative laminate, Grade VGS

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402-6 20150922 02/13/17

a. Drawer Sides and Backs: Solid-hardwood lumber. b. Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood.

C. Plastic-Laminate Countertops: 1. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate Grade: HGF, Grade GP-50, 0.050” nominal thickness. 2. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 3. Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces. 4. Core Material: Exterior-grade plywood.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas. Examine and complete work as required, including removal of packing and back-priming before installation.

B. Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with AWI Section 1700 for the same grade specified in this Section for type of woodwork involved.

C. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm).

D. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts.

E. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use fine finishing nails for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated.

F. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible. Fill gaps, if any, between top of base and wall with plastic wood filler, sand smooth, and finish same as wood base if finished.

G. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.

H. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other supports into underside of countertop. Caulk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."

END OF SECTION 06402

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

06650-1 SOLID POLYMER FABRICATIONS 02/13/17 20150922

SECTION 06650 - SOLID POLYMER FABRICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL:

1.01 SUMMARY.

A. The extent of solid polymer fabrications is shown on the Drawings and includes: 1. Countertops with integral bowl.

B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Rough carpentry 2. Tile work. 3. Plumbing.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. Applicable Standards: Standards of the following, as referenced herein: 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). 4. Federal Specifications (FS).

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, component sizes, fabrication details, attachment provisions and coordination requirements with adjacent work.

C. Samples: Submit minimum 2 inch by 2 inch samples. Indicate full range of color and pattern variation. Approved samples will be retained as a standard for work.

D. Product Data: Indicate product description, fabrication information and compliance with specified performance requirements.

E. Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer's care and maintenance data, including care, repair and cleaning instructions and maintenance video. Provide maintenance kit for matte finishes. Include in project close-out documents.

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:

A. Deliver no components to project site until areas are ready for installation. Store indoors.

B. Handle materials to prevent damage to finished surfaces. Provide protective coverings to prevent physical damage or staining following installation for duration of project.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A. Allowable Tolerances: 1. Variation in component size: +1/8 inch. 2. Location of openings: +1/8 inch from indicated location.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

SOLID POLYMER FABRICATIONS 06650-2 20150922 02/13/17

B. Solid polymer fabrications shall meet ISO (International Organization for Standardization) 14025: Environmental Product Declarations (EPD): Type III Labels certification.

1.06 WARRANTY:

A. Provide manufacturer's warranty against defects in materials, fabrication and installation, excluding damages caused by physical or chemical abuse or excessive heat. Warranty shall provide for replacement or repair of material and labor for a period of ten years, beginning at Grand Opening.

B. For fabrications with installed warranty coverage, identify by affixing manufacturer's fabrication/installation source plate. Maintain surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's care and maintenance instructions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 SOLID POLYMER FABRICATIONS:

A. Specified Product: E. I. du Pont de Nemours & Co., Inc., Corian® Surfaces.

B. Material: Cast, filled, acrylic; not coated, laminated or of composite construction, meeting ANSI Z124 1980, Type Six, and FS WW-P-541E/GEN dated August 1, 1980.

C. Material shall have minimum physical and performance properties specified.

D. Superficial damage to a depth of 1/32 inch shall be repairable by sanding or polishing.

E. Material: 1. Countertop: Material thicknesses: 3/4 inch. 2. Integral bowl: Model 810. 3. Endsplash: Material thickness: 1/2”.

F. Colors: 1. Countertop: Ecru. 2. Bowl: Vanilla.

2.02 ACCESSORY PRODUCTS

A. Adhesives and sealants: Use adhesives that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

B. Joint Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard two-part adhesive kit to create inconspicuous, non-porous joints by chemical bond.

C. Sealant: Manufacturer's standard mildew-resistant, FDA, UL listed silicone sealant in colors matching components.

D. Conductive Tape: 3M® aluminum foil tape, 4 mils thick, for use with cutouts near heat sources.

E. Insulating Felt Tape: Manufacturer's standard for use with conductive tape in insulating solid polymer from adjacent heat source.

2.03 FABRICATION:

A. Factory fabricate components to greatest extent practical to sizes and shapes indicated, in accordance with approved shop drawings and manufacturer's printed Instructions and technical bulletins.

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

06650-3 SOLID POLYMER FABRICATIONS 02/13/17 20150922

B. Form joints between components using manufacturer's standard joint adhesive; without conspicuous joints. Reinforce with strip of CORIAN® acrylic material, 2" wide.

C. Provide factory cutouts for plumbing fittings and bath accessories as indicated on the Drawings.

D. Rout and finish component edges with clean, sharp returns. Rout cutouts, radii and contours to template. Smooth edges. Repair or reject defective and inaccurate work.

E. Finish: Provide surfaces with a uniform finish. Matte: Gloss range of 5-20.

F. Cove Backsplash: Fabricate backsplashes using 1/2 inch CORIAN® acrylic material. Create 1/2 inch radius cove at intersection of counters and backsplashes.

G. Provide counter top complete with backsplash and endsplashes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install components plumb, level and rigid, scribed to adjacent finishes, in accordance with approved shop drawings and product data.

B. Form field joints using manufacturer's recommended adhesive, with joints inconspicuous in finished work. Reinforce joints as required.

C. Adhere sinks and lavatory bowls to tops using manufacturer's recommended sealant, adhesive and mounting hardware. (Technical Bulletin H-16307)

D. Provide backsplashes and endsplashes as indicated on the Drawings. Adhere to tops using manufacturer's standard color matched silicone sealant.

E. Keep components clean during installation. Remove adhesives, sealants and other stains. Keep clean until Date of Substantial Completion. Replace stained and damaged components.

F. Make plumbing connections to sinks in accordance with Division 15, Mechanical.

G. Protect surfaces from damage until Date of Substantial Completion. Repair work or replace damaged work which cannot be repaired to Architect's satisfaction.

END OF SECTION

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

SOLID POLYMER FABRICATIONS 06650-4 20150922 02/13/17

Page left intentionally blank

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

07210-1 BUILDING INSULATION 02/13/17 20150922

SECTION 07210 - BUILDING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Insulation under slabs-on-grade. 2. Concealed building insulation. 3. Ceiling insulation. 4. Wall insulation.

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 for surface burning characteristics and other method indicated with product, by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

B. Building insulation shall meet Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Standards Technical Panels (STP) 115: Sustainability of Thermal Insulation (Third-party International Organization for Standardization 14025, En- vironmental Product Declarations Type III Labels certification).

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 INSULATING MATERIALS

A. General: Provide insulating materials that comply with requirements and with referenced standards and, for preformed units, in sizes to fit applications indicated, selected from manufacturer’s standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths.

B. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, Type IV, 25 psi compressive strength, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indices of 75 and 450, respectively, min. R-4/inch. 1. Location: Below slab-on-grade and recessed slab-on-grade at freezer locations.

C. Ceiling and wall insulation: Mineral-fiber blanket insulation consisting of fibers manufactured from glass. 1. Un-faced Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indices of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics; thickness to provide R-19 thermal resistance. a. Locations: above suspended ceilings and in interior wall cavities. 2. Faced Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type III, Class A; Category 1, faced with foil- scrim or foil-scrim-polyethylene vapor-retarder membrane on one face; thickness to provide R-19 thermal resistance. a. Locations: at exterior perimeter walls.

2.02 AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS

A. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation and substrates.

B. Calking Compound: Material approved by manufacturer of safing insulation for sealing joint between foil backing of safing insulation and edge of concrete floor slab against penetration of smoke.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

BUILDING INSULATION 07210-2 20150922 02/13/17

C. Safing Clips: Galvanized steel safing clips approved by manufacturer of safing insulation for holding safing insulation in place.

2.03 INSULATION FASTENERS

A. Adhesively Attached, Spindle-Type Anchors: Plate welded to projecting spindle; capable of holding insulation of thickness indicated securely in position indicated with self-locking washer in place; and complying with the following requirements: 1. AGM Industries, Inc.; Series T TACTOO Insul-Hangers. 2. Eckel Industries of Canada; Stic-Klip Type N Fasteners. 3. Gemco; Spindle Type.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install insulation to comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application indicated. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.

B. Install perimeter insulation on vertical surfaces by setting units in adhesive. 1. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 24 inches below exterior grade line. 2. Protect below-grade insulation on vertical surfaces from damage during backfilling by applying protection board set in adhesive.

C. Protect top surface of perimeter under slab insulation from damage during concrete work by applying protection board.

D. Installation of General Building Insulation: Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units. 1. Install mineral-fiber insulation in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements: a. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends. b. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. 2. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches support un-faced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping stapling flanges to flanges of metal studs. 3. Stuff glass-fiber loose-fill insulation into miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where shown. Com- pact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft.

E. Install insulation on concrete or concrete masonry substrates by adhesively attached, spindle-type insulation anchors as follows: 1. Fasten insulation anchors to concrete substrates with insulation anchor adhesive according to anchor manufacturer's written instructions. Space anchors according to insulation manufacturer's written instructions for insulation type, thickness, and application indicated.

3.02 PROTECTION

A. General: Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

07210-3 BUILDING INSULATION 02/13/17 20150922

END OF SECTION 07210

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

BUILDING INSULATION 07210-4 20150922 02/13/17

Page left intentionally blank

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

07920-1 JOINT SEALANTS 02/13/17 20150922

SECTION 07920 - JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes joint sealants for the following applications: 1. Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal non-traffic surfaces. 2. Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces. 3. Horizontal construction and contraction joints in concrete floor slabs and pavements. 4. Joints in concrete curbs. 5. Perimeter of doors, windows and other framed wall openings 6. Bed joints for sills, thresholds, flanges and similar items requiring sealant. 7. Any joint where watertight or weathertight sealing is required.

B. The work specified herein includes: 1. Repair and modification to an existing structure. 2. New work. 3. Coordination and scheduling of repairs, modifications and new work. 4. Matching, integration and connection of repairs, modifications and new work.

C. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glazing sealants. 2. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for sealing perimeter joints of gypsum board partitions to reduce sound transmission. 3. Division 9 Section "Ceramic Tile" for sealing tile joints. 4. Division 9 Section "Acoustical Tile Ceilings" for sealing edge moldings at perimeters of acoustical ceilings.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Sealant Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Use sealant manufacturer’s standard test methods to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates.

B. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to joint-sealant manufacturers, for testing indicated below, samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants.

C. Joint sealants shall meet ISO (International Organization for Standardization) 14025: Environmental Product Declarations (EPD): Type III Labels certification.

1.04 WARRANTY

A. Special Installer's Warranty: 1. Installer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty:

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

JOINT SEALANTS 07920-2 20150922 02/13/17

1. Manufacturer's standard form in which elastomeric sealant manufacturer agrees to furnish elastomeric joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 2. Warranty Period: Twenty (20) years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Sealants and sealant primers used inside the weatherproofing system shall comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):

1. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L. 2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. 3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.

B. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

C. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.02 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS

A. Elastomeric Sealants, General: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates. 1. Suitability for Immersion in Liquids. Where elastomeric sealants are indicated for Use I for joints that will be continuously immersed in liquids, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1247 and qualify for the length of exposure indicated by reference to ASTM C 920 for Class 1 or 2. Liquid used for testing sealants is deionized water, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where elastomeric sealants are indicated for joints that will come in repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600.

B. Single-Component Mildew-Resistant Acid-Curing Silicone Sealant: 1. Products: a. Dow Corning Corporation; 786 Mildew Resistant. b. GE Silicones; Sanitary SCS1700. c. Tremco; Tremsil 200 White. 2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). 3. Class: 25. 4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). 5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.

C. Multicomponent Nonsag Urethane Sealant: 1. For joints not subject to traffic and requiring additional movement capability, provide one of the following: a. Products: 1) Pecora Corporation, Dynatrol II 2) Sika Corporation, Inc.; Sikaflex - 2c NS TG. 3) Sonneborn, Division of ChemRex Inc.; NP 2. 4) Tremco; Vulkem 227. 5) Tremco; Vulkem 322 DS. 2. Type and Grade: M (multicomponent) and NS (nonsag). 3. Class: 25.

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

07920-3 JOINT SEALANTS 02/13/17 20150922

4. Additional Movement Capability: 50% movement in extension and 50% in compression when tested for adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic movement per ASTM C 719. 5. Uses Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). 6. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.

D. Multicomponent Nonsag Urethane Sealant (ES 4): 1. Products: Pecora Corporation; Dynatred 2. Type and Grade: M (multicomponent) and NS (nonsag). 3. Class: 25. 4. Use Related to Exposure: T (traffic). 5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.

2.03 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS

A. Latex Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 834, Type P, Grade NF.

B. Products: 1. Pecora Corporation; AC-20+. 2. Sonneborn, Division of ChemRex Inc.; Sonolac. 3. Tremco; Tremflex 834.

2.04 SEMI-RIGID POLYUREA JOINT SEALANT (for construction and control joints in slab-on-grade)

A. Products: 1. Metzger/McGuire Spal-Pro RS 65 Semi-Rigid Polyurea Joint Sealant: For use in all concrete floor control joints except walk in coolers and freezers and floors to receive epoxy finish. 2. Metzger/McGuire Spal-Pro RSF Semi-Rigid Polyurea Joint Sealant: For use in all concrete floor control joints in walk in coolers and freezers without epoxy floor finish.

2.05 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING

A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance: 1. Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin) 2. O (open-cell material)

C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.

2.06 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.

C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

JOINT SEALANTS 07920-4 20150922 02/13/17

D. Stain Prevention Film: 1. SPF by Metzger/McGuire. 2. Euco CleanCut by Euclid

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

A. Inspect joints indicated to receive joint sealers, joint fillers, and/or caulking compound for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances and other conditions affecting joint sealer performance. Do not allow joint sealer work to proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost. 2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates, where recommended in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.

D. Stain Preventing Film: Use stain preventing film to protect slab surfaces from contact with semi-rigid joint filler. Follow manufacturer’s application instructions. Do not use tape to protect slab surfaces from contact with semi-rigid joint filler.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Sealant Installation: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

B. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials.

C. Seal and fill contraction, isolation and construction joints in floor slabs and pavements, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings or specified herein.

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

07920-5 JOINT SEALANTS 02/13/17 20150922

D. For interior slabs, use semi-rigid joint filler in contraction and construction joints, and use elastomeric joint sealant in isolation joints, unless noted otherwise.

E. Elastomeric Joint Sealant Installation: 1. General, Unless noted otherwise herein or on the drawings a. Use joint back-up material. b. Tool surface to provide smooth, attractive appearance and geometry recommended by sealant manufacturer. 2. Construction or contraction joints in concrete pavement/exterior slabs on ground. Finish joint surface as indicated in the drawing details.

F. Semi-rigid Joint Filler Installation: 1. Delay installation of semi-rigid joint filler as follows: a. Locations under cases and millwork: Install no sooner than 48 hours before cases are set. b. Locations not under cases and millwork: Install no sooner than 14 days prior to date of Turnover. 2. Do not use joint back-up material (i.e., backer rod, sand, etc.), except below bottom of saw cut shelf in construction joints. 3. Apply joint filler stain preventing film on both sides of joints. 4. Initially fill joints with semi-rigid polyurea joint filler at the earliest point in time permitted by the manufacturer. Completely fill joints in two passes, if needed, to produce a slight crown. 5. Remove excess filler from exposed concrete surface prior to it setting. 6. Add extra filler prior to setting, if needed to prevent depressed areas. 7. After curing, razor off crown so filler is flush with the adjacent concrete surfaces. 8. Immediately remove stain preventing film after shaving joint filler. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for removal. 9. No joint filling is to occur without the supervision and observation of the Owner’s special inspector. 10. Come back just before end of warranty period, or as directed by Owner’s Representative, to repair open or split joints with semi-rigid polyurea joint filler. All repairs to be monitored by the Owner’s special inspector, unless noted otherwise. a. Full Depth Repair 1) Required where the joint filler is shallow (concave or below the adjacent concrete floor surface), where the joint filler has separated from the concrete on both sides of the joint, or where the joint filler is less than full depth as shown in core samples or as shown by random sampling via removal. 2) Remove joint filler material for the full depth of the joint for the length of the joint determined by the Owner’s Representative. Ensure all joint filler residue on joint walls is removed back to clean concrete. 3) Blow out the joint with oil-free compressed air and vacuum clean. 4) Apply joint filler stain preventing film on both sides of joints. 5) Completely fill joint two passes, if needed, to produce a slight crown. 6) After curing, razor off crown so filler is flush with the adjacent concrete surfaces. 7) Immediately remove stain preventing film after shaving joint filler. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for removal. b. Partial Depth Repair 1) Required where splits in the joint material are visible or the joint material has separated from the concrete on one side of the joint, but the criteria for full depth repair are not met. a) Remove the top ½ inch minimum of joint filler for the length of the joint determined by the Owner’s Representative. Ensure all joint filler residue on joint walls is removed back to clean concrete. b) Blow out the joint with oil-free compressed air and vacuum clean. c) Apply joint filler stain preventing film on both sides of joints. d) Completely fill joint producing a slight crown. e) After curing, razor off crown so filler is flush with the adjacent concrete surfaces. f) Immediately remove stain preventing film after shaving joint filler. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for removal.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

JOINT SEALANTS 07920-6 20150922 02/13/17

G. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints.

H. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

I. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Joint Configuration: Concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193 unless otherwise indicated.

J. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.

3.04 PROTECTION AND CLEANING

A. Protect joint materials during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances or from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that curing is ensured per manufacturer’s recommendations without deterioration or damage at time of substantial completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint materials immediately and refill joints with new materials to produce joint materials installations with required areas indistinguishable for original work.

B. Clean off excess joint materials or smears adjacent to joints as work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint material and of products in which joints occur.

C. Immediately prior to sealing/filing, clean joints to full depth of sealant/filler in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

D. Remove form release agent, curing compound or other contaminants.

END OF SECTION 07920

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

08110-1 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 02/13/17 20150922

SECTION 08110 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. The extent of the work specified herein is shown on the drawings,

B. The work specified herein includes steel doors, door frames and window frames.

C. The work specified herein includes: 1. Repair and modification to an existing structure. 2. New work. 3. Coordination and scheduling of repairs, modifications and new work. 4. Matching, integration and connection of repairs, modifications and new work.

D. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Section 08711 – Door Hardware. 2. Section 08800 – Glazing.

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Steel Door and Frame Standard: Comply with ANSI A 250.8, unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Ceco Door Products; a United Dominion Company. 2. Curries Company. 3. Pioneer Industries, Inc. 4. Republic Builders Products. 5. Steelcraft; a division of Ingersoll-Rand.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 366/A 366M, Commercial Steel (CS), or ASTM A 620/A 620M, Draw- ing Steel (DS), Type B; stretcher-leveled standard of flatness.

B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 569/A 569M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.

C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with an A40 zinc- iron-alloy (galvannealed) coating; stretcher-leveled standard of flatness.

2.03 DOORS

A. Interior Doors: 1. Complying with ANSI 250.8 for level and model and ANSI A250.4 for physical endurance level indicated. 2. Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B, Model 2 (Seamless).

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110-2 20150922 02/13/17

2.04 FRAMES

A. General: Comply with ANSI A250.8; concealed fastenings, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Frame Steel Sheet Thickness: 0.067 inch (18 gage) for Level 3 steel doors.

C. Door Silencers: Three silencers on single-door frames and two silencers on double-door frames.

D. Plaster Guards: 0.016-inch thick, steel sheet plaster guards or mortar boxes to close off interior of openings.

E. Supports and Anchors: Not less than 0.042-inch thick zinc-coated steel sheet.

1. Masonry Wall Anchors: 0.177-inch diameter, steel wire complying with ASTM A 510 may be used in place of steel sheet.

F. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: 1. Provide manufacturer's standard units. 2. Zinc-coat items that are to be built into exterior walls according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C or D as applicable.

2.05 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate steel door and frame units to comply with ANSI A250.8 free from defects including warp and buckle. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer’s plant.

B. Interior Door Faces: Fabricate exposed faces of doors and panels, including stiles and rails of non-flush units, from cold-rolled steel sheet.

C. Core Construction: Vertical steel stiffeners with fiberglass insulation between stiffeners.

D. Clearances for Non-Fire-Rated Doors: Not more than 1/8 inch at jambs and heads, except not more than ¼ inch between pairs of doors. Not more than ¾ inch at bottom.

E. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117.

F. Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed hardware according to final door hardware schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI A250.6 and ANSI A115 Series specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware.

G. Frame Construction:

1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped and continuously welded corners and seamless face joints. Provide temporary spreader bars.

H. Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface-applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface-applied hardware may be done at Project site.

I. Locate hardware as indicated, or, if not indicated, according to ANSI A250.8.

J. Glazing Stops: Manufacturer’s standard, formed from 0.032-inch thick steel sheet.

1. Provide non-removable stops on secure side of interior doors for glass, louvers, and other panels in doors. 2. Provide screw-applied, removable, glazing stops on inside of glass, louvers, and other panels in

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

08110-3 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 02/13/17 20150922

doors.

2.06 FINISHES

A. Comply with NAAMM’s “Metal Finishes Manual” for recommendations relative to applying and designating finishes.

B. Comply with SPC-PA 1, “Paint Application Specification No. 1,” for steel sheet finishes.

C. Apply primers and organic finishes to doors and frames after fabrication.

D. Galvanized Steel Sheet Finishes:

1. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces with non-petroleum solvent so that surfaces are free of oil or other contaminants. After cleaning, apply a conversion coating of the type suited to the organic coating applied over it. Clean welds, mechanical connections, and abraded areas, and apply galvanizing repair paint specified below to comply with ASTM A780.

a. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for re-galvanizing welds in galvanized steel, with dry film containing not less than 94 percent zinc dust by weight, and complying with DOD-P-21035 or SSPC-Paint 20.

2. Baked-Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pre-treating, apply manufacturer’s standard 2- coat, baked-enamel finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat, with a minimum dry film thickness of 1 mil for topcoat. Comply with paint manufacturer’s instructions for applying and baking to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils.

a. Color and Gloss: As Selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range of choices for color and gloss.

E. Steel Sheet Finishes:

1. Surface Preparation: Solvent-clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1 to remove dirt, oil, grease, and other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel to comply with SSPC-SP 5 (White Metal Blast Cleaning) or SSPC-SP 8 (Pickling).

2. Pre-treatment: Immediately after surface preparation, apply a conversion coating of type suited to organic coating applied over it.

3. Baked-Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning and preparation, apply manufacturer’s standard 2- coat, baked-enamel finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat that complies with ANSI A 250.3. Comply with paint manufacturer’s instructions for applying and baking to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils.

a. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range of choices for color and gloss.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Placing Frames: Comply with provisions in SDI 105, unless otherwise indicated. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.

1. Wall Anchors: Provide at least three anchors per jamb. For openings 90 inches or more in height, in-

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110-4 20150922 02/13/17

stall an additional anchor at hinge and strike jambs.

2. Gypsum Board Partitions: For in-place partitions, install knock-down, drywall slip-on frames.

B. Door Installation: 1. Comply with ANSI A250.8. Shim as necessary to comply with SDI 122 and ANSI/DHI A115.1G. 2. Smoke Control Doors: Install to comply with NFPA 105.

C. After installation, remove protective wrappings from doors and frames and touch up prime coat with compatible air-drying primer.

END OF SECTION 08110

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

08210-1 WOOD DOORS 02/13/17 20150922

SECTION 08210 - WOOD DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Included in this section are requirements for wood doors.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. Comply with applicable portions of the following standards for wood doors: 1. Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) "Quality Standards and Guide Specifications". 2. National Wood Window and Door Association (NWWDA). NWWDA Industry Standards I.S.1 series. 3. Sustainable Forestry Initiative Standard (SFIS). 4. Forest Stewardship Council Standard (FSC) – FSC-STD-40-004 V2-0. 5. American Tree Farm System (ATFS) – AFF Standard.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Wood doors shall meet Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Standards Technical Panels STP 102: Sustainability of Swinging Door Leafs Panels (Third-party International Organization for Standardization 14025, Environmental Product Declarations Type III Labels certification).

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of door indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and other pertinent data.

1. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. 2. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL

A. Certified Wood: Fabricate doors with cores and veneers produced from wood obtained from forests certified by one of the following third party organizations: 1. SFI (Sustainable Forestry Initiative). 2. SFC (Sustainable Forestry Council). 3. SFM (CSA Sustainable Forest Management). 4. AFS (American Tree Farm System)

B. Low-Emitting Materials: Fabricate doors with adhesives and composite wood products that do not contain urea formaldehyde. Use glues and adhesives that have a VOC content of 30 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

WOOD DOORS 08210-2 20150922 02/13/17

2.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Wood doors conforming to the standards referenced in this section and the requirements listed below are acceptable from any manufacturer.

2.03 COMPONENTS

A. Solid Core Wood Doors: 1. Core: Mat formed particle board meeting requirements of ANSI A208.1, Grade #1-LD-1. 2. Stiles: Minimum 1" width mill-option softwood. 3. Top Rail: Minimum 1-1/8" width mill-option softwood. 4. Bottom Rail: Minimum 2-1/4" width mill-option softwood. 5. Faces: 3 ply, 1/8" thick plain sliced Birch hardwood plywood, stain grade. 6. Lock Blocks: Not required. 7. Adhesives: Type II, water resistant.

B. Accessories: 1. Provide wood stops with appropriate hardware for glazed openings. Stops shall be designed to securely restrain glazing, with profile to overlay and conceal edges of cutouts. Stops shall be factory mitered, finished and marked as to location, and shipped loose with each respective door. 2. Louvers: Provide sightproof stationary louvers for interior doors where indicated, constructed of inverted V-shaped or Y-shaped blades formed of 18 gauge cold-rolled steel. Space blades to provide not less than 20% free air opening.

2.04 FABRICATION

A. Bevel door edge as required for proper function prior to machining for hardware.

B. Provide machining and cut-outs for hardware, louvers and glazed openings as specified in related sections.

2.05 FACTORY FINISHING

A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied, before finishing.

1. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may be omitted on top and bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises.

B. Transparent Finish: 1. All doors to be finished at the factory, with UV cured system with performance properties equivalent to TR- 6 or OP-6 Catalyzed Polyurethane (WDMA), AWS System 10. 2. Factory pre-finished doors to be individually protected at the factory. 3. Final color, build, and sheen to be approved by the Architect.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

A. Prior to installation, examine surfaces designated to receive work described in this Section for conditions adversely affecting the finished work. Repair or replace surfaces not meeting tolerances or quality requirements governing substrate construction prior to initiating this work.

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

08210-3 WOOD DOORS 02/13/17 20150922

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install wood doors in accordance with approved shop drawings and requirements of authority having jurisdiction.

B. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and within the following clearances: 1. Jambs and heads: 1/8 inch. 2. Bottoms: 3/8 inch above threshold or finish floor.

C. Install rated doors, hardware and accessories in accordance with requirements of NFPA 80-A.

D. Install glazing as specified in related Section.

E. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site.

F. Check door operation and adjust door hardware after door installation.

G. Replace doors which do not meet specified fabrication tolerances.

3.03 CLEANING UP

A. During the progress of the work, the premises shall be kept free of debris and waste. Upon completion, remove from the site and dispose of all debris and surplus materials in a lawful manner.

B. At completion of work, touch up minor damage to adjacent construction and prefinished surfaces to the satisfaction of the Architect of Record. Replace materials damaged or stained during installation. Protect completed work until final acceptance by Owner.

END OF SECTION

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

WOOD DOORS 08210-4 20150922 02/13/17

Page left intentionally blank

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

08311-1 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 02/13/17 20150922

SECTION 08311 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Access doors and frames for walls and ceilings.

B. See Division 8 Section “Door Hardware” for mortise or rim cylinder locks and master keying.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

1. Hot-Dip Galvanized Steel: Coat to comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M for steel and iron products and ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel and iron hardware.

B. Steel Sheet:

1. Hot-Rolled: ASTM A569/A 569M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, and surface defects; pickled and oiled.

2. Cold-Rolled: ASTM A366/A 366M, Commercial Steel (CS), or ASTM A 620/A 620M, Drawing Steel (DS), Type B: stretcher-leveled standard of flatness.

a. Electrolytic zinc-coated steel sheet, complying with ASTM A591/A 591M, Class C coating, may be substituted at fabricator’s option.

3. Electrolytic Zinc Coated: ASTM A591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS), with Class C coating and phosphate treatment to prepare surface for painting.

4. Metallic Coated: ASTM 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B, with A60 zinc-iron-alloy (galvannealed) coating or G60 mill-phosphatized zinc coating; stretcher-leveled standard of flatness.

C. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B209, alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated, with not less than the strength and durability properties of alloy 5005- H15.

D. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D.

E. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, alloy 6063-T6.

F. Aluminum-Alloy Rolled Tread Plate: ASTM B 632/B 632M, alloy 6061-T6.

G. Drywall Beads: Edge trim formed from 0.0299-inch zinc-coated steel sheet formed to receive joint compound and in size to suit thickness of gypsum panels indicated.

H. Paint:

1. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Fast-curing, lead and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 08311-2 20150922 02/13/17

complying with performance requirements in FS TT-P-664; selected for good resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, compatibility with finish paint systems indicated, and capability to provide sound foundation for field-applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure.

2. Shop Primer for Metallic-Coated Steel: Organic zinc-rich primer complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with topcoat.

3. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for re-galvanizing welds in steel, complying with SSPC-Paint 20.

2.02 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Cesco Products.

2. Karp Associates, Inc.

3. Milcor Limited Partnership.

B. Flush Access Doors and Frames with Exposed Trim:

1. Material: Zinc-coated steel sheet. 2. Locations: Walls and ceiling. 3. Door: Minimum 0.060-inch thick sheet metal, set flush with exposed face flange of frame. 4. Frame: Minimum 0.060 thick sheet metal with ¾-inch wide, surface mounted trim at back of house and flush trim at GWB ceilings. 5. Hinges: Continuous piano hinge. 6. Latch (interior applications): Screwdriver-operated cam latch.

2.03 FABRICATION

A. Latching Mechanisms: Furnish number required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane when closed.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Advise installers of other work about specific requirements relating to access door and floor door installation, including sizes of openings to receive access door and frame, as well as locations of supports, inserts, and anchoring devices.

B. Set frames accurately in position and attach securely to supports with plane of face panels aligned with adjacent finish surfaces.

C. Adjust doors and hardware after installation for proper operation.

END OF SECTION 08311

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

08350-1 IMPACT DOORS 02/13/17 20150922

SECTION 08350 - IMPACT DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Monolithically (one piece) formed, insulated, impact door systems with spring bumpers and windows. 2. Hardware and accessories

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 08110 – Steel Metal Frames 2. Section 09260 – Gypsum Wall Board Assemblies.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Reference Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures; submit the following items: 1. Product information in print formats. 2. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication details and include door elevations, head, jamb and meeting stile details including full gaskets. 3. Samples: Full range of manufacturer's standard color selections for panel. 4. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals: a. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions. 5. Closeout Submittals: a. Cleaning and Maintenance instructions b. Warranty

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer Qualifications: Minimum 5 years experience in producing doors of the type specified.

1.04 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver product in manufacturer's original unopened packages with label legible and intact.

B. Examine doors upon delivery for damage. Verify doors were shipped on edge or in upright position as indicated on packaging by manufacturer.

C. Store doors at project site on edge or in upright position and under cover following manufacturer's instructions printed on carton.

1.05 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

A. Existing Conditions: Frames installed, under other sections, shall be level and plumb.

1.06 WARRANTY

A. One year from Date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, No Substitutions

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

IMPACT DOORS 08350-2 20150922 02/13/17

1. Approved Manufacturer: Chase Industries, Inc. (DBA Chase Doors) Durus Products, 2809 SW 13th Street, Redmond, OR 97756; Telephone: (800) 543-4455; Fax: (800) 285-0126.

2.02 IMPACT DOOR TYPE A: Durulite Retailer “R25”

A. Door Panel: 1. Monolithic, hollow shell of high impact, cross-linked polyethylene with minimum wall thickness of 1/8", overall panel thickness of 3-3/4" and textured finish. 2. Leading and bottom edges have molded in key extrusion to accept gaskets. The back edge has an extruded aluminum spine with a keyway that accepts a blade gasket. The top leading edge has a 3/4" radius. 3. Color shall be black.

B. Door Panel Core 1. 3-1/2” thick, foamed-in-place, non-CFC urethane foam bonded to interior of the high density, cross- linked polyethylene shell providing an insulating R factor of 25.

C. Standard Hinge System: consists of the following components: 1. Upper hinge: self-closing "V" cam design; 1-3/8" standard rise. The roller assembly design shall allow up and down adjustments to the door. Upper hinge seal shall be semi-rigid black PVC wrapped around a rigid PVC cup that moves vertically with the door panel. Hinge and Seal are mounted to a Stainless Steel mounting plate. 2. Lower hinge: cast aluminum lower hinge adapter with UHMW sleeve. 3. Hinge Shaft: 1” diameter x 1/8” wall tubular steel, mounted in the top and bottom of the aluminum back spine and fastened by screws on the inside of the spine. The tube steel rests in the UHMW sleeve, which is mounted in the lower hinge guard. The Roller Assembly mounts to the top of the tube steel and rests on the V-Cam. 4. Panels shall be manufactured with a one-piece back edge spine of continuous extruded aluminum with flanges that wrap the door panel. Spine shall be power coated black.

D. Vision Panel: 1. Double pane. Each window glazing shall be 1/8" thick polycarbonate with a PVC cap separator placed between two 1/8” thick ABS frames. Maximum height from finish floor to the bottom of the viewing area shall not exceed 43.”

E. Gaskets: 1. Gaskets shall be 55 to 70 durometer extruded black PVC fitted into matching, pre-formed gasket key and held by friction. Gaskets have wings, which seal against the door surface. a. Fully Gasketed: a blade-type gasket is used on the leading edge, the bottom edge and between the back edge of the door and jamb. Top seal is a co-extruded PVC extrusion with flexible PVC gasket and is mounted to the header.

2.03 IMPACT DOOR TYPE B: Durulite Retailer.

A. Door Panel: 1. Monolithic, hollow shell of high impact, cross-linked polyethylene with minimum wall thickness of 1/8", overall panel thickness of 1-1/2" and textured finish. 2. Leading edge has molded in key extrusion to accept gaskets. Bottom and back edges are fitted with an aluminum nosing which will accept gasket. The top edge has a 1/8” radius. 3. Color shall be black.

B. Door Panel Core 1. 1-1/2” thick, Panel Core: shall be of a non-CFC urethane foam bonded to interior of the high density cross linked polyethylene shell providing an insulating R factor of 9.86.

C. Standard Hinge System: consists of the following components:

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

08350-3 IMPACT DOORS 02/13/17 20150922

1. Upper hinge: self-closing "V" cam design; [1-3/8" standard rise]. The fully composite VCam roller assembly resists corrosion and rust. Upper hinge seal shall be semi-rigid black PVC wrapped around a rigid PVC cup that mounts directly to the VCam assembly and moves vertically with the door panel.. 2. Lower hinge: solid cast aluminum lower hinge adapter with UHMW sleeve. 3. Hinge Shaft: 1” diameter tubular steel, which runs the full length of the door and rests in the UHMW Sleeve which is mounted in the Lower Hinge Adapter. The Roller Assembly mounts to the top of the tube steel and rests on the V-Cam.

D. Vision Panel: 1. Single pane. Each window glazing shall be 1/8" thick polycarbonate. Maximum height from finish floor to the bottom of the viewing area shall not exceed 43.”

2.04 ACCESSORIES

A. Polyethylene Spring Bumpers: 1. 3" projection, height shall be 36". 2. Color: Black.

2.05 FABRICATION

A. Appropriate size panel is roto-molded with back edge 1” round steel tube (Hinge Shaft), and leading edge gasket extrusions in place. Panel is then foamed with non-CFC urethane. The panel is then trimmed, drilled, fit with hardware, vision panel, gasketing and required options installed. Completed door is serialized and packaged with hinge mounting hardware kit.

B. Complete unit to be assembled at factory, neat in appearance, free from defects and warping.

2.06 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Tolerances: 1. Width and height of each panel: +/-1/4 inch. 2. Maximum allowable deflection shall meet industry standards of a ¼” per 36.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that opening is ready to receive work and opening dimensions and clearances are as indicated on drawings.

B. Coordinate with responsible entity to perform corrective work on unsatisfactory conditions.

C. Commencement of work by installer is acceptance of opening conditions.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Follow manufacturer's instructions. Coordinate sequence of installation with other work to avoid delays.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

IMPACT DOORS 08350-4 20150922 02/13/17

B. Install doors accurately in their respective frames with clearances, necessary anchors, hardware and accessories according to the manufacturer's data and as specified.

3.03 ADJUSTING

A. Follow manufacturer's instructions as required to: 1. Clean and lubricate operating parts. 2. Adjust to open and close smoothly and freely without binding 3. Check seals for proper fit.

3.04 CLEANING

A. Clean surfaces soiled by work as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Remove surplus materials and debris from the site.

END OF SECTION

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

08361-1 SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 02/13/17 20150922

SECTION 08361 –SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes manually operated sectional door located at Entrance Vestibule.

B. Related Section: 1. Section 05500 "Metal Fabrications" for miscellaneous steel supports. 2. Section 06402 “Interior Architectural Millwork”

1.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General Performance: Sectional doors shall meet performance requirements specified without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction and without requiring temporary installation of reinforcing components.

1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type and size of sectional door and accessory.

B. Shop Drawings: For each installation and for special components not dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's product data. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.

1.04 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.

1.05 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance data.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.

B. Standard for Sectional Doors: Fabricate sectional doors to comply with DASMA 102 unless otherwise indicated.

1.07 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of sectional doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Turnover.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08361-2 20150922 02/13/17

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 ALUMINUM DOOR SECTIONS

A. Sections: Construct door sections with stiles and rails formed from extruded-aluminum shapes. Fabricate sections with stile and rail dimensions and profiles shown on Drawings. Join stiles and rails by welding or with concealed aluminum or nonmagnetic stainless-steel through bolts, full height of door section. Form meeting rails to provide a weathertight-seal joint. Extrusioned members for exterior side (Entrance Vestibule) and interior side (Sales Area) shall visually appear to be identical with no visible and/or applied reinforcing members. 1. Reinforce sections with continuous internal horizontal reinforcement, if required to stiffen door. 2. Provide reinforcement for hardware attachment.

B. Full-Vision Sections: Manufacturer's standard, tubular, aluminum-framed section fully glazed with 6-mm- thick, tempered glass glazing set in vinyl, rubber, or neoprene glazing channel and with removable extruded-vinyl or aluminum stops.

2.02 TRACKS, SUPPORTS, AND ACCESSORIES

A. Tracks: Manufacturer's standard, galvanized-steel track system of configuration indicated, sized for door size and weight, designed for lift type indicated and clearances shown on Drawings. Provide complete track assembly including brackets, bracing, and reinforcement for rigid support of ball-bearing roller guides for required door type and size. Slot vertical sections of track spaced 2 inches (51 mm) apart for door-drop safety device. Slope tracks at proper angle from vertical or design tracks to ensure tight closure at jambs when door unit is closed.

B. Track Reinforcement and Supports: Galvanized-steel track reinforcement and support members. Secure, reinforce, and support tracks as required for door size and weight to provide strength and rigidity without sag, sway, and vibration during opening and closing of doors.

C. Windows: Manufacturer's standard window units of type and size indicated and in arrangement shown. Provide removable stops of same material as door-section frames.

2.03 HARDWARE

A. General: Provide heavy-duty, corrosion-resistant hardware, with hot-dip galvanized, stainless-steel, or other corrosion-resistant fasteners, to suit door type.

B. Hinges: Heavy-duty, galvanized-steel hinges at each end stile and at each intermediate stile, according to manufacturer's written recommendations for door size. Attach hinges to door sections through stiles and rails.

C. Rollers: Heavy-duty rollers with steel ball-bearings in case-hardened steel races, mounted with varying projections to suit slope of track. Provide 3-inch- (76-mm-) diameter roller tires for 3-inch- (76-mm-) wide track and 2-inch- (51-mm-) diameter roller tires for 2-inch- (51-mm-) wide track.

2.04 LOCKING DEVICES

A. Slide Bolt: Fabricate with side-locking bolts to engage through slots in tracks for locking by padlock, located on single-jamb side, operable from inside only.

B. Chain Lock Keeper: Suitable for padlock.

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

08361-3 SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 02/13/17 20150922

2.05 COUNTERBALANCE MECHANISM

A. Torsion Spring: Counterbalance mechanism consisting of adjustable-tension torsion springs mounted on torsion shaft made of steel tube or solid steel. Provide springs designed for number of operation cycles indicated.

B. Cable Drums and Shaft for Doors: Cast-aluminum or gray-iron casting cable drums mounted on torsion shaft and grooved to receive door-lifting cables as door is raised. Mount counterbalance mechanism with manufacturer's standard ball-bearing brackets at each end of torsion shaft.

C. Cables: Galvanized-steel lifting cables.

D. Cable Safety Device: Include, on each side-edge of door, a device designed to automatically stop door if either lifting cable breaks.

E. Bracket: Provide anchor support bracket as required to connect stationary end of spring to the wall and to level the shaft and prevent sag.

F. Provide a spring bumper at each horizontal track to cushion door at end of opening operation.

2.06 MANUAL DOOR OPERATORS

A. Equip door with manufacturer's recommended manual door operator unless another type of door operator is indicated.

B. Push-up Operation: Lift handles and pull rope for raising and lowering doors, with counterbalance mechanism designed so that required lift or pull for door operation does not exceed 25 lbf (111 N)

2.07 DOOR ASSEMBLY

A. Full-Vision Aluminum Sectional Door: Sectional door formed with hinged sections. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, C. H. I. Overhead Doors, Model 3290 or comparable product by one of the following:

a. Amarr Garage Doors. b. Arm-R-Lite. c. Clopay Building Products; a Griffon company. d. Fimbel Architectural Door Specialties. e. General American Door Company. f. Haas Door; a Nofziger company. g. Martin Door Manufacturing. h. Overhead Door Corporation. i. Raynor. j. Rite-Hite Corporation. k. Wayne-Dalton Corp. l. Windsor Republic Doors.

B. Operation Cycles: Not less than 20,000.

C. Aluminum Sections: Full vision.

D. Track Configuration: High-lift track.

E. Windows: 1. ¼” clear tempered glazing for upper rows.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08361-4 20150922 02/13/17

2. At lower row, windows shall be substituted with ½” thick reclaimed wood panels “W7 – Pioneer Millworks Ash Planks – Custom Gray.” See Section 06402

F. Locking Devices: Equip door with slide bolt for padlock and chain lock keeper.

G. Manual Door Operator: Push-up operation.

H. Door Finish: 1. Aluminum Finish: Powder Coat, Oyster White, RAL 1013.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install sectional doors and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports; according to manufacturer's written instructions and as specified.

B. Tracks: Provide sway bracing, diagonal bracing, and reinforcement as required for rigid installation of track and door-operating equipment. Repair galvanized coating on tracks according to ASTM A 780.

C. Adjust hardware and moving parts to function smoothly so that doors operate easily, free of warp, twist, or distortion. Adjust doors and seals to provide tight fit around entire perimeter.

3.02 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain sectional doors.

END OF SECTION 08361

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

08411-1 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 02/13/17 20150922

SECTION 08411 - ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. The extent of the work specified herein is shown on the drawings.

B. Aluminum storefront system work includes: 1. Entrance and storefront systems, complete with reinforcing, fasteners, anchors, and attachment devices. 2. Glass and glazing accessories. 3. Accessories necessary to complete work.

C. Products Furnished But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Anchoring devices which are cast in concrete. 2. Glazing accessories which are part of aluminum framing system.

D. Related Requirements: Comply with following: 1. Perimeter Joint Sealants: Section 07920 - Joint Sealants. 2. Glass and Glazing: Section 08800 - Glazing.

E. Related Sections: 1. Section 07920 - Joint Sealants: Perimeter sealants and backup materials. 2. Section 08800 - Glazing.

1.02 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

A. Design Requirements: Manufacturer: Responsible for designing system, including anchorage to structural system and necessary modifications to meet specified requirements and maintain visual design concepts. 1. Drawings: Diagrammatic and do not purport to identify nor solve problems of thermal or structural movement, glazing, anchorage, or moisture disposal. 2. Unitized framing system of prefabricated nesting or stacking metal frames. 3. Requirements Shown by Details: Establish basic dimension of units, sight lines and profiles of members. 4. Provide entrance and storefront systems, including necessary modifications, to meet specified requirements and maintaining visual design concepts. 5. Assemblies: Free from rattles, wind whistles and noise due to thermal and structural movement and wind pressure. a. Provide for expansion and contraction due to structural movement without detriment to appearance or performance. b. Attachments: Account for site peculiarities and expansion and contraction movements so there is no possibility of loosening, weakening and fracturing connection between units and building structure or between units themselves. c. Anchors, Fasteners and Braces: Structurally stressed not more than 50 percent of allowable stress when maximum loads are applied. d. Provide concealed fastening wherever possible. 6. Glazing Requirements: Comply with Section 08800. 7. Anticipated Live Load Interior Beam Deflections: 1/360 of beam length.

B. Thermal Requirements: 1. Framing Systems: Accommodate expansion and contraction movement due to surface temperature differentials of 180 F ranging from 0 F to 180 F without causing buckling, stress on glass, failure of joint seals, excessive stress on structural elements, reduction of performance, or other detrimental

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411-2 20150922 02/13/17

effects. 2. Deflection Under Uniform Loading: When tested in accordance with ASTM E330 at design pressure, maximum deflection of exterior member shall not exceed L/175 or 3/4 inch maximum for spans under 13 feet – 6 inches and L/240 plus 1/4 inch for spans 13 feet – 6 inches or greater. Maximum deflections of members supporting plaster surfaces shall not exceed 1/360 of its span.

C. Sealant Performance and Requirements: Section 07920.

D. Testing Requirements: Provide components that have been previously tested by independent testing laboratory.

E. Interface With Adjacent Systems: 1. Integrate design and connections with adjacent construction. 2. Accommodate allowable tolerances and deflections for structural members in installation.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit in accordance with Section 01330. 1. Submit Sections 07920 and 08800 submittals simultaneously with submittals for this section.

B. Product Data: 1. Include information for factory finishes, accessories, glass, perimeter sealants and other required components. 2. Include sample of warranty customized for this Project. 3. Include color charts for finish indicating manufacturer's standard colors available for selection.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate fabrication, installation and finish of specified systems. 1. Include Following: a. Fully dimensioned plans and elevations with detail coordination keys. b. Locations of exposed fasteners and joints. 2. Provide Detailed Drawings of: a. Composite members. b. Anchorage. c. Flashing. d. System reinforcements. e. Expansion and contraction provisions. f. Glazing methods and accessories. g. Internal sealant requirements and recommended types. h. Thermal breaks. 3. Schedule of finishes.

D. Changed Condition Drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 01330.

E. Samples: Indicate quality of finish in required colors on alloys used for work, 12 inches long for extrusions and 6 inches square for sheet materials. 1. Where normal texture or color variations are expected, include additional samples illustrating range of variation. 2. Each type of glass, 12 by 12 inch size. 3. Joint sealants for color selection.

F. Informational Submittals: Submit following packaged separately from other submittals: 1. Test Reports for Standard Systems: Certified copies of previous test reports substantiating performance of system in lieu of retesting. Include other supportive data as necessary. 2. Support Reactions Design Data: Submit in accordance with Section 01330

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

08411-3 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 02/13/17 20150922

3. Certifications specified in Quality Assurance article. 4. Manufacturer's instructions.

G. Closeout Submittals: Submit specified warranty in accordance with Section 01770.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Single Source Responsibility: 1. To ensure quality of appearance and performance, obtain materials for systems from either single manufacturer or from manufacturer approved by systems manufacturer. 2. Provide glass, glazing, and perimeter joint sealants for entrance and storefront systems as work of this Section.

B. Installer Qualifications: Certified in writing by system manufacturer as qualified for installation of specified systems.

C. Certifications: 1. Manufacturer's certification that products furnished meet or exceed specified requirements. 2. Manufacturer's certification that sealed insulating glass meets or exceeds specified requirements. 3. Pre engineered system or manufacturer’s engineering certifications for system or engineer of record for the system design.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Comply with Section 01600. 1. Protect finished surfaces as necessary to prevent damage. 2. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings which become firmly bonded when exposed to sun. 3. Do not leave coating residue on any surfaces. 4. Replace damaged units. 5. Glass: Comply with Section 08800.

1.06 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranties: Prepare and submit in accordance with Section 01770. 1. Warranty jointly signed by manufacturer, Installer and Contractor agreeing to repair or replace assemblies which fail in material or workmanship during warranty period of two years. a. If joint warranty not available, issue separate warranties by manufacturer, Installer, and Contractor.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS AND PRODUCTS

A. Acceptable Entrance and Storefront Manufacturers: 1. Kawneer Company, Inc., Norcross, GA. 2. Vistawall Architectural Products, Terrell, TX. 3. US Aluminum Co., Houston, TX 4. YKK AP America, Inc., Atlanta, GA. 5. Accepted Substitute in accordance with Section 01600.

B. Acceptable Entrance and Storefront Products: 1. Storefront and Entrance Framing Systems (SF): Custom framing system conforming to specified requirements with features and design indicated on Drawings. Information and construction information at Drawings are based on the use of:

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411-4 20150922 02/13/17

a. Storefront Windows at Juice Venue: FG-3000 (1” insulated glazing) storefront system as manufactured by Vistawall. b. Windows and Door at Flour Mill: DRS Door Rail System as for ½“ glazing as manufactured by C.R. Laurence Co., Inc.

2.02 FRAMING MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES

A. Aluminum: 1. ASTM B221, alloy 6063-T5 for extrusions; ASTM B209, alloy 5005-H16 for sheets; or other alloys and temper recommended by manufacturer appropriate for specified finish. 2. Minimum thickness of 0.125 inch for framing members and rails, 0.090 inch minimum for sheet trim, flashing, closures, and other sheet goods, and 0.050 inch for glazing stops and similar components.

B. Internal Reinforcement: ASTM A36 for carbon steel; or ASTM B308 for structural aluminum. 1. Shapes and sizes to suit installation. 2. Steel components factory coated with alkyd type zinc chromate primer, FS TT-P-645, applied after fabrication.

C. Anchorage Devices: Manufacturer's standard formed or fabricated steel or aluminum assemblies of shapes, plates, bars or tubes. 1. Hot-dip galvanized steel assemblies after fabrication, ASTM A123, 2.0 ounce minimum coating.

D. Fasteners: Aluminum, non-magnetic stainless steel or other non-corrosive materials compatible with items being fastened. 1. Provide concealed fasteners wherever possible. 2. Exposed Locations: Phillips flathead screws with finish matching item fastened. 3. Concealed Locations: Manufacturer's standard fasteners. 4. At locations where securing dissimilar metals, provide dual alloy fasteners.

E. Expansion Anchor Devices: Drilled-in, expansion bolt anchors.

F. Protective Coatings and Barriers: 1. Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, alkyd-type, bituminous mastic capable of preventing galvanic action between dissimilar metals, free of lead, chromates, or sulfur and containing no asbestos fibers, compounded for 30 mil dry film thickness per coat. 2. Shims: Molded or extruded plastic, establishing sufficient space between dissimilar metals to prevent galvanic action or arcing of current.

G. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Components: Zinc oxide, FS TT-P-641.

H. Weatherstripping: Extruded elastomeric, ASTM C509 or C864.

I. Internal Sealants and Baffles: Types recommended by systems manufacturer.

J. Perimeter Joint Sealant and Backer Rod: Silicone—General Purpose sealant complying with Section 07920 - Joint Sealants. 1. Colors: Standard colors as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. 2. Primer: Comply with Section 07920. 3. Sealant Backing Bond Breaker Rod and Tape: Comply with Section 07920.

2.03 FABRICATION

A. Coordination of Fabrication: 1. Check actual frame openings required in construction work by accurate field measurements before

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

08411-5 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 02/13/17 20150922

fabrication. 2. Fabricate units to withstand loads which will be applied when system is in place.

B. General: Provide each unit of framework continuous. 1. Disassemble only to extent necessary for shipment and installation. 2. Conceal fasteners wherever possible. 3. Reinforce work as necessary for performance requirements, and for support to structure. 4. Form end dams at flashings to prevent water infiltration. 5. Separate dissimilar metals and aluminum in contact with concrete utilizing protective coating or preformed separators which will prevent contact and corrosion. 6. Glass and Glazing: Comply with Section 08800.

C. Aluminum Framing: Provide members of size, shape and profile indicated, designed to provide for glazing from exterior. 1. Provide manufacturer's standard thermal isolation between exterior and interior aluminum extrusions. 2. Components: Fabricate to allow for accurate and rigid fit of joints and corners. a. Match components carefully ensuring continuity of line and design. b. Fabricate frame assemblies with mitered or coped joints. c. Joints and Connections: Flush and weathertight. d. Slip Joints: Full, tight contact and weathertight. e. Maintain accurate relation of planes and angles, with hairline fit of contacting members. 3. Reinforcement: Reinforce to develop full strength and maximum rigidity in framework. Reinforce components at anchorage and support points, at joints, and at attachment points for interfacing work. a. Internal Reinforcement: Provide within framing members where required to maintain rigidity and accommodate design loads. 4. Fabricate framing for expansion and contraction due to temperature changes without detrimental to appearance or performance. 5. Make provisions in framing for minimum edge clearance, nominal edge cover and nominal pocket width for thickness and type of glazing or infill used in accordance with recommendations of manufacturer and GANA Glazing Manual. 6. Allow for adequate clearance around perimeter of system to enable proper installation and for thermal movement within system. 7. Separate dissimilar metals with Protective Coating or preformed separators to prevent contact and corrosion.

D. Welding: Comply with recommendations of American Welding Society (AWS). 1. Use recommended electrodes and methods to avoid distortion and discoloration. 2. Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces; restore mechanical finish.

2.04 FINISHES

A. Anodonic Coating: Vistawall Clear Anodic Coating - 204 R1 Clear II.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Erection Tolerances: 1. Limit Variations from Plumb and Level: a. 1/8 inch in 10 feet vertically. b. 1/8 inch in 20 feet horizontally. 2. Limit Variations from Theoretical Locations: 1/4 inch for any member at any location. 3. Limit Offsets in Theoretical End-To-End and Edge-To-Edge Alignment: 1/16 inch from flush surfaces not more than 2 inches apart or out-of-flush by more than 1/4 inch.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411-6 20150922 02/13/17

B. Aluminum Framing: Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and approved Shop Drawings. 1. Set units plumb, level and true to line, without warp or rack of frame. 2. Anchor securely in place, allowing for required movement, including expansion and contraction. 3. Protective Coating: Separate dissimilar materials at contact points, including metal in contact with masonry or concrete surfaces, with protective coating or preformed separators to prevent contact and corrosion. 4. Set sill members in bed of sealant. Set other members with internal sealants and baffles to provide weathertight construction.

C. Thresholds: Set in full, continuous bed of self-leveling sealant, specified in Section 07920. Mechanically attach to substrate in accordance with manufacturer’s standard requirements.

D. Joint Sealant: Install perimeter joint sealant and backing materials between assemblies and adjacent construction in accordance with Section 07920.

3.02 Glazing: Install glass in preformed glazing gaskets (Dry Method) in accordance with Section 08800.

A. Cleaning: 1. Clean surfaces in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations; remove excess mastic, mastic smears, foreign materials and other unsightly marks. 2. Clean metal surfaces exercising care to avoid damage.

END OF SECTION

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

08461-1 AUTOMATIC SLIDING ENTRANCE DOORS 02/13/17 20150922

SECTION 08461 - AUTOMATIC SLIDING ENTRANCE DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes single sliding and double (bi-parting) sliding automatic entrance door systems for interior applications.

B. See Division 8 Section “Glazing” for glazing requirements for automatic entrance doors.

1.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Provide automatic entrance door systems that have the following capabilities based on testing manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project: 1. Operating Temperature Range: Door operators capable of operating between minus 10 deg F and plus 120 deg F.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer, approved by manufacturer to install and maintain manufacturer’s products.

B. ANSI/BHMA Standard: ANSI/BHMA A156.10, “Power Operated Pedestrian Doors.”

C. UL Standard: Provide power door operators that comply with UL 325.

D. Emergency Exit Door Requirements: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for automatic entrance doors serving as a required means of egress.

E. 2012 International Building Code, Paragraphs 1008.1.3.2 and 1008.1.3.3.

1.04 WARRANTY

A. Special Assembly Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of automatic entrance door system that fail in materials or workmanship, excessive air leakage, faulty operation of operators and hardware, or deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering within three years from date of Substantial Completion.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: For sliding aluminum-framed glass doors. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware, attachments to other work, and operational clearances.

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide:

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

AUTOMATIC SLIDING ENTRANCE DOORS 08461-2 20150922 02/13/17

1. Manufacturer for Automatic Sliding Entrance Doors shall be same manufacturer as provided in Shell building construction. 2. Basis of Design: Model SL500 as manufactured by Besam ASSA ABLOY Entrance Systems, 1900 Airport Road, Monroe, NC 28110; 866.BEASM-87; www.besam-usa.com ; [email protected]

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated. 1. Extruded: ASTM B 221. 2. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209. 3. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10.

B. Glazing: As specified in Division 8 Section “Glazing” for gaskets and sealants required for glass installation at the project site.

C. Sealants and Joint Fillers: Refer to Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants” for joints at perimeter of entrance system.

D. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, premixed, non-metallic, non-corrosive, nonstaining grout; of consistency suitable for application.

E. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied, asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements, except containing no asbestos; formulated for 30-mil thickness per coat.

2.03 AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOOR ASSEMBLIES

A. General: Manufacturer's standard automatic entrance door system, complete with doors, sidelite and transom framing, operators, controls, activation devices, safety devices and accessories as indicated. 1. Configurations: a. Bi-parting sliding door, with flanking sidelights. 1) Traffic pattern: Two-way. 2) Emergency breakaway capability: Door only.

B. Activation Devices:

1. Microwave-scanner motion detector.

C. Operator Safety Devices:

1. Infrared-scanner presence detector.

2.04 COMPONENTS

A. Doors: Manufacturer's standard 1-3/4-inch- thick glazed doors with minimum 0.125-inch- thick, extruded tubular stile and rail members. Fabricate corners with mechanically fastened reinforcing brackets or by welding. Incorporate concealed tie-rods that span full length of top and bottom rails. 1. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Manufacturer’s standard snap-on, extruded-aluminum glazing stops and preformed resilient glazing gaskets. 2. Muntin Bars: Horizontal tubular rail member for each door; match stiles and rails.

B. Framing Members: Fabricate from extruded aluminum or formed-aluminum sheet or plate. 1. Main Extrusions: Minimum wall thickness of 0.125 inch. 2. Extruded Glazing Stops and Applied Trim: Minimum wall thickness of 0.062 inch. 3. Muntin Bars: Horizontal tubular rail member for each door; match stiles and rails.

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

08461-3 AUTOMATIC SLIDING ENTRANCE DOORS 02/13/17 20150922

C. Headers: Fabricated from minimum 0.125-inch- thick extruded aluminum or formed-aluminum sheet or plate. Conceal operator and roller track in header, providing access by means of hinged or removable access panel to permit service and adjustment. Secure panels to prevent unauthorized access. 1. Header Type: Surface mounted, with manufacturer’s standard case and sized to extend full width of door opening.

D. Carrier Assemblies and Overhead Roller Tracks: Manufacturer's standard carrier assembly that allows vertical adjustment; consisting of nylon- or delrin-covered ball-bearing-center steel wheels operating on a continuous roller track, or ball-bearing-center steel wheels operating on a nylon- or delrin-covered continuous roller track. Support doors from carrier assembly by cantilever and pivot assembly. 1. Rollers: Minimum two ball-bearing roller wheels and two anti-rise rollers for each active leaf.

E. Sills: Manufacturer’s standard sill members and bottom guide system, with stainless-steel ball-bearing- center roller wheels, and threshold and configuration indicated below:

1. Configuration: No threshold across door opening and surface-mounted, roller-guide track system at sidelites.

F. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard; compatible with adjacent materials. Provide nonstaining, non-ferrous shims for aligning system components.

G. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, non-staining, non-bleeding; compatible with adjacent materials.

1. Reinforcement: Reinforce members as required to retain fastener threads. 2. Exposed Fasteners: Do not use exposed fasteners, except for hardware application. For hardware application, use countersunk Phillips flat-head machine screws finished to match framing members or hardware being fastened, unless otherwise indicated.

H. Sign: Comply with ANSI/BHMA A156.10.

2.05 DOOR OPERATORS

A. General: Of size recommended by manufacturer for door size, weight, and movement; for condition of exposure; and for long-term, maintenance-free operation under normal traffic load for type of occupancy indicated. 1. Type: Power operated, complying with ANSI/BHMA A156.10. 2. Connections: For power and control wing. 3. Adjustment Features: Fully adjustable without removing entrance doors, including adjustable speed, adjustable time delay for length of time door remains open, and automatic door re-open if stopped while closing. 4. On/Off Feature: On/off/hold-open switch controls electric power to operator.

B. Electromechanical Operators: Self-contained overhead units, with power opening and closing mechanism, with checking in both opening and closing cycles, with safety-release clutch for obstructed closing, and that slides manually when power is off. 1. Closing Mechanism: Power operated. 2. Mounting: Concealed.

2.06 ACTIVATION AND SAFETY DEVICES

A. Microwave-Scanner Motion Detector: Self-contained, microwave-scanner sensing device that activates door operator; that is adjustable to provide detection patterns and sensitivity equivalent to those required for control mats; with time delay for closing set at no less than 1.5 seconds; and with metal or plastic housing in black finish.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

AUTOMATIC SLIDING ENTRANCE DOORS 08461-4 20150922 02/13/17

B. Infrared-Scanner Presence Detectors: Self-contained, infrared-scanner presence-sensing device that activates door operator; that is adjustable to provide detection patterns and sensitivity equivalent to those required for control mats; with metal or plastic housing in black finish.

C. Integrated standby power supply: Provide battery concealed in header and capable of full operation with blackout conditions, including sensor capabilities for minimum of 100 cycles.

2.07 HARDWARE

A. Heavy-Duty Hardware: Provide units as indicated in size, number, and type recommended by manufacturer for entrances required. Finish exposed parts to match door finish unless, otherwise indicated.

B. Emergency Breakaway Hardware: Provide release hardware that allows panel to swing out in direction of egress to full 90 degrees from any position in sliding mode with maximum force required to open panel of 50 lbf according to ANSI/BHMA A156.10. Interrupt operation of breakaway panel operator while in breakaway mode.

C. Deadlocks: Manufacturer's standard mortise hook bolt with 5-ply laminated steel, hook-shaped throw bolt, complying with ANSI/BHMA A156.5, Grade 1 requirements. 1. Mortise Cylinders: Manufacturer’s standard 6-pin, mortise cylinders complying with ANSI/BHMA A15.6.5, Grade 1 requirements, conforming to SFIC format.

D. Compression Weather Stripping: Manufacturer’s standard replaceable, compressible gaskets of molded neoprene or molded PVC. Include bumper-type gaskets at doorstops and laps.

E. Sliding Weather Stripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable weather stripping of wool, polypropylene, or nylon woven pile with nylon-fabric or aluminum-strip backing, complying with AAMA 701.

2.08 FABRICATION

A. Prefabrication: Complete automatic door fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work before shipment to Project site. 1. Perform fabrication operations, including cutting, fitting, forming, drilling, and grinding of metalwork in manner that prevents damage to exposed finish surfaces. For hardware, perform these operations before applying finishes. 2. Prepare components to receive concealed fasteners and anchor and connection devices.

B. Weld components to comply with referenced AWS standard. Weld before finishing components to greatest extent possible. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by de-scaling or grinding.

C. Glazing: Provide minimum clearances for thickness and type of glazing indicated, according to GANA's "Glazing Manual."

D. Metal Protection: Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.

E. Hardware: Install hardware, except surface-mounted hardware, at fabrication plant. Remove only as required for final finishing operation and for delivery to and installation at Project site.

F. Doors: Fabricate doors in profiles indicated. Reinforce as required to support imposed loads and for installing hardware. Factory assemble door and frame units.

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

08461-5 AUTOMATIC SLIDING ENTRANCE DOORS 02/13/17 20150922

G. Framing: Fabricate tubular and channel frame assemblies in configuration indicated, with manufacturer's standard welded or mechanical joints. Provide sub-frames and reinforcement of types indicated or, if not indicated, as needed for a complete system to support required loads.

2.09 FINISHES

A. Color: Clear anodized.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Templates and Diagrams: Furnish templates, diagrams, and other data to fabricators and installers of related work, as necessary for coordinating automatic entrance door installation.

B. Do not install damaged components. Fit frame joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. Rigidly secure non-movement joints. Seal joints watertight.

C. Metal Protection: Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.

D. Entrances: Install entrances plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades without warp or rack of framing members and doors. Anchor securely in place. Lubricate operating hardware and other moving parts. Install surface-mounted hardware using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible.

E. Door Operators: Install door operator system including control wiring. Refer to Division 16 Sections for connection to electrical power distribution system.

F. Activation and Safety Devices: Install control devices and wiring, including connections to door operators, as follows:

1. Microwave-Scanner Motion Detectors: Install scanners on both interior and exterior sides of each sliding automatic entrance door. 2. Infrared-Scanner Presence Detectors: Install scanners on both interior and exterior sides of each sliding automatic entrance door as indicated.

G. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 8 Section “Glazing”.

H. Sealants: Comply with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for installing sealants filers, and gaskets. 1. Set continuous sill members and flashings in full sealant bed to provide weather-tight construction. 2. Seal frame perimeter with sealant to provide weather-tight construction.

I. Adjusting: Adjust door operators, controls, and hardware for smooth and safe operation and for weathertight closure.

3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Inspection: After completing installation, an inspector certified by the American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers shall test and inspect each automatic entrance door for compliance with applicable ANSI/BHMA standards. 1. Inspection Report: Certified inspector shall submit report in writing to Architect and Contractor within 24 hours after inspection.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

AUTOMATIC SLIDING ENTRANCE DOORS 08461-6 20150922 02/13/17

B. Repair or remove and replace work that it does not comply with requirements.

3.03 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage manufacturer’s inspector certified by the American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain automatic entrance doors and door operators.

END OF SECTION 08461

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

08711-1 DOOR HARDWARE 02/13/17 20150922

SECTION 08711 - DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the commercial door hardware.

B. The work specified herein includes: 1. Hardware for new doors and locksets. 2. Coordination of new hardware into existing doors and locksets and if required, provision of new cylinders compatible with specified cores.

C. Whole Foods Market has a national agreement with InstaKey Security Systems for the provision of cores for the final keying configuration and master keying program. Contractor shall coordinate final keying requirements between Whole Foods Market and InstaKey Security Systems and furnish and install all final cores into locksets.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data for each type of product indicated.

B. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as installation procedures and diagrams. Coordinate final door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. 1. Document Review: Review contract documents for inconsistencies and conflicts and advise Architect prior to formal submittal of proposed modifications needed to maintain design and operational intent. 2. On-Site Review: Prior to preparation of submittals, Architectural Hardware Consultant shall visit site to confirm existence of and operation of existing hardware specified to be retained. Architect shall be advised of deficiencies. 3. Format: Use same scheduling sequence and format and use same door numbers as in the Contract Documents. 4. Content: Include the following information: a. Identification number, location, hand, fire rating, size, and material of each door and frame. b. Locations of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings on floor plans and to door and frame schedule. c. Complete designations, including name and manufacturer, type, style, function, size, quantity, function, and finish of each door hardware product.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Supplier of products and an employer of workers trained and approved by product manufacturers and an Architectural Hardware Consultant who is available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door hardware and keying. 1. Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person who is experienced in providing consult- ing services for door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and who is currently certified by DHI as Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC).

B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Where fire-rated door assemblies are indicated, provide door hardware rated for use in assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C, unless otherwise indicated.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

DOOR HARDWARE 08711-2 20150922 02/13/17

C. Means of Egress Doors: Latches do not require more than 15 lbf (67 N) to release the latch. Locks do not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation.

D. Accessibility Requirements: For door hardware on doors in an accessible route, comply with the U.S. Ar- chitectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and applicable requirements of ICC/ANSI A117.1. 1. Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf (22.2 N). 2. Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements: a. Interior, Non-Fire-Rated Hinged Doors: 5 lbf (22.2 N) applied perpendicular to door. b. Sliding or Folding Doors: 5 lbf (22.2 N) applied parallel to door at latch. c. Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. Provide thresholds not more than 1/2 inch (13 mm) high and 3/4 inch (19 mm) high for exterior sliding doors. 4. Adjust door closer sweep periods so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches (75 mm) from the latch, measured to the leading edge of the door.

E. Keying Conference: Conduct telephone conference with key supplier to comply with requirements in Sec- tion 013100 "Project Management and Coordination.” Notify Architect once conference has been accomplished.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product named for each door hardware item indicated in Door Hardware Sets.

2.02 DOOR HARDWARE

A. Scheduled Door Hardware: Provide door hardware according to Door Hardware Sets scheduled on the drawings.

2.03 PIVOTS AND HINGES

A. Manufacturers: 1. Hinges: a. Hager Companies (H). b. McKinney Products Company; Div. of ESSEX Industries, Inc. (MCK). c. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works (STH).

B. General: Except for hinges and pivots to be installed entirely (both leaves) into wood doors and frames, provide only template-produced units.

C. Non-removable Pins: Provide screw in hinge barrel that prevents removal of pin while door is closed; for out-swinging corridor doors with locks.

D. Screws: Phillips flat-head screws; screw heads finished to match surface of hinges.

2.04 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES

A. Manufacturer: Best Lock Corporation (BLC), compatible with small core interchangeable format.

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

08711-3 DOOR HARDWARE 02/13/17 20150922

B. Bored Lockset Design: As scheduled

C. Dummy Trim: Match knob lock trim and escutcheons.

D. Lock Throw: Comply with labeled fire door requirements.

E. Backset: 2-3/4 inches (70 mm), unless otherwise indicated.

2.05 BOLTS

A. Fire-Rated Doors: Comply with labeled fire door requirements.

B. Flush Bolts: 1. BHMA Grade 1, unless Grade 2 is indicated, designed for mortising into door edge. 2. Manufacturer: H. B. Ives (IVS).

2.06 OPERATING TRIM

A. Push-Pull Design: 1. As scheduled. 2. Manufacturer: Rockwood

2.07 CLOSERS

A. Surface-Mounted Closers: LCN Closers; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (LCN).

2.08 PROTECTIVE TRIM UNITS

A. Protective Trim Units: Sized 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) less than door width on push side and ½ inch (13 mm) less than door width on pull side, by height scheduled or indicated. Fasten with exposed machine or self- tapping screws. 1. Material: Metal. 2. Manufacturer: Rockwood Manufacturing Company.

2.09 STOPS AND BUMPERS

A. Stops and Bumpers: BHMA A156.16 , Grade 1.

B. Silencers for Metal Door Frames: 1. BHMA A156.16, Grade 1; neoprene or rubber, minimum diameter 1/2 inch (13 mm); fabricated for drilled-in application to frame. 2. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer: Rockwood.

C. Silencers for Door Frames: Neoprene or rubber, fabricated for drilled-in application to frame.

2.10 DOOR GASKETING AND THRESHOLDS

A. Door Gasketing: 1. Provide continuous smoke, light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated or scheduled. Provide non-corrosive fasteners. 2. Manufacturer, Gasketing & Door Bottoms: National Guard Products, Inc. (NGP). 3. Air Leakage: Not to exceed 0.50 cfm per foot (0.000774 cu. m/s per m) of crack length for gasketing other than for smoke control, as tested according to ASTM E 283.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

DOOR HARDWARE 08711-4 20150922 02/13/17

4. Smoke-Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 105 that are listed and labeled, based on testing according to UL 1784.

5. Fire-Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled, based on testing according to UL 10B or NFPA 252.

6. Sound-Rated Gasketing: Assemblies that are listed and labeled, based on testing according to ASTM E 1408.

7. Gasketing Materials: Comply with ASTM D 2000 and AAMA 701/702.

B. Thresholds: 1. Of type scheduled or indicated. 2. Manufacturers: National Guard Products, Inc. (NGP).

2.11 MISCELLANEOUS DOOR HARDWARE

A. Boxed Power Supplies: Modular unit in NEMA ICS 6, Type 4 enclosure; filtered and regulated; and listed and labeled for use with fire alarm systems.

2.12 CYLINDERS, KEYS, AND STRIKES

A. Cylinders: Tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver.

1. Manufacturer: Best Lock Corporation 2. Cylinders: Compatible with removable, small format interchangeable core format.

B. Cores: 1. Manufacturer: InstaKey Security System. 2. Finish: Face of core to match lockset. 3. Format: Removable cores compatible with specified cylinders.

C. Keying System: Provided by Core manufacturer, factory-registered keying system, final requirements to be coordinated with Whole Foods Market.

D. Strikes: Manufacturer’s standard strike with strike box for each latch or lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set.

2.13 FABRICATION

A. Base Metals: Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and BHMA A156.18 for finishes. Do not furnish manufacturer's standard materials or forming methods if different from specified standard.

B. Fasteners: Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. Provide steel machine or wood screws or steel through bolts for fire-rated applications.

C. Spacers or Sex Bolts: For through bolting of hollow metal doors.

D. Fasteners for Wood Doors: Comply with requirements of DHI WDHS.2, "Recommended Fasteners for Wood Doors."

E. Finishes: Comply with BHMA A156.18.

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

08711-5 DOOR HARDWARE 02/13/17 20150922

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Examine doors and frames for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance. Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring connections before electrified door hardware installation.

B. Steel Door and Frame Preparation: Comply with DHI A115 series. Drill and tap doors and frames for surface-applied hardware according to SDI 107.

C. Wood Door Preparation: Comply with DHI A115-W series.

D. Mounting Heights: Comply with the following requirements, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." 2. Custom Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Builders' Hardware for Cus- tom Steel Doors and Frames." 3. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors."

E. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards.

1. Thresholds: Set thresholds for acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."

F. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with accessibility requirements.

3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified independent Architectural Hardware Consultant to perform inspections and to prepare inspection reports.

B. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. 1. Spring Hinges: Adjust to achieve positive latching when door is allowed to close freely from an open position of 30 degrees. 2. Electric Strikes: Adjust horizontal and vertical alignment of keeper to properly engage lock bolt. 3. Door Closers: Adjust sweep period so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches (75 mm) from the latch, measured to the leading edge of the door.

C. Six-Month Adjustment: Approximately six months after date of Substantial Completion, Installer shall perform the following: 1. Examine and readjust each item of door hardware as necessary to ensure function of doors, door hardware, and electrified door hardware. 2. Consult with and instruct Owner's personnel on recommended maintenance procedures. 3. Replace door hardware items that have deteriorated or failed due to faulty design, materials, or installation of door hardware units.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

DOOR HARDWARE 08711-6 20150922 02/13/17

END OF SECTION 08711

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

08800-1 GLAZING 02/13/17 20150922

SECTION 08800 - GLAZING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes glazing for the following products and applications: 1. Automatic sliding doors. 2. Interior borrowed lites. 3. Interior Storefront framing.

1.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.

B. Glass Design: Glass thickness designations indicated are minimums and are for detailing only. Confirm glass thicknesses by analyzing Project loads and in-service conditions. Provide glass lites in the thickness designations indicated for various size openings, but not less than thicknesses and in strengths (annealed or heat treated) required to meet or exceed the following criteria: 1. Glass Thicknesses: Select minimum glass thicknesses to comply with ASTM E 1300, according to the following requirements: a. Specified Design Wind Loads: As indicated.

C. Thermal Movements: Provide glazing that allows for thermal movements resulting from a maximum change (range) of 120 deg F, in ambient and surface temperatures, respectively, acting on glass framing members and glazing components. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Sealant Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Use sealant manufacturer’s standard test methods to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates.

B. Safety Glass: Category II materials complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 and ANSI Z97.1.

C. Glazing Publications: 1. Comply with published recommendations of the following, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 2. GANA Publications: "Glazing Manual" and “Laminated Glass Design Guide”.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 BASIS-OF-DESIGN MANUFACTURER:

A. Oldcastle Glass.

B. Substitutions of equivalent products MAY be considered by the Architect, provided a Request for Substi- tution is submitted to the Architect in compliance with the requirements of Section 01600 – Product Re- quirements.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

GLAZING 08800-2 20150922 02/13/17

2.02 GLASS MATERIALS

A. Insulated Glass: 1. Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190, and complying with other requirements specified. a. Sealing System: Dual seal, with manufacturer's standard primary and secondary. b. Spacer: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction. c. Desiccant: Molecular sieve or silica gel, or blend of both.

B. Flat Glass: 1. ASTM C 1036 – Standard Specification for Flat Glass, Type 1, Class 1 (Clear) ,Quality q3

C. Tempered Glass: All tempered glass shall comply with the standards of ASTM C1048, Kind FT; 1. Condition A (uncoated). 2. Type I (transparent, flat). 3. Class 1 (Clear). 4. Quality q3.

D. Glazing Sealant: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers for selection of glass sealants which suit project application and installation conditions and which are compatible with surface contacted.

2.03 GLAZING GASKETS

A. Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of material indicated below, and of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal: 1. EPDM, dense compression gaskets complying with ASTM C 846. 2. Silicone, dense compression gaskets complying with ASTM C 1115. 3. EPDM or silicone soft compression gaskets complying with ASTM C 509, Type II, black.

2.04 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS

A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.

B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.

C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5.

D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.

E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking).

2.05 FABRICATION OF GLASS AND OTHER GLAZING PRODUCTS

A. Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing standard, to comply with system performance requirements.

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

08800-3 GLAZING 02/13/17 20150922

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GLAZING, GENERAL

A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. 1. Clean glazing channel and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Re- move coatings not firmly bonded to substrates. 2. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass with edge damage or other imperfections that when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. 3. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by sealant compatibility and adhesion testing. 4. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. 5. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances.

B. Protection: Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations, including weld splatter.

END OF SECTION 08800

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

GLAZING 08800-4 20150922 02/13/17

Page left intentionally blank

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

09260-1 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 02/13/17 20150922

SECTION 09260 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provision the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes gypsum board, light-gauge metal framing, fasteners and accessories for the following: 1. Steel framing systems to receive gypsum board. 2. Gypsum board screw-attached to steel framing and furring. 3. Interior walls, partitions and ceilings, including tape and joint compound finish. 4. Steel framing systems to receive gypsum board. 5. Ceramic tile backer board panels for the application of ceramic tile and thin brick. 6. Cable support systems. 7. Prefinished aluminum termination strips (Schluter strips).

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section "Miscellaneous Carpentry" for wood grounds, nailers, blocking and furring. 2. Division 7 Section "Building Insulation" for thermal insulation, vapor retarders and sound attenuation insulation installed in gypsum board assemblies. 3. Division 7 Section “Joint Sealants” for thermal and acoustical sealants. 4. Division 9 Section “Resinous Flooring” for epoxy flooring systems. 5. Division 9 Section “Tile” for ceramic tile.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Gypsum Board Terminology: Refer to ASTM C 11 for definitions of terms for gypsum board assemblies not defined in this Section or in other referenced standards.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1. Studs and Runners: Provide documentation that framing members' certification is according to SFIA's "Code Compliance Certification Program for Cold-Formed Steel Structural and Non-Structural Framing Members".

B. Shop Drawings: Show locations, fabrication, and installation of control and expansion joints including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other units of Work.

C. Shop drawings: Where interior architectural woodwork and any other items are suspended from structure by cable support systems specified herein, provide a Product List and Shop Drawings. 1. Include complete list of cable support system components, fasteners and accessories proposed for use in Product List. 2. Include copies of the manufacturer’s published installation instructions as well as any correspondence with the manufacturer specific to this project. 3. Include calculations showing that number and type of cable support systems proposed are more than adequate to support anticipated dead load, live load, seismic loads, etc. 4. Include detailed shop drawings illustrating each anticipated configuration, loading and anchor condition and documenting installer compliance with manufacturer’s published installation recommendations and procedures. 5. Provide shop drawings and calculations signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer registered in

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260-2 20150922 02/13/17

the State where the Project is located.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Sound Transmission Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with STC ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. Standard walls shall be designed to reduce sound transmission by 35 decibels (dB). 2. Fire-rated walls shall be designed to reduce sound transmission by 40 dB. 3. Mechanical room walls shall be designed to reduce sound transmission by 48 dB.

B. Gypsum Board Assemblies shall meet Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Standards Technical Panels (STP 100): Sustainability of Gypsum Boards and Panels (Third-party International Organization for Standardization 14025, Environmental Product Declarations Type III Labels certification).

C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where metal framing is part of a fire-resistance-rated assembly, provide framing identical to that of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by, and displaying a classification label from, a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by GA File Numbers in GA-600, "Fire Resistance Design Manual," or by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another testing and inspecting agency.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier.

B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack gypsum panels flat to prevent sagging.

C. Protect cold-formed metal framing from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling as required by AISI's "Code of Standard Practice".

1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with average recycled content of steel products such that postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than 28 percent.

B. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

2.02 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

09260-3 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 02/13/17 20150922

1. California Expanded Metal Co. (CEMCO) 2. Consolidated Fabricators Corp. 3. ClarkDietrich Building Systems. 4. MarinoWare; Div. of Ware Industries, Inc. 5. Scafco Corp. 6. Steel Network, Inc. (The) 7. Steel Construction Systems. (Steel-Con) 8. Steeler, Inc. 9. Super Stud Building Products, Inc.

B. Gypsum Board and Related Products: a. National Gypsum Company/Gold Bond Building Products b. United States Gypsum Company (USG).

2.03 STEEL SUSPENDED CEILING AND SOFFIT FRAMING

A. Components, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.

B. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch- diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475-inch- diameter wire.

C. Concealed Hangers: As follows: 1. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.162-inch diameter. 2. Rod Hangers: ASTM A 510, mild carbon steel. 3. Protective Coating: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized. 4. Flat Hangers: Commercial-steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60, hot-dip galvanized.

D. Cable Support Systems: 1. Gripple hangers with Grade AISI 316 zinc galvanized cable, sized for specific location indicated. Contact Lee Christian, Gripple, Inc., Ph: (678) 314-1669, www.gripple.com .

E. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base metal thickness of 0.0538 inch, a minimum 1/2-inch- wide flange, with ASTM A 653 for coating, G40 (Z120) or having a coating that provides equivalent corrosion resistance.

F. Furring Channels (Furring Members): Commercial-steel sheet with ASTM A 653. 1. Cold Rolled Channels: 0.0538-inch bare steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- wide flange, 3/4 inch deep. 2. Steel Studs: ASTM C 645. 3. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch deep.

G. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound transmission.

H. Grid Suspension System for Interior Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Furring Systems/Drywall. b. Chicago Metallic Corporation; c. USG Interiors, Inc.; Drywall Suspension System.

2.04 STEEL PARTITION AND SOFFIT FRAMING

A. Components, General: As follows:

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260-4 20150922 02/13/17

1. Comply with ASTM C 645 for conditions indicated. 2. Protective Coating: Comply with ASTM C 645; roll-formed from hot-dipped galvanized steel; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M G40 (Z120) or having a coating that provides equivalent corrosion resistance. A40 galvannealed products are not acceptable. a. Coatings shall demonstrate equivalent corrosion resistance with an evaluation report acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction.

B. Steel Studs and Runners: 1. For 16-gage and heavier units, fabricate metal framing components of structural quality steel sheet with a minimum yield point of 50,000 psi; ASTM A 653. 2. For 18-gage 20- gage units, fabricate metal framing components of commercial quality steel sheet with a minimum yield point of 33,000 psi; ASTM A 653. 3. For 25-gage units, fabricate metal framing components of commercial quality steel sheet with a minimum yield point of 33,000 psi; ASTM C645.

C. Proprietary Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of gypsum board applied to interior partitions resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. 1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Metal-Lite, Inc. Slotted Track or ClarkDietrich Building Systems Slotted Deflection Track.

D. Proprietary Firestop Track: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with movement of the structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. 1. Retain above for nonproprietary or below for semiproprietary Specification. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements." a. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Metal-Lite, Inc.; “The System” Track or ClarkDietrich Building Systems Slotted Deflection Track.

E. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated.

F. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: 0.0538-inch bare steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- wide flange.

G. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.

H. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.0538-inch bare steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- wide flange. 1. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum bare steel thickness of 0.0296 inch. 2. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch- diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475-inch- diameter wire.

I. Z-Shaped Furring: Nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches, wall attachment flange of 7/8 inch, minimum bare metal thickness of 0.0179 inch, and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated.

J. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.

2.05 INTERIOR GYPSUM WALLBOARD

A. Recycled Content of Gypsum Panel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 48% percent.

B. Regional Materials: Gypsum panel products shall be manufactured within 500 miles of Project site.

C. Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and correspond with support system indicated.

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

09260-5 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 02/13/17 20150922

D. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 1396. 1. Regular Type: a. Thickness: 5/8” , unless otherwise indicated on drawings. b. Long Edges: Tapered. 2. Type X: a. Thickness: 5/8 inch, unless otherwise indicated on drawings. b. Long Edges: Tapered. 3. Mold Resistant Type: ASTM C 1396/C 1396 M with moisture and mold resistant core and paper surfaces. a. Thickness: 5/8”, unless otherwise indicated on drawings b. Long Edges: Tapered. c. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 2373, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.

2.06 CERAMIC TILE BACKER BOARD PANELS

A. Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and correspond with support system indicated.

B. Fiber Reinforced Cementitious Backer Board: ASTM C1325. 1. Product: "Durock Cement Board Next Gen" manufactured by USG Corp. 2. Thickness: 5/8 inch.

2.07 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc. 2. Shapes: a. Cornerbead. b. Bullnose Bead. c. LC-Bead: J-shaped. d. L-Bead: L-shaped. e. U-Bead: J-shaped.

2.08 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475 and C 840 (3-coat system).

B. Joint Tape: 1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper. 2. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.

C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.

D. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels: 1. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by manufacturer.

2.09 PREFINSIHED ALUMINUM TERMINATION STRIPS:

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Schluter Systems LP, 194 Pleasant Ridge Road, Plattsburgh, NY 12901-5481; Telephone: 1.800.472.4588; FAX 1.800.477.9783; www.schluter.com .

B. Profiles: 1. At juncture of epoxy base and cooler panel: Jolly A-100. a. Finish: Brushed nickel anodized aluminum (ATGB). b. Size: Coordinate with tile thickness.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260-6 20150922 02/13/17

2. At juncture of epoxy base and ceramic tile: Jolly A-100. a. Finish: Brushed nickel anodized aluminum (ATGB). b. Size: Coordinate with tile thickness. 3. At outside corners of ceramic tile: Rondec. a. Finish: Brushed nickel anodized aluminum (ATGB).

2.10 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations.

B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate. 1. Use adhesives that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. 1. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer.

D. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- deep members designed to reduce sound transmission.

E. Sound Attenuation Blankets: As specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation."

F. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Suspended Ceilings: Coordinate installation of ceiling suspension systems with installation of overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive ceiling hangers at spacing required to support ceilings and that hangers will develop their full strength. 1. Furnish concrete inserts and other devises indicated to other trades for installation in advance of time needed for coordination and construction.

3.03 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL

A. Installation Standards: ASTM C 754, and ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framing installation.

B. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing at terminations in gypsum board assemblies to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. Comply with details indicated and with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations or, if none available, with United States Gypsum's "Gypsum Construction Handbook."

C. Isolate steel framing from building structure at locations indicated to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. 1. Isolate ceiling assemblies where they abut or are penetrated by building structure.

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

09260-7 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 02/13/17 20150922

2. Isolate partition framing and wall furring where it abuts structure, except at floor. Install slip-type joints at head of assemblies that avoid axial loading of assembly and laterally support assembly. a. Use deep-leg deflection track where indicated. b. Use proprietary deflection track where indicated. c. Use proprietary firestop track where indicated.

D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with steel framing or furring members. Frame both sides of joints independently.

3.04 INSTALLING STEEL SUSPENDED CEILING AND SOFFIT FRAMING

A. Suspend ceiling hangers from building structure as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension system. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with the location of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards. 3. Secure wire hangers by looping and wire-tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eyescrews, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 4. Secure hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eyescrews, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 5. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. 6. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.

B. Installation Tolerances: Install steel framing components for suspended ceilings so members for panel attachment are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet measured lengthwise on each member and transversely between parallel members.

C. Wire-tie furring channels to supports.

D. Install suspended steel framing components in sizes and spacings indicated, but not less than that required by the referenced steel framing and installation standards.

E. Grid Suspension System: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension system meets vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track.

3.05 INSTALLING STEEL PARTITION AND SOFFIT FRAMING

A. Install tracks (runners) at floors, ceilings, and structural walls and columns where gypsum board assemblies abut other construction.

B. Extend partition framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing over frames for doors and openings and frame around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling to provide support for gypsum board. 1. For fire-resistance-rated and STC-rated partitions that extend to the underside of floor/roof slabs and decks or other continuous solid-structure surfaces to obtain ratings, install framing around structural and other members extending below floor/roof slabs and decks, as needed to support gypsum board closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260-8 20150922 02/13/17

C. Install steel studs so flanges point in the same direction and leading edge or end of each panel can be attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.

D. Frame door openings to comply with GA-600 and with gypsum board manufacturer's applicable written recommendations, unless otherwise indicated. Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. 1. Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of floor or roof structure above.

E. Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings, unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads.

F. Z-Furring Members: 1. Erect insulation vertically and hold in place with Z-furring members. spaced 24 inches o.c. 2. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c. 3. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw-attach short flange of furring channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, space second member no more than 12 inches from corner and cut insulation to fit. 4. Until gypsum board is installed, hold insulation in place with 10-inch staples fabricated from 0.0625- inch- diameter, tie wire and inserted through slot in web of member.

G. Vapor Retarder: Install to comply with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation."

3.06 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL

A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: ASTM C 840 and GA-216.

B. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels, unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side.

C. Install ceiling board panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member.

D. Install gypsum panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.

E. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.

F. Attach gypsum panels to steel studs so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.

G. Attach gypsum panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts.

H. Do not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide-dimension lumber, including floor joists and headers. Float gypsum panels over these members using resilient channels, or provide control joints to counteract wood shrinkage.

I. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

09260-9 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 02/13/17 20150922

J. Cover both faces of steel stud partition framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally. 1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area. 2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect open concrete coffers, concrete joists, and other structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by coffers, joists, and other structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch- wide joints to install sealant.

K. Isolate perimeter of non-load-bearing gypsum board partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges with U-bead edge trim where edges of gypsum panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.

L. Floating Construction: Where feasible, including where recommended in writing by manufacturer, install gypsum panels over wood framing, with floating internal corner construction.

M. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control and expansion joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through gypsum board assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.

N. Space fasteners in gypsum panels according to referenced gypsum board application and finishing standard and manufacturer's written recommendations. 1. Space screws a maximum of 12 inches o.c. for vertical applications.

O. Space fasteners in panels that are tile substrates a maximum of 8 inches o.c.

3.07 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:

1. Regular: On all vertical and horizontal surfaces unless otherwise specified. 2. Type X: Where required for fire-resistance-rated assembly. 3. Mold-Resistant Type: a. On all vertical and horizontal surfaces in rooms and/or spaces that are not air conditioned (i.e., including but not limited to back of house corridors). b. Kitchen areas (where GWB is called for).

B. Single-Layer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to the greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated. 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing), unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints. a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of board. b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. 3. On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members.

C. Multilayer Application on Ceilings: Apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base layers on walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to framing members and offset face-layer joints 1 framing member, 16 inches minimum, from parallel base- layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260-10 20150922 02/13/17

D. Multilayer Application on Partitions/Walls: Apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions. 1. Z-Furring Members: Apply base layer vertically (parallel to framing) and face layer either vertically (parallel to framing) or horizontally (perpendicular to framing) with vertical joints offset at least one furring member. Locate edge joints of base layer over furring members.

E. Single-Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.

F. Multilayer Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws.

G. Tile Backing Panels: 1. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A108.11, at locations indicated to receive tile. 2. Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in the same plane, shim surfaces to produce a uniform plane across panel surfaces.

3.08 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Control Joints: Control joints in gypsum board assemblies shall comply with ASTM C 840. 1. Ceilings: a. Provide control joints in any and all ceiling areas exceeding 2500 sq. ft. (232 sq. m). b. Control joints in ceilings shall be no more than 50 feet (15.2 m) in any direction. c. Install control joints wherever ceiling framing or furring changes direction. 2. Partitions and Furring: a. Install control joints in all partitions and wall furring runs exceeding 30 feet (9.1 m). b. Control joints in partitions and furring shall be no more than 30 feet (9.1m) o.c. 3. Do not bridge building expansion joints with gypsum panels.

C. Prefinished Aluminum Termination Strips (Schluter): 1. Consult manufacturer’s current technical literature for proper design and installation instructions.

3.09 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.

B. Prefill open joints , rounded or beveled edges , and damaged surface areas.

C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape.

D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below, according to ASTM C 840, for locations indicated: 1. Level 1 – Concealed areas and back of house: Embed tape at joints in ceiling plenum, back of house and other concealed areas unless a higher level of finish is required for fire-resistance-rated assemblies and sound-rated assemblies. 2. Level 2 – Tile Substrate: Embed tape and apply separate first coat of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges. 3. Level 3 – Wallcoverings and textured finishes: Embed tape and apply separate first and fill coats of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges. 4. Level 4 – Exposed, painted gypsum board: Embed tape and apply separate first, fill, and finish coats of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

09260-11 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 02/13/17 20150922

E. Ceramic Tile Backer Board Panels: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.

END OF SECTION 09260

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260-12 20150922 02/13/17

Page left intentionally blank

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

09310-1 CERAMIC TILE 02/13/17 20150922

SECTION 09310 - CERAMIC TILE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Ceramic and porcelain wall tile. 2. Porcelain floor tile.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Division 9 Section “Gypsum Wall Board Assemblies” for gypsum wall board and related tile termination and trim sections.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Ceramic tile shall meet Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Environment Green Squared Certification: Tile Council of North America’s Certification (ANSI A138.1) (Third-party International Organization for Standardization 14025, Environmental Product Declarations Type III Labels certification).

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 TILE PRODUCTS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Tiles CT-1, CT-3, CT-4, and CT-10: Fireclay Tile, 495 W. Julian Street, San Jose, CA 95110; 408.275.1182; www.fireclaytile.com . 2. Tiles CT-2: Daltile, 7834 C.F. Hawn Freeway, Dallas, Texas 75217; 404.355.0258; www.daltile.com . 3. Tile CT-5, CT-6 and CT-7: Pental Surfaces, 70750 Valjean Avenue, Van Nuys, CA 91406; 818.787.7937; www.pentalonline.com . 4. Tile CT-9: Original Mission Tile, Jorge de Avila No 100, San Juanico El Grande (Esq. Francisco de la Cruz, sobre Amado Nervo) San Luis Potosi, SLP 78414, Mexico; 011 52 (444) 240 4456; www.originalmissiontile.com . 5. Tile FT-1: Anatolia Tile and Stone, Inc., 8300 Huntington Road, Vaughan, ONT Canada L4L 1A5; 877.311.3434; www.anatoliatile.com .

B. Wall Tile Trim Units: Matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile and coordinated with sizes and coursing where applicable. 1. Base: To match tile. 2. External Corners: Square corners. 3. Internal Corners: Field-butted square corners except with coved base and cap angle pieces designed to fit with stretcher shapes.

2.02 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Thresholds: Fabricate to provide transition between adjacent floor finishes. Bevel edges at 1:2 slope, limit height of bevel to ½ inch or less, and finish bevel to match face of threshold. 1. Marble Thresholds: a. ASTM C 503 with a minimum abrasion resistance of 10 per ASTM C 1353 or ASTM C 241 and with honed finish. b. Description: Uniform, fine- to medium-grained white stone with gray veining.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

CERAMIC TILE 09310-2 20150922 02/13/17

2.03 SETTING AND GROUTING MATERIALS

A. Manufacturers:

1. LATICRETE International Inc. 2. MAPEI Corporation.

B. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): 1. ANSI A118.4. 2. Prepackaged dry-mortar mix combined with liquid-latex additive.

C. Organic Adhesive: ANSI A136.1, Type I. with a VOC content of 65 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

D. Standard Sanded Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6, color as indicated.

E. Standard Un-sanded Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6, color as indicated.

F. Epoxy Grout: 1. Laticrete Spectralock Pro Premium Grout meeting requirements of ANSI A118.6, color as indicated.

G. Polymer-Modified Tile Grout: 1. ANSI A118.7, manufacturer and color as indicated on the drawings. 2. Polymer Type: Liquid-latex form for addition to prepackaged dry-grout mix.

2.04 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Elastomeric Sealants: Elastomeric sealants of base polymer and characteristics indicated that comply with applicable requirements in Division 7 Section “Joint Sealants.”

1. One-Part, Mildew-Resistant Silicone: ASTM C 920; Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, G, A, and as applicable to nonporous joint substrates indicated, O; formulated with fungicide, intended for in- service exposures of high humidity and extreme temperatures.

a. Products:

1) Dow Corning Corporation; Dow Corning 786. 2) GE Silicones; Sanitary 1700. 3) Pecora Corporation; Pecora 898 Sanitary Silicone Sealant. 4) Tremco, Inc.; Tremsil 600 White.

2. Multipart, Pourable Urethane Sealant for Use T: ASTM C920; Type M; Grade P; Class 25; Uses T, M, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.

a. Products:

1) Pecora Corporation; NR-200 Urexpan. 2) Tremco, Inc.; THC-900.

B. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, Portland cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials, unless otherwise specified in Division 3.

C. Crack Isolation Membrane: 1. Laticrete International, Inc., Blue 92 Ant-Fracture Membrane meeting requirements of ANSI A118.12

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

09310-3 CERAMIC TILE 02/13/17 20150922

D. Grout Sealer: Manufacturer’s standard silicone product for sealing grout joints that does not change color or appearance of grout.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Remove coatings, including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, that are incompatible with tile-setting materials.

B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions with trowelable leveling and patching compound according to tile- setting material manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Remove protrusions, bumps, and ridges by sanding or grinding.

D. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, use factory blended tiles or blend tiles at Project site before installing.

E. Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated under tile type or needed to prevent grout from staining or adhering to exposed tile surfaces, pre-coat them with continuous film of temporary protective coating, taking care not to coat unexposed tile surfaces.

3.02 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. ANSI Tile Installation Standards: Comply with parts of ANSI A108 Series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that apply to types of setting and grouting materials and to methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules.

B. TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation." Comply with TCA installation methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules.

C. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without interruptions, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.

D. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.

E. All outside corners to be constructed using square edged tile with Schluter trim.

F. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern, unless otherwise indicated. Align joints when adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are same size. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Provide uniform joint widths, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Grout tile to comply with requirements of ANSI A108.10, unless otherwise indicated.

1. For chemical-resistant epoxy grouts, comply with ANSI A108.6.

H. Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds at locations indicated; set in same type of setting bed as abutting field tile, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Set thresholds in latex-Portland cement mortar for locations where mortar bed would otherwise be exposed above adjacent non-tile floor finish.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

CERAMIC TILE 09310-4 20150922 02/13/17

I. Metal Edge Strips: Install at locations indicated or where exposed edge of tile flooring meets carpet, wood, or other flooring that finishes flush with top of tile.

J. Install tile on walls with the following joint width: 3/16”.

K. Install tile on floors with the following joint width: 1/8”.

3.03 TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE

A. Interior wall installation over solid backing, organic adhesive; TCA W223. 1. Grout: Polymer-modified sanded grout.

B. Interior floor installation over slab on grade: TCA F115. 1. Grout: Epoxy grout.

END OF SECTION 09310

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

09511-1 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 02/13/17 20150922

SECTION 09511 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes: 1. Acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings.

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: 1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide acoustical panel ceilings identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Ratings are indicated by design designations from UL’s “Fire Resistance Directory” or from the listings of another testing and inspecting agency.

a. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

B. Acoustical panel ceilings shall meet ISO (International Organization for Standardization) 14025: Environmental Product Declarations (EPD): Type III Labels certification.

1.03 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full-size panels equal to 5 percent of quantity installed for each type, color and pattern.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified.

2.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

2.03 GENERAL

A. Recycled Content: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 10 percent.

B. Glass-Fiber-Based Panels: Made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde.

C. Acoustical Panel Standard: Comply with ASTM E 1264.

D. Metal Suspension System Standard: Comply with ASTM C 635.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511-2 20150922 02/13/17

E. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. 1. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency.

F. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Zinc-coated carbon-steel wire; ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. 1. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106-inch diameter wire.

G. Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer’s standard moldings for edges and penetrations that fit acoustical panel edge details and suspension systems indicated; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners.

H. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Non-sag, paintable, non-staining, latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 that effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.

1. Products: Pecora Corp.; AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant.

I. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: non-drying, non-hardening, non-skinning, non-staining, gunnable, synthetic-rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce airborne sound transmission.

1. Products: a. Pecora Corp.; BA-98. b. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Acoustical Sealant.

2.04 ACOUSTICAL PANELS

A. Water-Felted, Mineral-Base Acoustical Panels for Acoustical Panel Ceiling: 1. Product: “Radar” Ceiling Tile panel as manufactured by United States Gypsum Company. 2. Classification: Panels fitting ASTM E 1264 for Type III, mineral base with painted finish; Form 2, water felted. 3. Color: White 4. Light Reflectance Coefficient: Not less than LR 0.80. 5. Noise Reduction Coefficient: NRC 0.55. 6. Ceiling Sound Transmission Class: CSTC 35. 7. Edge Detail: Square (SQ). 8. Thickness: 5/8-inch. 9. Sizes: a. ACT 1: 24” x 24” x 1/2”.

B. Moisture-Resistant Ceiling Tile: "Vinyl Faced ClimaPlus # 3230" PVC Free Sheetrock Brand Lay-In Ceiling Tile manufactured by United States Gypsum Company. 1. Sizes: a. ACT 2: 24" x 24" x 1/2".

C. Prelaminated Insulated Ceiling Panels: 1. Product: Nudo Products #F3PB500-FR-MR-F200-CT.

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

09511-3 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 02/13/17 20150922

2. Thickness: 2 ½”. 3. Color: White, textured. 4. Size: a. ACT 3: 24” x 24”

2.05 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM

A. Suspension System for Acoustical Panel Ceilings ACT-1: Provide acoustical panel ceiling suspension system complying with the following:

1. Products: Provide one of the following:

a. Prelude XL Exposed Tee System; Armstrong. b. Celotex 15/16” Classic Stab. c. Snap Grid 1200 Seismic System with aluminum cap; Chicago Metallic Corp. d. Donn DX/DXL 15/16” Grid; USG.

2. Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, coating designation, with pre-finished 15/16-inch- wide metal caps on flanges; other characteristics as follows: a. Structural Classification: Heavy-duty system. b. End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) or butt-edge type, as standard with manufacturer c. Face Design: Flat, flush. d. Cap Material: Steel or aluminum sheet as standard with manufacturer. e. Cap Finish: Painted white.

B. Suspension System for Acoustical Panel Ceilings ACT-2, ACT-3: Provide suspension system complying with the following:

1. Products: Provide one of the following:

a. Prelude XL Exposed Tee System; Armstrong. b. Snap Grid 1200 Seismic System with aluminum cap; Chicago Metallic Corp. c. Donn DXLA 15/16” (Aluminum Capped) Grid; USG.

2. Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Hot-Dip Galvanized-Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 coating designation, with pre-finished, 15/16-inch-wide, aluminum caps on flanges; other characteristics as follows:

a. Structural Classification: Heavy-duty system. b. Aluminum Cap Finish: Painted white.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636 and seismic requirements per IBC Seismic Design Category D, per manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook.

B. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width tiles at borders.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511-4 20150922 02/13/17

C. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members, plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum. Splay hangers only where required and, if permitted with fire- resistance-rated ceilings, to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers, use trapezes or equivalent devices.

1. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck; anchor into concrete slab.

2. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs or to steel roof deck.

D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. Screw attach moldings to substrate with concealed fasteners at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not more than 3 inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet. Miter corners accurately and connect securely.

E. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent or kinked members.

F. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit.

END OF SECTION 09511

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

09650-1 RESILIENT FLOOR TILE 02/13/17 20150922

SECTION 09650 - RESILIENT FLOOR TILE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Vinyl composition floor tile.

1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Shop Drawings: For each type of floor tile. Include floor tile layouts, edges, columns, doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts. 1. Show details of special patterns.

C. Samples: Full-size units of each color and pattern of floor tile required.

1.03 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance data.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For resilient tile flooring, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. 1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.

2.02 VINYL COMPOSITION FLOOR TILE (VCT-1)

A. Product: Armstrong World Industries, Inc; Armstrong, Excelon SDT Tile, 12" x 12" face size, 1/8" thick.

B. Tile Standard: ASTM F 1066, Class 2, through-pattern tile.

C. Wearing Surface: Smooth.

D. Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm).

E. Size: 12 by 12 inches (305 by 305 mm).

F. Color: Fossil Gray.

2.03 RECYCLED RUBBER FLOOR TILE (VCT-2)

A. Manufacturer: To Market, 397 N. Harvard Avenue, Oklahoma City, OK 73127; 866.772.4772; www.tomkt.com

B. Product: Atmosphere 2 Recycled Rubber Flooring. 1. Color: Structure TM906 – Kingman Green. 2. Mat size: 12” x 12” straight edge. 3. Thickness: 3/8” (8 mm). 4. Weight: 2 lbs./square foot.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

RESILIENT FLOOR TILE 09650-2 20150922 02/13/17

5. Composition: recycled tire rubber granules, SBR (Styrene-butadlene rubber) and colored EPDM (ethylene-propylene diene monomer). 6. Characteristics: a. Abrasion Resistance (ASTM C501): 0.502 grams/1000 cycles +/- 5 mg b. Density (ASTM D3676): 55 lbs./cubic foot. c. Shore Hardness (ASTM D2240): 65. d. Static Load Limit (ASTM F970-87): 0.0 % residual compression. e. Critical Radiant Flux (ASTM E648-94A): Class I / Class II. f. Elongation at Break (ASTM D412): 120%. g. Tensile Strength (ASTM D412): 290.2 lbs./square inch. h. Coefficient of Friction ASTM D2947-93): 1.04 Dry / 1.05 Wet. i. Stain Resistance (ASTM-D543): No change (ammonia, bleach, rust, grass, coffee, fruit juice, cola, ink, lipstick)

2.04 INSTALLATION MATERIALS FOR VINYL COMPOSITION FLOOR TILE

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by floor tile manufacturer for applications indicated.

B. FloorScore Compliance: Resilient tile flooring shall comply with requirements of FloorScore Standard. 1. Adhesives shall comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): a. VCT and Asphalt Tile Adhesives: Not more than 50 g/L.

C. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by floor tile and adhesive manufacturers to suit floor tile and substrate conditions indicated. 1. For Static Dissapative tile: S-202 Static-Dissipative Tile Adhesive as manufactured by Armstrong World Industries.

D. Floor Polish: 1. Provide protective, liquid floor-polish products recommended by floor tile manufacturer. 2. For Static Dissapative tile: S-392 Static Dissipative Cleaner and Tile Polish as manufactured by Armstrong World Industries.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION FOR VINYL COMPOSITION FLOOR TILE

A. Prepare substrates according to floor tile manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products.

B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by floor tile manufacturer. Do not use solvents. 3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by floor tile manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within range on pH scale recommended by manufacturer in writing. 4. Moisture Testing: Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing according to floor tile manufacturer's written recommendations..

C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

09650-3 RESILIENT FLOOR TILE 02/13/17 20150922

D. Do not install floor tiles until they are the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed.

E. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient floor tile.

3.02 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION FOR VINYL COMPOSITION FLOOR TILE

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile.

B. Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter. 1. Lay tiles square with room axis

C. Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles. 1. Lay tiles with grain running in one direction.

D. Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.

E. Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend floor tiles to center of door openings.

F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking device.

G. Adhere floor tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.

3.03 CLEANING AND PROTECTION FOR VINYL COMPOSITION FLOOR TILE

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting floor tile.

B. Floor Polish: Remove soil, adhesive, and blemishes from floor tile surfaces before applying liquid floor polish. 1. Apply two coats.

C. Cover floor tile until Substantial Completion.

3.04 PREPARATION FOR REYCLED RUBBER FLOOR TILE

A. Prepare substrates according to floor tile manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

C. Do not install floor tiles until they are the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed.

D. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by rubber floor tile.

3.05 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION FOR RECYCLED RUBBER FLOOR TILE

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

RESILIENT FLOOR TILE 09650-4 20150922 02/13/17

B. No adhesive is required for installation of tiles.

C. Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter. Lay tiles square with room axis

D. Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces.

3.06 CLEANING AND PROTECTION FOR RECYCLED RUBBER FLOOR TILE

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting floor tile.

B. Cover floor tile until Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION 09650

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

09651-1 RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 02/13/17 20150922

SECTION 09651 - RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 THIS SECTION INCLUDES

A. Wall base and accessories as shown on the drawings and schedules and as indicated by the requirements of this section.

1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract (including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 sections) apply to the work of this section.

1.03 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Other Division 9 sections for floor finishes related to this section but not the work of this section.

B. Division 3 Concrete; not the work of this section.

C. Division 6 Wood and Plastics; not the work of this section.

D. Division 7 Thermal and Moisture Protection; not the work of this section.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide wall base and accessories supplied by one manufacturer, including leveling and patching compounds, and adhesives.

B. Provide flooring material to meet the following fire test performance criteria as tested by a recognized independent testing laboratory: 1. ASTM E 648 Critical Radiant Flux of 0.45 watts per sq. cm. or greater, Class I. 2. ASTM E 662 (Smoke Generation) Maximum Specific Optical Density of 450 or less.

C. Resilient wall base shall meet third-party ISO (International Organization for Standardization) 14025, Environmental Product Declarations (EPDs) Type III Labels certification: NSF/ANSI 332 Sustainability Assessment for Resilient Flooring.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the manufacturer's standard samples showing the required colors for wall base and applicable accessories.

B. Submit the manufacturer's certification that the wall base has been tested by an independent laboratory and complies with the required fire tests.

1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

A. Deliver materials in good condition to the jobsite in the manufacturer's original unopened containers that bear the name and brand of the manufacturer, project identification, and shipping and handling instructions.

B. Store materials in a clean, dry, enclosed space off the ground, and protected from the weather and from extremes of heat and cold. Protect adhesives from freezing. Store flooring, adhesives and accessories in the spaces where they will be installed for at least 48 hours before beginning installation.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09651-2 20150922 02/13/17

C. Maintain a minimum temperature in the spaces to receive the flooring and accessories of 65ºF (18ºC) and a maximum temperature of 85ºF (29ºC) for at least 48 hours before, during, and for not less than 48 hours after installation. Thereafter, maintain a minimum temperature of 55ºF (13ºC) in areas where work is completed. Protect all materials from the direct flow of heat from hot-air registers, radiators, or other heating fixtures and appliances.

D. Install wall base and accessories after the other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. Close spaces to traffic during the installation of the wall base.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 WALL BASE MATERIALS

A. Provide 1/8 in. (3.2 mm) thick, 4 in. high Wall Base with a matte finish, conforming to ASTM F 1861, Type TS (Thermoset Vulcanized Rubber), Group 1 (Solid), as manufactured by Roppe Corporation.

2.02 ADHESIVES

A. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. For sealing joints between the top of wall base or integral cove cap and irregular wall surfaces such as masonry, provide plastic filler applied according to the manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Provide transition/reducing strips tapered to meet abutting materials.

C. Provide threshold of thickness and width as shown on the drawings.

D. Provide resilient edge strips of width shown on the drawings, of equal gauge to the flooring, homogeneous vinyl or rubber composition, tapered or bullnose edge, with color to match or contrast with the flooring, or as selected by the Architect from standard colors available.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

A. Report conditions contrary to contract requirements that would prevent a proper installation. Do not proceed with the installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B. Failure to call attention to defects or imperfections will be construed as acceptance and approval of the subfloor. Installation indicates acceptance of substrates with regard to conditions existing at the time of installation.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Remove paint, varnish, oils, release agents, sealers, and waxes. Remove residual adhesives as recommended by the flooring manufacturer. Remove curing and hardening compounds not compatible with the adhesives used, as indicated by a bond test or by the compound manufacturer's recommendations for flooring. Avoid organic solvents.

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

09651-3 RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 02/13/17 20150922

3.03 INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES

A. Apply top set wall base to walls, columns, casework, and other permanent fixtures in areas where top-set base is required. Install base in lengths as long as practical, with inside corners fabricated from base materials that are mitered or coped. Tightly bond base to vertical substrate with continuous contact at horizontal and vertical surfaces.

B. Fill voids with plastic filler along the top edge of the resilient wall base or integral cove cap on masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates.

C. Place resilient edge strips tightly butted to flooring, and secure with adhesive recommended by the edge strip manufacturer. Install edge strips at edges of flooring that would otherwise be exposed.

3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Use a clean white cloth dampened with water to remove wet adhesive from wall base, substrate, floor covering and tools.

B. Dried adhesive may require the use of denatured alcohol applied to a clean white cloth. Follow manufacturer’s precautions when using denatured alcohol.

END OF SECTION

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09651-4 20150922 02/13/17

Page left intentionally blank

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

09672-1 RESINOUS FLOORING 02/13/17 20150922

SECTION 09672 - RESINOUS FLOORING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. This section includes the following: 1. Resinous flooring system as shown on the drawings and in schedules.

B. Related sections include the following: 1. Cast-in-Place Concrete, Section 03300. 2. Concrete Finishes, Section 03345. 3. Gypsum Wall Board Assemblies, Section 09260.

1.03 SYSTEMS DESCRIPTION

A. The work shall consist of preparation of the substrate, the furnishing and application 1. EPX-1: Cementitious urethane based self-leveling seamless flooring system with colored quartz aggregate, an ultra-clear epoxy grout coat followed by topcoats of clear Armor Top high traffic urethane topcoat at Other Areas (service and prep areas). 2. EPX-2: Cementitious urethane based self-leveling seamless flooring system with neutral flintshot aggregate broadcast solid color urethane top-coat at the Scullery and Kitchen areas. 3. EPX-3: Epoxy based multi roller applied flooring system and urethane topcoat. The system shall be clear in color and texture as specified by the Owner with a nominal thickness of 27 mils. It shall be applied to the prepared area(s) as defined in the plans strictly in accordance with the Manufacturer's recommendations (public and staff restrooms).

B. The systems shall have the color and texture as specified by the Owner with a nominal thickness of 1/4 inch. A textured floor sample will be available on the job site to verify that finished work meets with floor safety and sanitation expectations. It shall be applied to the prepared area(s) as defined in the plans strictly in accordance with the Manufacturer's recommendations.

C. Cove base to be applied per manufacturers standard details unless otherwise noted. A cove base sample will be available on the job site to profile, texture and even transition radius to improve floor sanitation.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Latest edition of Manufacturer's literature including performance data and installation procedures.

B. Manufacturer’s Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for each product being used.

C. Samples: 1. Three six (6) inch square sample of each of the two proposed systems. 2. One cove base sample selected from one of the designated floor systems. 3. Color, texture, and thickness shall be representative of overall appearance of finished systems. Contact Architect for approved samples.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

RESINOUS FLOORING 09672-2 20150922 02/13/17

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. The Manufacturer shall have a minimum of 5 years’ experience in the production, sales, and technical support of cementitious urethane, hybrid floor systems, quartz aggregate broadcast floors and related materials.

B. The Applicator shall have been approved by the flooring system Manufacturer in all phases of surface preparation and application of the products specified. The installation contractor will be chosen from a select list of Tier One Applicators that are familiar with Whole Foods and work to the standards of the Dur- A-Flex Strategic Account Program. Contact John Conway, Dur-A-Flex Strategic Accounts Manager for current list of installation contractors that are available to bid on Whole Foods projects, 860-528-9838.

C. No requests for substitutions shall be considered.

D. System shall be in compliance with requirements of United States Department of Agriculture (USDA), Food, Drug Administration (FDA), local Health Department and be registered under NSF International’s Guidelines for Proprietary Substances and Nonfood Compounds.

E. A pre-installation conference shall be held between Applicator, General Contractor, Owner and Architect to review and clarification of this specification, application procedure, quality control, inspection and acceptance criteria and production schedule.

F. The Applicator shall strictly follow all the requirements and procedures stipulated in “Whole Foods Market Guidelines for Installation” manual as prepared by the manufacturer.

G. Resinous flooring shall meet third-party ISO (International Organization for Standardization) 14025, Environmental Product Declarations (EPDs) Type III Labels certification: NSF/ANSI 332 Sustainability Assessment for Resilient Flooring.

1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Packing and Shipping: 1. All components of the system shall be delivered to the site in the Manufacturer's packaging, clearly identified with the product type and batch number.

B. Storage and Protection: 1. The Applicator shall be provided with a dry storage area for all components. The area shall be between 60 oF and 85 oF, dry, out of direct sunlight and in accordance with the Manufacturer's recommendations and relevant health and safety regulations. 2. Copies of Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for all components shall be kept on site for review by the Engineer or other personnel.

C. Waste Disposal: 1. The Applicator shall be provided with adequate disposal facilities for non-hazardous waste generated during installation of the system.

1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Site Requirements: 1. Application may proceed while air, material and substrate temperatures are between 60 oF and 85 oF providing the substrate temperature is above the dew point. Outside of this range, the Manufacturer shall be consulted. 2. The relative humidity in the specific location of the application shall be less than 85% and the surface temperature shall be at least 5 oF above the dew point. 3. The Applicator shall ensure that adequate ventilation is available for the work area. This shall include the use of manufacturer’s approved fans, smooth bore tubing and closure of the work area.

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

09672-3 RESINOUS FLOORING 02/13/17 20150922

4. The Applicator shall be supplied with adequate lighting equal to the final lighting level during the preparation and installation of the system.

B. Conditions of new concrete to be coated with cementitious urethane material. 1. Concrete shall be moisture cured for a minimum of 3 days and have fully cured a minimum of 5 days in accordance with ACI-308 prior to the application of the coating system pending moisture tests. 2. Concrete shall have a flat rubbed finish, float or light steel trowel finish (a hard steel trowel finish is neither necessary nor desirable). 3. Sealers and curing agents should not to be used. 4. Concrete shall have minimum design strength of 3,500 psi. and a maximum water/cement ratio of 0.45. 5. Concrete surfaces on grade shall have been constructed with a vapor retarder to protect against the effects of vapor transmission and possible delamination of the system.

C. Safety Requirements 1. All open flames and spark-producing equipment shall be removed from the work area prior to commencement of application. 2. "No Smoking" signs shall be posted at the entrances to the work area. 3. Non-related personnel in the work area shall be kept to a minimum.

1.08 WARRANTY

A. The manufacturer shall warrant that material shipped to buyers at the time of shipment substantially free from material defects and will perform substantially to manufacturer’s published literature when used in accordance with the latest prescribed procedures and prior to the expiration date.

B. The manufacturer’s liability with respect to this warranty is limited to the value of the material purchase.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURER

A. Dur-A-Flex, Inc., 95 Goodwin Street, East Hartford, CT 06108, Phone: (860) 528-9838, Fax: (860) 528- 2802

B. Manufacturer of Approved System shall be single source and made in the USA.

2.02 FLOORING

A. EPX1: Dur-A-Flex, Inc., Hybri-Flex EQ, 3/16” thick cementitious urethane base coat with double broadcast Q28 -15 colored quartz aggregate with Ultra Clear epoxy grout coats followed by finish coat of Armor Top Urethane. a. Locations (Other Areas): 1) Meat Prep. 2) Bakery Service. 3) Bakery Prep. 4) Coffee/Gelato Service. 5) Meat Service. 6) Prepared Foods Service. 7) Seafood Service. 8) Specialty Service. 9) Specialty Clean. 10) Produce Prep. 11) Coolers and Freezers (if indicated on drawings). 2. System Materials: a. Topping: Dur-A-Flex, Inc., Poly-Crete SL resin, (1/8” thick cementitious urethane base coat).

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

RESINOUS FLOORING 09672-4 20150922 02/13/17

b. Aggregate: Dur-A-Flex, Inc., Q28-15 double broadcast colored quartz aggregate. c. Topcoats: Dur-A-Flex, Inc., Ultra Clear Epoxy grout coat followed by a final topcoat(s) of Armor Top urethane. Finished surface texture shall match texture of approved samples. Contact Architect for approved samples. 3. Patch Materials: a. Shallow Fill and Patching: Use Dur-A-Flex, Inc. Poly-Crete MD (up to ¼ inch). b. Deep Fill and Sloping Material (over ¼ inch): Use Dur-A-Flex, Inc. Poly-Crete WR.

B. EPX2: Dur-A-Flex, Inc., Poly-Crete MDB with Color Fast cementitious urethane topcoat seamless flooring system. 1. Locations (areas with potential of exposure to boiling water): a. Kitchen. b. Scullery. 2. System Materials: a. Topping: Dur-A-Flex, Inc., Poly-Crete MD resin (1/4” thick cementitious urethane base coat). b. Aggregate: Dur-A-Flex, Inc., Flint Shot aggregate. c. Topcoats: Dur-A-Flex, Inc., Poly-Crete Color Fast, two-component resin, color Dark Gray. Finished surface texture shall match texture of approved samples. Contact Architect for approved samples. 3. Patch Materials: a. Shallow Fill and Patching: Use Dur-A-Flex, Inc., Poly-Crete MD (up to ¼ inch). b. Deep Fill and Sloping Material (over ¼ inch): Use Dur-A-Flex, Inc., Poly-Crete WR. 4. Drain Details: a. Imperative to follow specific drawings for both trench and circular floor drains in areas exposed to hot water. b. Deviation from drawing details are not accepted. Repairs at a later date are not possible.

C. EPX3: Epoxy-Based seamless flooring system 1. Locations: a. Public restrooms. b. Staff restrooms. 2. System Materials: a. Primer: Dur-A-Flex, Inc, Dur-A-Glaze #4 resin with Damp Primer hardener. b. Body Coat: Dur-A-Flex, Inc, Dur-A-Glaze Shop Floor Resin in light grey. 3. Topcoat: Dur-A-Flex, Inc. Armor Top Gloss resin light grey (no grit), hardener with Dur-A-Grip. Finished surface texture shall match texture of approved samples. Contact Architect for approved samples. 4. Patch Materials: a. Shallow Fill and Patching: Use Dur-A-Flex, Inc. Dur-A-Glaze Rapid Patch b. Deep Fill and Sloping Material (over ¼ inch): Use Dur-A-Flex, Inc. Dur-A-Crete.

2.03 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS – EPX1: Other Areas: Bakery Service, Bakery Prep, Coffee/Gelato Svc., Meat Prep, Meat Service, Prepared Foods Service, Seafood Service, Specialty Service, Specialty Clean, Produce Prep, Coolers and Freezers (if indicated on drawings)

A. Base Coat Poly-Crete SL 1. Percent Reactive 100 % 2. VOC 0 g/L 3. Bond Strength to Concrete ASTM D 4541 400 psi, substrates fails 4. Compressive Strength, ASTM C579 7,800 psi 5. Tensile Strength, ASTM D 638 4,200 psi 6. Flexural Strength, ASTM D 790 5,076 psi 7. Impact Resistance @ 125 mils, MIL D-3134, >160 inch lbs. No visible damage or deterioration

B. Grout Coat Dur-A-Glaze Ultra Clear

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

09672-5 RESINOUS FLOORING 02/13/17 20150922

1. Percent Reactive, 100% 2. VOC 0 g/l 3. Water Absorption, ASTM D 4060 Nil 4. Tensile Strength, ASTM D 638 2100 psi 5. Compressive Strength, ASTM D-695 11,200 psi 6. Impact Resistance, MIL D-24613 0.0007, No cracking or delamination 7. Pot Life @ 70 F 45 mins 8. Cure Time @ 70 F 8 hours

C. Final Topcoat Armor Top 1. Percent reactive resin 100 % 2. VOC 0 g/L 3. Tensile strength, ASTM D 638 7,000 psi 4. Tensile modulus, ASTM D 638 300,000 psi 5. Coefficient of Friction ASTM D 2047 >0.60 6. UV Resistance Excellent 7. Taber Abrasion, ASTM D4060 8. With Grit 4 mg. loss 9. Without Grit 10 mg. loss 10. Potlife @ 70 F 2 hours 11. Dry Time @ 70 F, 50% RH 8 hrs. tack free, 12 hrs. dry 12. Recoat time @ 68 F <24 hours

2.04 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS – EPX2: Kitchen and Scullery.

A. Base Coat Poly-Crete MD 1. Percent Reactive 100 % 2. VOC 0 g/L 3. Bond Strength to Concrete ASTM D 4541 400 psi, substrates fails 4. Compressive Strength, ASTM C579 7,250 psi 5. Tensile Strength, ASTM D 638 750 psi 6. Flexural Strength, ASTM D 790 4,400 psi 7. Impact Resistance @ 125 mils, MIL D-3134, >160 inch lbs. No visible damage or deterioration

B. Top Coat Poly-Crete Color Fast 1. Percent Reactive, 100% 2. VOC 0 g/l 3. Shore D Hardness, ASTM D2240 65D 4. Tensile Strength, ASTM D 638 4200 psi 5. Compressive Strength, ASTM C579 7800 psi 6. Taber Abrasion, ASTM D4060 45 mg loss 7. Gloss, ASTM D523 60 degrees Semi-Gloss Appearance 8. Pot Life @ 70 F 10 minutes 9. Working Time @ 70 F 20 minutes

2.05 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS – EPX3 Public and Staff Restrooms.

A. Primer Dur-A-Glaze #4 with Damp hardener 1. Percent Solids 100 % 2. VOC 0 g/L 3. Bond Strength to Concrete ASTM D 4541 550 psi, substrates fails 4. Hardness, ASTM D 3363 3H 5. Elongation, ASTM D 2370 9 %

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

RESINOUS FLOORING 09672-6 20150922 02/13/17

6. Flexibility (1/4: Cylindrical mandrel), ASTM D 1737 Pass 7. Impact Resistance, ASTM D 2794 >160 8. Abrasion Resistance ASTM D 4060, CS 17 wheel, 1,000 g Load 30 mg loss

B. Body Coat Dur-A-Glaze Shop Floor 1. Percent Solids 100 % 2. VOC 0 g/L 3. Compressive Strength, ASTM D 695 17,500 psi 4. Tensile Strength, ASTM D 638 2,100 psi 5. Flexural Strength, ASTM D 790 5,100 psi 6. Abrasion Resistance, ASTM D 4060 C-10 Wheel, 1,000 gm load, 1,000 cycles 29 mg loss 7. Flame Spread/NFPA-101, ASTM E 84 Class A 8. Impact Resistance MIL D-24613 0.0007 inches, no cracking or delamination 9. Water Absorption. MIL D-24613 Nil 10. Potlife @ 70 F 20 minutes

C. Topcoat Armor Top (no grit) 1. Percent Solids 95 % 2. VOC 0 g/L 3. Tensile Strength, ASTM D 2370 7,000 psi 4. Adhesion, ASTM 4541 Substrate Failure 5. Hardness, ASTM D 3363 4H 6. 600 Gloss ASTM D 523 70 (gloss finish) 7. Abrasion Resistance, ASTM D4060 Gloss Satin CS 17 wheel (1,000 g load) 1,000 cycles 10 12 mg loss 8. Pot Life, 70 F, 50% RH 2 Hours 9. Full Chemical Resistance 7 days

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, installation tolerances and other conditions affecting flooring performance. 1. Verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for flooring installation and comply with requirements specified.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. General 1. New and existing concrete surfaces shall be free of oil, grease, curing compounds, loose particles, moss, algae growth, laitance, friable matter, dirt, and bituminous products . 2. Moisture Testing: 3. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and as follows: Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test ASTM F 1869-98. 4. Application will proceed only when the vapor/moisture emission rates from the slab is less than and not higher than 12 lbs./1,000 sf/24 hrs. 5. Perform relative humidity test using is situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 92% relative humidity level measurement. 6. Mechanical surface preparation: a. Shot blast all surfaces to receive flooring system with a mobile steel shot, dust recycling machine (Blastrac or equal). All surface and embedded accumulations of paint, toppings hardened

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

09672-7 RESINOUS FLOORING 02/13/17 20150922

concrete layers, laitance, power trowel finishes and other similar surface characteristics shall be completely removed leaving a bare concrete surface having a minimum profile of CSP 4-5 as described by the International Concrete Repair Institute. b. Floor areas inaccessible to the mobile blast machines shall be mechanically abraded to the same degree of cleanliness, soundness and profile using diamond grinders, needle guns, bush hammers, or other suitable equipment. c. Where the perimeter of the substrate to be coated is not adjacent to a wall or curb, a minimum 1/2 inch key cut shall be made to properly seat the system, providing a smooth transition between areas. The detail cut shall also apply to drain perimeters and expansion joint edges. d. Cracks and joints (non-moving) greater than 1/8 inch wide are to be chiseled or chipped-out and repaired per manufacturer’s recommendations. 7. At spalled or worn areas, mechanically remove loose or delaminated concrete to a sound concrete and patch per manufactures recommendations. 8. At doorway transitions a keyway shall be cut into the floor to create a smooth transition between the restroom flooring and the adjoining polished concrete. Key way should be approx. ¼” wide x ¼” deep and be placed in an area where it will not been seen when the restroom door is closed.

3.03 APPLICATION

A. General 1. The system shall be applied in distinct steps as listed according to the specific areas of the store. 2. Immediately prior to the application of any component of the system, the surface shall be dry and any remaining dust or loose particles shall be removed using a vacuum or clean, dry, oil-free compressed air. 3. The handling, mixing and addition of components shall be performed in a safe manner to achieve the desired results in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 4. The system shall follow the contour of the substrate unless pitching or other leveling work has been specified by the Architect. 5. A neat, professional finish with well-defined boundaries and straight edges shall be provided by the Applicator. All floor area will meet desired floor texture sample as provided on initial job overview meeting. Cove base details shall meet profile, color and texture of job site sample. 6. Coordinate the placement of prefinished aluminum termination strips (Schluter Strips) at the top of the coved base (furnished and installed under Section 09260 with related trades, i.e., Tile and Gypsum Wall Board installers).

B. EPX1: Other Areas: 1. Base Coat: a. The base coat shall be applied as a self-leveling system as specified by the Architect. The topping shall be applied in one lift with a nominal thickness of 1/8 inch. b. The topping shall be comprised of three components, a resin, hardener and white powder SL filler as supplied by the Manufacturer. c. The hardener shall be added to the resin in a steel bucket and thoroughly mixed with a dispersion blade and a high speed electric drill. White SL aggregate shall then be added to the catalyzed mixture and mixed in a manner to achieve a homogenous blend. d. The topping shall be applied over horizontal surfaces using ½ inch “v” notched squeegee, trowels or other systems approved by the Manufacturer. e. Immediately upon placing, the topping shall be degassed with a loop roller. f. Colored Quartz aggregate shall be broadcast to excess into the wet material at the rate of 0.8 lbs./sf. g. Allow material to fully cure. Vacuum, sweep and/or blow to remove all loose aggregate. 2. Second Broadcast: a. The broadcast coat shall be comprised of a liquid component and a hardener which is added at the rate 2 parts hardener to one part resin. Thoroughly mix by mechanical means such as a high speed paddle mixer. b. The broadcast coat resin shall be applied at the rate of 80 sf/gal using a flat squeegee and backroll method. c. Colored quartz aggregate shall be broadcast into the wet resin at the rate of 0.5 lbs./sf.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

RESINOUS FLOORING 09672-8 20150922 02/13/17

d. Allow material to fully cure. Vacuum, sweep and/or blow to remove all loose aggregate. e. Grout coat: f. The grout coat shall be roller applier with a coverage rate of 80 sf/gal. using a flat squeegee and backroll method. g. The grout coat shall be comprised of Ultra Clear liquid and hardener which is to be added at a rate in accordance with the Manufacturer's recommendations and thoroughly dispersed by suitably approved mechanical means such as a high speed paddle mixer. h. The grout coat will be allowed to cure prior to the application of the final top coat of Armor Top Urethane. i. The second topcoat shall be roller applier with a coverage rate of 100 sf/gal. j. The finish floor will have a nominal thickness of 1/4 inch. 3. Final Topcoat: a. The final topcoat shall be roller applier with a coverage rate of approximately 625 sf/kit. b. The final topcoat shall be comprised of a highly abrasion resistant aliphatic urethane liquid and a hardener which is to be combined together based on kit proportions. Do not break up kits as this material is ratio and weight sensitive. Mix in accordance with the Manufacturer's recommendations and thoroughly dispersed by suitably approved mechanical means such as a high speed paddle mixer. c. Applicators should wear spiked shoes during this process and follow application instructions as provided by the manufacturer. Careful attention to desired wet film thickness is critical to achieving professional results. d. Additional topcoats may be required to match texture of approved sample. Finished surface texture to match approved samples. Contact Architect for samples.

C. EPX2: Kitchen and Scullery areas: 1. Base Coat: a. The base coat shall be applied as a self-leveling system as specified by the Architect. The base coat shall be applied in one lift with a nominal thickness of 3/16 inch. b. The topping shall be comprised of three components, a resin, hardener and filler as supplied by the Manufacturer. c. The hardener shall be added to the resin and thoroughly dispersed by suitably approved mechanical means. MD Aggregate shall then be added to the catalyzed mixture and mixed in a manner to achieve a homogenous blend. d. The topping shall be applied over horizontal surfaces using a gauge rake or a pin rake set to deliver a 3/16” thick layer of base material. ½ inch “v” notched squeegee, trowels or other systems approved by the Manufacturer. e. Immediately upon placing, the topping shall be degassed with a porcupine roller. f. Flintshot aggregate shall be broadcast to excess into the wet material at the rate of 0.8 lbs./sf. g. Allow material to fully cure. Vacuum, sweep and/or blow to remove all loose aggregate.

2. Color Fast Top Coat: a. The top coat shall be comprised of three components, a resin, hardener and white powder filler as supplied by the Manufacturer. b. The resin shall be poured and all contents scraped into a steel mixing bucket, Slowly add the white powder material to the resin and mix thoroughly with a high speed dispersion blade for 45 seconds. Slowly add the hardener portion to the previously mixed material and blend for an additional 45 seconds. c. Pour out the mixed material onto the floor and spread to proper thickness using a non-marking window squeegee. Cut in edges and around equipment with a small brush. d. Saturate a 18” x 3/16” thick high quality roller with the color fast top coat material. Use this roller to level and achieve a uniform consistency of the finished top coat. A final cross roll should occur 90 degrees opposite the normal traffic flow in the area being covered. Allow to dry. e. Additional topcoats may be required to match texture of approved sample. Finished surface texture to match approved samples. Contact Architect for samples.

D. EPX3: Public and Staff Restrooms: 1. General

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

09672-9 RESINOUS FLOORING 02/13/17 20150922

2. The system shall be applied in distinct steps as listed below: a. Substrate preparation b. Priming c. Body coat application d. Topcoat application 3. Immediately prior to the application of any component of the system, the surface shall be dry and any remaining dust or loose particles shall be removed using a vacuum or clean, dry, oil-free compressed air. 4. The handling, mixing and addition of components shall be performed in a safe manner to achieve the desired results in accordance with the Manufacturer's recommendations. 5. The system shall follow the contour of the substrate unless pitching or other leveling work has been specified by the Architect. 6. A neat finish with well-defined boundaries and straight edges shall be provided by the Applicator. 7. Primer a. The primer shall consist of two components: a liquid resin and hardener that is mixed at the ratio of 2 parts resin to 1 parts hardener. b. The primer shall be applied by 1/8 inch notched squeegee and back rolled at the rate of 200 sf/gal to yield a dry film thickness of 8 mils. 8. Body Coat a. The body coat shall be applied as specified by the Architect. b. The body coat shall be comprised of two components, a resin, and hardener as supplied by the Manufacturer and mixed in the ratio of 2 parts resin to 1 part hardener. c. The body coat shall be applied over horizontal surfaces using “v” notched squeegee and back rolled at the rate of 80-100 sf/gal. d. Allow material to fully cure. 9. Topcoat a. The topcoat of Armor Top shall be roller applied per manufacturer’s spread rate of 625 sf/kit (gloss finish) or 750 sf/kit (satin finish) to yield a dry film thickness of 3 mils. b. The topcoat shall be comprised of a liquid resin, hardener and Dur-A-Grip that is mixed per the manufacturer’s instructions. c. The finished floor system will have a nominal thickness of 27 mils. d. Add small amount of Dur-A-Grip, manufactured from very small polypropylene beads, to the topcoat to provide additional traction to floor when floor is wet.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Tests, Inspection 1. The following tests shall be conducted by the Applicator: a. Temperature: Air, substrate temperatures and, if applicable, dew point. b. Coverage Rates: Rates for all layers shall be monitored by checking quantity of material used against the area covered.

3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Cure flooring material in compliance with manufacturer’s directions, taking care to prevent their contamination during stages of application and prior to completion of the curing process.

B. Remove masking. Perform detail cleaning at floor termination, to leave cleanable surface for subsequent work of other sections.

END OF SECTION 09762

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

RESINOUS FLOORING 09672-10 20150922 02/13/17

Page left intentionally blank

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

09900-1 PAINTING 02/13/17 20150922

SECTION 09900 - PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Work described in this section includes: 1. Touching up of shop applied prime coats. 2. Preparation of surfaces to receive finish. 3. Priming and back-priming of millwork. 4. Painting, staining or finishing of surfaces as specified herein.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Dry Film Thickness (DFT) as used in this Section, refers to the thickness of the coating measured in mils per coat when completely dry.

B. Mil as used in this Section is the thickness of the paint film measured in on thousandth of an inch.

C. VOC Volatile Organic Compounds found in primers, sealers, stains and coatings.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product List: 1. Submit a complete list of products and color samples proposed for use at least 30 days prior to commencement of painting work. 2. Indicate manufacturer, brand name, quality and type paint for each surface to be finished. 3. Use of products specified herein does not relieve contractor from responsibility of submitting product list. 4. Submit 8-1/2" x 11" samples of color samples to Architect for color on project per paint finish schedule. 5. Certification: Submit manufacturer's certified letter outlining the project square footage, minimum specified dry film thickness, percent solids per volume and the number of gallons required to meet the specified dry film thickness.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Qualifications 1. Work is to be executed by qualified painters with a minimum of three years experience in surface preparation and paint application.

B. Application 1. Where two finish coats are specified, tint the first finish coat one half the color of the second coat. Where white is selected as the second coat finish color, the first finish coat color is to be an off white. 2. Primers are to be un-tinted.

C. Field Samples 1. Apply a sample of the coating system in an area designated by the Owner/Architect.

D. Manufacturer's Warranty 1. Inspection of all surfaces to be coated must be done by the manufacturer’s representative to assure proper preparation prior to application. 2. All thinner, fillers, primers and finish coatings must be from the same manufacturer to support a product warranty. Products other than those from the finish manufacturer must be accompanied by a letter stating the fitness for use. 3. See Section 01600 – “Product Requirements” for additional warranty information.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

PAINTING 09900-2 20150922 02/13/17

E. Paint shall meet third-party ISO (International Organization for Standardization) 14025, Environmental Product Declarations (EPDs) Type III Labels certification.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Delivery: 1. Deliver Materials to job-site, ready-mixed in original containers with labels intact. 2. Provide labels bearing manufacturer's name, paint type, color and recommended installation and reducing procedures.

B. Storage and Handling: 1. Store acceptable materials in a single place. 2. Maintain neat, clean conditions in storage areas; remove rags and waste materials at end of each day's work. 3. Close containers at end of day's work. Leave no hazardous materials open.

C. Waste Management & Disposal: 1. Dispose of contaminated flammable solvent, used rags containing solvent and empty cans daily. 2. Dispose of hazardous coatings or solvents in accordance with state, county and local regulations for hazardous waste disposal.

1.06 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Site Inspection: 1. The Contractor shall inspect surfaces to be painted for signs of defects, physical damage, excessive moisture or contamination that would prevent proper adhesion.

B. Environmental Requirements: 1. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations as to environmental conditions under which materials may be applied. 2. Apply no materials in spaces where dust is being generated.

C. Protection: Cover and protect finished work of other trades and surfaces not being painted concurrently or not to be painted.

D. Safety Precautions: 1. Provide temporary fire protection equipment in materials storage area. 2. Prohibit smoking in storage area.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PAINT, GENERAL

A. VOC CONTENT 1. Products shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction and, for interior paints and coatings applied at Project site, the following VOC limits, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). a. Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L. b. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: 150 g/L. c. Dry-Fog Coatings: 400 g/L. d. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 200 g/L. e. Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: 250 g/L. f. Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: 340 g/L. g. Pretreatment Wash Primers: 420 g/L. h. Floor Coatings: 100 g/L. i. Shellacs, Clear: 730 g/L.

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

09900-3 PAINTING 02/13/17 20150922

j. Shellacs, Pigmented: 550 g/L.

2.02 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Benjamin Moore & Co. 2. ICI Paints. 3. Sherwin Williams.

B. Manufacturer for Wood Sealer on unstained recycled wood, unstained glue laminated beams, unstained wood trusses and stained and unstained dimensional lumber: 1. Bona US, 2550 South Parker Road, Suite 600, Aurora, CO 80014; 800.872.5515; www.bona.com

C. Miscellaneous Materials: 1. Paint Thinners and Tints shall be products of same manufacturer as paint or approved by him for use with his products. 2. Shellac, turpentine and patching compound materials for execution of work shall be pure, best quality products.

2.03 MIXING AND TINTING

A. Deliver paint products ready-mixed to job site.

B. Paint shall be well ground, shall not settle, cake or thicken in the container, shall be broken with a paddle to a smooth consistency.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

A. Examine surfaces with representative of paint manufacturer, designated to receive work described in this section for conditions adversely affecting the finished work, which cannot be corrected under "preparation" requirements specified herein. Repair or replace surfaces not meeting tolerance or quality requirements imposed within specifications governing substrate construction prior to initiating this work.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Wood Surfaces to receive paint: 1. Fill all nail holes, cracks, joints and defects prior to first coat of paint. Match filler to natural color of wood. 2. Sand surfaces even and smooth and dust or vacuum. 3. Clean soiled surfaces just prior to painting. 4. Apply shellac, not more than two pounds cut to knots, pitch and resinous sapwood before applying prime coat.

B. Painted wood: 1. Clean soiled surfaces just prior to painting. 2. Apply shellac, not more than two pounds cut, to knots, pitch and resinous sapwood before applying prime coat.

C. Ferrous Metals - with the exception of items noted as mill finish steel (MFS): 1. All unpainted surfaces shall be prepared in accordance with SSPC-SP 2 & 3, "Hand and Power Tool" cleaning. 2. All primed surfaces showing a gloss shall be sanded or brushed to a dull surface to provide a profile for mechanical bonding of succeeding coat. 3. Wash surfaces with non-ammoniated cleaner.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

PAINTING 09900-4 20150922 02/13/17

D. Ferrous Metals - items noted as mill finish steel (MFS): 1. Wipe surface with mineral spirits and allow to dry.

E. Concrete: 1. Rub concrete to remove all burrs. 2. Fill all irregularities with cement grout. 3. Allow a minimum of 30 days curing prior to any paint work. 4. Remove all laitence, efflorescence, form release oils and agents by abrasive sweepblast. 5. New concrete should be allowed to cure a minimum of 28 days or meet the requirements of ASTM D4263-83. Surface laitance must be removed so as to expose aggregate. 6. Cleaning: a. Concrete must free of grease, oils, coatings, dust, curing compounds and other contaminants in accordance with ASTM D4258-83. b. Concrete shall be abrasively cleaned by an abrasive blast cleaning procedure in accordance with ASTM D4259-88, section 8 c. The surface profile is not to exceed ⅛" (peak to valley) or as required to maintain intended profile as specified in drawings. Minor surface area deterioration of ⅛" or greater shall be repaired to minimize excessive material usage. Preparation by mechanically abrading in accordance with ASTM 4259-88, section 6 is acceptable subject manufacturers approval. d. Edges and other areas inaccessible to the abrasive blast equipment should be prepared using a hand held surface scabbler with vacuum attachment. e. For wet application, allow the surface to dry thoroughly for a minimum of 24 to 48 hours after rinsing prior to painting.

F. Galvanized Metal and Aluminum 1. Wash factory- or shop-primed surfaces with non-ammoniate cleaner and wipe dry with clean cloth. 2. Wash bare galvanized and aluminum surfaces with solvent and wipe dry with a clean cloth. Bare galvanized surfaces shall be completely free of dirt, dust, oils, waxes and other contaminants. Minor or occasional oxidation of galvanized coating is acceptable provided all loose oxidant is mechanically removed and the surface washed clean of the resulting dust by the method specified above.

G. Gypsum Drywall: 1. Fill narrow, shallow cracks and small holes with spackling compound or patching plaster. Allow to dry. 2. Sand smooth without raising nap of paper on wallboard.

H. Rooftop Gas Piping: SSPC-SP3 Power Tool Cleaning, leaving a surface profile.

3.03 APPLICATION

A. Test surfaces with moisture meter prior to application of first paint coat. Apply paint only when moisture content is within manufacturer's recommended limits.

B. Apply paint materials using clean brushes, rollers or spraying equipment.

C. Apply materials at a rate not exceeding that recommended by paint manufacturer for surface being painted, less ten percent for losses.

D. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for drying time between coats.

E. Vary slightly the color of successive coats.

F. Sand and dust between coats to remove defects visible from a distance of five feet.

G. Finish coats shall be smooth, free of brush marks, streaks, laps or pile-up of paint, skipped or missed areas.

H. Inspection:

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

09900-5 PAINTING 02/13/17 20150922

1. Do not apply additional coats until completed coat has been inspected by General Contractor. 2. Only inspected coats of paint will be considered in determining number of coats applied.

I. Make edges of paint adjoining other materials or colors clean and sharp with no overlapping.

J. Where portion of finish is damaged or unacceptable, refinish entire surface of wall.

K. Back-prime woodwork with material specified for prime coat, without runs on face.

L. Paint inside of ductwork flat black for entire area visible through pipe openings.

M. Seal tops and bottoms of interior doors with prime coat only; side edges same as faces of doors.

N. Finish all edges of exterior doors same as faces.

O. Where bright colors are indicated on the plans apply additional coats of paint to cover the surface with a uniform coloring.

P. At BOH sealed wood, seal all exposed surfaces and edges.

3.04 CLEANING

A. Touch up and restore finish where damaged.

B. Remove spilled, splashed or splattered paint from all surfaces.

C. Do not mar surface finish of item being cleaned.

D. Leave storage space clean and in condition of equivalent space in project.

E. Excess materials: When painting work is complete, neatly store remaining paint and accessory materials. 1. Remaining paint and accessory materials are the property of the Owner. 2. Sort materials by type and intended use. 3. Dry or loose materials not in containers shall be neatly folded, stacked and placed in containers specifically designed for material storage (shelves, pallets, etc). Do not use improvised or recycled packaging for material storage. 4. Tightly close all containers. 5. Clearly mark containers not bearing a label or other printed description with description of material inside. 6. Containers shall be clean and dry on the outside.

3.05 PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. Products listed in the Schedule of Paint Finishes below define requirements for quality, and are manufacture by Benjamin Moore & Company or Sherwin Williams unless otherwise indicated. Equivalent products by other manufacturer’s listed in Part 2 may be furnished in lieu of those specified. Substitution of products by manufacturers other than those listed will not be permitted.

B. Surfaces not requiring painting or staining: 1. Ceramic tile, glass, aluminum, brass, bronze, stainless steel, plastic, copper and rubber. 2. Prefinished surfaces, unless noted otherwise. 3. Concealed ductwork, conduit and piping.

3.06 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE: Provide the following paint systems for various substrates as indicated:

A. Rooftop Gas Piping: 1. Primer Moore: #Z163 Moorecraft SuperSpec DTM Alkyd Low Lustre Enamel (1.5 mils DFT).

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

PAINTING 09900-6 20150922 02/13/17

2. 1st coat Moore: # 164 Weatherproof Aluminum Paint (0.7 mils DFT). 3. 2nd coat Moore: # 164 Weatherproof Aluminum Paint (0.7 mils DFT).

3.07 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE: Provide the following paint systems for various substrates as indicated:

A. Gypsum Board Ceilings (flat finish): 1. Prime all new surfaces. Prime coat may be omitted on previously-painted surfaces. Comply strictly with the provisions of paragraph 3.02 “Preparation” above. 2. 1st coat: Moore: #N534 Ultra Spec Interior, Zero VOC, Acrylic Latex Primer (1.8 mil DFT) 3. 2nd coat Moore: #N536 Ultra Spec Interior, Zero VOC, Acrylic Latex Flat Paint (1.8 mils DFT) 4. 3rd coat Moore: #N536 Ultra Spec Interior, Zero VOC, Acrylic Latex Flat Paint (1.8 mils DFT)

B. Gypsum Board Ceilings, Walls and Soffits at food service areas (eggshell finish): 1. Prime all new surfaces. Prime coat may be omitted on previously-painted surfaces. Comply strictly with the provisions of paragraph 3.02 “Preparation” above. 2. 1st coat: Moore: #N534 Ultra Spec Interior, Zero VOC, Acrylic Latex Primer (1.8 mil DFT) 3. 2nd coat: Moore: #V342 Corotech Pre-Catalyzed Water Borne Epoxy Eggshell (2.0 mils DFT) 4. 3rd coat: Moore: #V342 Corotech Pre-Catalyzed Water Borne Epoxy Eggshell (2.0 mils DFT)

C. Gypsum Board Walls at non-food service areas (eggshell finish): 1. Prime all new surfaces. Prime coat may be omitted on previously-painted surfaces. Comply strictly with the provisions of paragraph 3.02 “Preparation” above. 2. 1st coat: Moore: #N534 Ultra Spec Interior, Zero VOC, Acrylic Latex Primer (1.8 mil DFT) 3. 2nd coat Moore: #N538 Ultra Spec Interior, Zero VOC, Acrylic Latex Eggshell Paint (1.8 mils DFT) 4. 3rd coat Moore: #N538 Ultra Spec Interior, Zero VOC, Acrylic Latex Eggshell Paint (1.8 mils DFT)

D. Wood- Painted: 1. Prime all new surfaces. Prime coat may be omitted on previously-painted surfaces. Comply strictly with the provisions of paragraph 3.02 “Preparation” above. 2. 1st coat Moore: #N534 Ultra Spec Interior, Zero VOC, Acrylic Latex Primer (1.8 mil DFT) 3. 2nd coat Moore: #N539 Ultra Spec Interior, Zero VOC, Acrylic Latex Semi-Gloss (1.8mils DFT) 4. 3rd coat Moore: #N539 Ultra Spec Interior, Zero VOC, Acrylic Latex Semi-Gloss (1.8mils DFT)

E. Wood at Sales Area– Clear Coated: 1. 1st coat Bona: Bonaseal Waterborne Floor Sealer. 2. 2nd coat Bona: Bona Naturale, Commercial Matte. 3. 3rd coat Bona: Bona Naturale, Commercial Matte.

F. WD-6 and WD-8 (to match stained to match WD-7): 1. 1st coat Sherwin Williams: Wood Classics Interior Oil Stain – 250. 2. 2nd coat Bona: Bona Naturale, Commercial Matte. 3. 3rd coat Bona: Bona Naturale, Commercial Matte.

G. Mill Finish Steel (MFS) – Clear Coated: 1. 1st coat Bona: Bona Naturale, Commercial Matte. 2. 2nd coat Bona: Bona Naturale, Commercial Matte.

H. Wood at Back of House – (Plywood and Base) Clear Coated: 1. 1st coat Moore: #423 Benwood Stays Clear Acrylic Polyurethane Low Luster (1.1 mils DFT). 2. 2nd coat Moore: #423 Benwood Stays Clear Acrylic Polyurethane Low Luster (1.1 mils DFT).

I. Ferrous Metal (primed metal deck, steel joists girders and joists): 1. Prime all new surfaces. Prime coat may be omitted on previously-painted surfaces. Comply strictly with the provisions of paragraph 3.02 “Preparation” above. 2. 1st coat Moore: #395 Benjamin Moore Latex Flat Dry Fall (1.9 mils DFT)

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

09900-7 PAINTING 02/13/17 20150922

J. Ferrous Metal (unprimed): 1. Prime all new surfaces. Prime coat may be omitted on previously-painted surfaces. Comply strictly with the provisions of paragraph 3.02 “Preparation” above. 2. 1st coat Moore: As recommended by Paint Manufacturer 3. 2nd coat Moore: #N539 Ultra Spec Interior, Zero VOC, Acrylic Latex Semi-Gloss (1.8mils DFT) 4. 3rd coat Moore: #N539 Ultra Spec Interior, Zero VOC, Acrylic Latex Semi-Gloss (1.8mils DFT)

K. Ferrous Metal (shop-primed): 1. Prime all new surfaces. Prime coat may be omitted on previously-painted surfaces. Comply strictly with the provisions of paragraph 3.02 “Preparation” above. 2. 1st coat Moore: As recommended by Paint Manufacturer 3. 2nd coat Moore: #N539 Ultra Spec Interior, Zero VOC, Acrylic Latex Semi-Gloss (1.8mils DFT) 4. 3rd coat Moore: #N539 Ultra Spec Interior, Zero VOC, Acrylic Latex Semi-Gloss (1.8mils DFT)

L. Galvanized Metal: 1. Prime all new surfaces. Prime coat may be omitted on previously-painted surfaces. Comply strictly with the provisions of paragraph 3.02 “Preparation” above. 2. 1st coat Moore: As recommended by Paint Manufacturer 3. 2nd coat Moore: #N539 Ultra Spec Interior, Zero VOC, Acrylic Latex Semi-Gloss (1.8mils DFT) 4. 3rd coat Moore: #N539 Ultra Spec Interior, Zero VOC, Acrylic Latex Semi-Gloss (1.8mils DFT)

M. Floor Marking Paint: 1. 1st Coat Sherwin Williams Promar Alkyd Fast Dry Zone Marking Paint, Yellow (7.5 mils DFT).

END OF SECTION

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

PAINTING 09900-8 20150922 02/13/17

Page left intentionally blank

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

09985-1 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PANELS 02/13/17 20150922

SECTION 09985 - FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PANELS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Work Included: All labor, materials, appliances, tools, equipment, facilities, transportation and services necessary for and incidental to performing all operations of the work of this section, complete as shown on drawings and as specified herein.

B. Related work specified elsewhere includes but is not limited to: 1. Section 06105 – Miscellaneous Carpentry 2. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Assemblies 3. Section 09511 – Acoustical Ceiling Systems

1.02 QUALITY CRITERIA

A. Qualification of Installers: For the actual cutting and installation of panels, use only thoroughly trained and experienced installers. In the acceptance or rejection of installed panels, no allowance shall be made for lack of skill on the part of installer.

B. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide fiberglass-reinforced plastic wall panels that are identical to those tested in accordance with ASTM E84 for the fire performance characteristics indicated below. Identify wall panel materials with appropriate markings from the testing and inspection organization. 1. Flame spread: 20 or less, U.L. Class A. 2. Smoke developed: 200 or less.

C. Single source responsibility: Obtain each color, texture, grade, finish and type of wall panel material from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying the progress of the work.

D. Fiberglass reinforced panels shall meet Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Standards and International Organization for Standardization (ISO) 14025, Environmental Product Declarations Type III Labels certification.

1.03 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental conditions: Do not install wall panel material until the space to receive the wall panel material is enclosed and weatherproof. Do not install materials until the ambient temperature within the building is maintained and stabilized at not less than 60 F for not less than ten (10) days prior to the beginning of the installation and ten (10) days following installation. 1. During and after installation, shield walls from exposure to direct sunlight to avoid blistering and distortion.

B. Use all means necessary to protect paneling materials before, during and after installation and to protect the installed work of other trades. In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Architect of Record and at no additional cost to the Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURER

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Kemlite Company, Inc.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PANELS 09985-2 20150922 02/13/17

2.02 FIBERGLASS-REINFORCED PLASTIC WALL PANELS

A. Sheet wall panels: Provide manufacturer’s standard, textured, semirigid, fiber-reinforced plastic sheets of thickness indicated. Material shall be chemical and stain-resistant. Plastic sheets shall comply with the performance characteristics specified. 1. Type 1: FIRE-X GLASBOARD with Surfaseal. a. Sheet Size: 48” x 120” b. Texture: Pebbled. c. Thickness: 0.090-inch (3/32”) thick. d. Color: White 85.

2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. FRP Moldings: Extruded, solid-polyvinyl chloride moldings, edge molding, inside corner molding, division molding, cap strips, outside corner and inside corner molding for 3/32" FRP paneling. Molding color(s) shall match color(s) or adjacent panels.

B. Fasteners: Provide high-impact, thermoplastic drive rivets. Color shall match wall panel.

C. Adhesives: 1. All adhesives shall be only those recommended by the manufacturer being installed. 2. Adhesive: Mildew-resistant, nonstaining adhesive, for use with specific wall covering and substrate application, as recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer, and with a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

D. Sealant: Provide Kemlite 255 Silicone Sealant, color, White.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION:

A. Examine substrates scheduled to receive fiberglass-reinforced wall panel materials for compliance with manufacturer’s requirements and conditions affecting performance. 1. Wall surfaces to receive wall panel materials shall be dry and free from dirt, grease, loose paint and scale. 2. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. General: Prior to installation, clean substrate to remove dust, debris and loose particles. 1. Provide skim coat over rough walls to smooth surface. 2. Drywall to be smooth with no low or high spots. 3. Complete all finishing operations, including painting, before beginning installation of wall panel materials. 4. Test masonry and plaster substrates to receive wall panel with electronic moisture meter. Moisture content shall be within manufacturer’s recommended limits. 5. Prime and seal substrates, if required, in accordance with the wall panel manufacturer’s recommendations for the type of substrate. 6. Acclimatize materials by removing from packaging in areas of installation not less than 48 hours before installation.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. General: 1. Cutting: With carbide-tipped, fine-toothed saw blades and drill bits; or with snips. Cut with face side up. Cut neatly around any pipes or boxes. 2. Wall panels to fit against ceiling and on top of base or as shown on details. Cut neatly to fit. 3. Install panels with manufacturer’s recommended gap for panel field and corner joints.

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

09985-3 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PANELS 02/13/17 20150922

4. Fastener holes in panels shall be predrilled and 1/8” larger than the diameter of the fastener. 5. Adhesive: Using a ¼”, notched trowel and the manufacturer’s recommended adhesive, apply adhesive to panel back for 100% coverage 6. Moldings: Install silicone sealant within moldings. Install moldings at all perimeter edges of panels, except above ceiling plane and in the longest practical lengths. Tightly butt end joints and miter joints of moldings. 7. Installation type: Install panels for full wall height.

3.04 CLEANING

A. General: Immediately upon completing of installation, clean plastic and accessories in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

B. Remove any excess adhesive or sealant from face seams, perimeter edges or adjacent surfaces using solvent or cleaner recommended by panel manufacturer.

C. Remove and replace any damaged sheets that cannot be cleaned.

D. Remove surplus materials, rubbish, and debris resulting from installation upon completion or work and leave areas of installation neat and clean.

END OF SECTION

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PANELS 09985-4 20150922 02/13/17

Page left intentionally blank

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

10160-1 STAINLESS STEEL TOILET PARTITIONS 02/13/17 20150922

SECTION 10160 – STAINLESS STEEL TOILET PARTITIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Stainless Steel Toilet Partitions to be furnished and installed at the Public Restrooms.

B. The work specified in this section includes furnishing, delivery and installation of all Toilet Partitions as indicated on the drawings and as required by actual conditions at the building. The Toilet Partitions shall include the furnishing of all necessary screws, special screws, bolts, special bolts, expansion shields and all other devices necessary for the proper installation and application of the Toilet Partitions.

C. Related Work specified elsewhere: 1. Division 9 Sections – “Finishes”. 2. Section 10801 – “Toilet and Bath Accessories”

1.02 REFERENCES

A. Standard: All Toilet Partitions shall be scheduled, supplied and installed in accordance with: Local Building Code, ANSI (American National Standards Institute) and the 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design (Department of Justice). In all cases the above references shall be taken to mean the latest edition of that particular standard including all revisions.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. General Requirements: Make all submittals in accordance with Section 01330.

B. Schedules: Submit detailed shop drawings.

C. Product Data: Submit product sheets and/or catalogue cuts, of all products listed in the shop drawings.

D. Samples: Upon request, submit a returnable sample of the Toilet Partitions to the Architect for approval not later than (10) days after requested. All samples must be properly identified including: name of supplier, and name of manufacturer.

E. Operations and Maintenance Data: 1. Comply with the requirements of Section 01770 – “Closeout Procedures”. 2. Submit two (2) copies of an Operation and Maintenance Manual. Include maintenance instructions, catalogue pages for each product, Name/Address and phone number of the Manufacturer and their Sales Agent and a Copy of the final shop drawings.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Substitutions: See Section 01600 – “Product Requirements”.

B. Supplier Qualifications: Toilet Partition shop drawings and Toilet Partitions shall be procured from a source of supply approved by the Consultant/Owner/Architect. Supplier is responsible for the complete Toilet Partition subcontract.

C. Stainless steel toilet partitions shall meet ISO (International Organization for Standardization) 14025: Environmental Product Declarations (EPD): Type III Labels certification.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

STAINLESS STEEL TOILET PARTITIONS 10160-2 20150922 02/13/17

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Marking and Packaging: Toilet Partitions must be delivered to the job site in the manufacturer’s original packages and marked to correspond with the approved shop drawings.

1.06 WARRANTY

A. Written Guarantee: The Toilet Partition manufacturer shall guarantee all Toilet Partitions by written certification, for a period of (1) year from Date of Substantial Completion of the project, against any defects in design, materials and workmanship. Any defects as described will be made good by the manufacturer at no additional cost to the owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Approved Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products specified herein by one of the manufacturers listed below. 1. Hadrian, Inc. 8671-A Tyler Boulevard, Mentor, Ohio 44060 TEL: 440-974-7120 FAX: 440-974-7122 2. Accurate Partitions, PO Box 287, Lyons, IL 60534-0287. TEL: (708) 442-6800. FAX: (708) 442-7439.

2.02 STAINLESS-STEEL, FLOOR-MOUNTED AND OVERHEAD-BRACED TOILET PARTITIONS

A. Materials: 1. Construction: Doors, Panels and Pilasters shall be constructed of two sheets of Type 304, #4 brushed finish stainless steel, laminated under pressure to masonite to a (1/2") honeycomb core for impact resistance, rigidity and sound deadening. Formed edges to be welded together and interlocked, under tension, with a roll-formed oval crown locking bar, mitred, welded and ground smooth at the corners. Honeycomb to be of virgin, long fiber paper with a maximum 12.5mm (1/2") cell size and a minimum compressive strength of 90 pounds per square inch. 2. Doors: Shall be 25mm (1") thick with cover sheets not less than 22ga. (0.8mm). 3. Panels: Shall be 25mm (1") thick with cover sheets not less than 22ga. (0.8mm). (Panels wider than 46" are 20ga. Standard.) 4. Pilasters: Shall be 32mm (1.25") thick with cover sheets not less than 20 ga. (0.9mm). Pilaster tops shall be reinforced with 20 ga. channel to create extra strength and twist-free rigidity along with minimizing damage by handling and/or shipping. 5. Headrail: Shall be 25mm (1") by 41mm (1.625") extruded anodized aluminum with double-ridge anti- grip design. Wall thickness to be 1.5mm (0.060") and shall be securely attached to wall and pilasters with manufacturer's fittings in such a way as to make a strong and rigid installation. All joints in headrails shall be made at pilaster.

B. Hardware and Fittings: 1. All panel and pilaster brackets and all door hardware shall be chrome-plated zinc die-castings, standard. 2. Doors shall be equipped with a gravity type hinge mounted on the lower pilaster hinge bracket. Door hinges shall be the wraparound type and adjustable to permit the door to come to rest at any position when not latched. 3. Each door to be fitted with a combined coat hook and bumper and a concealed latch, with face mortised flush with edge strip of door. 4. Barrier-free doors shall include ADA paddle handle to activate latch without fingertip grip application. Both standard and barrier-free latches shall have a turn slot designed to allow emergency access from exterior. The combined stop and keeper shall have a 19mm (0.75") diameter bumper locked in place. 5. Barrier-free doors to include one door pull on the pull side of the door. 6. Door top hinge pin shall be made from high strength, self-lubricating nylon with a split-tip design to prevent rising out of top door casting.

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

10160-3 STAINLESS STEEL TOILET PARTITIONS 02/13/17 20150922

7. Pilaster shoes shall be a welded one-piece design made from polished stainless steel. Two-piece shoes that can disassemble when kicked are unacceptable.

C. Finish: 1. All components shall be #4, brushed stainless steel.

D. Adhesives and sealants: 1. Use adhesives that have a VOC content of 30 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Site Preparation: The contractor must examine all site conditions that would prevent the proper application and installation of Toilet Partitions. Any defect must be immediately identified and corrected, prior to the installation of the Toilet Partitions.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Mounting Locations: All Toilet Partitions must be mounted according Manufacturer’s standard locations and those specified on the drawings.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Inspection: After installation has been completed, provide for a site inspection of all Toilet Partitions to determine that all items have been supplied and installed as per the details. Also, check the operation and adjustment of all Toilet Partitions. Any discrepancies, or malfunctioning product, must be reported to the Architect immediately.

3.04 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING

A. Final Preparation: At final completion, Toilet Partitions shall be left clean and free from disfigurement. Make all final adjustments. Where Toilet Partitions are found defective, repair or replace or otherwise correct as directed.

3.05 PROTECTION

A. Site Protection: The Contractor must provide for the proper protection of all Toilet Partitions until the owner accepts the project as complete.

END OF SECTION

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

STAINLESS STEEL TOILET PARTITIONS 10160-4 20150922 02/13/17

Page left intentionally blank

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

10170-1 SOLID-PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS 02/13/17 20150922

SECTION 10170 – SOLID-PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Solid Plastic Toilet Compartments to be furnished and installed BOH Staff Restrooms.

1.02 REFERENCES

1.03 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Concealed steel support members.

B. Section 06110 - Section 10801 - Toilet and Bath Accessories.

C. Section 01811 – Sustainable Design Requirements – Green Globes

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300.

C. Shop Drawings: 1. Dimensioned plans indicating layout of toilet compartments. 2. Dimensioned elevations indicating heights of doors, pilasters, dividing panels, and other components; indicate locations and sizes of openings in compartment dividing panels for toilet and bath accessories to be installed in partitions; indicate floor and ceiling clearances. 3. Details indicating anchoring components and methods for project conditions; indicate wall and ceiling support components required for installation, but not supplied by toilet compartment manufacturer.

D. Verification Samples: For each color specified, two sample chips representing actual product and color.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.

B. Store off the ground, indoors and undercover.

C. Store material where ambient temperature is maintained within 40 to 110 degrees F (5 to 43 degrees C).

1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Do not deliver materials or begin construction activities of this section until building is enclosed, with complete protection from outside weather.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

SOLID-PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10170-2 20150922 02/13/17

1.07 WARRANTY

A. Provide a written warranty covering all plastic components and plastic hardware against breakage, corrosion and delamination for a period of 15 years under normal use conditions.

1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A. Solid-plastic toilet compartments shall meet ISO (International Organization for Standardization) 14025: Environmental Product Declarations (EPD): Type III Labels certification.

1.09 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate Work with placement of support framing and anchors in walls and ceilings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Santana Products Company; P. O. Box 2021, Scranton, PA 18501. ASD. Tel. Toll Free: (800) 368-5002, Phone: (570) 504-1270. Fax: (570) 348-2959. Web Site: www.hinyhider.com E-mail: [email protected].

B. Substitutions: Not permitted.

C. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01600.

2.02 TOILET COMPARTMENTS AND SCREENS

A. Floor-Mounted Overhead-Braced, Clean-Look: Fabricated with non-corrosive doors, panels and pilasters to sizes indicated on the Drawings. 1. Floor Attachment of Pilaster: Stainless steel pilaster shoes (20 gauge, polished finish) anchored to finished floor with plastic anchors and #14 by 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) star-head security pin, stainless steel screws. 2. Wall Brackets: Brackets shall be used for all panels to pilaster, pilasters to wall and panel to wall connections. a. Full length, continuous plastic wall brackets. b. Attachment of full length brackets to adjacent wall construction by #14 by 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) star-head security pin, stainless steel screws anchored directly behind the vertical edge of panels and pilasters at 13 inch (3302 mm) intervals along the full length of bracket and at each 13 inch (3302 mm) interval alternately spaced between anchor connections. 3. Pilaster Front Connections: Wall brackets fastened to panels and pilasters using Clean Look connections using #14 by 3/4 inch (19 mm) stainless steel star-head security pin screws. 4. Headrail Connections: Headrail fastened to tops of pilasters and 18 gauge stainless steel headrail brackets using Clean Look connections using #14 by 3/4 inch (19 mm) stainless steel star-head security pin screws. 5. Door hardware shall be as follows: a. Integral Hinge System. Pilaster machined to accept door and hinge mechanism for the upper and lower portion of pilaster and door. Lower hinge consists of a two-piece 1/2 inch (12.5 mm) diameter nylon pin with "Cam Action" and a 3/16 inch (4.8 mm) stainless steel pin. Upper hinge consists of a two-piece 1/2 inch (12.5 mm) diameter, 4 inch (102 mm) long nylon pin with the upper portion of the nylon pin milled to receive a stainless steel spring. b. Barrier-free doors to include one door pull on the pull side of the door. c. Door strike and keeper fabricated from heavy aluminum extrusion (6463-T5 Alloy) with bright- dipped anodized finish, surface mounted, and thru-bolted to pilaster with star-head security pin, stainless steel barrel bolts. Size of strike shall be 6 inches (152 mm) in length. d. Door latch housing fabricated from heavy aluminum extrusion (6463-T5 Alloy) with bright-dipped

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

10170-3 SOLID-PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS 02/13/17 20150922

anodized finish, surface mounted and connected to door using Clean Look connections using #14 by 3/4 inch (19 mm) stainless steel star-head security pin screws. e. Barrier-free doors shall include ADA paddle handle to activate latch without fingertip grip application. f. Each door to include: one chrome plated zamac coat hook with rubber bumper.

B. Urinal and Sight Screens, Clean Look: Fabricated with non-corrosive panels and pilasters to sizes indicated on the Drawings. 1. Provide for the following mounting options: a. Wall hung. 2. Wall Brackets: Brackets shall be used for all panels to pilaster, pilasters to wall and panel to wall connections. a. Full length, continuous plastic wall brackets. b. Attachment of full length brackets to adjacent wall construction by #14 by 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) star-head security pin, stainless steel screws anchored directly behind the vertical edge of panels and pilasters at 13 inch (3302 mm) intervals along the full length of bracket and at each 13 inch (3302 mm) interval alternately spaced between anchor connections. 3. Pilaster Front Connections: Wall brackets fastened to panels and pilasters using Clean Look connections using #14 by 3/4 inch (19 mm) stainless steel star-head security pin screws. 4. Ceiling and Floor Connections: Use the same type of fasteners specified for wall brackets. a. Solid plastic pilaster shoes anchored to finished floor with plastic anchors and #14 by 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) star-head security pin, stainless steel screws. b. Headrail heavy aluminum extrusion (6463-T5) with bright-dipped anodized finish in anti-grip configuration. c. Headrail brackets shall be 18 gauge stainless steel. 5. Color: Classic - Charcoal Grey / OP

C. Adhesives and sealants: Use adhesives that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2.03 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate panels, doors and pilasters from High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) containing a minimum of 10 percent recycled material which is waterproof, non-absorbent and has a self-lubricating surface that resists marking with pens, pencils or other writing utensils. Provide with a special protective plastic covering prior to shipment. Finish of doors, panels, pilasters and screens shall be as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range.

B. Doors, panels and pilasters, nominal 1 inch (25 mm) thick with all edges machined to a radius of .250 inch (6 mm) and all exposed surfaces free of saw marks.

C. Toilet Partitions: 1. Dividing panels shall be 55 inches (1397 mm) high and mounted at 14 inches (356 mm) above finished floor. 2. Doors shall be 55 inches (1397 mm) and mounted at 14 inches (356 mm) above finished floor. 3. Aluminum edging strips to be fastened to the bottom edge of all doors and panels using vandal-proof "T" barb heat sync.

D. Urinal screens 1. Urinal screens will be a minimum 42 inches (1067 mm) high by 18 inches (457 mm) deep mounted at 14 inches (356 mm) above finished floor. 2. Urinal screens to be 24 inches (610 mm) deep and 42 inches (1067 mm) high will be wall mounted at 14 inches (356 mm) above finished floor with or without pilaster(s); pilasters shall be a minimum of 56 inches high with or without supporting headrail from 82 inches (2083 mm) high pilasters to adjacent wall per plans and details. 3. Pilasters shall be mounted with a one-piece plastic shoe with star-head security pin, stainless steel

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

SOLID-PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10170-4 20150922 02/13/17

fasteners. 4. Aluminum edging strips to be fastened to the bottom edge of all doors and panels using vandal-proof "T" barb heat sync.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify correct location of built-in framing, anchorage and bracing.

B. Verify correct spacing of plumbing fixtures.

C. Do not begin installation until reinforcement in ceilings and walls and substrate finishes have been properly installed and prepared.

D. Notify Architect of unsatisfactory conditions before proceeding.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.

B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Erect all components and accessories in a substantial manner, straight, level, and plumb.

C. Install with no evidence of drilling, cutting, or patching visible in the finished work.

D. Clean finished surfaces after installation and leave free of imperfections.

3.04 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation From Indicated Position: 1/4 inch (6 mm).

B. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/8 inch (3 mm).

C. Clearance at vertical edges of doors shall be uniform top to bottom and shall not exceed 1/4 inch (6 mm).

3.05 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust and align hardware to uniform clearance at vertical edge of doors.

B. Adjust hinges when unlatched to position doors as follows: 20 degrees open.

C. Adjust adjacent components for consistency of line or plane.

3.06 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products until completion of project.

B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

10170-5 SOLID-PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS 02/13/17 20150922

END OF SECTION

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

SOLID-PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10170-6 20150922 02/13/17

Page left intentionally blank

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

10520-1 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 02/13/17 20150922

SECTION 10520 - FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes portable fire extinguishers.

B. Allowances: 1. Extinguishers: Provide an allowance to furnish and install 20 multi-purpose, 2 wet-chemical and 1 carbon dioxide fire extinguishers 2. Locations of fire extinguishers to be coordinated by the Contractor and field located by Cobb County Fire Inspector.

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extin- guishers."

B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 366/A 366M carbon steel, commercial quality, stretcher leveled, tempered rolled.

2.02 PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. J. L. Industries, Inc.; a division of Activar Construction Products Group. 2. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. 3. Potter Roemer LLC; Div. of Smith Industries, Inc.

B. General: Provide fire extinguishers at locations directed by the City of Hoover Fire Inspector. 1. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer’s standard steel, designed to secure extinguisher indicated and with plated or baked-enamel finish. 2. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. a. Identify bracket-mounted fire extinguishers with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in red letter decals applied to mounting surface.

C. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type (Sales and Back of House): UL-rated 4-A:60-B:C, 10-lb nominal capacity, in enameled-steel container.

D. Wet-Chemical Type C (Kitchen Area): UL-rated K in stainless-steel container; with pressure-indicating gauge.

E. Carbon Dioxide Type (MDF Room): UL-rated 5-B:C, 5-lb nominal capacity, with carbon dioxide in manufacturer's enameled-steel container.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10520-2 20150922 02/13/17

2.03 FINISHES

A. Steel Baked-Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pre-treating, apply manufacturer’s standard two-coat, baked-enamel finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. Minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils. 1. Color and Gloss: As selected from manufacturer’s standard.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged units.

B. Install fire-protection specialties in locations indicated or if not indicated, as approved by the City of Hoo- ver Fire Inspector. 1. Per 2010 ADA Standards the maximum reach range height to the controls of the fire extinguishers shall not exceed 48”. For the fire extinguishers weighting more than 40 lbs (18 kg) the maximum mounting height shall be 48”. Per NFPA 10, Fire extinguishers with a gross weight greater than 40 lb (18.14 kg) shall be installed so the top of the fire extinguisher is not more than 3 ½ ft above the floor. Fire extinguishers or cabinets that project more than 4” from the face of the wall shall be mounted such that the bottom of the extinguisher or cabinet does not exceed 27” above the finished floor. In no case shall the bottom of the extinguisher be less than 4” above the floor.

END OF SECTION 10520

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

10606-1 CHAIN-LINK FENCES AND GATES 02/13/17 20150922

SECTION 10606 - CHAIN-LINK FENCES AND GATES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Galvanized-steel chain-link fence fabric. 2. Galvanized-steel framework.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 CHAIN-LINK FENCE FABRIC

A. General: Comply with the recommendations of the Chain-Link Manufacturers Institute’s “Product Manu- al”. Comply with ASTM A 392, CLFMI CLF 2445, and requirements indicated below. 1. Steel Wire Fabric: Metallic-coated wire with a diameter of 0.120 inches (3.05 mm). 2. Mesh Size: 2 inches (50 mm). 3. Weight of Metallic (Zinc) Coating: ASTM A 392, Type II, Class 1, 1.2 oz./sq. ft. (366 g/sq. m) with zinc coating applied after weaving. 4. Provide fabric in one-piece heights measured between top and bottom of outer edge of selvage knuckle or twist.

B. Selvage: Twisted top and knuckled bottom.

2.02 INDUSTRIAL FENCE FRAMING

A. Round steel pipe for Posts and Rails: Comply with ASTM F 1043 for framing, ASTM F 1083 for Group IC round pipe, and the following: 1. Group: IA, round steel pipe, Schedule 40. 2. Metallic Coating (internal and external): Type A, consisting of not less than minimum 2.0-oz./sq. ft. (0.61-kg/sq. m) average zinc coating per ASTM A 123/A 123M.

B. Post brace rails: Match top rail for coating, strength and stiffness requirements. Provide brace rail with truss rod assembly for each gate, end and pull post. Provide two brace rails extending in opposite directions, each with a truss rod assembly, for each corner post and for pull posts. Provide rail ends and clamps for attaching rails to posts.

C. Top rails: With swaged ends or fabricated for expansion-type coupling.

D. Intermediate rails: Match top rail for coating, strength and stiffness requirements.

E. Bottom rails: Match top rail for coating, strength and stiffness requirements.

2.03 SWING AND SLIDING GATES

A. General: Comply with ASTM F 900 for single swing gates and ASTM F 1184 for sliding gates.

B. Metal Pipe and Tubing: Galvanized steel. Comply with ASTM F 1043 and ASTM F 1083 for materials and protective coatings. 1. Frames and Bracing: Fabricate members from round galvanized steel tubing with outside dimension and weight according to ASTM F 900 for swing gates, ASTM F 1184 for sliding gates and the following: 2. Gate Fabric Height: As indicated 3. Leaf Width: As indicated.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

CHAIN-LINK FENCES AND GATES 10606-2 20150922 02/13/17

2.04 TENSION WIRE AND FITTINGS

A. Metallic-Coated Steel Wire: 0.177-inch- (4.5-mm-) diameter, marcelled tension wire complying with ASTM A 824, Type II, zinc coated (galvanized) by hot-dip process, and matching chain-link fabric coating weight.

B. Fittings: Provide fittings for a complete fence installation, including special fittings for corners. Comply with ASTM F626.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Installation, General: Install chain-link fencing to comply with ASTM F 567 and more stringent requirements specified.

B. Post Setting: 1. Posts to be surface mounted to concrete slab with expansion bolts placed through bottom plate welded to post. Verify that posts are set plumb, aligned, and at correct height and spacing, and hold in position during placement. Protect posts damage after installation.

C. Terminal Posts: Locate terminal end, corner, and gate posts per ASTM F 567.

D. Line Posts: Space line posts uniformly at 5 feet (1.5 m) o.c.

E. Bottom Rails: Install, spanning between posts.

F. Tie Wires: Use wire of proper length to firmly secure fabric to line posts and rails. Attach wire at 1 end to chain-link fabric, wrap wire around post a minimum of 180 degrees, and attach other end to chain-link fabric per ASTM F 626. Bend ends of wire to minimize hazard to individuals and clothing.

G. Gate installation: 1. Install gates according to manufacturer's written instructions, level, plumb, and secure for full opening without interference. 2. Attach fabric as for fencing. 3. Attach hardware using tamper-resistant or concealed means. 4. Install ground-set items in concrete for anchorage. 5. Provide steel sleeves for all drop rods. 6. Adjust gate and hardware to operate smoothly, easily and quietly throughout entire movement range. 7. Confirm that latches and locks engage securely without forcing or binding.

END OF SECTION 10606

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

10801-1 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 02/13/17 20150922

SECTION 10801 - TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Toilet and bath accessories. 2. Infant-care products. 3. Under-lavatory guards. 4. Foot Pull.

1.02 WARRANTY

A. Special Mirror Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects within 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Toilet and Bath Accessories: a. American Specialties, Inc. b. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. c. Bradley Corporation. d. McKinney/Parker Washroom Accessories Corp. 2. Infant-Care Products: a. American Infant Care Products, Inc. b. American Specialties, Inc. c. Koala Corporation. d. Safe-Strap Company, Inc. 3. Under-lavatory Guards: a. Truebro, Inc. 4. Foot Pull: a. Footpull.com, 5301 Ridge Springs Court, Arlington, TX 76017, 682.551.6331 or 225.445,1522, www.footpull.com 5. Child Lavatory Access Device: a. Step ‘N Wash, model number SNW-SS 975 as supplied by HEFCO, LLC, 11 Mansell Circle, Ro- swell, GA 30075; Contact Jason Koenig, 770.846.6873.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, No. 4 finish (satin), 0.0312-inch (0.8-mm) minimum nominal thickness, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.

C. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and tamper-and-theft resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed.

D. Mirror Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality q2, nominal 6.0 mm thick, with silvering, electroplated copper coating, and protective organic coating complying with FS DD-M-411.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801-2 20150922 02/13/17

2.03 FABRICATION

A. General: One, maximum 1-1/2-inch- diameter, unobtrusive stamped manufacturer logo, as approved by Architect, is permitted on exposed face of accessories. On interior surface not exposed to view or back surface of each accessory, provide printed, waterproof label or stamped nameplate indicating manufacturer's name and product model number.

B. Surface-Mounted Toilet Accessories: Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and access panels with continuous stainless-steel hinge. Provide concealed anchorage where possible.

C. Framed Glass-Mirror Units: Fabricate frames for glass-mirror units to accommodate glass edge protection material. 1. Provide mirror backing and support system that permits rigid, tamper-resistant glass installation and prevents moisture accumulation. 2. Provide galvanized steel backing sheet, not less than 0.034 inch and full mirror size, with nonabsorp- tive filler material. Corrugated cardboard is not an acceptable filler material. 3. Provide continuous ½” wide polished stainless steel frame.

D. Mirror-Unit Hangers: Provide mirror-unit mounting system that permits rigid, tamper- and theft-resistant installation, as follows: 1. One-piece, galvanized steel, wall-hanger device with spring-action locking mechanism to hold mirror unit in position with no exposed screws or bolts. 2. Heavy-duty wall brackets of galvanized steel, equipped with concealed locking devices requiring a special tool to remove.

E. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative.

2.04 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES

A. See schedule on drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. 1. Install all accessories to comply with requirements of the 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design as published by the Department of Justice. 2. Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf (1112 N), when tested according to method in ASTM F 446. 3. Install one foot pull and sign on the restroom side of each door leading from public or staff toilet rooms. 4. At Child Lavatory Access Device, ensure that adjacent lavatory floor space complies with all accessibility requirements.

3.02 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items.

B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings.

C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations.

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

10801-3 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 02/13/17 20150922

END OF SECTION 10801

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801-4 20150922 02/13/17

Page left intentionally blank

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

12484-1 ENTRANCE MATS AND GRIDS

02/13/17 20150922

SECTION 12484 - ENTRANCE MATS AND GRIDS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. The extent of the work specified herein is shown on the drawings.

B. The work specified herein includes Floor Mats & Frame Assemblies.

C. Related Sections: 1. The following sections contain requirements related to the work specified herein. 2. Grouting frames into recess; refer to sections 03300 - “Cast-In-Place Concrete”.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following in accordance with conditions of contract and Division 1 specification section 01330.

B. Product data for each type of floor mat/grid and frame specified including manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions.

C. Shop drawings in sufficient detail showing layout of mat/grid and frame specified including details indicating construction relative to materials, direction of traffic, spline locations, profiles, anchors and accessories.

D. Samples for verification purposes: Submit an assembled section of floor mat/grid and frame members with selected tread insert showing each type of color for exposed floor mat/grid, frame and accessories required.

E. Maintenance data in the form of manufacturer's printed instructions for cleaning and maintaining floor mats/grids.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Flammability in accordance with ASTM E648, Class 1, Critical Radiant Flux, minimum 0.45 watts/m2.

B. Slip resistance in accordance with ASTM D-2047-96, Coefficient of Friction, minimum 0.60 for accessible routes.

C. Standard rolling load performance to be 1000 lb./wheel (load applied to a solid 5” x 2” wide polyurethane wheel, 1000 passes without damage).

D. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain floor mats/grids and frames from one source of a single manufacturer.

E. Utilize superior structural aluminum alloy 6103-T5 for rail components.

F. Shall meet third-party ISO (International Organization for Standardization) 14025, Environmental Product Declarations (EPDs) Type III Labels certification: NSF/ANSI 332 Sustainability Assessment for Resilient Flooring & NSF/ANSI 140 Sustainability Assessment for Carpet.

G. NSF/ANSI 332 Sustainability Assessment for Resilient Flooring.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

ENTRANCE MATS AND GRIDS 12484-2 20150922 02/13/17

H. NSF/ANSI 336 Sustainability Assessment for Commercial Furnishings Fabric.

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials to the project site ready for use and fabricated in as large sections and assemblies as practical, in unopened original factory packaging clearly labeled to identify manufacturer.

1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Field measurements: Check actual openings for mats/grids by accurate field measurements before fabrication. Record actual measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of work.

B. For recess application coordinate frame installation with concrete construction to ensure recess and frame anchorage are accurate and that the base is level and flat. Defer frame installation until building enclosure is complete and related interior finish work is in progress.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURER

A. Approved Manufacturer: SpaceLinks International, www.spacelinks.com. Contact: Shawn P Dockry, [email protected] , 800-233-4575 x 120

2.02 FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES

A. Model and Description: 1. Design-Links 2 flexible, injection molded, 100% virgin PVC quads surrounded by 0.75” x 0.5” x 1 3/8” overlapping divider anodized aluminum frames that install in ½” recess provided in the concrete slab. The surface of the mat shall consist of removable carpet strips spaced 1.25” on center and secured in place with loop and hook fasteners.

B. Materials and Finish 1. Vinyl properties: a. Thickness: 5/8.” b. Hardness: Shore ‘A’ ASTM D2240-86: 85. c. Specific Gravity: ASTM D792: 1.34. d. Tensile Strength: ASTM D421 Die C: 2640 psi. e. Elongation Percentage at Break: ASTM D412 Die C: 365 psi. f. 100% Modulus: ASTM D412 Die C: 1339 psi g. Tear Strength: ASTM D624: 362 psi. h. Low Temperature Brittleness: ASTM D11: -37 degrees C. i. Static Coefficient of Friction: ASTM D2047: Dry leather = 0.79; wet leather = 1.04. j. Color: Black. 2. Aluminum Properties: a. Aluminum frame composition: 6063-T5. b. Lineals and dividers: Outdoor, all weather anodized aluminum. c. Color: Clear anodized 3. Fiber Properties: a. Carpet Insert: Meka Brush Super utilizing engineered Dartex fiber in dense cut pile construction. b. Face weight: 26 oz./sq. yd. c. Denier: 2750. d. Fiber: Engineered 100% polypropylene blends. e. Backing: Vinyl and hook and loop fastening system. f. Carpet insert color: Charcoal.

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

12484-3 ENTRANCE MATS AND GRIDS

02/13/17 20150922

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verification of conditions: 1. Examine areas and conditions under which work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper or timely completion. 2. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Manufacturer shall offer assistance and guidance to provide a template of irregular shaped mat/grid assemblies to ensure a proper installation.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install the work of this section in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 1. Install rails perpendicular to traffic flow. 2. Do not splice units in the middle of a door opening wherever possible.

B. Set mat/grid at height recommended by manufacturer for most effective cleaning action.

C. Coordinate top of mat/grid surfaces with bottom of doors that swing across to provide ample clearance between door and mat/grid.

3.04 CLEANING

A. It is important to the life cycle of the entrance mat that a maintenance schedule be developed which includes regular vacuuming and extraction that correctly matches the amount of traffic the mat incurs.

3.05 PROTECTION

A. After completing required frame installation and concrete work, provide temporary filler of plywood or fiberboard in recess, and cover frames with plywood protective flooring. Maintain protection until construction traffic has ended and project is near time of substantial completion.

B. Defer installation of floor mats/grids until time of substantial completion of project.

END OF SECTION

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

ENTRANCE MATS AND GRIDS 12484-4 20150922 02/13/17

Page left intentionally blank

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

13900-1 FIRE SUPPRESSION 02/13/17 20150922

SECTION 13900 - FIRE SUPPRESSION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Automatic sprinkler systems. 2. Fire protection sprinkler piping work with feed and cross main piping, branch line piping, test valves, test connections, and sprinklers. 3. Flow indicators, valves, gauges, alarms, drain piping, and supervisory switches. 4. System design, installation and certification.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. ASTM A 47 - Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings 2. ASTM A 53 - Pipe, Steel, Black And Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded And Seamless 3. ASTM A 135 - Electric-Resistance-Welded Steel Pipe 4. ASTM A 234 - Piping Fittings Of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel For Moderate And High Temperature Service 5. ASTM A 536 - Ductile Iron Castings 6. ASTM A 795 - Black And Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Welded And Seamless Steel Pipe For Fire Protection Use 7. ASTM A 865 - Threaded Couplings, Steel, Black Or Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Welded Or Seamless, For Use In Steel Pipe joints

B. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): 1. ASME B 16.1 - Cast Iron Pipe Flanges And Flanged Fittings 2. ASME B 16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings 3. ASME B 16.4 - Gray Iron Threaded Fittings 4. ASME B 16.5 - Pipe Flanges And Flanged Fittings Nps 1/2 Through Nps 24 Metric/ Inch Standard 5. ASME B 16.9 - Factory-Made Wrought Buttwelding Fittings 6. ASME B 16.11 - Forged Fittings, Socket-Welding And Threaded

C. Factory Mutual System (FM): Approval Guide, Latest edition.

D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): NFPA 13, Current Edition - Installation of Sprinkler Systems.

E. Underwriters Laboratory (UL): UL Fire Protection Directory – Latest Edition.

F. Comply with requirements of Tenant’s underwriter, Liberty Mutual Property Engineering, Sprinkler Plan Review Submittal Guide For Whole Foods Market, Inc., dated December 2016.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Contractor shall be responsible to make the following submittals and receive the respective approvals: 1. Fire Protection Engineer (through Architect). 2. Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). 3. Whole Foods Market Insurance Underwriter: Liberty Mutual Property Engineering. a. Submit .pdf copies to 1) Josh Goodson at Liberty Mutual ( [email protected] ). 2) Donna Settle at John L. Wortham & Son, L.P. ([email protected] ). 3) [email protected]

B. The following information is required for sprinkler plan submission:

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

FIRE SUPPRESSION 13900-2 20150922 02/13/17

1. Physical Characteristics (Cross Section Through Building) a. Storage height. b. Roof height. 2. Sprinkler Design a. Densities. b. Areas of operation. (Include key plan on each drawing.) 3. Water Supply a. Static pressure, residual pressure, and flow. b. Date of flow test. c. Location of flow test hydrants shown on site plan. d. Elevation referenced to finished floor level. e. Source of water. f. On-site verification water flow test as referenced under "Flow Tests". 4. Manufacturer's Data a. Pipe, fittings, and mechanical couplings. b. Alarm valves. c. All control, globe, and check valves. d. Water motor alarm and gongs. e. Sprinklers. f. Pipe hangers and supports. g. Water flow and tamper switches. h. Chrome metal wall plates and escutcheons. i. Underground pipe, valves, fittings and hydrants. j. Hose stations. k. Backflow preventer with pressure loss curves. 5. A machine copy of the hydraulic calculation nameplate properly filled out for each system shall be submitted along with the manufacturer's submittal data and shop drawings referenced above.

C. Submittal Procedure: 1. Submittals shall be complete, accurate, and in full compliance with contract requirements for proper and timely approval. 2. Maintain two copies of approved documents on site. 3. Submittals will be rejected which do not comply with Contract Documents. a. Design Issues: Incorrect densities, design areas, equipment sprinkler spacing, hose station missing, incomplete system design, etc. No changes in design area, number of sprinklers operating, pipe sizes, number of branch lines, number of mains or deviation of water supply from that shown on the Contract Documents shall be approved by Whole Foods. This is not intended to limit the Contractor from making minor modifications to system design for coordination purposes. b. Incorrect Material: Do not propose pipe, sprinklers or backflow preventers not indicated in Contract Documents. Products not specified in contract documents are cause for rejection. c. Incorrect Valves: Do not propose OS&Y valves when wall PIV's are indicated in the Contract Documents. 4. Rejected submittals shall be revised and resubmitted until approved. Extension of time will not be allowed for rejected submittals. a. The Fire Suppression subcontractor shall revise and resubmit rejected submittals within 7 days of receipt of rejected submittals. b. The Contractor shall verify that the Fire Suppression subcontractor has addressed all required revisions in the resubmittal.

D. Contract Closeout Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Maintenance Data: Include components of system, servicing requirements, inspection data, and owners manuals. 2. Training Requirements: Provide operational training to Whole Foods. Include system control operation, Fire Pump (if provided) manual and abort functions, trouble procedures, auxiliary functions and emergency procedures. 3. Contractors Material Test Certificates: Provide Copies of completed Underground, Overhead, and

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

13900-3 FIRE SUPPRESSION 02/13/17 20150922

Fire Pump (if applicable) Contractor’s Material Test Certificates. 4. As-Built shop drawings indicating installed location of components, including all piping, sprinklers, hangers, valving, inspector's test stations, auxiliary drains, and hose stations (if required). 5. At Project completion, present to the Store Manager the As Built Drawings enclosed in a plastic pipe tube (fixed cap at one end and a threaded-cap on the other end) for storage in the Riser Room. 6. In addition to the copies of Documents delivered to the Store Manager, distribute additional copies of documents as indicated below: a. Contractor shall deliver copies of the As-Built shop drawings and Contractor's Record Letter of Conformance for Fire Suppression and Contractor’s Material Test Certificates (Underground, Overhead, and Fire Pump) in both hard copy and electronic form (*.pdf) to Whole Foods. b. Contractor shall deliver copies of the Contractor's Record Letter of Conformance for Fire Suppression and Contractor’s Material Test Certificates (Underground, Overhead, and Fire Pump) in both hard copy and electronic form (*.pdf) to Architect.

E. Once the submittals have been approved by the AHJ and Fire Protection Enginner, Contractor shall submit all documents to the Owner’s Underwriter, Liberty Mutual Property Engineering for final review and receive their approval prior to the start of the installation.

1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. System shall provide coverage for all existing and new building and expansion areas including, but not limited to, areas scheduled in this Section. Contract Documents have been prepared in accordance with NFPA 13 (working plans) except for fabrication information. The Contract Documents are prepared to a level consistent with that level required by the Authorities Having Jurisdiction to gain plan check approval. No changes in design area, number of sprinklers operating, pipe sizes, number of branch lines, number of mains or deviation of water supply from that shown on the drawings shall be approved by Fire Protection Consultant. This is not intended to limit the Contractor from making minor modifications to system design for coordination purposes. The Contractor shall review the Contract Documents for completeness and to ensure that the Construction Documents meet all Authorities Having Jurisdiction requirements. Discrepancies with NFPA or Authorities Having Jurisdiction requirements shall be brought to the attention of the Fire Protection Consultant prior to bid. The Contractor shall complete the fire protection Contract Documents to provide all final required detail such as fabrication details, final pipe cuts, hanger cuts, and other miscellaneous details not required by the Authority Having Jurisdiction for approval. Contractor is responsible to coordinate design with all trades and disciplines.

B. Provide system complying with NFPA 13, Authorities Having Jurisdiction, and Contract Documents. Densities and areas of application shown or specified have been developed based on NFPA requirements, engineering judgment and insurance carrier requirements.

C. Base system design on water flow test data shown on the Drawings.

D. Verify actual backflow preventer to ensure correct friction loss is calculated.

E. Provide fire department connections where required.

F. Sprinklers in light hazard areas shall be quick response type.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Guarantee system for a period of one year after completion of work and acceptance by Owner.

B. Qualifications (Installer): Company specializing in performing work of this Section with minimum three years experience and a minimum of a NICET Certified Engineering Technician (Level III) Technician Fire Sprinkler Designer on staff responsible for project.

C. Company shall have a sprinkler contractor license issued by the Authorities Having Jurisdiction.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

FIRE SUPPRESSION 13900-4 20150922 02/13/17

D. Regulatory Requirements: Provide certificate of compliance from Authorities Having Jurisdiction indicating approval of field acceptance tests.

1.06 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Provide extra sprinklers under the provisions of NFPA 13. Provide suitable wrenches for each sprinkler type. Provide sprinklers as needed to meet the requirements listed below. Provide a minimum of 2 spare sprinklers for new sprinklers being added that do not match existing: 1. 12 Sales Floor Type 2. 4 Dry Pendent 3. 2 each of other type present for a total of 24.

B. If needed, provide sprinkler and sprinkler wrench cabinet per NFPA 13, adjacent to sprinkler risers.

C. Provide hydraulic calculation placard attached to each riser on systems that are modified or added.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, and protect products to site as directed by Whole Foods and/or their General Contractor.

B. Store products in shipping containers and maintain in place until installation. Provide temporary inlet and outlet caps. Maintain caps in place until installation.

1.08 FLOW TESTS

A. Flow test data may be provided as part of the contract documents and may be used as a preliminary indicator of available water supply only. Flow test data may also be available from the local water supplier and should also be considered only as preliminary.

B. Each contractor submitting a bid on this project shall verify flow test information in the vicinity of the project by his own water flow test at the indicated hydrants. No requests for change orders will be accepted because successful contractor did not verify water supply information obtained from local authorities or did not run his own test prior to submitting his bid.

C. All flow test data shall be subject to the "10% rule" as defined in this paragraph. Before any calculations or supply curve plotting, reduce the reported static and residual pressures by 10%. Make no reduction to the flow rate reported. When submitting flow test data, copy and complete the "Flow Test Report" attached at the end of this specification section.

D. No hydraulic calculations, drawings, or equipment submittals will be reviewed unless they are based on and accompanied by “Flow Test Report” as attached at the end of this specification section. The flow test data used for calculations may not be from a preliminary test. The “Pre-Bid Flow Test” must be reported on the “Flow Test Report” whether a “Preliminary Flow Test” was or was not presented as part of the contract documents.

E. At the completion of the project, submit the "Flow Test Report" again to include "Project Completion Flow Test". Submit at this time to Architect in accordance with general submission requirements, and to owner's insurer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Provide UL Listed or FM Approved materials complying with NFPA 13, unless noted otherwise in Contract Documents.

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

13900-5 FIRE SUPPRESSION 02/13/17 20150922

2.02 FIRE PROTECTION PIPING - ABOVE GROUND 1. Wet Pipe Systems, Utilizing Threaded Pipe: a. Schedule 40 black steel pipe. b. Threadable lightwall sprinkler pipe. One of the following: 1) Dyna-Thread by Allied Tube and Conduit, Harvey, IL, (800) 882-5543. 2) Eddy Thread 40 by Bull Moose Tube Company, Chesterfield, MO, (800) 325-4467. 3) Mega-Thread by Wheatland Tube Company, Collingswood, NJ, (800) 257-8182. 4) EZ-Thread by Youngstown Tube, Youngstown, OH (866) 843-8823. 5) Substitutions: Not permitted. c. Pipe shall have a corrosion resistance ratio of 1.0 or greater after threading. d. Pipe located outdoors and piping in non-conditioned spaces shall be externally galvanized. 2. Wet Pipe Systems, Utilizing Roll Grooved Pipe. a. Schedule 10 black steel pipe. b. Lightwall sprinkler pipe. One of the following: 1) Dyna-Flow by Allied Tube and Conduit, Harvey, IL, (800) 882-5543. 2) Eddy-Flow by Bull Moose Tube Company, Chesterfield, MO, (800) 325-4467. 3) Fire-Flo by Youngstown Tube, Youngstown, OH (866) 843-8823. 4) EZ-Flow, by Northwest Pipe Company, Portland, OR, (800) 824-9824. 5) Substitutions: Not permitted. c. Pipe shall have a corrosion resistance ratio of 1.0 or greater. d. Pipe located outdoors and piping in non-conditioned spaces shall be externally galvanized. 3. Dry Pipe Systems: Same as wet pipe systems except pipe shall be galvanized, zinc coated internally and externally.

B. Fittings: Provide one of the following: 1. Cast-Iron Threaded Flanges: ASME B16.1. 2. Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4. 3. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3. 4. Steel, Threaded Couplings: ASTM A 865. 5. Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234, ASME B16.9, or ASME B16.11. 6. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5. 7. Steel, Grooved-End Fittings: UL-listed and FM-approved, ASTM A 47, malleable iron or ASTM A 536, ductile iron; with dimensions matching steel pipe and ends factory grooved according to AWWA C606. Roll groove only, cut groove unacceptable. 8. Steel Fittings and Cast Iron fittings shall not be used for dry pipe systems. 9. Fitting type shall match pipe. Galvanized fittings shall be used for dry pipe systems. 10. Crimp-type couplings shall not be used.

C. Flexible Piping Systems: At Contractor’s option, UL listed and FM approved flexible piping connections to sprinklers may be used for both suspended and sheetrock ceilings when suitable for their intended use. 1. Description: Connections shall include a fully welded (non-mechanical fittings), braided, leak-tested sprinkler drop with a minimum internal corrugated hose diameter of 1 inch, lengths of 2 ft to 6 ft., and a one-piece multi-port ceiling bracket with removable attachment hub and self-securing integrated snap-on clip-ends for attachment to ceiling grid without the need for a screw fastener. 2. Acceptable Manufacturer: Flex Head series 2000 by Flexhead Industries of Holliston, MA (800) 829- 6975 or (508) 893-9596, Fax (508) 893-6020. 3. No Substitutions Permitted.

2.03 BACKFLOW PREVENTER ASSEMBLIES (IF NEEDED)

A. Subject to compliance with design and Authority Having Jurisdiction requirements, provide Backflow Preventer Assembly as follows: 1. 2 Inch Connections and Smaller: If Authorities Having Jurisdiction requires double check, double detector check, or reduced pressure type devices use ASSE or USC Cross Connection approved device. 2. 2-1/2 Inch Through 10 Inch Connections:

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

FIRE SUPPRESSION 13900-6 20150922 02/13/17

2.04 SPRINKLERS

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide UL Listed or FM Approved automatic sprinklers. Provide sprinklers with nominal 5.6, 8.0, 11.2, or 16.8, or 25.2 K-factor. Sidewall sprinklers are not acceptable, unless noted otherwise. Provide the following sprinkler types: 1. Areas With Exposed Structure Above: Upright or pendent sprinkler, bronze. 2. Areas With Gypsum Board Ceilings: Pendent sprinkler, chrome, with two-piece semi-recessed chrome escutcheon plate. 3. Areas With Lay-in Ceilings: Pendent sprinkler, chrome, with two-piece semi-recessed chrome escutcheon plate. 4. Areas With Wood Ceilings: Concealed pendent sprinkler, brass, with brass escutcheon plate.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Install system and equipment in accordance with NFPA 13 and manufacturer's instructions.

3.02 INSTALLATION - ABOVE GROUND PIPING

A. Provide piping in accordance with NFPA 13.

B. If required because of the project’s location, provide seismic restraints for piping.

C. Locate top beam clamp or thru bolt connection near joist panel points per pipe support detail.

D. Provide piping to conserve building space. Do not interfere with use of building space and other work.

E. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.

F. Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories for finish painting. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding. Protect sprinkler to ensure sprinklers do not receive field paint. Remove protective covering after painting. Replace sprinklers having paint other than factory finish with new sprinklers. Cleaning and reuse of painted sprinklers is prohibited.

G. Examine other work indicated on the Drawings and conditions at job site. Coordinate routing of work with other construction trades to avoid interference with other installations. Do not cut building structural members, beams, joists, etc. for routing of sprinkler piping.

H. Seal pipe penetrations through fire rated walls or floors to achieve fire resistance equivalent to fire separation required. Provide wall plates at all penetrations. Provide zinc coated (galvanized) all-thread rod for hanging dry system piping.

I. Provide valves with stems upright or horizontal.

J. Route piping and locate sprinklers as required to avoid building structure, equipment, plumbing piping, heating and air conditioning piping, ductwork, lighting fixtures, electrical conduits and bus ducts, and similar work. Locate center of sprinkler a minimum of 6 inches off ceiling grid. 1. Final location of lighting and exposed ductwork shall have priority over pipe routing and final sprinkler locations. 2. Sprinkler piping in sales area without a ceiling and stockroom shall be located above bottom of joists. Minimum height of sprinkler piping in areas with ceilings shall be 1’-0” above ceiling. 3. All drops shall be installed behind full height walls and shall be concealed from view from any location on the sales floor. 4. All laterals (i.e., for soffits, clouds, etc.) shall be installed on the top of soffits or cloud and shall be

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

13900-7 FIRE SUPPRESSION 02/13/17 20150922

concealed from view from any location on the sales floor.

K. Provide inspector's test valves at five feet minimum to seven feet maximum above finish floor.

3.03 SPRINKLER (COOLERS/FREEZERS)

A. Install dry pendent sprinklers with a minimum 14 inch distance between the outside top surface of the freezer / cooler and the face of tee connecting to the wet pipe supply system.

B. Installation procedure for dry pendant sprinklers at coolers/freezers: 1. Core drill 2 1/2 inch diameter hole through freezer/cooler insulated ceiling panel. 2. Drop sprinkler assembly through hole cored in freezer/cooler insulated panel. 3. Spray expanding foam insulation fully around the sprinkler heads and piping. 4. Once cured, trim the foam to be flush with the top and bottom of the ceiling panels. 5. Apply ample amount of silicone caulk to completely seal the spray foam, as it is open-cell foam. 6. Install Tyco Dry Seal Boot DSB-2 on the top side of the cooler/freezer panel in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations to create the air break. 7. Securely seal the sprinkler escutcheons to the ceiling panel.

3.04 IDENTIFICATION

A. Apply signs to control, drain, test and alarm valves to identify their functions. Provide lettering sizes and styles per Authorities Having Jurisdiction. Provide hydraulic placard for each sprinkler system in accordance with NFPA 13. Stencil riser/zone numbers on risers.

B. Provide a sprinkler zone map that clearly identify the location of all: areas protected, control valves, dry pipe valve, inspector’s test valves, auxiliary drains, pumps, and tanks. Sprinkler Zone Map shall be laminated in plastic. Permanently attach to wall in fire sprinkler riser room.

3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. General: Contractor shall schedule, coordinate and conduct all tests required by Authorities Having Jurisdiction and Whole Foods. Contractor shall modify, replace or retest as required by Authorities Having Jurisdiction and / or Whole Foods.

B. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler system according to NFPA 13 "Systems Acceptance" Chapter. Test the systems, including the underground water mains, and the aboveground piping and components to assure that equipment and components function as intended. Pressure test the systems in accordance with NFPA 13. The Contractor shall have available copies of as-built drawings. 1. Above Ground Fire Protection Piping: a. Test per NFPA 13. b. Inspect welds and verify welder's qualifications per Authorities Having Jurisdiction. c. Perform Hydrostatic tests per NFPA 13. 2. Backflow Prevention Assembly Forward Flow Test. 3. Operation of control valves and flowing of inspector's test connections to verify operation of alarm devices including alarm switches. After operation of control valves has been completed, assure that control valves are in the open position. 4. Main Drain flow test.

END OF SECTION

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

FIRE SUPPRESSION 13900-8 20150922 02/13/17

Page left intentionally blank

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

15000-1 HEATING. VENTILATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING 02/13/17 20150922

SECTION 15000 - HEATING. VENTILATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING

PART 1 - GENERAL:

1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. The Mechanical Contractor (also referred to as The Contractor) shall comply with all requirements of the General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, Temporary Work and General Requirements which are binding.

B. The general requirements and details of the equipment are shown on the drawings. Dimensions and/or scales are approximate and must be checked at the building by the Contractor prior to installation of the material before any order is given for fabrication.

C. The Contractor is responsible for any Electrical/Structural/Plumbing changes and any associated cost resulting from approved equipment substitutions.

D. Any obstructions in building work or other details must be thoroughly checked as the work progresses and such changes as required to clear up the obstruction shall be included in this Contract.

E. Connections indicated on the various apparatus are particularly intended as an indication only. The actual connections shall be made as to best suit the requirements of the particular equipment. Adequately provide for service clearance while minimizing the space required.

F. The Contractor shall fully inform himself regarding any peculiarities and limitations of the space available for the installation of his equipment and materials under the Contract. All of the equipment and mechanical appurtenances shall be made easily and quickly accessible.

G. Although the location of equipment may be indicated on the drawings, renovation and construction of the building may develop unseen conditions. In such cases, the Contractor must call attention to this fact before installing his work and confer with the Architect or his representative for final instructions.

H. The drawings are diagrammatic, intending to show general duct runs and locations of equipment, and do not necessarily show all required offsets, etc. Carefully study the various duct runs and make such adjustments in exact routing as may be necessary to fit ductwork into space available and to avoid conflicts with other trades. The drawings shall be accurately followed where they are definite, provided such procedure causes no objectionable conditions, or does not conflict with other trades.

I. All materials and equipment shall be properly and effectively protected by this Contractor. All ducts, while being placed, shall have the ends closed before leaving the work so as to keep out all foreign matter.

J. The Contractor shall examine carefully the Architectural and Structural drawings and existing building, as to the locations and sizes of beams, joists, columns, etc.

K. The Contractor shall furnish to the General Contractor all requirements and locations for lintels, framed openings and chases for ductwork, equipment and other items under this Contract.

L. The Contractor is responsible for daily clean up of his work before leaving the site.

M. The Contractor shall carefully coordinate his work with that of other trades.

N. The Contractor shall maintain fire separation integrity at all penetrations relative to his work.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

HEATING. VENTILATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING 15000-2 20150922 02/13/17

1.02 SCOPE OF WORK:

A. Work includes furnishing all labor, material, equipment~, tools, transportation, supervision and services necessary for, and reasonably Incidental to, the installation of the HVAC work, as herein specified, indicated and/or required to fully conform to the intent of the Contract documents. Work shall be performed with competent mechanics in a workman-like manner using proper equipment and tools.

B. The Mechanical Contractor shall install Owner-furnished HVAC control boards and space sensors and make termination connections for same. The Electrical Contractor shall provide the energy management controls wiring.

C. All roof openings required for mechanical work shall be the responsibility of the Mechanical Contractor. Burglar bars are to be provided on for all new and existing HVAC roof openings 12 x 12 and larger (grease-laden exhaust air ducts excepted).

D. Changes in pulleys, belts, and dampers or adding dampers as required for correct balance shall be done by the Mechanical Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. ')

E. The Mechanical Contractor shall be responsible for providing an independent testing agency for the Air System Test and Balance. The Mechanical Contractor shall provide on-site mechanics to assist the Test and Balance Contractor during the balance tasks.

1.03 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM:

A. The system shall provide complete year round heating and air conditioning, where and as indicated. The systems shall be comprised of roof top gas heat/electric cool units, ductless split system air conditioners, exhaust fans and other miscellaneous equipment as noted on the plans. Kitchen hood exhaust systems with fire suppression systems are specified. The systems shall include all ductwork, flues, grilles, registers, diffusers, fans, roof curbs, unit bases, controls, condensate removal systems and insulation, all as indicated, hereinafter specified, 0 or required.

1.04 SITE INSPECTION AND PLAN REVIEW:

A. Examine the plans and premises to understand the conditions which may affect performance of work before submitting a proposal.

B. No subsequent allowance for time or money will be considered for any consequence related to failure to examine the plans and site conditions.

1.05 WORK BY OTHERS:

A. The Electrical Contractor shall run power to and connect all powered mechanical equipment.

B. Electrical disconnects for each piece of equipment shall be supplied by the Electrical Contractor unless noted otherwise; this contractor shall coordinate with Electrical Contractor for proper sizing.

C. Ductwork smoke detectors shall be furnished by the Fire Alarm Contractor for installation into duct by the Mechanical Contractor. Fire Alarm Contractor shall provide wiring between ductwork smoke detectors and the store's fire alarm system.

D. All painting shall be by the Painting Contractor, except as otherwise indicated.

E. All structural supports, lintels and framing needed for the mechanical equipment shall be furnished and installed by the General Contractor except prefabricated roof curbs. Such curbs shall be by the Mechanical Contractor.

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

15000-3 HEATING. VENTILATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING 02/13/17 20150922

F. All flashing around vents, flues, prefabricated curbs and equipment supports on I roof shall be by others.

G. The energy management system controls wiring shall be provided by the Electrical Contractor. The Mechanical Contractor shall install Owner-Furnished control boards and space sensors and make the required termination connections.

1.06 CODES PERMITS AND FEES:

A. All work shall be executed and inspected in accordance with all laws, ordinances, rules and regulations of the Local, State, National, or other regulating authorities having jurisdiction over such work. The Mechanical Contractor shall obtain and pay for all fees in connection therewith. Should any changes in the drawings or specifications be required to conform with these ordinances, the Contractor shall notify the Architect/Engineer, before submitting his bid. After entering into the Contract, the Contractors involved shall be required to complete all necessary work to meet the above requirements, without extra expense to the Owner.

1.07 SHOP DRAWINGS:

A. Furnish seven copies of the manufacturer's portfolio, with the full description of equipment and materials to be furnished under the specifications. The items submitted include, but are not be limited to, the following: 1. HVAC roof top units 2. Ductless split HV AC systems 3. Hoods and associated fire suppression systems, make-up air units and exhaust fans 4. General exhaust fans 5. Air curtains 6. Outdoor air intakes 7. Insulation 8. Roof curbs 9. Grilles, registers and diffusers 10. Flues and pre-fabricated grease duct 11. Flexible duct and spin-ins 12. Equipment identification nameplates

B. No piece of equipment or material shall be installed under these specifications until they are approved by the Engineer. Shop drawings for all items shall be submitted at the same time neatly bound in seven separate and complete folders.

C. The Engineer will review submittals two times. Resubmissions required due to non-compliance with the contract documents, or non-compliance with review comments, will be re-reviewed at the Contractor's expense.

1.08 RECORD DOCUMENTS:

A. The Contractor shall maintain, at the job site, one set of blue line or black line prints of the drawings, of the work of this Section, and he shall record thereon, daily, all changes in the location, sizing and arrangement that may be made, for any reason, in the work during the course of construction so as to reflect the installation "record document." Upon completion of the project, "record document" drawings shall be transferred by the Contractor to a vellum obtained from the Architect and given to the Architect within 30 days after final acceptance.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

HEATING. VENTILATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING 15000-4 20150922 02/13/17

1.09 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS:

A. In addition to giving the Owner's representative on-the-job instructions to permit proper operation and care of the entire installation, the Contractor shall furnish to the Architect and Engineer, for transmittal to the Owner, two bound copies of instruction in the operation, maintenance and care of each piece of equipment, including frequency of inspection, oiling, greasing, adjusting and other attention needed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Manuals shall provide pertinent maintenance data for all major equipment installed under the Mechanical Contract, and shall include but not be limited to, descriptive literature, cuts, diagrams, warranties, dimensions, model numbers and part numbers. Data shall include the serial numbers of the actual equipment installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS:

A. All materials furnished under these specifications shall be new, the best of their respective kind, and shall conform to all standards of requirements governing same, and shall be approved by the engineer before being installed.

B. Where a specified manufacturer or trade name is mentioned in these specifications, the intent is to establish a certain level of quality.

2.02 MECHANICAL EOUIPMENT:

A. Refer to the Schedules and Notes on the Drawings.

B. Refer to Specifications for additional features and requirements.

2.03 VIBRATION:

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining a quiet system with vibration suitably under control, as judged by the Engineer/Owner. This also includes expansion noises, rattles, etc.

B. Provide properly sized vibration isolators as required to prevent excessive vibration transmission.

2.04 PACKAGED ROOFTOP UNITS:

A. The Contractor shall furnish and install units as indicated on the plans. Units shall be of the type, size and capacity as detailed in the equipment schedule and as manufactured by Trane and Seasons 4, or approved equal.

2.05 EXHAUST FANS:

A. The Contractor shall furnish and install exhaust fans of the type, size and capacity as detailed in the equipment schedule and as manufactured by Greenheck and Captive Aire, or approved equal.

B. Roof-mounted exhaust fans: Fans shall be centrifugal type, belt or direct driven units as indicated, with aluminum housing. Belt-driven fans shall have adjustable motor sheaves; direct-driven fans shall have fan-mounted speed controller. Motor and fan shall be resiliently mounted, isolated from the housing. Units shall be complete with disconnect switch and roof curb.

C. Fans, so designated, shall be equipped with automatic gravity operated backdraft dampers

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

15000-5 HEATING. VENTILATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING 02/13/17 20150922

2.06 KITCHEN HOOD EXHAUST SYSTEMS:

A. The contractor shall furnish and install hoods as indicated on the plans. The hoods shall be as manufactured by Captive Aire or approved equal

B. Grease-laden cooking hoods shall comply with following minimum requirements. Refer to the plans for hood sizes and arrangement. 1) Hoods shall be UL listed, NSF listed and built in accordance with NFP A 96. Each hood shall be individually designed by the manufacturer for its specific application. 2) Hoods shall be constructed 430 stainless steel with #3 polish (exposed surfaces) and include stainless steel enclosure panel to extend from top of hood to 3 inches above finished ceiling. 3) Hoods shall be provided with stainless steel backsplash. 4) Furnish hood complete with UL classified grease filters and pre-wired UL listed incandescent light fixtures. 5) Hoods shall have pre-wired flush-mounted switch panel to control fans and lights. 6) Where scheduled, hoods shall be furnished with a UL listed utility cabinet housing the fire suppression system and electrical controls. 7) Hoods shall be furnished with a pre-wired electrical control package that includes all necessary switches, starters and relays necessary to meet the hood's requirements. 8) Hoods shall be furnished with a pre-piped fire protection system. The hood manufacturer shall include the services of a qualified and insured fire system distributor to perform field hook-up and testing of the hood fire protection system.

C. Hood exhaust systems shall be installed in accordance with all requirements of the local jurisdiction and all applicable codes and regulatory agencies, including the International Mechanical Code and NFP A 96.

D. Grease-laden duct shall be of the type and material as indicated on the plans. 1) 16 gauge carbon steel duct.

a) All joints and connections shall be made of a continuous liquid-tight external weld. All elbows and offsets shall be made with smooth radius fittings; mitered elbows or turning vanes are not permitted. b. Exhaust duct shall be wrapped with fire proofing insulation as described in the insulation specification section.

2) Pre-fabricated grease duct -Metal-Fab Model 2G or approved equal by Metalbestos a. a) Duct manufacturer shall have available the necessary resources to advise of proper application, selection and installation. b) Furnish UL listed double-wall, factory-built, insulated grease duct that is rated for 1" clearance to combustibles and conforms to the requirements of NFPA 96. c) Inner wall shall be type 304 stainless steel. Outer wall shall be aluminized steel. Duct shall incorporate 2" of high temperature ceramic fiber insulation between the inner and outer walls. d) Grease duct manufacturer shall include all fittings, transitions, hood connectors, supports, guides, cleanout ports and expansion joints required for a complete installation. e) Grease duct shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions, UL listing and state or local code.

E. Provide clean-out openings in grease-laden exhaust duct at all changes in direction and for any portions of the system not accessible from the hood or exhaust fan.

F. Hood and duct hangers and supports shall be of non-combustible material attached to the building structure in an approved manner. Mechanical fasteners shall not penetrate duct walls.

G. Hoods shall be hung at the heights noted on the plans. Coordinate placement of hoods with the Owner- approved fixture plan to ensure proper coverage of appliances.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

HEATING. VENTILATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING 15000-6 20150922 02/13/17

H. The Contractor shall install the stainless steel ceiling closures and backsplashes specified to be furnished with the hoods.

2.07 HOOD FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS:

A. The Contractor shall provide a UL listed, pre-engineered fire protection system for Contractor-furnished and Owner-furnished hoods as noted on the plans.

B. Hood fire suppression systems shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of the local jurisdiction and all applicable codes and regulatory agencies. Installation of the system shall be performed only by a fire system distributor trained and qualified to install the specific system being provided. The fire system distributor shall submit plans and acquire all permits and approvals necessary for proper installation and final acceptance.

C. System shall operate automatically and by a manual pull station. Manual pull station locations shall be approved by the local fire marshal or building inspector. Manual pull stations shall be installed recessed into the wall and labeled/identified in an approved manner.

D. Activation of the hood fire suppression system shall automatically shut-off all power to the cooking equipment. Automatic gas shut-off valves shall be mechanically operated, furnished as part of the hood fire suppression system for installation by the plumbing contractor. Electric appliances shall automatically shut down by a micro switch wired through a shunt trip breaker. Shunt trip breakers, when required, shall be furnished and installed by the electrical contractor.

E. Hood fire suppression systems shall be connected to the store's fire alarm system.

F. All cylinders, valves, piping and conduit for fire suppression systems shall be installed concealed from public view. Any questions regarding the visibility of components shall be brought to the attention of the Owner prior to installation.

G. After installation, the fire system distributor shall conduct any and all tests required to demonstrate proper operation of the system. All hood fire suppression systems shall be turned over to the Owner with fully charged cylinders.

2.08 GRILLES. REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS:

A. Grilles, registers and diffusers shall be as manufactured by Titus, Krueger or Metal-Aire. Selections shown on the drawing schedule are bared on Titus. Units / by other manufactures shall be selected in accordance with their published performance data to provide air patterns, velocities, pressure drops and sound characteristics equal to the specified units. Grille, register and diffuser finishes shall be selected by the Architect.

2.09 CONDENSATE PIPING:

A. Provide all condensate drainpipe and fittings required for a complete installation. All primary cooling coil condensate from HV AC roof top units shall be trapped and spill on the roof. Routing of condensate piping shall be kept unobtrusive where exposed below the roof; route vertical runs down in walls where possible. Roof top unit secondary (overflow) condensate connections shall be trapped and terminated above the roof.

B. Cooling condensate from air handlers inside the building shall be routed as noted on the plans. Provide a condensate pump where indicated or required for proper disposal of the condensate. Coordinate with division 16.

C. Follow the specific equipment manufacturer's installation instructions with regard to condensate removal systems.

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

15000-7 HEATING. VENTILATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING 02/13/17 20150922

D. All condensate piping inside the building shall be type "L " copper with soldered joints and shall be insulated as noted in the insulation specification section. Condensate piping above the roof shall be PVC.

E. Cut pipe accurately to measurements established at the building and work into place without springing or forcing. Cutting or other weakening of building structure to facilitate piping installation will not be permitted. Remove burrs from pipes by reaming. Install pipe to permit free expansion and contraction without damage to joints or hangers. Pitch lines down with grade of not less than 1/8" per foot. Provide die-electric union for all connections of dissimilar metals. Unions shall be as manufactured by Epco.

F. Support all lines with substantial hangers or supports. Provide support at each change of direction and not more than 2 feet from elbow. Support hangers, where applicable, from beam clamps, preset concrete inserts or self-drilling steel inserts. Provide adjustable ring or roller type hangers, whichever may be applicable to permit necessary expansion and contraction, maintaining proper pitch free from pockets. At supports, provide saddles 12" long made of curved steel plates minimum of 16 gauge material with turned up edges to protect insulation.

2.10 HVAC DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES:

A. Provide commercial grade galvanized steel ductwork as indicated on the plans, fabricated and installed in accordance with the latest SMACNA duct construction and installation standards, including required duct reinforcement. All joints to be made using an approved SMACNA method and sealed air tight with sealant Prior to externally insulating.

B. All duct sizes shown are free area. Allowances to be made for insulation.

C. Provide externally adjustable volume dampers in branch line take-offs as indicated or required to balance the system.

D. Provide turning vanes for use in all rectangular elbows. They shall be assembled single blade type. Fasten assembled turning vanes into duct with rivets. Turning vanes shall be assembled using runners manufactured by Elgen Manufacturing Company or approved equal. Make other elbows and offsets with inside throat radius of not less than width of duct.

E. Provided flexible duct where indicated. Flexible duct shall be UL Standard 181 approved and in compliance with NFP A 90A and 90B. Flexible duct shall have a metalized vapor barrier, a minimum insulation value of R-4.2 and be rated for 10" w.c. positive pressure, 1" negative pressure. Thermaflex M- KE or equal. Flexible ducts shall have a maximum length of 10 ft. and be supported on 36 inch centers with 1 inch wide bands. Install flexible duct fully extended, with full 0 radius elbows, free of sags, kinks and flow restrictions. Flexible duct take-offs from sheet metal duct shall be made with Air- Trac SI-5 galvanized steel spin-in fittings (beaded) with damper, or approved equal. Flexible ducts shall be connected to spin-ins and diffusers using metal bands. Take-off fittings shall be sealed air-tight at the sheet metal duct connection and field insulated.

F. Provide hinged access doors as large as practical for intended purpose and size of duct in which installed. Provide access doors in all ducts at automatic dampers, fire dampers, control instruments and where else indicated or required with insulation covered with vinyl plastic liner, compression type latches, baked enamel finish, Ventfabrics, Inc., Type" A" or "B" or approved equal.

G. Exposed supply and return rectangular ductwork at the roof top unit connections shall be double-wall insulated with a galvanized finish.

2.11 INSULATION:

A. All insulation cements, covers, etc., shall conform to smoke and flame requirements as specified in NFP A No. 90A.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

HEATING. VENTILATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING 15000-8 20150922 02/13/17

B. All concealed single-wall supply air, return air and make-up air sheet metal ductwork shall be externally insulated with Owens-Coming Fiberglas All Service Faced Ductwrap, Type 100. Use 1-1/2" thickness for ductwork located inside the thermal building envelope. Vinyl faced ductwrap may not be used. Do not wrap duct until it is sealed by the ductwork installer.

C. Apply I " of Owens-Coming Aeroflex Plus Type 150 acoustical duct liner to the exposed rectangular supply duct in sales area.

D. Grease-laden exhaust duct as indicated on the plans shall be wrapped with two layers of Thermal Ceramics Firemaster Fastwrap+, or approved equal, installed in accordance with the manufacturer's published installation instructions. The fireproofing ductwrap shall be rated for 0" clearance to combustibles.

E. All cooling coil condensate piping inside the building shall be insulated with 2" Armstrong Armaflex flexible elastomeric thermal insulation.

2.12 MOTORS:

A. All permanently wired polyphase motors of 1 hp or more shall meet minimum efficiencies shown in the table below:

hp Minimum Rate 1992 Minimum Rate efficiency, Percent Efficiency, Percent

1-4 77.0 78.5

5-9 82.5 84.0

10-19 84.0 85.5

20-49 87.5 88.5

50-99 89.5 90.2

100-124 91.0 91.7

125-greater 91.7 92.4

B. The above table applies to all single speed NEMA Design B induction motors having nominal speeds of 1200, 1800 or 3600 RPM with open drip-proof or TEFC enclosures. Other motor types are exempt from efficiency requirements of this table.

2.13 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS:

A. The Mechanical Contractor shall install Owner-furnished HV AC control boards and space sensors and make termination connections for same. The Electrical Contractor shall provide the energy management controls wiring.

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

15000-9 HEATING. VENTILATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING 02/13/17 20150922

B. The mechanical contractor shall, after the installation is complete, check and adjust all controls and verify that they are operating properly. The controls shall be warranted against defects in workmanship and material for a period of one (1) year after acceptance by the Owner. The mechanical contractor shall instruct the Owner, or his designated representative, in the operation of the temperature and humidity controls.

2.14 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION NAMEPLATES

A. The Contractor shall furnish and install mechanically fastened engraved acrylic/plastic nameplates (1" white architect lettering on black background) on all equipment located on the roof. Nameplate material shall be designed for outdoor use.

B. The Contractor shall furnish and install nameplates similar to above for all VVT zone and bypass dampers. Nameplates shall be located where they are easily seen.

C. Nameplates as indicated above shall identify equipment with the mark numbers shown on the drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EOUIPMENT INSTALLATION:

A. Equipment shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturers instructions to conform with the details and application indicated.

B. Provide necessary supports for all equipment and appurtenances as required. Provide supports for all roof mounted equipment and piping. All roof top unit roof curbs to be insulated.

C. Temporary filters shall be provided for all fans and return grilles that are operated during construction. Openings in equipment shall be kept plugged at all times until connection is made to the system. The ends of all pipes and ducts shall be kept plugged or capped during construction in an approved manner.

D. Provide pre-charged refrigerant line sets where required. Determination of lengths and sizes for proper performance shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

E. E. Condensate from roof top units and indoor air handlers shall be trapped and routed as indicated on the plans.

3.02 INSERTS AND OPENINGS:

A. The layout of such items as sleeves, chases, openings and inserts shall be arranged for in advance of construction of work and shall be directed and superintended to see that same is carried out without unnecessary cutting of the building. Any damage done to the building by the Contractor's failure to provide the necessary information as to the required chases, sleeves, and openings shall be corrected and with no extra expense to the Owner.

B. All sleeves and inserts required for passage and support of ductwork shall be C furnished and installed by this Contractor as walls and floors are constructed.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

HEATING. VENTILATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING 15000-10 20150922 02/13/17

C. Pipes passing through masonry or concrete floors, walls and partitions shall be provided with sleeves of standard weight, zinc coated steel pipe of sufficient length to pass through the entire thickness of the structure and shall be secured in position; sleeves in concrete shall be installed by this Contractor before concrete is placed. Sleeves in Equipment Rooms shall terminate 1" above finished floor. All sleeves shall maintain an annular clear space between the bare pipe and sleeve or between the covering and the sleeve of 1/4". Pipe sleeves through walls below grade and through floors shall be sealed watertight with mechanical rubber seal.

D. The Contractor shall coordinate all necessary sizes, locations, arrangements, details, and data required for proper construction of chases, fresh air intakes, combustion air intakes, pockets, holes, etc., to be provided in the building construction for accommodation of HV AC equipment, ducts, etc.

E. Cut and patch only where necessary for any new building work for the accommodation of HV AC work. All patching shall be done in full accordance with requirements of those sections of these specifications applying to the various trades, materials, methods, finish, etc., involved in the patching.

F. Pipes passing through fire or smoke rated partitions shall be sealed with NFPA approved fire-stopping material.

3.03 ESCUTCHEONS:

A. Where pipes or conduits pass through floors, walls, or ceilings in finished rooms, they shall be fitted with chromium plated escutcheons of suitable pattern to effectively cover the trough opening. Where sleeves project above floors, special deep type escutcheons shall be provided.

3.04 TEMPORARY HEAT:

A. The General Contractor shall be responsible for temporary heating of the building as required during construction

B. No equipment furnished under this Section shall be used for temporary heating or cooling without written permission of the Owner. Where equipment, provided under this Section, is permitted to be used for temporary heating, the Contractor for this Section shall cooperate with the General Contractor to ensure the proper and safe operation of such equipment at all times. Should the Contractor for this Section at any time observe that the equipment is being operated in a manner which would be injurious to or affect final acceptance of the equipment, he shall immediately take such steps, as he deems necessary, to protect the equipment and his own interests.

C. All equipment used for temporary heat shall be cleaned before delivering same to Owner and the equipment shall be in first class condition in all respects (including complete filter change out).

3.05 TEST OF COMPLETE PLANT:

A. This Contractor shall furnish all the necessary service required to place the completed systems in continuous operation. The Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning systems shall be operated for a period of three days of eight hours per day. All necessary adjustments shall be made at this time including thermostatic and electrical controls so that the various pieces of equipment function as intended. The entire work covered by the Contract will not be ready for acceptance until it is functioning to the Owner's entire satisfaction.

3.06 PRE-FINAL INSPECTION & ADJUSTMENTS:

A. System shall be balanced and reports submitted to Architect prior to pre-final inspection.

B. Balancing Agency shall be represented at pre-final inspection meeting by qualified testing personnel with balancing equipment and two copies of air balancing test report.

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

15000-11 HEATING. VENTILATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING 02/13/17 20150922

C. Perform duct leak test and document leakage rate on test and balance report. If duct leak rate exceeds 5% of system flow, reseal all duct joints and seems, and perform additional duct leak test.

D. See Air System Testing and Balancing section for additional requirements.

3.07 AIR SYSTEM TESTING & BALANCING:

A. Test and Balance Subcontractor: 1. Whole Foods Market has a “National Agreement” with Melink Corporation for the Test and Air Balance of new stores. The General Contractor is responsible for securing payment and coordination of services. 2. Contact information: Melink Test and Air Balance, 5140 River Valley Road, Milford, OH 45150; Phone (513) 965-7300; Fax (513) 965-7350, [email protected] . 3. This specification establishes the quality of performance for the information of the Contractor, Architect and Owner.

B. Related Sections 1. Division 15 a. Complete installation and start mechanical systems, and make changes in sheaves, belts, and dampers on equipment as required for correct balance as recommended by Air Testing & Balancing Agency at no additional cost to Owner. b. Perform repair of leaks in ductwork at no additional cost to Owner. c. Complete installation of noted Temperature Controls and assist the Balancing Agency in the testing and balancing of mechanical system. Calibrate room thermostats as required during testing procedures. Instruct testing personnel in proper use and setting of control system components.

C. Performance Requirements 1) Furnish supervision, personnel, instruments, calibration equipment, and other materials and services to perform work of this Section. 2) Test, balance, and adjust all heating, ventilating, and air conditioning cooling systems, and hood exhaust systems, as described in the Contract Documents. a. Perform testing and balancing in complete accordance with Associated Air Balance Council Standards for Field Measurement & Instructions, Form P1266, Volume I. Record test data on AABC standard forms or facsimile.

D. Quality Control 1) Submit four copies of complete test data to Engineer for evaluation and approval. Include in air balance report letter indicating that smoke testing of hood exhaust systems has been accomplished and report of findings regarding airtightness of each ducted system. 2) Test & Balance Report – b. Report shall be complete with logs, data, and records as required herein. Submit logs, data, and records on white bond paper bound together in report form. c. Report shall be certified accurate and complete by Balancing Agency's certified test and balance engineer. d. Report shall contain following general data in format selected by Balancing Agency. (1) Project Number (2) Project Title (3) Project Location (4) Project Architect and Mechanical Engineer (5) Test and Balance Agency (6) Contractor and mechanical sub-contractor (7) Dates tests were performed (8) Certification Document (9) Report Forms similar to AABC Standard format. e. Report shall include following -

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

HEATING. VENTILATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING 15000-12 20150922 02/13/17

(1) Preface suggesting abnormalities and problems J :Ji:! encountered. (2) Instrumentation List including type, model, manufacturer, ,; serial number, and calibration dates. (3) System Identification reporting location of zones, supply, return, and exhaust openings. (4) Record following for each piece of equipment. a) Manufacturer, model number, and serial number (b) Design and manufacturer rated data (c) Actual CFM (d) Suction and discharge static pressure of each fan (e) Outside-air and return-air total CFM (f) Actual operating current, voltage, and brake horsepower of each fan motor (g) Final RPM of each motor (h) Fan and motor sheave manufacturer, model, size, number of grooves and center distance (i) Belt size and quantity (G) Static-pressure controls final operating set points ') (5) Submit approved copy of report for inclusion in Division 15 Operations & Maintenance Manual.

E. Qualifications 1) Work of this Section will be performed by independent Air Testing & Balance Agency specializing in testing and balancing of heating, ventilating, and cooling systems to balance, adjust, and test air moving equipment, air distribution, and exhaust systems.

F. Scheduling 1) Test and balance subcontract will be awarded to Melink Test and Air Balance upon confirmation of receipt of Notice to Proceed to allow Melink Test and Air Balance to schedule this work in cooperation with other Sections involved and to comply with completion date. 2) During construction, Melink Test and Air Balance shall inspect installation of pipe systems, metal sheet work, temperature controls, and other component parts of mechanical systems. Perform inspections as follow a) One inspection when 60% of duct work is installed. b) One inspection when 90% of equipment is installed. 3) Do not begin air testing and balancing until: a) After completion of air cooling, heating, and exhaust systems including installation of specialties, devices, and new filters. b) Proper function of controls system components including electrical interlocks, damper sequences, air reset, and fire stats has been verified. c) Automatic temperature controls have been calibrated and set for design operating conditions. d) Verify proper thermostat calibration and setting of control components such as static pressure controllers and other devices that may need set points changed during process of balancing system

4) Heating, ventilating, and cooling systems and equipment shall be in full operation and continue in operation during each working day of testing and balancing.

G. Field Quality Control 1) Site Tests a) If requested, conduct tests in presence of Engineer. b) Instruments used by Agency will be accurately calibrated and maintained in good working order. c) Air Testing & Balancing Procedure

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

15000-13 HEATING. VENTILATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING 02/13/17 20150922

(1) Perform tests at high and low speeds of multi-speed systems and single speed systems. Perform following testing and balancing functions in accordance with Associated Air Balance Council National Standards - (a) Fan Speeds -Test and adjust fan RPM to achieve design CFM requirements. J (b) Current and Voltage -Measure and record motor current and voltage. (c) Pilot-tube Traverse -Perform Pilot-tube traverse of main supply and return ducts to obtain total CFM. (d) Outside Air -Test and adjust system minimum outside air by Pitot-tube traverse. (e) Static Pressure -Test and record system static pressures, including suction and discharge static pressure of each fan. (f) Air Temperature -Take wet and dry bulb air temperatures on eptering and leaving side of each cooling coil. Dry bulb temperatures shall be taken on entering and leaving side of each heating coil. (g) Zone Ducts -Adjust zone ducts to within design CFM requirements. At least one zone balancing damper shall be completely open. (h) Main Ducts -Adjust main ducts to within design CFM requirements and traverse for total CFM quantities. (i) Branch Ducts -Adjust branch ducts to within design CFM requirements. Multi-diffuser branch ducts shall have at least one outlet or inlet volume damper completely open. (j) Tolerances -Test and balance each diffuser, grille, and \ register to within 10% of design requirements. (k)Identification -Identify the location and area of each grille, diffuser, register, and terminal box. Record on air outlet data sheets. (l) Description -Record size, type, and manufacturer of each diffuser, grille, and register on air outlet data sheets. (m)Drafts -Adjust diffusers, grilles, and registers to minimize drafts. (2) Permanently mark outside air, supply air, and return air damper positions after balancing has been completed. 2) Final Inspection & Adjustments - a) System shall be balanced and reports submitted to Engineer prior to final inspection. b) Agency shall be represented at final inspection meeting by qualified testing personnel with balancing equipment and two copies of air balancing test report. (1) Engineer will choose and direct spot balancing of one zone. Differences between the spot balance and test report will be justification for requiring repeat of testing and balancing for entire building. If recheck testing demonstrates measured flow deviation of 10% or more from recorded information on report, report will be rejected and new inspection and report will be made and C' resubmitted. (2) Melink Test and Air Balance shall be prepared to spot smoke test one ducted system as directed by Architect's Engineer. (3) Rebalancing shall be done in presence of Engineer and subject to his approval. (4) Spot balance and rebalance shall be performed at no additional cost to Owner. a. System shall be balanced and reports submitted to Engineer prior to pre- final inspection. b. Where unit supplied to job site provides over 5% more air than schedule requirements, rooms supplied by that system shall have their supply air quantities increased by ratio of actual total air quantity supplied to minimum air quantity required by unit schedule.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

HEATING. VENTILATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING 15000-14 20150922 02/13/17

3.08 FINAL SITE VISIT

A. When the work on the entire structure has been completed and is ready for a final site visit, such a site visit shall be made by the Engineer or his duly authorized representative at which time the Contractor shall demonstrate that the requirements of the Contract as it applies to his work have been carried out and that the system has been adjusted and operated in accordance therewith. Subsequent to this final visit, the Engineer will provide a final punch list of items to be corrected/completed. The Engineer will re- visit the site one time to check this final list. If additional visits are required to verify punch list completion, these wIll be at the expense of the Contractor.

3.09 GUARANTEE AND SERVICE:

A. The Contractor shall guarantee all materials and workmanship for a period of one I (1) year after date of substantial completion and shall repair or replace at no i additional cost to the Owner, any part thereof which may become defective within the period of guarantee, ordinary wear and tear excepted. The Contractor shall be responsible for any damaged material or workmanship caused by or resulting from defects in his work and shall pay for same.

B. In addition, the Contractor shall provide free service, inspections and adjustments to the completed system, including all controls and any adjustments and balancing which may develop for one (1) year, beginning from the date of substantial completion. This Contractor shall leave with the Owner, parts and service lists for equipment covered under this Contract and equipment warranties for a period longer than one (1) year. The Contractor shall leave his business address and telephone number with the Owner or Owner's representative.

END OF SECTION

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

15400-1 PLUMBING 02/13/17 20150922

SECTION 15400 - PLUMBING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK:

A. The Contractor shall provide a completed plumbing system, as indicated on the drawings, including, but not necessarily limited to, the following principle items of work: 1. Soil, waste and vent systems. Domestic hot and cold water systems and domestic water heater. Plumbing fixtures, trimmings, valves, traps and floor drains. Grease separator and associated piping and gas piping. 2. All excavation, installation of underground piping, testing and backfilling, etc.

1.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:

A. The Plumbing Contractor shall comply with all requirements of the General Conditions, General Requirements, Bidding Requirements, Supplemental Conditions and other General Specification Requirements. This Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary and reasonably incidental to the completion of all work required and hereinafter specified.

B. The plumbing contractor shall comply with reference standards, codes, flows and regulation.

C. All workmanship, materials and equipment required for work, under this Contract, shall be new and of first quality and is to be in accordance with the 2012 International Plumbing Code or governing laws or ordinances. In case of a conflict with these plans and specifications, the ordinance or codes shall govern.

D. Comply with all provisions of General Conditions of the Contract and with Supplementary General Conditions as specified hereinafter.

E. Products of manufacturers other than those specified herein shall be considered.

F. All work shall be coordinated with other trades and laid out in advance of construction.

G. All fixtures, piping, fittings, controls, etc., shall be protected against injury, weather and foreign matter.

H. All equipment shall be approved by the societies governing said equipment such as UL, ASTM, NAFM, etc.

I. Plumbing contractor is responsible for daily clean-up before leaving site.

J. All work shall be laid out in advance of construction, including chases, pipe sleeves, etc., to avoid cutting or altering of new work. Any cutting, altering or damage to the building as a result of the plumbing contractor's work or failure to provide the necessary information shall be the responsibility of the contractor and shall be repaired, etc., with no cost to the Owner. Any rework shall be such that the completed job will be uniform and not show any patched areas. No cutting of any building structure shall be made without the approval of the Architect.

K. All piping exposed to unconditioned spaces shall be part of this contract and protected against freezing.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

PLUMBING 15400-2 20150922 02/13/17

1.03 WORK BY OTHERS:

A. The Contractor shall familiarize himself with other divisions of the specifications and the accompanying drawings, and evaluate the project as a complete unit to establish interconnection points with regard to other trades. The following work, except as noted, is not included in the Plumbing Contract. However, this Contractor shall furnish to the Contractors of other trades, information necessary for the incorporation of these items into the plumbing system. 1. Painting of equipment, piping, etc., is covered under another division of these specifications. This Contractor shall touch up all scratches or scuffed surfaces of pre-finished equipment, piping, etc., as required. 2. Electrical wiring and connections of plumbing items requiring such connection shall be as covered under electrical division of the specifications. Controls, safety switches, etc., shall be provided by the Plumbing Contractor but shall be wired by the Electrical Contractor, including conduit. Gas solenoid valve at hoods shall be provided by the plumbing contractor but shall be wired by the electrical contractor, including conduit.

B. The Contractor shall leave in a 9" x 6" glass frame, a card with his name, address and the date of final inspection of the construction. This frame shall be mounted in the space designated by the Architect; said frame being installed neatly.

1.04 PERMITS AND FEES:

A. This Contractor shall make all arrangements necessary, obtain all permits and licenses, pay for all required fees to install and complete the plumbing installation.

1.05 RECORD DOCUMENTS:

A. The Contractor shall maintain, at the job site, one set of blue line or black line prints of the drawings, of the work of this section, and he shall record thereon, daily, all changes in the location, sizing and arrangement that may be made, for any reason, in the work during the course of construction so as to reflect the installation "record document". Upon completion of the project, "record documents" shall be provided by the Contractor in accordance with Section 01770, Closeout Procedures. If accuracy of record documents is inadequate, the general contractor and subcontractor relative to disciplines shall bear the additional expenses for architect/engineer to field survey and document changes.

1.06 SHOP DRAWINGS:

A. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings of all major equipment to be constructed and/or purchased and installed on this project. Submit complete information including catalog data, engineering pertinent dimensions, capacities, etc. All equipment proposed shall be properly checked and coordinated with other trades before submittal. Submission must be made within thirty calendar days after award of the Plumbing Contract.

B. The required shop drawings shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. Plumbing fixtures 2. Cleanouts 3. Insulation 4. Water heaters 5. Drains 6. Valves/Regulators 7. Pumps 8. Hangers and Supports 9. Piping (all applications) 10. Hydrants 11. Roof drains 12. Separators/Interceptors

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

15400-3 PLUMBING 02/13/17 20150922

C. Approval of the submitted shop drawings shall not relieve the Contractor from complying with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

D. This office will review substitutions, shop drawings, product data, record documents and 0 & M Manuals one time. All resubmittals not approved will be re-reviewed at Contractor's expense.

1.07 GUARANTEE:

A. This Contractor shall guarantee this installation to be free of all faults and defects for a period of one (1) year, not including damage by poor maintenance on the part of the Owner. If such faults and defects appear within one (1) year, the Contractor shall replace, repair or reinstall same to the satisfaction of, and at no expense to, the Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MOTORS AND WIRING:

A. All motors and starting and control equipment for motor operated equipment included in this Contract shall be furnished by this Contractor. All motors shall be set by this Contractor.

B. All control wiring for water heater shall be done by the Plumbing Contractor.

C. All motors shall be of the capacity required to operate the equipment specified, but they shall not be less than that specified. The temperature rise of all motors shall not exceed 40 degrees above room temperature when operating at full capacity. All motors are to be equipped with manual starters.

2.02 BACKFILLING AND EXCAVATION:

A. All excavation required, in connection with plumbing, shall be done by this Contractor. Excavations shall be made in a manner to provide a uniform bearing for all pipes and equipment.

B. Underground pipe shall be supported for its entire length, except for hub depressions on undisturbed earth, graded to provide the required slope. Blocking up of pipe or supporting pipe on fill will not be permitted.

C. Contractor shall not disturb building foundations at any time.

D. After all items to be buried have been tested, inspected and approved; backfill with clean materials. Backfill material shall be free from trash and debris and shall contain sufficient moisture for proper compaction. Backfill for the first 16” depth shall be graded aggregate stone material and shall be stamped well before covering with successive layers. Subsequent layers shall be made in layers 8" deep and stamped well before covering with successive layers of material. Allow for shrinkage of fill by mounding earth over excavated area.

E. Provide any additional material required for backfilling operations.

2.03 PIPING WORK:

A. General: 1. All piping shall be concealed below floor, in pipe shafts, pipe spaces, above ceilings, behind furring and wherever it is practical to conceal it from view. No pipe fitting joints shall be concealed below a slab on grade. Where longer runs of piping must be installed below slab than is commercially available, it shall be brought to the attention of the Owner, Architect and Engineer for resolution. 2. Where piping must be run exposed, it shall be run in such a manner as to provide maximum usage of space involved.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

PLUMBING 15400-4 20150922 02/13/17

3. Verify any exposed piping prior to installation with owner/architect/engineer.

B. Piping shall be run to true alignment, perpendicular or parallel to adjacent walls, level or with uniform slope as required. Care shall be taken for spacing of pipes and location of pipes, all with respect to ducts, conduits, beams, columns and equipment. Coordinate pipe work with other trades to affect a plumbing system in the best interests of the Owner. Coordinate below floor piping with existing structure.

C. Rough in for all equipment requiring connection to the plumbing system. Verify exact locations and numbers of fixtures from architectural drawings before roughing in same.

D. All offsets and small piping details are not shown on the drawings because of the small scale. Make all provisions for expansion and contraction to avoid undue strain, noise or breakage.

E. Unions, flanges and shut-off valves shall be provided at each piece of equipment and specialties, and at all points as required to provide ease of replacement and/or service without interruption of service to other sections of the system. Appropriate strainer shall be installed ahead of each pump, circulator and automatic controlling device.

F. Bushings shall not be used where reducer couplings can be utilized.

G. Include in piping work any miscellaneous connections, items, etc., not ordinarily or specifically shown or specified which are necessary for a complete plumbing installation in accordance with the applicable codes and standards.

H. When joining piping of dissimilar materials, use dielectric coupling manufactured by Watts, EPCO or approved equal.

2.04 SLEEVES:

A. Provide relieving arches, steel or cast iron pipe sleeves for all pipes passing under or through a footing or foundation wall. Sleeves shall be two pipe sizes larger than the pipe passing through wall. Top of plumbing pipe shall clear the top of relieving arch or sleeve not less than 2".

B. All pipes passing through floor or exterior walls below grade shall be provided with cast iron or steel sleeves which shall have an annular clearance of approximately 1/2". This space shall have Fiberglass or glass wool with approved caulking or water plug cement to form a waterproof joint between pipe and sleeve.

C. All pipes passing through masonry or concrete walls or through partitions shall be provided with sleeves. This space shall have Fiberglass or glass wool with approved caulking or water plug cement to form a waterproof joint between pipe and sleeve. No sleeves are required on horizontal exposed pipes passing through wall to fixture location adjacent to wall.

D. All pipes passing through fire rated penetrations shall be provided with sleeves. This space shall have Tremco, Nelson fire stopping or an approved equal to achieve the proper fire resistance rating.

E. Sleeves shall be cut off 3/4" to 1" above floor when passing through the floor.

F. All sleeves for insulated pipe shall be sufficiently large enough to allow for pipe insulation.

2.05 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS:

A. All piping above grade shall be supported to true alignment with hangers equal to B-Line clevis, split ring or split steel beam clamps, side beam brackets, structural steel angles, channels, wall brackets or riser clamps.

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

15400-5 PLUMBING 02/13/17 20150922

B. Wire or strap hangers will not be allowed.

C. Hangers shall be spaced to prevent sagging and not restrict pipe expansion or contraction. Maximum spacing shall be as follows: 1. 5' on center for soil pipe 2. Copper, Steel Pipes and PVC

Pipe Size Maximum Spacing Maximum Spacing Copper/Steel PVC 1/2" and 3/4 5' 4-1/2' 1" and 1-1/4 6' 5-1/2' 1-1/2" 8' 6' 2" and larger 10' 6'

No section of pipe (pipe joint) shall be supported by less than two hangers.

D. Hangers rods shall be of steel with the minimum diameters: 1. 3/8" for pipes 2" and smaller. 2. 1/2" for 2-1/2" and 3" pipes. 3. 5/8" for 4" and 5" pipes. 4. 3/4" for 6" pipes. 5. 7/8" for 8" pipes and larger.

E. Piping shall be hung free of pipe sleeves.

F. Pipe hangers shall be sized to suit pipe. Where pipe is insulated, hangers shall be installed with saddles outside the insulation to prevent compression of insulation. Saddles are to be curved to fit the insulation. Thickness is to be 16 gauge galvanized metal and minimum of 12" in length.

G. Hangers that come in contact with copper pipe shall be copper, copper plated or brass to prevent electrolysis.

H. If “Unistrut” system is used to gang piping, provide saddles beneath insulation and secure piping to strut assembly.

2.06 ESCUTCHEON PLATES:

A. Where pipes pass through ceilings, walls and finished spaces, provide and install 20 gauge stamped steel, chrome plated plates, fastened to pipes by friction clips. Plates shall be of such size so as to properly cover openings in encased pipe sleeves. On insulated pipes, the plates shall fit the insulation uniformly.

B. The spaces where pipes pass through ceilings, walls and finished spaces shall be sealed with a silicone caulking before escutcheon plate is installed.

2.07 CUTTING AND PATCHING:

A. Before any cutting or patching is to be done, the Contractor shall have the approval of the Architect. It shall be the responsibility of this Contractor to cut and shall engage the original trade for patching.

2.08 ACCESS DOORS:

A. Access doors shall be Acudor Company or the approved equal. It shall be the responsibility of the plumbing Contractor to see that they are properly located to provide necessary access to the equipment as indicated or required. Submit shop drawings and coordinate work closely with the other trades involved. Doors shall be appropriate for the type of construction.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

PLUMBING 15400-6 20150922 02/13/17

2.09 DRAIN SYSTEM AND ASSOCIATED ITEMS:

A. Sanitary Sewers: 1. Before proceeding with the plumbing work, this Contractor shall verify all pertinent elevations, inverts, etc., to ascertain that the entire plumbing system can be installed as designed, maintaining the required slope, and that the final connections to existing exterior sewers can be properly made. 2. All soil, storm and waste piping, beneath building floors and outside of building, shall be service weight cast iron soil pipe with approved fittings and gasket joints. PVC may be used at the contractor's option where locally approved and accepted by Owner. (Foam core shall only be used below grade in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.) 3. All waste and vent piping, above grade within building, shall be cast iron, approved copper or standard galvanized iron, all with approved drainage fittings. PVC may be used, if locally approved, except in exposed areas, IE: no PVC in plenum spaces. 4. Provide and install a complete system of plumbing connecting to and serving all fixtures, drains and equipment requiring same, whether furnished by this Contractor or by others. All final connections shall be by this plumbing Contractor. 5. On joints between threaded piping and cast iron pipe, provide a collar or part coupling screwed on to form a spigot end. On threaded joints, use a lubricant applied to male threads only. Finished screwed joints shall not show more than one thread. Threads on threaded piping shall be full cut, standard taper and have a sharp profile.

B. Vent System: 1. Furnish and install Stoneman vandal proof hood on all vent piping. Vent piping to extend 12" above roof. Flashing shall be by the Roofing Contractor. 2. Venting system to be in accordance with Local and State Codes. 3. All new vents extending above roof shall maintain 10' from any fresh air intake or opening.

C. Drains: 1. Furnish and install floor, roof and special drains as shown and sized on the drawings and hereinafter specified. 2. Drains shall be complete with traps, trim, flashing and appurtenances and shall be constructed of stainless steel or cast iron with noted finish unless otherwise specified. Where white metal is called for, it shall be an approved white bronze alloy with high nickel content and polished finish. 3. Set all drains level and at proper elevations to surrounding floor area to provide smooth and uniform drainage areas. (Refer to Architectural and Structural drawings for floor slope and elevations.) 4. Unless noted otherwise, provide a trap for each drain of a material to match the pipe line to which it discharges. 5. Drains located in waterproofed floors of composition materials or of other kinds shall be fitted with all required flanges, clamping devices and trim required to assure watertight conditions, and they shall be made watertight. 6. Floor Drains shall be J. R. Smith or approved equal such as Josam, Zurn or Wade. 7. Trench Drains shall be J. R. Smith or approved equal such as ABT or Zurn.

D. Cleanouts: 1. Provide cleanouts at all points required by code and in accessible locations at the bottoms of all waste stacks, and at points indicated. All cleanouts shall be J. R. Smith, Josam or Zurn. 2. Cleanouts shall be the full size of the pipe lines to which they are directly connected but need not be larger than 4" for pipe lines up to 10" and shall be at least 6" for pipe lines and larger. 3. J.R. Smith numbers are used for a guide only, for type of cleanouts required and to establish a level of quality. 4. Finished floor – J R. Smith No. 4033L duco C.I. body with round adjustable scoriated secured nickel bronze top, bronze plug. 5. Stack exposed – J.R. Smith No. 4512S duco C.I. cleanout tee and countersunk bronze plug. 6. Stack concealed – J.R. Smith No. 4530S duco C.I. cleanout tee and countersunk plug with stainless steel round cover and screw.

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

15400-7 PLUMBING 02/13/17 20150922

E. Plumbing Valves: 1. Full, open ball valves in copper piping shall be 200 pound bronze, solder end, screw-in bonnet, inside screw, traveling stem type; Nibco or approved equal. 2. Valves in 1/2" and 3/4" copper branch piping to fixtures may be stop and drain bronze valves; Nibco or approved equal. 3. Check valves shall be 300 pound bronze, solder end, renewable composition disc, screw-in bonnet, inside screw, traveling stem type; Nibco. 4. Backflow preventers, vacuum breakers or both shall be provided on any fixtures required by code.

F. Valve Tags and Charts: 1. Furnish and install identifying tags on all valves, installed under this Section, which are not immediately adjacent to or in clear view of the equipment served and where needed to simplify and aid in description of sequence of operation. Tags shall be 24 gauge aluminum, anodized black with engraved identifying symbols, 3/4" high or equal. Tags may be 2" diameter discs with chainhold and secured to the valves with nonferrous beaded chain.

G. AIR ADMITTANCE VALVES 1. Manufacturer: Studor 2. NSF/ASSE approved. 3. UL Listed. 4. Installation of Air Admittance Valves: (Where allowed by code) a. Install valves after drainage and waste system has been roughed in and pressure tested. b. Locate valves minimum 4 inches above horizontal branch drain or fixture drain being vented. c. Install valves in accessible locations. d. Connect valves to piping in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions. e. Install valves in upright position, within 15 degrees of true vertical. f. Extend minimum of 1 vent to open atmosphere for each building drainage system. g. Do not install valves on chemical waste systems. h. In attics, install valves minimum 6 inches above attic insulation.

2.10 PIPING SYSTEMS:

A. Domestic Hot, Cold, and Filtered Water Piping: 1. This Contractor shall furnish and install a complete system of hot and cold water connections to all fixtures and equipment requiring such connections, and include rough-in for Owner supplied equipment. 2. Underground water piping, within 5' of structure, shall be ASTM B88 Type "K" hard drawn copper with wrought copper fittings and seat joints. All other water piping, with exception of reverse osmosis, distilled, and High Ph, shall be ASTM B88 Type "L" hard drawn copper with joints and fittings as above. Solder shall be 95-5 on all sweat joints. No pipe fitting joints shall be concealed below a slab on grade. Where longer runs of piping must be installed below slab than is commercially available, it shall be brought to the attention of the Owner, Architect and Engineer for resolution. 3. Above grade water piping shall be GASTM B88 Type "L" hard drawn copper with joints and fittings as above. Solder shall be 95-5 on all sweat joints. 4. All piping connections to fixtures and equipment shall be at least one pipe size larger than fixtures or equipment connection size. 5. Ball, swing check, valves 2-1/2" and smaller shall be Nibco 200 psi. Butterfly valves and swing checks 3" and larger shall be flanged iron body, bronze trim, Nibco 200 psi. Use ball valves, except where otherwise indicated. Square head cocks shall be Nordstrom or approved equal. 6. Grade and provide hose bibbs to allow systems to drain completely. Where low points occur in the piping system, use additional hose bibbs. 7. Generally, all piping shall be concealed in pipes shafts, pipe spaces, above ceilings, behind furring and wherever it is practical to conceal it from view. 8. Care shall be taken for spacing of pipes and location of pipes, all with respect to ducts, conduits, beams, columns, equipment, and expansion joints. Coordinate pipe work with other trades to effect a

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

PLUMBING 15400-8 20150922 02/13/17

plumbing system in the best interests of the Owner. 9. Rough in for all equipment requiring connection to the plumbing system. Verify exact locations and numbers of fixtures from design drawings before roughing in same. 10. Unions, flanges and valves shall be provided at each piece of equipment and specialties and all points, as required, to provide ease of replacement and/or service without interruption of service to other sections of the existing system. 11. All piping shall be clean inside, before installation. Ends of threaded piping shall be reamed clean of burrs, etc. Approved pipe lubricant shall be applied to the male threads only before assembly.

B. GAS PIPING 1. All gas piping 3" and smaller shall be screwed fittings with unions, dirt /sediment traps and gas cock unless otherwise noted. 2. Gas piping and fittings to be black iron. 3. All gas appliances requiring flex connections shall be commercial grade braided steel with rubber sheath. 4. All gas piping 4" and larger shall be welded with flanged fittings. 5. All exposed gas piping shall be black iron and primed coat to avoid corrosion. All floor penetrations shall be protected. 6. Gas piping within concrete shall be black iron, sleeved and vented to atmosphere. 7. All gas piping concealed within walls shall be jacketed corrugated stainless steel tubing and shall be connected to manifold system prior to distribution. Provide termination brackets within wall for all gas tubing serving cooking equipment. All tubing and fittings shall be UL listed. 8. All gas equipment underneath Type I hood systems to have mechanically operated gas valve and solenoid valve with pilot bypass unless noted otherwise. Contractor shall provide and install noted valve and interface with fire suppression system. The contractor shall coordinate with hood supplier and electrical to interlock solenoid valve with hood exhaust system. 9. Prime and paint all new and existing gas piping on the roof yellow. 10. All below grade gas piping shall be black iron, sleeved and vented to atmosphere. Pre-sleeved and vented corrugated stainless steel tubing with vents at both ends is acceptable if approved by the local authority.

2.11 PIPING IDENTIFICAIION

A. Domestic hot water, cold water, return, vacuum and gas piping to be identified with stenciling (label all piping and directions). 1. Gas Pipe Y -Yellow with black letters 2. Sanitary GW -Green with white letters 3. Cold Water GW -Green with white letters 4. Hot Water Y -Yellow with black letters 5. Return Hot Water Y -Yellow with black letters 6. Filtered Water GW -Green with white letters 7. Store Reverse Osmosis (SRO) GW -Green with white letters 8. Reverse Osmosis (RO) GW -Green with white letters 9. Distilled (DI) GW -Green with white letters 10. High PH (HP) GW -Green with white letters

2.12 DISINFECTION OF POTABLE WATER SYSTEM:

A. After all domestic cold water and hot supply and return piping have been flushed free of foreign matter, and within 30 days prior to turning the space over to the Owner, this piping shall be sterilized in accordance with the requirements of applicable codes and by means at least equivalent to the following: 1. Introduce chlorine by means of a solution equal to sodium hypochlorite, filling the lines slowly and applying the agent at a rate of 100 parts per million of available chlorine in the system as determined by test at the ends of the lines. Open and close all valves and outlets while the system is being chlorinated. 2. After the sterilizing agent has been in the system for not less than two hours, test for available

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

15400-9 PLUMBING 02/13/17 20150922

chlorine at the ends of the lines. Open and close all valves and outlets while the system is being chlorinated. 3. After the sterilizing agent has been in the system for not less than two hours, test for available chlorine at the ends of the lines, and if less than 50 ppm is found at any point so tested, the sterilization process shall be repeated until 50 ppm is found to exist at the end of the specified period, after which the chlorine shall be flushed out of the system by the flow of pure water out of all valves and outlets. 4. Chlorinated or otherwise treated water shall not be permitted to flow through hosed or other attachments which might be damaged by the Chlorinated chemical concentration required for sterilization. 5. Provide copy of certification of potable water system to owner.

2.13 INSULATION:

A. Hot water and hot water return piping located above grade shall be insulated with 1" thick glass fiber low pressure insulation with Universal Vapor Barrier Jacket. Insulation shall be as manufactured by KNAUF, Johns-Manville or Owens-Coming. Insulate fittings and valves in hot water lines with molded glass fiber fittings insulators to same thickness as glass fiber insulation on the pipe.

B. Cold water piping and traps on sanitary waste piping in parking level, above ground within building, within exterior walls, etc. shall be insulated with 1" thick glass fiber low pressure insulation with Universal Vapor Barrier Jacket. Insulation shall be as manufacturer by KNAUF, Johns-Manville or Owens-Coming. Vapor barrier jacket shall be sealed air tight throughout cold water piping system. Fittings and valves shall be insulated with molded glass fiber insulators to same thickness as pipe cover and coated with vapor barrier mastic. Water piping installed in parking level to be insulated as noted above and heat traced per drawings.

C. Filtered water piping above grade shall be insulated with 1" thick glass fiber low pressure insulation with Universal Vapor Barrier Jacket. Insulation shall be as manufacturer by KNAUF, Johns-Manville or Owens- Coming. Vapor barrier jacket shall be sealed air tight throughout cold water piping system. Fittings and valves shall be insulated with molded glass fiber insulators to same thickness as pipe cover and coated with vapor barrier mastic.

D. Vertical and horizontal water piping run within interior framed walls in insulation envelope shall maintain a minimum of 1/2" thick glass fiber low pressure insulation. Provide jackets and elbow similar to standard insulation jacket.

2.14 PLUMBING FIXTURES/WATER HEATERS:

A. Plumbing fixtures shall be furnished complete with all trim, traps, supply pipes, stops, fittings, supports, carriers, fasteners, etc., all as required for mounting and connecting. Fixtures shall be white, except as otherwise noted.

B. Wall hung fixtures shall be installed with floor mounted carriers and 1/4" steel plate behind fixture on opposite side of wall to support fixtures. Plate shall be large enough to receive all fixture bolts. Ends of bolts to be welded to plate and plate to be firmly anchored to wall prior to the mounting of the fixture.

C. Refer to schedule on drawings for model and manufacturer of plumbing fixtures and water heaters.

D. All fixtures complete with all required trim.

E. Mounting heights for fixtures shall be based on local codes or local authority.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

PLUMBING 15400-10 20150922 02/13/17

2.15 INSPECTION AND TESTS:

A. Equipment, materials, power and labor necessary for inspection and tests shall be furnished by the Plumbing Contractor, including pumps, instruments, protective devices, piping, connections and appurtenances.

B. Drainage System: Test of all drainage and vent lines shall be in strict accordance with the code requirements.

C. Water Supply System: All water piping installed by this Contractor, including fixture and equipment connections after erection and prior to concealment, shall be tested under a pressure of not less than 100 psi for at least two hours without leaks. Tests may be made by the use of compressed air, hydraulic methods, or by a combination of air and hydraulic methods. Any defective piping shall be replaced with new material and no caulking shall be permitted.

D. Balance recirculating balancing valves in accordance with GPM noted on drawings and submit report to owner/engineer for review.

E. These tests shall not relieve the plumbing contractor from his responsibility for leaks which may develop after these tests are made.

2.16 EQUIPMENT FURNISHED BY OTHERS:

A. Owner furnished equipment: 1. This Contractor is to rough in and connect equipment requiring connection to the plumbing system. 2. Provide and install all supplies, stops and traps as required to connect equipment. 3. Contractor shall not rough in for any equipment until equipment suppliers furnish him with complete rough in drawings.

END OF SECTION

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

16050-1 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 02/13/17 20150922

SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with Division 1 - General Requirements and referenced documents.

B. Related Work: 1. Section 15000: Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. "Provide" shall mean furnish, install and connect complete.

B. "Wiring" shall mean electrical conductors for power or signal, installed in conduit, wireway, raceways, or steel duct with all required boxes, fittings, connectors and accessories completely installed.

C. "Work" shall be understood to mean all the materials completely installed including labor.

D. "Drawings and Specifications" shall be understood to mean the Contract Documents, including all Divisions, Sections and Addenda.

E. "Review of Shop Drawings" - See Division 1.

F. "Conduit" shall be understood to mean rigid steel, intermediate metal (IMC), electric metallic tubing (EMT), flexible conduit or plastic Schedule 40 PVC conduit.

G. "Contractor" shall be understood to mean the Electrical Contractor of record.

H. "Engineer" shall be understood to mean the Electrical Engineer of record.

1.03 WORK INCLUDED

A. The following list is not to be construed as complete. Included are following: 1. Lighting system installed in interior areas and exterior areas. 2. Power system installed including interior areas and exterior areas. 3. Emergency generator plant and related accessories. 4. Grounding system. 5. Electrical provisions for security system, building automation system, refrigeration control and monitoring system, fire alarms system, telephone and data systems. 6. Line voltage control circuits for operation of Heating and Ventilating, Air Conditioning and Plumbing Systems as defined on HVAC and Plumbing Construction Documents. 7. Wiring for Whole Foods Store Equipment a. All store equipment including, but not limited to, that supplied by Whole Foods. Refrigeration equipment vendor and other store fixture vendors shall be completely wired and tested for proper operation. b. Contractor shall familiarize himself with all pieces of equipment prior to electrical rough-in. c. Verify all stub-up locations and types of junction boxes required for each piece of equipment with owner’s representative prior to rough-in. d. Provide all wiring, outlets, and connections as required for each checkout stand devices including, but not limited to cash registers, scanners, strip readers, conveyor belts. Locate all outlets so as to be hidden from view under or within the equipment footprint. e. Provide all power and control wiring for refrigeration systems.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050-2 20150922 02/13/17

f. Provide all defrost wiring between refrigerated cases and walk-in coolers/freezers. g. Provide all interconnecting wiring between compressor racks and the defrost panel. h. Provide all control wiring from the refrigeration control panels on the compressor racks to all temperature controls, solenoid valves, PI valves, etc. 8. All concrete work for pads (including housekeeping pads), bases for outdoor lighting fixtures, and conduit envelopment. Housekeeping pads to extend 4-6 inches beyond dimension of the served equipment and to be 4 inches high, unless other noted on the drawings. Provide pads for all floor mounted equipment unless other noted on the drawings. 9. All work to be done using the best and highest practice to provide complete systems as described.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Comply with State Electrical Safety Orders and local codes and ordinances. 2. Materials shall be listed by Underwriter's Laboratories, and shall bear the Inspection Label. 3. Materials shall meet with approval of the Division of Industrial Safety, State of Alabama and all authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Electrical Power Service: Electrical power services and metering facilities shall conform to requirements of serving Utility Companies and shall meet with approval of local and state inspecting authorities.

C. Electrical Acceptance Tests. 1. General Scope a. As part of the contract, the contractor shall perform tests of installed work as herein specified and specified in other Sections of Division 16 of these Specifications. b. The contractor shall provide all materials, equipment, labor and technical supervision to perform such tests and inspections. c. All tests shall be performed in compliance with the recommendations and requirements of the National Electrical Testing Association, Inc., (NETA), and applicable codes and standards. d. Upon completion of the tests and inspections noted in these Specifications, a label shall be attached to all serviced devices. These labels shall indicate date serviced and the service company responsible. e. The tests and inspections shall determine suitability for continued reliable operation. f. All tests shall be conducted in the presence of the Owner's Representative. 2. Test reports shall include: a. Description of equipment tested. b. Description of test. c. Test results. d. Conclusions and recommendations. e. Appendix, including appropriate test forms. f. List of test equipment used and calibration date.

1.05 SUBMITTAL

A. Product Data: Submit copies of material list.

B. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit for electrical items (except installation materials) such as, but not limited to: a. Panel boards and switch boards, b. Lighting fixtures, c. Transformers, d. Safety and disconnect switches, e. Emergency generator, f. Pre-fabricated electrical distribution centers.

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

16050-3 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 02/13/17 20150922

2. Check shop drawings for space requirements and conformance with Contract Documents. 3. Shop drawings shall indicate the interrupting rating of type of equipment proposed, switchgear elevations and dimensions, single line diagrams, bus sizes, motor control center starter types and wiring diagrams, fuse AIC rating and class. 4. Shop drawing materials shall be submitted in electronic format in a single, indexed .pdf file. Hard copies will not be accepted. 5. Submit to the Owner's Representative in electronic .pdf format the following: a. A System Short Circuit Study based on an infinite bus (on primary side of high voltage transformer) and on the per unit method or in accordance with the latest Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE) recommendations. Reports shall be submitted during the submittal period. This study shall show that all equipment proposed shall be rated to exceed the maximum ultimate fault current level available at the point of application by at least 10% (series connected rating is not acceptable). This study shall be submitted before or with all switchgear and panels, transformers. This study shall be carried out by the switchboard manufacturer. The cost of this study shall be included as part of the Contract Sum. b. A Coordination Study of all protective devices, including the utility protective device through all feeder devices on the secondary of each transformer. Study to be presented on LOG-LOG paper. Upon review of the study, the Contractor shall set devices at agreed-upon settings and provide a data sheet to the Owner's Representative, with a copy to the Owner’s representative, indicating final settings for all adjustable devices. The coordination study shall be submitted with short circuit study and before feeders are being installed on site. This study shall be carried out by the switchboard manufacturer. The cost of this study shall be included as part of the Contract. c. Manufacturer's printed instructions for operation and maintenance of electrical equipment, including replacement parts lists. d. Service and Operating Manuals for all equipment. e. Three-phase voltage test. f. Report showing test voltage L-N on the secondaries of all transformers. g. Grounding systems tests. h. Test reports. i. Factory tests.

1.06 PRODUCT HANDLING

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for protecting all properties of whatever description lying within the scope of the project from damage resulting from, or incidental to, this Contract. Likewise, the Contractor shall be obliged to pay for all such damage occurring during the progress of the work.

B. All materials and equipment, both before and after erection, shall be properly protected from the weather and other hazards and kept in a clean and orderly manner.

C. All conduit ends, and parts or equipment left unconnected shall be capped, plugged or otherwise properly protected to prevent damage or the intrusion of foreign matter.

D. At the completion of the work, equipment and materials shall be cleaned and turned over to the Owner’s representative in a condition satisfactory to the Owner’s representative.

E. Damage or defects developing before acceptance of the work shall be replaced with new at the Contractors expense.

F. Manufacturer’s direction shall be followed completely in the delivery, storage, protection and installation of all equipment and materials.

G. Deliver materials to job site in original unbroken package, properly tagged with UL Label, size, type and manufacturer indicated.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050-4 20150922 02/13/17

1.07 LOCATION AND ROUTING

A. The Drawings indicate diagrammatically the desired location or arrangement of outlets, equipment, etc., and are to be followed as closely as possible. Judgment must be exercised in executing the work so as to secure the best possible installation in the available space and to overcome local difficulties due to space limitations or interference with structural conditions. The Contract Documents are not intended to show every detail part, support, final connection, accessory, or every structural difficulty that may be encountered during the work. Except as otherwise indicated, locations of items are approximate only. Exact locations necessary to secure proper conditions and results shall be determined at project site and shall be approved by the Owner's Representative.

B. Locations shown on architectural ceiling drawings or on wall elevations shall take precedence over electrical plan locations.

C. Verify dimensions and the correct location of equipment before proceeding with the roughing-in of connection.

D. Lighting fixtures in mechanical spaces and elevator machine rooms are shown in their approximate locations only. Do not install light outlets or fixtures until mechanical piping and ductwork are installed; then lighting fixtures shall be installed in locations best suited for equipment arrangement and as approved by the Owner's Representative. Verify locations of fixtures in elevator machine rooms before installation.

E. All scaled and figured dimensions are approximate of typical equipment of the class indicated. Before proceeding with any work, carefully check and verify all dimensions, sizes, etc., with the drawings to see that the equipment being installed will fit into the spaces provided.

F. Access to Equipment: Locate starters, switches, receptacles, cable tray and pullboxes to provide easy access for operation, repair, maintenance to comply with code, and if concealed, provide access doors.

G. The Contractor shall be responsible for verifying that equipment being provided will fit dimensionally in locations shown on drawings.

1.08 MATERIALS STANDARDS

A. Materials and equipment shall be new.

B. All work shall meet the requirements of the governing codes as listed in Division 1 and General Conditions, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, and the requirements of the following: 1. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA). 2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 3. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE). 4. Institute of Cable Engineers Association (ICEA). 5. National Electrical Contractors' Association Standards for Construction (NECA). 6. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL). 7. Instrument Society of America (ISA). 8. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). 9. National Electrical Code (NEC). 10. Occupational Safety and Health Appeals Board (OSHA).

C. Items for similar application shall be of the same manufacturer.

D. The label of listing by UL shall appear on all materials and equipment for which standards have been established by the agency.

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

16050-5 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 02/13/17 20150922

E. Where codes establish label or approved requirements, furnish all materials and equipment with either the required labels affixed or the necessary written approval.

F. Provide the type and quantity of electrical materials and equipment necessary to complete work and all systems in operation, tested and ready for use.

G. Provide and install all incidental items that belong to the work described and which are required for complete systems.

1.09 TESTING

A. Upon completion of the work and adjustment of all equipment, conduct an operating test for each system approval. The Contractor shall pay for a testing agency to conduct the test in the presence of the Owner's Representative. Demonstrate that all systems and equipment operate in accordance with all requirements of the Contract Documents and to be free from all electrical and mechanical defects. Provide all systems free from short circuits and grounds and show an insulation resistance between phase conductors and ground not less than 250,000 ohms for all feeders and circuits of 60 amps ampacity and higher.

B. Produce resistance to ground tests by Journeymen Electricians and the required number of apprentices to measure resistance to ground at all grounding electrodes. Make tests before slabs of affected areas are poured in order that corrective measures, if required, may be taken. If the resistances exceed values specified in this Specification perform all corrective measures as approved by the Owner's Representative.

C. Prior to energizing any motors, measure the service voltage for phase balance and report immediately to the Owner's Representative if unbalance exceeds 1% from mean.

D. Measure the three-phase voltage at no load and at maximum load conditions.

E. Complete all tests prior to final field observation of project, including corrective work based on the results of the tests.

1.10 TRAINING

A. Provide a minimum of 20 hours for the necessary training program and instructions to the Owner's Representative, for entire Building Electrical System in addition to what is specified in each section.

1.11 SITE VISIT AND FAMILIARIZATION

A. Contractors proposing to undertake work under this Division shall: 1. Visit the site of the work, and fully familiarize themselves of all conditions that affect the work or cost thereof. 2. Examine the drawings and specifications as related to the site conditions. 3. Acquaint themselves with all utility companies from whom services shall be supplied; verify locations of utility service points, demarcations and interfaces and determine exact requirements.

B. Notice: Consideration will not be granted for any alleged misunderstanding of the amount of work to be performed. Tender of proposal shall convey full agreement and understanding to all items and conditions specified, indicated on the drawings, and required by nature of the site.

1.12 DISCREPANCIES

A. Should the Electrical Contractor find discrepancies or omissions in the Contract Documents, or be in doubt as to the intent, he shall immediately obtain clarification from the Electrical Engineer before submitting a proposal for work under this Division.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050-6 20150922 02/13/17

B. It is the electrical contractor's responsibility to review the drawings and specifications prior to submitting their bid, for compliance with the local regulations of the Electrical Inspection Agency, Fire Inspection Agency and the Local Electric and Telephone Utilities, and to notify the engineer of record immediately of any discrepancies found.

C. Electrical Material and Labor costs shall be estimated on a project specific basis without the use of "flat rate" estimating guides from sources such as NECA (National Electrical Contractors Association), or similar. Electrical contractor is directed to acquaint himself with article titled "Changes in the Work", in the agreement between Owner and Contractor, unit prices requested in Bid Proposal Form and Statement 12, "Change Orders", in Bid Proposal Form.

1.13 AS-BUILT (RECORD) DRAWINGS

A. Record on clean and latest, current set of electrical drawings all changes and deviations from the contract drawings. Record final location of switchboards, panelboards, transformers, disconnect switches, etc. Make sufficient measurements to locate all major underground conduit runs and show same on record drawings.

B. Provide as specified in Section 01700, Closeout Procedures.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS (use only prime quality, new materials apparatus, and equipment).

A. Use only new, U.L. listed or labeled materials apparatus, and equipment.

B. Conduit: 1. Rigid conduit shall have UL Label, zinc coated exterior, either hot dip galvanized, sherardized, or metallized, and zinc enamel interior; set screw fittings are permitted. 2. Electrical metallic tubing: UL Label, zinc coated exterior and zinc or enamel interior; fittings for EMT shall be steel gland ring compression type. Type AC cable shall not be used. 3. Flexible metallic conduit: a. UL Label, zinc coated exterior and interior; fitting for flexible conduit shall be "JAKE" or Squeeze type, set screw connectors shall not be used. b. Liquid-tight flexible conduit shall be Sealtite type U.A. with Appleton Series "ST" or Pyle-National Series "CT" connectors. 4. Non-metallic conduit: a. Shall be Type I per U.L. 651, and shall be equivalent to "PVC Schedule 40" as manufactured by Carlon. All sweeps, bends and risers shall be concrete encased schedule 80. b. All high-voltage conduit, telephone conduit, service entrance conduit, and feeders 100 amps and over shall be encased in 3" red, mixed concrete when buried in site. c. Non-metallic flexible tubing shall not be used. 5. Sealant: Fire rated equal to wall or ceiling penetrated. Silicon foam Dow-Corning #2001, General Electric Co., "Pensil #851," or approved equal. 6. Conduit seals shall be Crouse-Hinds Type "EYS" or "EZS", Appleton Type "ESUF" or ESUM", or approved equal, with sealing compound as recommended by the manufacturer for hazardous or refrigerated areas.

C. Racks and trapeze hangers: Formed steel channels similar to Unistrut.

D. Vibration fittings and seismic expansion joints: O.Z. Type DX. Provide seismic couplings/joints as required per code.

E. Outlets and Junction Boxes: 1. Galvanized or sherardized, one piece pressed steel, knock-out type.

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

16050-7 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 02/13/17 20150922

2. Size of each box determined in accordance with National Electrical Code for number of conductors or number and size of conduits entering box, but not less than 4 in. square and 1-1/2 in. deep. 3. Outlet boxes installed in concrete for fixtures: 4 3/8in. octagonal concrete box with minimum depth of 3 in. 4. Outlet boxes installed in concrete for wiring devices: 4in. square and 1-1/2in. deep concrete box with 1-1/2in. deep cover plate. 5. Exposed outlet boxes: Case metal with threaded or union hub, Crouse-Hinds type "FS" or "FD" with cast metal covers. 6. Outlet boxes installed in masonry walls: Masonry type with square corners and without exterior mounting ears or shall be standard 4S box with 2in. masonry extension ring. Mounted in conjunction with coursing. 7. Back-to-back boxes type are not permitted. 8. Gangable type boxes are not permitted. 9. For outdoors and damp locations, utilize in-use cast weather-proof/gfi outlet boxes with gasketed cast covers.

F. Pullboxes: 1. In no case the pullboxes shall be made of less size or material thickness than required by governing electrical code. 2. General purpose sheet steel pull boxes: Furnished with removable screw covers; manufacturers standard baked enamel finish. 3. Weatherproof sheet steel pullboxes: Fabricated of code gauge hot-dipped galvanized steel and gasketed weather-tight cover of same materials; manufacturer's standard baked exterior enamel finish. 4. Cast metal pullboxes: Furnished with gasketed screw covers and necessary drilled and tapped conduit entries; screws shall be bronze or brass.

G. Floor mounted outlets and boxes: 1. In floor boxes mounted in slabs on grade to be watertight cast iron boxes with number of gangs per plans, combine all floor receptacles, telephones and data outlets at a single location into one floor box U.O.N. All boxes shall be 3 3/8" deep with 1 7/8" minimum adjustment before pour and 1/2" adjustment capability after pour. Boxes to be finished out flush with final floor finish. Boxes shall be as manufactured by Walker or approved equal as follows: 1 Gang 880CS1 2 Gang 880CS2 3 Gang 880CS3 2. In floor boxes mounted in slabs above grade level to be concrete tight stamped steel with number of gangs per plans. Combine all floor receptacles, telephone and data outlets at a single location into one floor box U.O.N. All boxes shall be 3 15/32" deep with 2" minimum adjustment before pour and 1/2" minimum adjustment capability after pour. Boxes to be finished out flush with final floor finish. Boxes shall be as manufactured by Walker or approved equal as follows: 1 Gang 880S1 2 Gang 880S2 3 Gang 880S3 3. Boxes- Finishes: a. Box trim plates shall match final floor finish in area installed. b. Hard finish floors shall use brass tile rings. Walker #817T, 827T and 837T or approved equal as appropriate. c. Carpet finished floors shall use brass carpet flanges. Walker #817C, 827C, 837C or approved equal as appropriate. d. Receptacle covers to be Walker #828R or approved equal as appropriate. e. Tele/data covers to be Walker #829S or approved equal as appropriate. f. Partition feed covers to be Walker #829CK-1 or approved equal as appropriate. 4. Poke Through Type Infloor Outlets

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050-8 20150922 02/13/17

a. All poke throughs are to be fire rated to match floor being penetrated. Verify floor fire rating prior to installation. Coordinate all floor penetration locations with project structural engineer in writing prior to core drilling penetration. In any buildings with post tension slabs the floor shall be x-rayed prior to core drilling. b. Poke throughs are to be Walker #1570-A (duplex receptacle), Walker #1990-A (Quadplex receptacle), Walker 15AM Series for tele/data outlets, coordinate exact jack type(s) with owner's telecom installer prior to project completion. c. Poke through for partition furniture fees are to be Walker #1620-PF50/75 or approved equal.

H. Wire and Cable: 1. 600 Volt conductors: a. Conductor size: #12AWG minimum. Conductors shall be solid. b. Conductors #8AWG and larger shall be stranded. c. Conductors shall be copper. Aluminum conductors shall not be used. d. Type THWN or type THHN 600 Volt insulation shall be used for conductors #12 AWG and larger. Service entrance conductors shall be XHHW. For branch circuit conductors minimum wire size for lighting and power circuits shall be #12 (unless noted otherwise on the plans). Refer to WIRING SCHEDULE ON THE DRAWINGS for wire size depending on the length of the conductors. This schedule is based on THWN/THHN 75 degree C copper conductors, 90% power factor, (K) constant = 12. Refer to the plans for specific circuit requirement. In no case shall the voltage drop exceed 3% for branch circuits

I. Adhesive Marker: "Brady” Vinyl, pre-printed with pressure sensitive adhesive.

J. Terminal Cabinets: 1. Terminal cabinets shall be flush or surface mounted as indicated. Where indicated, cabinets shall be of weatherproof construction. 2. Cabinets shall be code gauge galvanized steel sized and provided with barriers indicated. Install 3/4in. plywood backboard, painted black, in each cabinet with adequate type terminals. 3. Front panels shall be of sheet steel, painted to match lighting panels if surface mounted and prime coat finished if flush mounted. Provide front panel doors with semi-concealed hinges. Front panel shall be provided with a white on black (black letters), l in. by 2 1/2 in. laminated plastic nameplate engraved as designated by Architect and mounted by rivets or screws. On flush cabinets mount nameplate inside of panel door. 4. Cabinets shall be UL listed. 5. Acceptable cabinet manufacturers: Eaton, General Electric, Siemens, or Square D.

K. Magnetic Starters: 1. Provide two or three overload relays respectively for two-pole or three-pole starters. 2. All starters of same make. NEMA rating with overload heaters sized according to 115% of nameplate rating of actual motors installed. 3. Overload relays shall be bimetallic type. 4. Auxiliary contacts, pushbuttons, selector switches, pilot lights, as required by heating, ventilation, air conditioning and plumbing systems. Acceptable manufacturers: Eaton, General Electric, Siemens, Square D or Allen-Bradley.

L. Manual Motor Starters: 1. Flush or surface mounting type as required, number of poles, size, and overload heaters as required by size of motors actually installed. 2. Acceptable manufacturers: Eaton, General Electric, Siemens, Square D or Allen-Bradley.

M. Disconnect Switches: Non-fusible or fusible, externally operated horsepower-rated 250 volt or 600 volt as required; NEMA Type 1 enclosure except where WP is indicated, use NEMA Type 3R enclosures.

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

16050-9 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 02/13/17 20150922

N. Grounding: 1. 480 volt motors or equipment shall have bonded ground jumpers from feeder conduit to motor frame. 2. Grounding bushings shall be used wherever conduits are grounded.

O. Lighting Fixtures: 1. Provide complete lighting system, wired, assembled and operable, including lighting equipment and accessories as shown on the drawings, described in the fixture schedules and specified herein. Accessories include canopies, suspension of proper lengths, hickeys, castings, sockets, holders, reflectors, ballasts, diffusing material, louvers, plaster and mounting frames, lamps, recessing boxes, supporting brackets and channels to span structural members. Fixtures to be factory pre-wired and pre-assembled. 2. Catalog numbers are given for manufacturers' identification. Conform to standards of quality defined by written descriptions and catalog numbers. Fixtures to be UL labeled for location and operating conditions required. 3. Fixtures of the same type to be of one manufacturer and of identical finish and appearance. Where not identified on drawings, provide same type as indicated in similar locations. 4. For recessed fixtures, provide frame and trim compatible with ceiling type and construction. Refer to ceiling specifications and architectural drawings to determine types. 5. Provide adequate lamp shielding, proper ventilation and heat dissipation. 6. Secure diffusers to trim by devices not requiring tools for removal, or for re-lamping. 7. Locate fixture outlets and recessed fixtures by reference to architectural drawings, Architectural reflected ceiling plans and measurement of building construction. Do not scale electrical drawings. 8. Where boxes for light fixtures occur in plaster or acoustical ceilings, the boxes shall be securely supported independent of the ceiling suspension system and shall not depend on the suspension system for support. 9. Each light fixture shall be supported by means of adequate hangers with attachments to building construction, independent of any ceiling system. 10. Chain hangers or tie wire shall not be used in the support of lighting fixtures. Suspended fixtures shall also be fitted with swivel hangers and canopies. 11. All light fixtures shall be furnished complete with lamps as indicated in the Lighting Fixture Schedule, Incandescent lamps shall be rated 130 volts. All fluorescent lamps shall be standard cool white rapid start, as manufactured by General Electric. All substitute lamp manufacturers shall be approved by the Owner. Tube guards are required for open fixtures and exposed lamps where located over food areas. 12. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings in accordance with overall specifications and the requirements of this section. Shop drawing shall include but not be limited to the following: a. For all lighting fixtures and other lighting equipment specified in this section, submit lighting brochure indexed alphabetically in accordance with fixture identification on drawings, tabbed for each fixture and clearly identifying the catalog numbers for each piece of equipment and all special features. b. Submittal of fixtures listed with manufacturer's name and series or model number shall include the following: 1) A current manufacturer's data sheet (copies not acceptable) or construction drawing for each light fixture type. Duplication of types on a single data sheet or drawing is not acceptable. Data shall include dimensions, weight, ballast characteristics, description of lens, louver, diffuser, finish, frame, housing, reflector, recommended lamps. 2) Fixture options, finishes, electrical characteristics, lamp type, ballast type/manufacturer, lens thickness/type/ manufacturer. 13. General Construction: a. Sheet Metal: Free of tool marks and dents. Finished to eliminate exposed sharp edges. Intersections and joints formed true, sufficiently rigid to prevent distortion after assembly. b. Castings: Free of blemishes, scale and rust, and finished smooth. c. Aluminum Surfaces, Nonreflecting: Anodized clear and with color as indicated. Castings to be irridited, sandblasted and anodized.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050-10 20150922 02/13/17

d. Aluminum Reflectors: Treat with alzak process to provide permanent reflective surface. Extruded reflectors to be unscored, bright dipped and clear anodized. 14. Ballasts: a. General 1) All ballasts for a single type lighting fixture shall be by a single manufacturer to assure consistent and similar light output of that type lighting fixture. 2) Ballasts for all electric discharge lamps shall be located within the same fixture housing unless specified to be remote. 3) Ballasts shall comply with all applicable UL, CBM, and ANSI standards and shall be UL listed. Ballasts performance may be certified by a nationally recognized independent testing laboratory with a U.S. government registered certification mark for fluorescent lamp ballasts. Performance certification shall be conducted per ETL procedure B20.2 in accordance with ANSI C82.2 test methods. 4) All ballasts shall be high power factor (H.P.F.) 90% minimum. Capacitors in ballasts shall not have PCB's. 5) All ballasts shall be grounded per NEC Article 410-E. 6) All fluorescent ballasts utilized on the interior shall be of the energy saving type unless noted otherwise. 7) The terms outdoors and exterior when used in this section shall mean outside of the building or structure and all unheated areas within the confines of the building or structure. 8) Operating temperature shall, in general, be as follows: a) Normal room ambient, 68 oF to 84 oF. b) Mechanical and boiler room ambient 131 oF. c) Outdoors 20 oF. b. Fluorescent Ballasts 1) Operating Voltages: Ballasts shall operate within the following voltage limits without any deleterious effect. a) Nominal voltage 120 VAC, operating range 108-132 VAC. b) Nominal voltage 277 VAC, operating voltage 249-305 VAC. 2) Minimum Starting Temperature for outdoor and indoor ballasts shall be as follows unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. Outdoor temperature rated ballasts shall be furnished for all fixtures installed within coolers and freezers. Starting Starting Temp. Temp. Type Type Lamps Ballast Freezer Cooler 430 Ma Rapid Start Standard -20 oF 0oF

3) Protection. Ballasts shall have UL listed Class P to limit ballast case temperature to 90 oC maximum with reset. 4) Sound Rating: Type Indoor Ballast Type Lamps Ballasts Sound Rating 430 Ma Rapid Start Standard Type A

5) Warranty. Fluorescent ballasts shall be warranted against failure due to defects in material and workmanship for a minimum period of three (3) years from date of installation acceptance regardless of the date of manufacture. c. HID Ballasts 1) Operating Characteristics. Ballasts for mercury or metal halide lamps shall be (CW) constant wattage (isolated) type. All ballasts shall have the following characteristics: a) CW: A ± 13 percent variation in line voltage shall not result in a variation in lamp wattage greater than ± 2 percent. 2) Starting Temperature. Ballast starting temperature shall be -20 oF.

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

16050-11 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 02/13/17 20150922

3) Protection. All HID ballasts shall be fused with size and type as recommended by the ballast manufacturer. Reference FUSING LIGHTING FIXTURES AND POLES paragraph hereinafter. 4) Sound Rating. In the absence of unified standards for sound rating in ballast industry, the requirement of sound level limitation shall be based on quietest model available for type of lamp used. Where available, ballast shall carry a sound rating of A. 5) Outdoor Ballasts. Ballast cases and covers shall be weatherproof type to prevent entry of moisture. Where wiring enters ballast a permanent watertight seal shall be provided. 6) Warranty. HID ballasts shall be warranted against failure due to defects in material and workmanship for a minimum period of one (1) year from date of installation acceptance regardless of the date of manufacture. d. Manufacturers 1) Electronic ballasts rapid start and bi-ax lamps shall be type manufactured by Magnetek Triad (Ballaster), Advance Transformer Company or approved equal. a) Ballasts shall operate lamps at a frequency of 20 to 35KHz with no detectable flicker. b) Ballasts that operate as a parallel circuit shall permit other lamps to maintain full output after failure of companion lamp(s). c) Rapid-Start ballasts shall provide soft/stable start of rapid-start lamps and maintain full cathode heat during operation. d) Ballasts shall be of U.S. manufacture and carry a 3-year warranty. e) Ballasts shall comply with FCC and NEMA limits governing EMI and RFI and shall not interfere with operation of other normal electrical equipment. f) Ballasts shall meet any applicable ANSI standards (i.e. harmonic distortion, surge protection, etc.). g) Ballasts shall not be affected by lamp failure and shall deliver normal lamp life. h) Ballasts shall be marked with manufacturer's name, part number, supply voltage, power factor, open circuit voltage, current draw for each lamp type and UL listing. 2) HID ballasts shall be manufactured by General Electric Company, Universal Manufacturing Company or Advance Transformer Company. 3) Non-Electronic fluorescent ballasts. a) Ballasts shall be UL Listed, Class P, Sound A rated. b) (UL Listed when installed in the fixture. c) Be fully operationally compatible with lamps provided. d) Shall be manufactured by Advance Transformer Co., Universal Manufacturing Corp. or General Electric Company. e) Carry a 3-year warranty. f) All ballasts shall be high power factor (HPF) 90% minimum. Capacitors in ballasts shall not have PCBs. g) All ballasts shall be grounded per NEC Article 410-E. h) Operating temperature shall, in general, be as follows: ⋅ Normal room ambient, 68 °F to 84 °F. ⋅Mechanical and boiler room ambient 131 °F Outdoors 0 °F. i) Operating Voltages: Ballasts shall operate within the following voltage limits without any deleterious effect. Nominal voltage 120 VAC, operating range 110-125 VAC. Nominal voltage 277 VAC, operating voltage 255-289 VAC. j) Minimum starting temperature for outdoor and indoor ballasts shall be as follows unless otherwise indicated on the drawings: Starting Starting Type Temp. Temp. Type Lamps Ballast Outdoors Indoor 425 Ma Instant Start Slimline -20 F 50 F 430 Ma Rapid Start Standard -20 F 50 F

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050-12 20150922 02/13/17

460 Ma Rapid Start Energy Saving ------60 F 800 Ma Rapid Start High Output -20 F 50 F 1500 Ma Rapid Start Power Groove -20 F 50 F

15. Fusing Lighting Fixtures and Poles a. General: All HID fixtures shall be fused. b. Material and Application 1) Fuseholder shall be one of the following: a) Up to 300 volts, for all interior mounted fixtures provide: b) Bussmann HLR holder (w/6" of #18 solid CU wire) c) Up to 600 volts for all outdoor mounted fixtures or fixtures exposed to moisture (or in pole bases) provide fuseholders for 1-1/2" long x 13/32" fuses of correct wire size: Joy X8919 holder (two terminal) Joy X8917 holder (one terminal) Bussmann HEX holder (two terminal) Bussmann HEB holder (one terminal) d) When the manufacturer's standard design utilizes other fuseholders such as panel mounted (HPC-D, HPF, HPL-B, etc.), they will be acceptable providing voltage and ampacity for the intended application does not exceed the values of those specified above. e) Manufacturer. Fuse holders shall be manufactured by Bussmann Division of McGraw Edison or approved equal. 16. Fluorescent Fixture Temperature Rating a. Design recessed fixtures to limit ballast case temperature installed in fixtures to 90(C with line voltage at 277 volts plus 5 percent, room ambient at 25(C plus 5 percent, plenum ambient at 55(C plus 5 percent and ceiling material not to exceed R factor of 20. b. Certify conformance on submittals. c. Conform with Guarantee Requirement per General Conditions. 17. Fluorescent Fixture Construction a. Lampholders: Bi-pin type. Permitting full entry of lamp pins in a vertical plane, after which entry, a 90( rotation shall properly seat the lamp. Corrosion-resistant "edge-wipe" type lamp pin contacts. b. Lampholder Fastening: Securely fasten to brackets or socket straps with machine screws in a manner to eliminate excessive flexing under normal lamp pressure. Replaceable without removing fixture from the installation. In fixtures with end plates, backed by fixture housing to prevent twisting. Where sockets cannot be backed up by housing, secure with two screws or bolts. c. Housings and Bodies: Fabricated or die-formed, cold-rolled heavy-duty steel welded into a one- piece assembly using lab seam construction. Breaks, bends, edges, holes, and knockouts accomplished by die-forming and machine operation. Alternately, fabricated of extruded aluminum sections or die-formed from aluminum with sections positively interlocked to provide a rigid unit. A complete die-formed housing of heavy-duty steel will be acceptable providing the unit is ribbed, embossed or paneled for strength. d. Provide wiring and ballast compartment accessible from below when the fixture is in the installed position, with wiring secured to the body of the fixture with the cover removed. e. In suspended ceilings, in addition to seismic suspension, provide four clips attached to fixtures to positively tie fixture to T-bar or ceiling channel suspension. In plaster and dry wall ceilings, provide plaster frame and U channel supports. f. In fixed ceilings, provide access to fixture outlet box through fixture. g. Finish: Finish visible fixture trim in color designated on drawings, or baked matte white enamel where not otherwise noted. h. Rustproof Metal Parts: Provide enamel finish, baked-on at a minimum temperature of 300(F. Enamel reflective surface to have 87 percent reflectivity, minimum. i. Louvers: Parabolic louver blades, 3" deep; semi-specular anodized aluminum reflector sheet; low iridescent, contoured to assure shielding of lamp, lamp image, and white interior surfaces. Minimum 30( shielding.

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

16050-13 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 02/13/17 20150922

j. Lenses: Flat lens designed to direct light down and present low surface brightness within normal viewing angles; high molecular weight virgin acrylic plastic having maximum melt flow rate of 2.2 grams/10 minutes per ASTM D1238 Condition 1 and minimum flow temperature of 315 degrees F per ASTM D569; smooth on one side, uniform pattern of male cones or hexagonal prisms on the other. Special types where noted on fixture schedule. Prismatic lenses shall be manufactured by KSH Inc. as noted above. k. Doors: Provide minimum trim, separable, hinged door with mitered corners, secured in place by inconspicuous spring loaded, visible, finger operated catches, removable without tools, but hinged to preclude accidental dislodgement in the open position. Incorporate light trap between door and fixture. Retain lens or louver firmly in door with clips or clamping frame, but allowing for lens replacement without special tools. l. Fixture Wiring: Wire with 600 volts, 105(C rated, thermoplastic or asbestos insulation, No. 14 AWG minimum size. Interconnect between sockets and ballasts, and provide twelve inch minimum length pigtails. Provide two wire pigtail for single circuit connection, four wire for two circuit connection. Where fixture is served from two sources, barrier wiring from emergency source and provide inside notation indicating separate source. m. Modular Wiring: Where modular wiring systems are used in conjunction with lighting fixtures, manufacturer of light fixture shall provide UL listed fixture for use with modular or manufactured wiring systems. n. Fixture Connection: Connect to fixture outlet, with six foot length of flex and conductor insulated for rated fixture operating temperature in areas where modular wiring system cannot be used. o. General: All sagging, cracked, dented, or otherwise damaged lenses or louvers in lighting fixtures shall be replaced. The replacements shall be new lenses or louvers of the same type and color as those damaged. p. Labeling: Provide specific UL label for use and mounting.

Label Use IC Insulated ceilings Non IC (w/Thermal Overload) Fixed ceiling SC Suspended accessible ceiling Damp Location Exterior protected location Wet Location Exterior exposed locations

18. Incandescent Fixtures a. Medium base sockets below 300 watts and mogul base for 300 watts and larger, unless otherwise noted. b. For recessed fixtures, provide mounting frame with an attached pre-wired junction box, rated for through wiring with 60(C conductors, designed for installation without installing trim, diffusers or lens. Verify suitability of attached junction boxes for number of conductors indicated on drawings, and provide additional boxes where attached junction box capacity is exceeded. c. Provide specific UL label for use and mounting.

Label Use IC Insulated ceilings Non IC (w/Thermal Overload) Fixed ceiling SC Suspended accessible ceiling Damp Location Exterior protected location Wet Location Exterior exposed location

d. Fasten fixture sockets and reflectors securely to body to prevent rotation or rocking during re- lamping. e. Fasten or hinge trims and lenses to the fixture body so that no part of the fixture must be held during the re-lamping procedure. Securely retain lenses in lens door so that dropping of door cannot dislodge lens.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050-14 20150922 02/13/17

f. Glass lenses or diffusers to be free from spherical or chromatic imperfections and have thermal characteristics of "Pyrex". g. All recessed incandescent fixtures in the same area shall be supplied by the same manufacturer to assure matching of cone colors and trim pieces. h. Wall Recessed or Surface Mounted: (Similar for wall or surface mounted compact fluorescent) 1) Provide adequate support for lighting fixture by rigidly supporting the fixture housing and outlet box. 2) Coverplates, trim pieces or canopies shall meet flush with the wall for recessed units and tight to the fixture housing for surface mounted units. 19. High Intensity Discharge Fixtures a. Provide porcelain, screw type mogul sockets UL listed at 600 volts, 1500 watts, securely fastened to fixture body to prevent twisting or rocking of socket when lamping or relamping. For pendant units, provide balanced construction for use on swivel hanger. b. Bracket Mounted: 1) All bracket-mounted fixtures shall be specifically designed for this type installation. 2) Mounting hardware shall be completely tight. c. Ceiling Recessed and Surface Mounted: 1) Provide adequate support for lighting fixtures by rigidly supporting the recessed outlet box in finished areas or surface mounted box in unfinished areas. 2) Coverplates or canopies shall be screwed tight to the box. Coverplates or canopies on recessed boxes shall meet flush with the wall. d. Wall Surface Mounted: 1) Provide adequate support for lighting fixture by rigidly supporting the recessed outlet box in finished areas or surface mounted box in unfinished areas. e. General: 1) Provide ballast compatible with specified lamps, per HID Ballasts specification, and so certify. 20. Lighting Fixture Description: Refer to schedule on drawings, as follows and to requirements in other paragraphs herein. 21. Lamps a. General: Unless specified otherwise herein, furnish and install a lamp for each fixture of type and wattage indicated on drawings. Replace all burned-out lamps or ballasts at the completion of contract work just prior to Architect/Engineer's final punchlist. b. Fluorescent lamps: Compatible with specified ballast and fixtures. 3500(K unless otherwise noted. Compact fluorescent shall be wattage as listed on drawing 3500(K lamps. c. Incandescent lamps: Inside frosted or as recommended by fixture manufacturer. Provide 130 volt rating, unless otherwise noted. d. Metal Halide: Phosphor coated, unless otherwise noted, universal burning type, used with compatible ballasts in enclosed fixtures. Breaking of outer glass to disconnect supply to arc tube. Initial Life- Watt Base Lumens Hours Comment 100 ED-17 8,500 10,000 Enclosed Fixture 175 BT 28 14,000 7,500 Enclosed Fixture 250 BT 28 20,500 10,000 Enclosed Fixture 400 ED-18 24,000 50,000 By Venture or Phiillips

e. Manufacturer: All lamps shall be manufactured by the same manufacturer, Osram/Sylvania, General Electric Co. or approved equal. 22. General Purpose Receptacles: a. Shall be specification grade, 2P-3W, with provisions for back-wiring from eight separate wiring openings with screw activated clamp type terminals and side wiring with captively held binding screws.

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

16050-15 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 02/13/17 20150922

b. Receptacle cover shall be high-impact, chemical resistant nylon and housing shall be high-impact, chemical resistant ABS/PVC or equivalent. Mounting strap shall be wrap-around design and grounding contact must be heavy-duty type. c. They shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories and verified as meeting Federal Specifications W-C-596F. d. Receptacles shall be Pass & Seymour or approved equal or Hubbell or Bryant. e. Duplex Receptacles: 1) No.5262 15A-125V or approved equal ivory or color as approved by Architect. 2) No.5362 20A-125V or approved equal ivory or color as approved by Architect. f. Single Receptacles: 1) No.5261-7 15A-125V or approved equal ivory or color as approved by Architect. 2) No.5361-7 20A-125V or approved equal ivory or color as approved by Architect. 3) Isolated Ground Duplex Receptacles: 4) No.IG6200 15A-125V or approved equal, Orange (IG), Red (Generator). 5) No.IG6300 20A-125V or approved equal, Orange (IG), Red (Generator). g. Receptacles shall be installed with the "U" grounding contact at the top. Where receptacles are mounted horizontally they shall be installed with the neutral contact at the top. h. Special receptacles as indicated on drawings. i. All receptacles shall be submitted for shop drawing review and color approval to the Architect and Engineer. 23. Toggle Switches: a. Shall be quiet AC-type, specification grade with provisions for backwiring with screw actuated clamp type terminals, side-wiring with adaptively-held binding screws, and separate screw terminal for the grounding wire. They shall be color coded for current rating, and certified by UL as meeting Federal Specification W-S-896E. b. Switches shall be Pass & Seymour or approved equal by Hubbell or Bryant. 20 AMP 30 AMP 120-277V AC 120-277V AC Ivory Toggle Switch 2HP -240V 2HP-240V Single Pole 20AC1-I 30AC-1-I Double Pole 20AC2-I 30AC-2-I Three-Way 20AC3I 30AC-3-I Four-Way 20AC4-I 30AC-4-I Special switches as indicated on drawings. Locking 20AC1-L-I 30AC1-L-I Pilot Light 20AC1-RPL-I 30AC1-RPL-I (Red Toggle) 24. Plates: All switches, receptacles, telephone and blank outlets shall be 0.040 in thick, satin finish stainless steel type 302 alloy unless otherwise noted. Pass & Seymour, General Electric, Hubbell, or Bryant. 25. Plates requiring engraved lettering shall be as: a. Contactor control switches. b. Key operated switches. c. Switches with pilot lights. d. Motor, heating and ventilating control switches. e. Switches where outlets or switch equipment are not visible from switch location. 26. Occupancy sensors shall be equal to WattStopper ceiling mounted CI-2000. 27. Mounting Facilities: Provide mounting facilities required for properly securing of hanging fixtures, equipment and outlets. Provide sleeves, inserts, expansion joints, and all components as required.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050-16 20150922 02/13/17

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Location and verification of dimensions: Scaled and figure dimensions are approximate and are given for estimating purposes only. Before proceeding with work, check and verify dimensions and sizes and assume responsibility for fitting of all materials and equipment to other parts of equipment and to the structure. Where apparatus and equipment have been indicated on drawings, dimensions have been taken from typical equipment of the class indicated. Check the drawings to see that equipment to be installed will fit into the spaces provided.

B. Install materials and equipment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, instructions, industry standards.

C. Trench and Backfill: Provide trenching, concrete encasement of conduit, backfilling and compaction for underground high voltage system.

D. Conduit: 1. Rigid conduit: Shall be used when installed in encased in concrete below slabs, in concrete or masonry walls, exposed on roof or exposed on interior walls below 4'-0" above floor, and where required by code. 2. Rigid conduit in concrete in contact with earth, except below slab, shall be encased 3" on all sides with red mixed concrete envelope. Concrete mix shall be 5.5 sack, using pea gravel as aggregate. 3. Protection: Wrap runs underground with Hunt's "Process No. 3" or Scotch "No. 50 tape", half-lapped. 4. EMT: a. Use only for concealed interior runs or exposed interior runs 4'0" above floor. b. EMT may be used on roofs under roofing and where protected by adjacent rigid roof insulation. c. EMT shall not be cast in concrete or installed in masonry walls. 5. No conduit and fittings shall be used without prior review. 6. Seal-tite flexible conduit shall be used for all final connections to motors and equipment in wet, damp or outdoor areas where drawings indicate use of flexible conduit. 7. Terminate conduit runs to rotating, adjustable, or movable equipment with flexible connections. 8. Install flexible isolating connections in conduit runs between building structure and air conditioning equipment, transformers or other equipment transmitting vibration or noise. 9. Do not use thread-less conduit couplings for rigid conduit except for connections requiring union. 10. Rigid conduit shall be terminated with metallic bushings. 11. Install three 3/4 in. empty conduits from each flush mounted panelboard to accessible above ceiling space where conditions occur. Cap conduit with standard galvanized pipe caps. 12. Conduit shall not be embedded in concrete slab less than 4 in. thick and conduit 1-1/4 in. and larger shall not be installed in slab. Install conduit embedded in concrete slabs not on grade between reinforcing bars and bottom of slab. For slabs on grade, install conduit below slab, as specified. 13. Non-metallic conduit: Shall be installed underground and in duct banks. Bends and risers shall be schedule 80, concrete encased. Risers shall terminate at panels and pullboxes with double locknuts and insulated grounding bushing. Bare copper ground wire shall be installed in conduit runs between panels and pullboxes and connected to ground bushing at each end. Ground wire shall be code sized or as indicated on drawings. Non-metallic conduit shall not be installed in concrete slabs or panels. 14. Non-metallic conduit in duct banks shall be installed as described in Concrete Encasement. 15. Provide secure mounting facilities for conduits. Wire or plumbers tape shall not be used for hanging of suspended conduit. Conduits shall not be secured to suspended ceiling hanger wires or to suspended ceiling structure. 16. Provide junction or pullboxes where required for pulling conductors due to excessive numbers of bends or lengths of conduit runs. Provide separation on voltages for all enclosures. All boxes shall be code sized. 17. Provide expansion couplings wherever conduits cross expansion or seismic joints or for continuous

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

16050-17 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 02/13/17 20150922

straight runs in excess of 100 feet except when embedded in concrete. Expansion fittings shall have bonding jumper or be of grounding type. 18. Re-route conduit where necessary to clear structural and mechanical obstructions. 19. Bury underground conduit except under buildings to depth of not less than 24 inches below finished grade. Bury runs smaller than 1-1/4" to minimum depth of 6 inches under floor slabs and provide 3 inches concrete encasement. For conduit 1-1/2" and larger, trench sufficiently under floor slabs to provide a minimum buried depth of 36 inches below finished grade. Minimum depths are to top of concrete envelopes. 20. Install long radius bends in underground service conduits and in other long underground runs in excess of 100ft. Do not flatten or kink bends. 21. Run conduits at right angles and parallel to structural members, walls, floor and ceiling. Secure conduits 1-inch and smaller with one hole malleable iron straps. Secure conduits 1-1/4 inch and larger with conduit hangers or two hole galvanized straps. Support suspended conduits with conduit hangers and 1/4 inch hanger-rod. Rack mount or suspend multiple conduit runs on trapeze hangers with 3/8in. rods. 22. Conduits installed in concrete, wet locations, exposed to weather or underground shall have threads filled with red lead and oil before screwing into couplings and threaded fittings. 23. Run conduits in spaces above suspended ceilings parallel to walls and floors. 24. Coordinate conduit runs in roof insulation and for securing of conduit runs above finished roof. 25. Where more than two conduits are installed in one common concrete envelope, separate conduits with conduit spacers. 26. Conceal conduit above ceiling, or in walls, unless otherwise noted. 27. A separate conduit shall be installed for each homerun indicated on the drawings. 28. Paint fire alarm conduits with a 1-inch wide red band every 5 feet of run. 29. Provide a green insulated ground conductor of size as required by code or parity size as noted in all flexible and PVC conduit runs and in metallic conduit where noted. 30. Do not strap or fasten rigid conduit to mechanical equipment, or to equipment subject to vibration or mounted on shock absorbing bases. 31. Conduits which are installed above dry type suspended ceilings shall not be secured to ceiling support wires. Support such conduit independent of ceiling suspension systems. 32. Support conduit to structure above suspended ceiling 8" minimum above ceiling to allow removal of ceiling tile. Do not support from T-bars or T-bar hanger wires. Do not support from roof decking. Maintain five inch clearance above recessed light fixtures. 33. Support conduits adjacent to walls with preformed channels. 34. Provide plated or galvanized hangers, rods, channels and metallic support and fastening material. 35. Conduit shall not be run closer than 12 inches to any hot water pipe, steam pipe, heater flue or vent. Maintain minimum 6 inches clearance between conduit and piping. 36. Conduits in furred spaces shall be routed to clear access openings. 37. Upon completing the installation of any run of conduit, the runs shall be tested to see that they are free from all obstructions and have a smooth interior. Install pull ropes ready to pull circuit conductors. 38. Seal: a. Conduits terminating where termination is subject to moisture, where conduit penetrates a cooler or freezer, or where conduit penetrates exterior wall or roof shall be sealed. b. Seal all conduit from exterior outlets or outlets in coolers and freezers at first interior junction to prevent moisture from entering the building through the conduit. c. Seal all conduit to sump pump motors and control panel. d. Seal all conduit that passes through the following areas: 1) As indicated on drawings. 2) Refrigerated area. 3) Temperature control room such as cold room or warm room. 4) Seal material shall be Johns-Manville "Dux Seal", Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Co. "Scotchfil" or equal. 39. Empty Conduit a. Provide a nylon or a 3/32-inch O.D. polyethylene rope, rated at 200 pounds tensile strength, in all

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050-18 20150922 02/13/17

conduits more than 5 feet in length left empty for future use. Not less than 3' of rope shall be left at each end of the conduit. b. Tag all empty conduits at each accessible end with a permanent tag identifying the purpose of the conduit and the location of the other end. c. Cap the open ends of conduits with approved manufactured conduit seals until ready to pull in conductors.

40. Communication/Telephone/Data Systems: a. Provide all conduit, cable and devices as specified on the drawings. Provide a pull string in each conduit. b. Final connections for communications, telephone, and data systems to be made by Whole Foods communications contractor. c. Coordinate all efforts including size of conduit, quantity, and locations of cable runs with the communications contractor.

E. Installation of 600 volt conductors: 1. Branch conductors shall be continuous between outlets or junction boxes and no splices shall be made except in outlet boxes, pull boxes, panelboard gutters or hand-holes. Feeders shall not be spliced in pull boxes. 2. All joints, splices and taps #10 and smaller (including fixture pigtails) shall be connected with "Ideal" wire nuts. 3. Oil or grease shall not be used when pulling conductors. Use acceptable cable lubricants only. Conductors shall not come in contact with earth or laid out on concrete slabs while being installed. 4. Train and lace conductors neatly in panels, cabinets and equipment. 5. Tighten pressure type lugs on panels and equipment, and re-tighten 24 hours later. 6. Tagging of conductors: a. Tag branch circuits in panelboards, in gutters, and in junction boxes where unused circuits terminate for purpose of identifying various circuits. b. Tag feeders and mains in switchboards. c. Tag with adhesive type of marker manufactured by "Brady" as distributed by Graybar Electric Co. 7. Separate conductors of different voltages in independent raceways and enclosures. 8. Separate conductors supplied by the emergency generator in raceways and enclosures independent from the normal power conductors.

F. Flashing: Fasten to roof and flash conduits passing through roof and exterior walls in a manner acceptable to Architect.

G. Pullboxes: 1. Care shall be exercised in locating underground pullboxes to avoid installation in drain water flow areas. 2. General purpose sheet steel pullboxes shall be installed only in dry protected locations and shall have removable screw covers.

H. Junction Boxes: 1. Outlet boxes shall be mounted at vertical center of block where mounted in masonry walls. 2. Outlet boxes shall be securely fastened to structure.

I. Heating and Ventilating, Air Conditioning and Plumbing Electrical Work: 1. Outlet boxes shall be mounted at vertical center of block where mounted in masonry walls. 2. Outlet boxes shall be securely fastened to structure. 3. Review mechanical plans for all control wiring, shutoffs, duct detector, and other electrical coordination requirements.

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

16050-19 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 02/13/17 20150922

J. Rough-in locations for fixtures and equipment shall be determined from the unit itself or from the approved shop drawings.

K. Provide all necessary anchoring devices and supports. 1. Use structural supports suitable for equipment, or as indicated. 2. Check loadings and dimensions of equipment with shop drawings. 3. Do not cut or weld to building structural members.

L. Arrange for necessary openings to allow for admittance of equipment. Where equipment cannot be installed as structure is being erected, provide and arrange for building-in of boxes, sleeves, or other devices to allow later installation.

M. Install equipment to permit easy access for normal maintenance. 1. Maintain easy access to switches, motors, drives, pullboxes, receptacles, etc. 2. Notify Owner's Representative in writing of relocation items which interfere with access.

N. Provide concrete foundations or pads for all floor mounted electrical equipment, as follows or as otherwise indicated on drawings. 1. Refer to General Conditions and Division 1 as applicable for requirements. 2. Where drawings do not show special foundations, install 3-inch thick housekeeping concrete pads and 4-inch wide edges. 3. Set anchor bolts for equipment.

O. Locate exit signs so that signs are visible from all corridor locations. In open areas, relocate signs as requested by Owner's Representative, who must approve any relocation in writing to Contractor.

P. No material, device or equipment shall be shipped to site unless shop drawings have been approved for such, prior to shipment.

Q. Sound Control: Install material and equipment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation to minimize noise levels. Correct noise or vibration occurring as a result of installation or equipment at no cost to the Owner’s representative.

3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:

A. Tests: 1. Furnish necessary instruments and equipment required for making tests, test all wiring for shorts, open circuits or grounding. Provide documentation of all tests upon request. 2. Immediately correct any defective work. 3. When entire installation has been completed and lighting fixtures installed, test out circuits and switching, and demonstrate that operation of system is in accordance with Contract Documents. 4. Test, coordinate, and set ground fault interrupter devices under direction of approved third-party testing agency.

3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING:

A. Cleaning: 1. Clean exposed parts of lighting fixtures, electrical equipment and interior of panels, cabinets and switchboards of dirt, cement, and plaster and other materials. 2. Replace or refinish scratched or damaged materials.

B. Lighting Adjustment: At final night-time inspection, adjust lighting as required by Architect.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050-20 20150922 02/13/17

3.04 SETTING OF PROTECTIVE DEVICE

A. Prior to final completion of the project, set all protective device relays and internal settings to provide adjustment between upstream and downstream protective devices. Setting shall be based on the accepted coordination study.

3.05 INDOOR LIGHTING FIXTURE INSTALLATION

A. General 1. Verify final type of ceiling construction prior to ordering fixtures and provide mounting frame to match. 2. Lighting fixtures recessed in plaster or dry wall ceilings shall be provided with plaster frames. 3. Fixtures shall not be supported directly from ceiling tile, ductwork, piping, or horizontal conduits. 4. All fixtures shall be supported by means of yokes or other mounting devices as recommended by fixture manufacturer. All supports shall meet NEC Article 410 Section D. 5. All fixtures shall be clean and free of visible labels, markings and lamp retainer gaskets prior to final inspection. 6. All recessed lighting fixture trims shall meet flush with the ceiling and shall not have light leakage. 7. All recessed lighting fixtures in removable ceilings shall be connected to modular wiring system to allow ease of relocation after installation. 8. All lighting fixtures inside air handling units or in return air plenums shall be rigidly supported. Fluores- cent fixtures shall not be mounted perpendicular to air flow nor directly in air flow. 9. Fixtures installed in compressor, fan and similar equipment rooms and areas shall be located, and height adjusted, on job to clear all obstructions such as ducts, piping, bracing and supports. Locate fixtures so that proper illumination will be obtained. Where location of fixtures shown on the plans must be radically changed, notify Architect. 10. Fixtures shall be shipped to job completely assembled as unit except stems, canopies, joiners and other required fittings.

B. Fluorescent Fixtures (Ceiling Recessed Mounted) 1. Fluorescent fixtures shall have frame suitable for installation in the type ceiling installed. 2. Fluorescent fixtures with parabolic louvers are to be supplied and installed with protective plastic sheeting in place. This protective material is not to be removed until all painting and clean-up in areas of fixtures has been completed. 3. Fluorescent fixtures shall be supported by rod hangers from building structure or other methods to adequately support the fixtures. 4. All lenses and louvers shall be cleaned. Lenses shall be cleaned on both sides. All fingerprints and smudges on louvers shall be completely removed. All foreign material fixtures shall be removed.

C. Fluorescent Fixtures (Ceiling Surface Mounted) 1. Fixtures surfaced mounted in continuous rows shall be mounted in exact horizontal alignment and free of vertical deflection and angular jointing. 2. Fixtures mounted in rows along tee bars shall be supported independent of ceiling with B-line #IDS clips.

D. Fluorescent Fixtures (Wall Recessed or Surface Mounted) 1. Fixtures and trims shall be square and plumb. All openings around fixture trims shall be filled and finished with appropriate material. 2. Surface mounted fixtures and recessed mounted fixture trim pieces shall be tight against the mounting surface.

E. Fluorescent Standby Lighting Fixtures: Units shall be mounted fixed in place where indicated on the drawings and be wired to normal unswitched power feeding lighting within the space.

F. Incandescent Fixtures (Ceiling Recessed Mounted)

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

16050-21 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 02/13/17 20150922

1. All fixtures shall be provided with frame-in kits for drywall or plaster ceilings or suspension bar hanger supports for tee bar ceilings. 2. All fixtures in drywall or plaster ceiling shall be provided with accessible junction boxes through fixture opening. 3. Any reflectors shall fit tight to ceiling and be free of fingerprints, dust and dirt.

G. Compact Fluorescent (Ceiling Recessed Mounting) 1. All fixtures shall be provided with frame-in kits for drywall or plaster ceilings or suspension bar hanger supports for tee bar ceilings. 2. All fixtures in drywall or plaster ceiling shall be provided with accessible junction boxes through fixture opening. 3. Any reflectors shall fit tight to ceiling and be free of fingerprints, dust and dirt.

H. HID Fixtures (Bracket Mounted) 1. HID fixtures shall be rigidly mounted. 2. All fixtures shall be square and plumb.

I. HID Fixtures (Ceiling Recessed and Surface Mounted) 1. HID fixtures in ceiling shall have frame suitable for installation in type ceiling installed. 2. Surface mounted fixtures shall be rigidly fastened in place.

J. HID Fixtures (Wall Surface Mounted) 1. Fixture shall be square and plumb. 2. Surface mounted fixtures shall be rigidly fastened in place.

3.06 OUTDOOR LIGHTING FIXTURE INSTALLATION

A. Wall or Bracket Mounted Fixture Installation 1. Contractor shall verify exact mounting location of fixtures to avoid interference with louvers, windows, doors and lintels. Where fixtures are indicated above doors or openings into the building, they shall be centered on that door or opening. 2. Unless otherwise noted, all fixtures of the same type on a single side of the building shall be mounted in the same horizontal plane. 3. All brackets shall be rigidly attached to the building with appropriate hardware.

B. Recessed, Surface or Pendant Mounted Fixture Installation 1. Recessed fixture faceplate shall be pulled tight to mounting surface to prevent entry of insects. 2. Surface or pendant-mounted fixtures shall be rigidly attached to building or structure. 3. Unless otherwise noted, all pendant-mounted fixtures of the same type below a single canopy or covered walkway shall have the bottom of the fixture mounted at the same horizontal plane.

3.07 LAMP INSTALLATION

A. Contractor shall furnish and install all lamps. All lamps missing or burnt out at Architect/Engineer's final inspection shall be furnished and installed or be replaced.

B. All fluorescent lamps with blackened ends shall be replaced.

C. All lamps shall be compatible with the lighting fixtures in which they are inserted.

3.08 BALLAST INSTALLATION

A. All fluorescent or HID lighting fixtures shall be provided with ballasts. All ballasts shall be mounted inside the lighting fixture unless otherwise indicated.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050-22 20150922 02/13/17

B. Fluorescent Standby Lighting Ballasts: 1. For fluorescent standby lighting units, the inverter, battery, charger, and ballast shall be installed within the lighting fixture ballast chamber where possible. 2. Where fluorescent standby lighting units inverter, battery, charger, and ballast are mounted on top of the fluorescent lighting fixtures, adequate clearance shall be provided. 3. The remote test switch shall be installed in the light fixture and allow testing by pushing on the fixture lens or through the louver. 4. The fluorescent standby lighting units shall be wired to an unswitched circuit. 5. Integral Ni-Cad battery pack equipped fixtures shall have combination battery pack/ballast and shall be capable of supplying each lamp in the fixture with power for 90 minutes per code. 6. Emergency battery packs for 4' fluorescent lamps shall be capable of providing a lumen output of at least 1100 lumens. Units shall be Emergi-Lite FPSI/U series or approved equal. 7. Emergency battery packs for twin tube fluorescent lamps shall be capable of providing a lumen output of at least 90% of rated lamp lumens. Units shall be Emergi-Lite FPDL7 series or approved equal.

3.09 INSTALLATION OF FUSES IN LIGHTING FIXTURES AND POLES

A. Fixture fuses shall be installed on the line side of the ballast in each "hot" lead. Fuseholders in exterior fixtures shall be waterproof and have required terminals of size and type to match wiring. Fuse size and type (slow blow or quick blow) shall be as recommended by ballast manufacturer.

3.10 FLUORESCENT FIXTURE LENS INSTALLATION:

A. All fluorescent fixture lenses and louvers shall be framed unless otherwise indicated.

END OF SECTION

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

16060-1 GROUNDING AND BONDING 02/13/17 20150922

SECTION 16060 - GROUNDING AND BONDING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes grounding of electrical systems and equipment. Grounding requirements specified in this Section may be supplemented by special requirements of systems described in other Sections.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Product Data: For Ground rods.

C. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.

D. Field Test Reports: Submit written test reports to include the following: 1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with requirements.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Testing Agency Qualifications: 1. Testing agency as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7 or a member company of the International Electrical Testing Association and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the International Electrical Testing Association to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: 1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. 2. Comply with UL 467.

C. Comply with NFPA 70; for overhead-line construction and medium-voltage underground construction, comply with IEEE C2.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Grounding Conductors, Cables, Connectors, and Rods: a. Apache Grounding/Erico Inc.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

GROUNDING AND BONDING 16060-2 20150922 02/13/17

b. Boggs, Inc. c. Chance/Hubbell. d. Copperweld Corp. e. Dossert Corp. f. Erico Inc.; Electrical Products Group. g. Framatome Connectors/Burndy Electrical. h. Galvan Industries, Inc. i. Harger Lightning Protection, Inc. j. Hastings Fiber Glass Products, Inc. k. Heary Brothers Lightning Protection Co. l. Ideal Industries, Inc. m. ILSCO. n. Kearney/Cooper Power Systems. o. Korns: C. C. Korns Co.; Division of Robroy Industries. p. Lightning Master Corp. q. Lyncole XIT Grounding. r. O-Z/Gedney Co.; a business of the EGS Electrical Group. s. Raco, Inc.; Division of Hubbell. t. Robbins Lightning, Inc. u. Salisbury: W. H. Salisbury & Co. v. Superior Grounding Systems, Inc. w. Thomas & Betts, Electrical.

2.02 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS

A. For insulated conductors, comply with Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."

B. Material: Copper-clad steel and copper.

C. Equipment Grounding Conductors: Insulated with green-colored insulation.

D. Isolated Ground Conductors: Insulated with green-colored insulation with yellow stripe. On feeders with isolated ground, use colored tape, alternating bands of green and yellow tape to provide a minimum of three bands of green and two bands of yellow.

E. Grounding Electrode Conductors: Stranded cable.

F. Underground Conductors: Bare, tinned, stranded, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Bare Copper Conductors: Comply with the following: 1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. 2. Assembly of Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. 3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33.

H. Copper Bonding Conductors: As follows: 1. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG copper conductor, 1/4 inch in diameter. 2. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded copper conductor. 3. Bonding Jumper: Bare copper tape, braided bare copper conductors, terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick. 4. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided copper conductors, terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.

I. Ground Conductor and Conductor Protector for Wood Poles: As follows: 1. No. 4 AWG minimum, soft-drawn copper conductor. 2. Conductor Protector: Half-round PVC or wood molding. If wood, use pressure-treated fir, or cypress or cedar.

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

16060-3 GROUNDING AND BONDING 02/13/17 20150922

J. Grounding Bus: Bare, annealed copper bars of rectangular cross section, with insulators.

2.03 CONNECTOR PRODUCTS

A. Comply with IEEE 837 and UL 467; listed for use for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and connected items.

B. Bolted Connectors: Bolted-pressure-type connectors, or compression type.

C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welded type, in kit form, and selected per manufacturer's written instructions.

2.04 GROUNDING ELECTRODES

A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel.

B. Ground Rods: Sectional type; copper-clad steel. Size: ¾” diameter by 10’ – 0” long.

C. Test Wells: Provide handholes as specified in Division 2 Section "Underground Ducts and Utility Structures."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 APPLICATION

A. Use only copper conductors for both insulated and bare grounding conductors in direct contact with earth, concrete, masonry, crushed stone, and similar materials.

B. In raceways, use insulated equipment grounding conductors.

C. Exothermic-Welded Connections: Use for connections to structural steel and for underground connections, except those at test wells.

D. Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Use bolted pressure clamps.

E. Ground Rod Clamps at Test Wells: Use bolted pressure clamps with at least two bolts.

F. Grounding Bus: Install in electrical and telephone equipment rooms, in rooms housing service equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. 1. Use insulated spacer; space 1 inch from wall and support from wall 6 inches above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated. 2. At doors, route the bus up to the top of the door frame, across the top of the doorway, and down to the specified height above the floor.

G. Underground Grounding Conductors: Use copper conductor, No. 2/0 AWG minimum. Bury at least 24 inches below grade or bury 12 inches above duct bank when installed as part of the duct bank.

3.02 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS

A. Comply with NFPA 70, Article 250, for types, sizes, and quantities of equipment grounding conductors, unless specific types, larger sizes, or more conductors than required by NFPA 70 are indicated.

B. Install equipment grounding conductors in all feeders and branch circuits.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

GROUNDING AND BONDING 16060-4 20150922 02/13/17

C. Isolated Grounding Receptacle Circuits: Install an insulated equipment grounding conductor connected to the receptacle grounding terminal. Isolate grounding conductor from raceway and from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Signal and Communication Systems: For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and other communication systems, provide No. 4 AWG minimum insulated grounding conductor in raceway from grounding electrode system to each service location, terminal cabinet, wiring closet, and central equipment location. 1. Service and Central Equipment Locations and Wiring Closets: Terminate grounding conductor on a 1/4-by-2-by-12-inch grounding bus. 2. Terminal Cabinets: Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet grounding terminal.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Ground Rods: Install at least three rods spaced at least one-rod length from each other and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes. 1. Drive ground rods until tops are 2 inches below finished floor or final grade, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductors. Use exothermic welds, except at test wells and as otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging copper coating.

B. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise indicated. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.

C. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install so vibration by equipment mounted on vibration isolation hangers and supports is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations, unless a disconnect-type connection is required; then, use a bolted clamp. Bond straps directly to the basic structure taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts. Install straps only in locations accessible for maintenance.

D. Metal Water Service Pipe: Provide insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes by grounding clamp connectors. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor to street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end.

E. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters. Connect to pipe with grounding clamp connectors.

F. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system upstream from equipment shutoff valve.

G. Install one test well for each service at the ground rod electrically closest to the service entrance. Set top of well flush with finished grade or floor.

3.04 CONNECTIONS

A. General: Make connections so galvanic action or electrolysis possibility is minimized. Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct contact will be galvanically compatible. 1. Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to ensure high conductivity and to make contact points closer to order of galvanic series. 2. Make connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact. 3. Coat and seal connections having dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent future penetration of

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

16060-5 GROUNDING AND BONDING 02/13/17 20150922

moisture to contact surfaces.

B. Exothermic-Welded Connections: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Welds that are puffed up or that show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not acceptable.

C. Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: For No. 8 AWG and larger, use pressure-type grounding lugs. No. 10 AWG and smaller grounding conductors may be terminated with winged pressure-type connectors.

D. Noncontact Metal Raceway Terminations: If metallic raceways terminate at metal housings without mechanical and electrical connection to housing, terminate each conduit with a grounding bushing. Connect grounding bushings with a bare grounding conductor to grounding bus or terminal in housing. Bond electrically noncontinuous conduits at entrances and exits with grounding bushings and bare grounding conductors, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Connections at Test Wells: Use compression-type connectors on conductors and make bolted- and clamped-type connections between conductors and ground rods.

F. Tighten screws and bolts for grounding and bonding connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A.

G. Compression-Type Connections: Use hydraulic compression tools to provide correct circumferential pressure for compression connectors. Use tools and dies recommended by connector manufacturer. Provide embossing die code or other standard method to make a visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on grounding conductor.

H. Moisture Protection: If insulated grounding conductors are connected to ground rods or grounding buses, insulate entire area of connection and seal against moisture penetration of insulation and cable.

3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing: Owner’s representative will engage a qualified testing agency to perform the following field quality-control testing:

B. Testing: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform the following field quality-control testing:

C. Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing: 1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements. 2. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, and at ground test wells. Measure ground resistance not less than two full days after the last trace of precipitation, and without the soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance. Perform tests, by the fall-of- potential method according to IEEE 81. 3. Provide drawings locating each ground rod and ground rod assembly and other grounding electrodes, identify each by letter in alphabetical order, and key to the record of tests and observations. Include the number of rods driven and their depth at each location and include observations of weather and other phenomena that may affect test results. Describe measures taken to improve test results. a. Equipment Rated 500 kVA and Less: 10 ohms. b. Equipment Rated 500 to 1000 kVA: 5 ohms. c. Equipment Rated More Than 1000 kVA: 3 ohms. d. Substations and Pad-Mounted Switching Equipment: 5 ohms. e. Manhole Grounds: 10 ohms. 4. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

GROUNDING AND BONDING 16060-6 20150922 02/13/17

promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.

END OF SECTION

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

16075-1 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 02/13/17 20150922

SECTION 16075 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Identification for raceway and metal-clad cable. 2. Identification for conductors and communication and control cable. 3. Underground-line warning tape. 4. Warning labels and signs. 5. Instruction signs. 6. Equipment identification labels. 7. Miscellaneous identification products. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 and ANSI C2. B. Comply with NFPA 70. C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145. 1.04 COORDINATION A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in the Contract Documents, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual, and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project. B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied. C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors. D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway and cable size. B. Color for Printed Legend: 1. Power Circuits: Black letters on a white field. 2. Legend: Indicate system or service and voltage, if applicable. C. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical- resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label. D. Snap-Around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeves, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action. E. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeves, 2 inches (50 mm) long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16075-2 20150922 02/13/17

F. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Tape: Colored, heavy duty, waterproof, fade resistant; 2 inches (50 mm) wide; compounded for outdoor use. 2.02 CONDUCTOR AND COMMUNICATION- AND CONTROL-CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils (0.08 mm) thick by 1 to 2 inches (25 to 50 mm) wide. B. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process. C. Aluminum Wraparound Marker Labels: Cut from 0.014-inch- (0.35-mm-) thick aluminum sheet, with stamped, embossed, or scribed legend, and fitted with tabs and matching slots for permanently securing around wire or cable jacket or around groups of conductors. D. Metal Tags: Brass or aluminum, 2 by 2 by 0.05 inch (50 by 50 by 1.3 mm), with stamped legend, punched for use with self-locking nylon tie fastener. E. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and polyester or nylon tie for attachment to conductor or cable. 1. Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag manufacturer. 2.03 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145. B. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment, unless otherwise indicated. C. Baked-Enamel Warning Signs: Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size required for application. 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) grommets in corners for mounting. Nominal size, 7 by 10 inches (180 by 250 mm). D. Metal-Backed, Butyrate Warning Signs: Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose-acetate butyrate signs with 0.0396-inch (1-mm) galvanized-steel backing; and with colors, legend, and size required for application. 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) grommets in corners for mounting. Nominal size, 10 by 14 inches (250 by 360 mm). E. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends: 1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD - EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES." 2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES (915 MM)." 2.04 INSTRUCTION SIGNS A. Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick for signs up to 20 sq. in. (129 sq. cm) and 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick for larger sizes. 1. Engraved legend with black letters on white face. 2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners. 3. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable equipment. 2.05 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS A. Adhesive Film Label: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm). B. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm). Overlay shall provide a weatherproof and ultraviolet-resistant seal for label. C. Self-Adhesive, Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Adhesive backed, with white letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm).

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

16075-3 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 02/13/17 20150922

D. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting. White letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm). E. Stenciled Legend: In nonfading, waterproof, black ink or paint. Minimum letter height shall be 1 inch (25 mm). 2.06 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS A. Cable Ties: Fungus-inert, self-extinguishing, 1-piece, self-locking, Type 6/6 nylon cable ties. 1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch (5 mm). 2. Tensile Strength: 50 lb (22.6 kg), minimum. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 85 deg C). 4. Color: Black, except where used for color-coding.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 APPLICATION A. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification: For primary and secondary conductors No. 1/0 AWG and larger in pull and junction boxes, and handholes use color-coding conductor tape. Identify source and circuit number of each set of conductors. For single conductor cables, identify phase in addition to the above. B. Branch-Circuit Conductor Identification: Where there are conductors for more than three branch circuits in same junction or pull box, use color-coding conductor tape. Identify each ungrounded conductor according to source and circuit number. C. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach write-on tags to conductors and list source and circuit number. D. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, signal, sound, intercommunications, voice, and data connections. 1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation. 2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections. 3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and Operation and Maintenance Manual. E. Instruction Signs: 1. Operating Instructions: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation. 2. Emergency Operating Instructions: Install instruction signs with white legend on a red background with minimum 3/8-inch- (10-mm-) high letters for emergency instructions at equipment used for power transfer. F. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification. 1. Labeling Instructions: a. Indoor Equipment: Adhesive film label. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) high letters on 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) high label; where 2 lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches (50 mm) high. b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16075-4 20150922 02/13/17

c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for viewing from the floor. 2. Equipment to Be Labeled: a. Panelboards, electrical cabinets, and enclosures. b. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items. c. Electrical switchgear and switchboards. d. Transformers. e. Electrical substations. f. Emergency system boxes and enclosures. g. Disconnect switches. h. Enclosed circuit breakers. i. Motor starters. j. Push-button stations. k. Power transfer equipment. l. Contactors. m. Remote-controlled switches, dimmer modules, and control devices. n. Voice and data cable terminal equipment. o. Fire-alarm control panel and annunciators. p. Security and intrusion-detection control stations, control panels, terminal cabinets, and racks. q. Monitoring and control equipment. r. Uninterruptible power supply equipment. s. Terminals, racks, and patch panels for voice and data communication and for signal and control functions. t. Receptacles. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products. B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work. D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device. E. Attach nonadhesive signs and plastic labels with screws and auxiliary hardware appropriate to the location and substrate. F. System Identification Color Banding for Raceways and Cables: Each color band shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot (15-m) maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot (7.6-m) maximum intervals in congested areas. G. Color-Coding for Phase Identification, 600 V and Less: Use the colors listed below for ungrounded service, feeder, and branch-circuit conductors. 1. Color shall be factory applied. 2. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits: a. Phase A: Black. b. Phase B: Red. c. Phase C: Blue. 3. Colors for 480/277-V Circuits:

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

16075-5 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 02/13/17 20150922

a. Phase A: Brown. b. Phase B: Orange c. Phase C: Yellow. 4. Colors for Isolated Circuits: a. Ground: Green with yellow stripe b. Neutral: White with yellow stripe 5. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum distance of 6 inches (150 mm) from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings. H. Aluminum Wraparound Marker Labels and Metal Tags: Secure tight to surface of conductor or cable at a location with high visibility and accessibility.

END OF SECTION

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16075-6 20150922 02/13/17

Page left intentionally blank

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

16411-1 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 02/13/17 20150922

SECTION 16411 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following individually mounted, enclosed switches and circuit breakers:

1. Fusible switches. 2. Nonfusible switches. 3. Molded-case circuit breakers. 4. Enclosures.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Field quality-control test reports.

D. Operation and maintenance data.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Arti- cle 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified.

2.02 FUSIBLE AND NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products. 2. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Control Division. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D/Group Schneider.

B. Fusible Switch, 1200 A and Smaller: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate specified fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept two padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 16411-2 20150922 02/13/17

C. Nonfusible Switch, 1200 A and Smaller: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, lockable handle with capability to accept two padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

D. Accessories:

1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors. 2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded, and bonded; and labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors. 3. Auxiliary Contact Kit: Auxiliary set of contacts arranged to open before switch blades open.

2.03 MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS AND SWITCHES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products. 2. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Control Division. 3. Moeller Electric Corporation. 4. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 5. Square D/Group Schneider.

B. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker: NEMA AB 1, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents.

1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger. 2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-mounted, field- adjustable trip setting. 3. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller and let-through ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5. 4. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with 30-mA trip sensitivity.

C. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker Features and Accessories:

1. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. 2. Lugs: Mechanical style with compression lug kits suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material. 3. Application Listing: Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HACR for heating, air- conditioning, and refrigerating equipment. 4. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator. 5. Shunt Trip: 120-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at 75 percent of rated voltage.

2.04 ENCLOSURES

A. NEMA AB 1 and NEMA KS 1 to meet environmental conditions of installed location.

1. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R. 2. Kitchen Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless steel. 3. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4.

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

16411-3 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 02/13/17 20150922

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete housekeeping pads. Verify structural requirements with structural engineer.

B. Comply with applicable portions of NECA 1, NEMA PB 1.1, and NEMA PB 2.1 for installation of enclosed switches and circuit breakers.

C. Mount individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height, unless otherwise indicated. Anchor floor-mounting switches to concrete base.

D. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Ma- terials and Methods "

E. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.

F. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs as specified in Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."

3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Prepare for acceptance testing as follows:

1. Inspect mechanical and electrical connections. 2. Verify switch and relay type and labeling verification. 3. Verify rating of installed fuses.

B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in NETA ATS, Section 7.5 for switches and Section 7.6 for molded-case circuit breakers. Certify compliance with test parameters. 2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

END OF SECTION 16411

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 16411-4 20150922 02/13/17

Page left intentionally blank

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

16429-1 INTEGRATED ELECTRICAL PANELBOARDS 02/13/17 20150922

SECTION 16429 - INTEGRATED ELECTRICAL PANELBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. Integrate switchboard manufacturer shall furnish and the General Contractor and electrical subcontractor shall install where indicated on the construction documents. The integrated electrical panelboard is a freestanding, dead front type, low-voltage distribution switchboard utilizing group mounted circuit protective devices and other integrated equipment panel boards, transformers, contactors, telephone equipment, and temperature control equipment as specified herein and as shown on the contract drawings.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. The low-voltage integrated electrical panel boards and all components therein shall be designed, manufactured, and tested in accordance with the latest applicable following standards: 1. NEMA PB-2. 2. UL Standard 891.

1.03 SUBMITTALS —FOR REVIEW / APPROVAL

A. The following information shall be provided by the supplier on each project and submitted to the engineer: 1. Front view elevation with dimensions. 2. Floor plan with dimensions. 3. Top view with dimensions. 4. Single line diagram with all wire sizes. 5. Detailed systems schematic diagram for all internal wiring. 6. Nameplate schedule. 7. Component list. 8. Conduit entry/exit locations and sizes. 9. Integrated assembly ratings including: a. Short circuit current rating. b. Voltage. c. Continuous current. d. Series rated combinations. 10. Major component ratings including: a. Voltage. b. Continuous current. c. Interrupting ratings. d. Short circuit current rating. 11. Cable terminal sizes.

1.04 QUALIFICATIONS

A. The manufacturer of the assembly has been pre-selected by the owner’s representative. Products shall be manufactured by General Electric, Square D, or Siemens. This equipment is pre-purchased by owner’s representative and installed by the General Contractor and the Electrical Sub-contractor.

1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. The low-voltage integrated electrical panel board shall be UL labeled. When shown on the drawings, the panel board shall contain “Suitable for Use as Service Equipment” labeling and meet UL and National Electrical Code standards for service equipment.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

INTEGRATED ELECTRICAL PANELBOARDS 16429-2 20150922 02/13/17

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Equipment shall be handled by the general contractor’s electrical subcontractor and stored by the general contractor’s electrical subcontractor in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions off-site and / or on- site. One (1) copy of these instructions shall be included with the equipment at time of shipment.

B. A copy of the manufacturers’ standard handling and storage requirements shall be supplied to the general contractor’s electrical subcontractor.

C. General Contractor’s electrical subcontractor shall inspect the craftsmanship of all equipment for proper wiring terminations and all other defectives, and shall immediately notify the manufacturer of all such defectives for correction by the manufacturer.

1.07 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Four (4) copies of the equipment operation and maintenance manuals shall be provided prior to final payment.

B. Operation and maintenance manuals shall include the following information: 1. Instruction books and /or leaflets. 2. Recommended renewal parts list. 3. Drawings and information required 4. Preventative Maintenance Data 5. Parts & Labor Information

C. The manufacturer and electrical contractor shall provide owner’s representative personnel with a minimal 20 hours of training indicating how to fully and completely operate all products.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Switchboards: 1. CD Controls, using GE panels and breakers. 2. Contact information: Dave Roach, CD Controls, 55 Gateway Drive, Lavonia, GA 30553; phone: 706.356.0325; email [email protected]

B. Assembly shall be fabricated, assembled and tested in the Manufacturer’s facility.

2.02 RATINGS

A. The assembly shall be rated to withstand mechanical forces exerted during short circuit conditions when connected directly to a power source having available fault current as shown on the drawings. The main distribution section shall be fully rated at rated voltage. Sub-panels may be series rated. Copies of series combinations shall be submitted with final RFQ quote. Electrical contractor shall verify with Utility Co. for available short circuit current and shall promptly notify the Engineer in writing if the utility fault current exceeds that indicated on the drawings.

B. Voltage rating shall be as indicated on the drawings.

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

16429-3 INTEGRATED ELECTRICAL PANELBOARDS 02/13/17 20150922

2.03 CONSTRUCTION

A. The integrated switchboard shall consist of the required number of vertical sections bolted together to form a rigid freestanding assembly. The sides and rear shall be covered with removable bolt-on covers. All edges of front covers or hinged front panels shall be formed. The integrated switchboard front covers shall be made of brushed aluminum and have full height hinged doors, which can be easily removed without screws, etc. Provide adequate ventilation within the enclosure.

B. All sections of the integrated switchboard shall be front and rear aligned (except for integrated transformer sections). All protective devices shall be group mounted. Devices shall be front removable and load connections front accessible enabling switchboard to be mounted against a wall.

C. Enclosures shall be of indoor ventilated construction. Outdoor enclosures shall be non-walk-in and provided with space heaters and thermostat.

D. Finish. All exterior and interior steel surfaces of the switchboard shall be properly cleaned and provided with a rust-inhibiting phosphatized coating. Color and finish of the switchboard shall be ANSI 61or manufacturer’s standard.

E. Where shown on drawings, provide shipping splits between sections to accommodate installation. Shipping splits shall be clearly marked on manufacturer’s submittal drawings.

2.04 WIRING/TERMINATIONS

A. The switchboard manufacturer shall furnish small wiring, necessary fuse blocks and terminal blocks within the switchboard. Control components mounted within the assembly, such as fuse blocks, relays, pushbuttons, switches, contactors, etc., shall be suitably marked for identification corresponding to appropriate designations on manufacturer's wiring diagrams. Wire markers shall be utilized on each conductor identifying the circuit per drawings.

B. Mechanical type terminals shall be provided for all line and load terminations suitable for copper cable rated for 75 degrees C of the size as indicated on the drawings.

C. Lugs shall be provided in the incoming line section for connection of the main grounding conductor. Additional lugs for connection of other grounding conductors shall be provided as indicated on the drawings.

D. All control wire shall be bundled and secured by use of Panduit type wireway. Insulated locking spade terminals shall be provided for all control connections, except where saddle type terminals are provided integral to a device. All current transformer secondary leads shall first be connected to conveniently accessible short circuit terminal blocks before connecting to any other device. All groups of coil control wires shall be provided with terminal blocks with suitable numbering strips. Provide wire markers at each end of all control termination wires.

E. The switchboard manufacturer shall wire all panel boards from the associated feeder breaker to the panel board as noted on drawings.

2.05 MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A. Feeder protective devices in section switchboards shall be molded case circuit breakers with inverse time and instantaneous tripping characteristics. Ground fault protection shall be provided where indicated. All circuit breakers shall be bolt-on construction.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

INTEGRATED ELECTRICAL PANELBOARDS 16429-4 20150922 02/13/17

B. Circuit breakers shall be operated by a toggle-type handle and shall have a quick-make, quick-break over- center switching mechanism that is mechanically trip-free. Automatic tripping of the breaker shall be clearly indicated by the handle position. Contacts shall be non-welding silver alloy. A push-to-trip button on the front of the circuit breaker shall provide a local manual means to exercise the trip mechanism.

C. Circuit breakers shall have a minimum symmetrical interrupting capacity as indicated on the drawings.

D. Circuit breakers in main switchboard shall be fully rated. All branch breakers in other sections may be UL series combinations listed for the available fault current at 480X and 10,000 amperes at 208V.

E. Circuit breakers 800 ampere frame and below shall have thermal-magnetic trip units and inverse time- current characteristics.

F. Provide shunt trips, bell alarms, and auxiliary switches as shown on the contract drawings.

2.06 INTEGRATED PANELBOARDS

A. The switchboard manufacturer as shown on the contract drawings shall integrate and assemble Panel boards into the switchboard. Each panel board shall contain its own hinged door to allow access to breaker handles.

B. Feeder breakers within the switchboard shall be factory wired to the associated panel boards. Wire markers shall be utilized to identify the conductors and matched on both ends with panel designation and phase markings. Where shipping splits are shown, provide adequate wire and associated barriers, conduit and other necessary materials for contractor connection. The switchboard manufacturer shall connect and secure either the line or load side of each connection on shipping splits.

2.07 DRY TYPE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS

A. Switchboard Installation 1. When dry type distribution transformers are shown up to 225KVA on drawings, the transformer shall be installed on a platform mounted above the panelboards U.N.O. Transformer platform shall be furnished by switchgear manufacturer and installed by the electrical contractor. 2. The transformer shall be secured in a manner that assures the structural integrity of the vertical switchboard section and the transformer. 3. The electrical contractor shall wire the transformer from the feeder overcurrent device to the line side of the transformer in accordance with UL and the National Electrical Code utilizing copper conductors. 4. The electrical contractor shall wire the secondary side of the transformer to the load or panel board shown on the drawings in accordance with UL and the National Electrical Code utilizing copper conductors. 5. Within the switchboard provide adequate ventilation for the transformer and other installed components. 6. Provide (4) 2-1/2% FCBN primary taps for 15 KVA and smaller. Provide (4) 2-1/2% FCBN and (2) 2- 1/2% taps FCAN primary taps for 30 KVA and larger transformers.

2.08 ENCLOSURES

A. Type 1 Indoor Enclosure.

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

16429-5 INTEGRATED ELECTRICAL PANELBOARDS 02/13/17 20150922

2.09 NAMEPLATES

A. Engraved nameplates, mounted on the face of the assembly, shall be furnished for all main and feeder circuits as indicated on the drawings. Nameplates shall be laminated plastic, black characters on white background. Characters shall be 3/16 inch high, minimum. Sticker type nameplates are also acceptable. Nameplates shall give item designation and circuit number as well as frame ampere size and appropriate trip rating. Furnish Master nameplate giving switchboard designation, voltage ampere rating, short circuit rating, manufacturer’s name, general order number and item number.

B. Control components mounted within the assembly, such as fuse blocks, relays, pushbuttons, switches, etc., shall be suitably marked for identification corresponding to appropriate designations on manufacturer’s wiring diagrams.

2.10 FINISH

A. All exterior and interior steel surfaces of the switchboard shall be properly cleaned and provided with a rust-inhibiting phosphatized coating. Color and finish of the switchboard shall be ANSI 61 or manufacturer’s standard.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 FACTORY TESTING

A. The factory tests shall be performed on the equipment provided under this section. All tests shall be in accordance with the latest version of ANSI and NEMA standards.

B. The switchboard shall be completely assembled, wired, adjusted and tested at the factory. After assembly, the complete switchboard will be tested for operation under simulated service conditions to assure the accuracy of the wiring and the functioning of all equipment. The main circuits shall be given a dielectric test of 2200 volts for one minute between live parts and ground and between opposite polarities. The wiring and control circuits shall be given a dielectric test of 1500 volts for one minute between live parts and ground.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. The Contractors shall install all equipment per the manufacturer's recommendations and the contract drawings.

B. The assembly shall be provided with adequate lifting means and shall be capable of being moved into installation position and bolted directly to the floor without the use of floor sills providing the floor is level to 1/8 inch per 3-foot distance in any direction. All necessary hardware to secure the assembly in place shall be provided by the Contractor.

END OF SECTION

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

INTEGRATED ELECTRICAL PANELBOARDS 16429-6 20150922 02/13/17

Page left intentionally blank

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

16615-1 EMERGENCY ELECTRICAL GENERATOR (NATURAL GAS) AND ATS 02/13/17 20150922

SECTION 16615 - EMERGENCY ELECTRICAL GENERATOR (NATURAL GAS) AND ATS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. It is the intent of these specifications to ensure that the generator (provided by the Developer) is installed and fully operating properly per manufacturer’s standards.

B. The equipment supplied and the installation shall meet the applicable requirements of the following codes and regulations: 1. NFPA 37 Stationary Combustion Engines 2. NFPA 101 Life Safety Code, 2012 Edition 3. NFPA 110 Standby Power Systems, 2002 Edition 4. All Governing Agency Noise Ordinances 5. All Governing Air Pollution Control District Rules and Regulations 6. AIEE Standard 606, Speed Governing of Engine Generator Units 7. NEMA MG1, Motors and Generators 8. UL-1008 Standard for Safety 9. All codes and regulations for the State of GA, Cobb County and the City of Kennesaw. 10. All equipment shall be new, of current domestic production of a national firm which manufacturers the engine-generator set as a matched unit, and the manufacturer together with its authorized representative, shall have full responsibility for the performance of the generator set and its accessories.

C. Generator set (provided by Developer) manufactured by Generac. Contact information: Peter Smith, National Accounts Manager, Generac Power Systems, 211 Murphy Drive, Eagle, WI 53119; Phone 860.287.1457; [email protected].

1.02 RATING

A. Generator set is rated as specified in Single Line diagram, 1800 RPM, 0.80 Power Factor, 480 VAC, 3 ph, 4 wire, for continuous standby operation during any utility power failure. Rating shall be verified by electrical contractor.

1.03 GENERATOR VERIFICATION

A. The specifications as listed under “Part 2 - Products” shall confirmed by electrical subcontractor. All deviations shall be furnished to the Architect, in written form, within 60 days of the start of the Tenant Improvements construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERATOR

A. The generator shall be 4-pole, revolving field, with rotating brushless or static exciter. It shall have a solid state voltage regulator capable of maintaining voltage within ±2 percent at constant load from 0-100 percent of rating. Voltage regulator shall be of the volts-per-hertz type and NFPA-110 requirement for 100% load pickup shall be met. The regulator shall be sealed from the environment and isolated from the load to prevent tracking when connected to SCR loads. (PMG type).

B. Generator shall be self-ventilated of drip-proof construction with amortisseur rotor winding and skewed for smooth voltage waveform. The insulation material shall meet the NEMA standard (MGI-22.40 and 16.40) for Class H and be vacuum impregnated with epoxy varnish to be fungus resistant per MIL I-24092. Temperature rise of the rotor and stator shall be limited to NEMA Class F.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

EMERGENCY ELECTRICAL GENERATOR (NATURAL GAS) AND ATS 16615-2 20150922 02/13/17

C. On application of any load up to 100 percent of the rated load, the instantaneous voltage dip shall not exceed 20 percent and shall recover to ±2 percent rated voltage within one second.

D. The generator, having a single maintenance free bearing, shall be directly connected to the flywheel housing with a semi-flexible coupling between the rotor and the flywheel.

E. Generator shall have two (2) mounted circuit breakers, molded case or insulated case construction (verify number and rating with single line diagram). Breakers shall be Merlin Gerin or equal and utilize a thermal magnetic trip unit and 24 VDC shunt trip. The breakers shall be UL listed with shunt trip device connected to engine/generator safety shutdowns. Breakers shall be housed in an extension terminal box mounted on the side of the generator. A bus tap connection shall be provided for fire pump connection.

F. Mechanical type lugs, sized for the circuit breaker feeders shown on the drawing, shall be supplied on the load side of the breaker.

G. Generator shall over-voltage protection for sensitive loads that will shut the unit down when voltage exceeds 115 percent of rated for longer than 1 second.

H. “Emergency Stop” pushbutton per NFPA 110 provided with the generator. Mount pushbutton in a NEMA 3R enclosure and have a cover to prevent accidental operation. Mount pushbutton on building exterior wall near generator. Provide low voltage cabling per the manufacturer’s recommendations to operate the pushbutton.

2.02 GENERATOR CONTROLLER

A. A generator mounted control panel for complete control and monitoring of the engine and generator set functions (provided with the generator). Panel shall include automatic start/stop operation, adjustable cycle cranking, digital AC metering (0.5% true rms accuracy) with phase selector switch, digital engine monitoring, shutdown sensors and alarms with horn and reset, adjustable cool-down timer and emergency stop push-button. Panel shall incorporate self-diagnostics capabilities and fault logging. Critical components shall be environmentally sealed to protect against failure from moisture and dirt. Components shall be housed in a NEMA 1/IP22 enclosure with hinged lid. Provide low voltage cabling per the manufacturer’s recommendations to operate the controller.

B. Digital Readouts: Provide the following digital readouts: 1. Engine oil pressure 2. Coolant temperature 3. Engine RPM 4. System DC volts 5. Engine running hours 6. Generator AC volts 7. Generator AC amps 8. Generator frequency 9. KW Meter 10. Percentage of rated Power 11. KVA meter 12. KVAr meter 13. Power Factor meter 14. KWHR meter

C. Alarm NFPA 110: Provide the following indications for protection and diagnostics according to NFPA 110 level 1. 1. Low oil pressure 2. High water temperature

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

16615-3 EMERGENCY ELECTRICAL GENERATOR (NATURAL GAS) AND ATS 02/13/17 20150922

3. Low coolant level 4. Overspeed 5. Overcrank 6. Emergency stop depressed 7. Approaching high coolant temperature 8. Approaching low oil pressure 9. Low coolant temperature 10. Low voltage in battery 11. Control switch not in auto. Position 12. Low fuel main tank 13. Battery charger ac failure 14. High battery voltage 15. EPS supplying loadp 16. Spare

D. Programmable Control Panel: Provide programmable protective relay functions inside the control panel to include the following: 1. Undervoltage 2. Overvoltage 3. Overfrequency 4. Underfrequency 5. Reverse power 6. Overcurrent (phase and total) 7. kW level (overload) 8. Three spare LED’s 9. Four spare inputs.

2.03 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR PANEL

A. One (1) remote annunciator panel (provided by Developer with Generator) shall meet the requirements of NFPA 110, Level 1 provided with the generator 1. Locate annunciator on exterior surface of powerwall PW1A. 2. The annunciators shall provide remote annunciation of all points stated above and shall incorporate ring- back capability so that after silencing the initial alarm, any subsequent alarms shall sound the horn. 3. Provide alarm indication for “generator ground fault” on solidly grounded wye systems of more than 150 volts to ground and circuit breakers rated 1000 amp or more, to meet NEC. 4. Provide low voltage control wiring per the manufacturer’s recommendations.

B. Panel shall include Level 1 alarms and the following minimum features. 1. Prealarm high engine temperature 2. Prealarm low oil pressure 3. Low water temperature 4. Low fuel 5. Battery charger fault 6. Low battery voltage 7. Auxiliary fault

C. Shutdown indicators for: 1. High engine temperature 2. Low oil pressure 3. Emergency stop 4. Overspeed 5. Overcrank

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

EMERGENCY ELECTRICAL GENERATOR (NATURAL GAS) AND ATS 16615-4 20150922 02/13/17

D. Status indicators for: 1. Line power 2. Generator power 3. System ready 4. Generator switch not in "Auto" 5. Lamp test switch

E. Alarm horn, with "Silence/Normal" Switch.

F. Auxiliary contact for run status for BMS connection.

2.04 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES

A. Automatic transfer switches shall be provided as an integral part of the integrated electrical switchboards specified in Section 16429. See Section 16429 for additional information.

B. Provide two automatic transfer switches compatible with the engine generator control system. Switches shall be rated for continuous duty with voltage and amps as indicated on the drawings, 60 Hz. Switch shall contain three (3) poles with solid neutral, and shall be mounted within an integrated electrical switchboard.

C. The automatic transfer switches shall be mechanically held and electrically operated by a single-solenoid mechanism energized from the source to which the load is to be transferred. The switch shall be rated for continuous duty and be inherently double throw. The switch shall be mechanically interlocked to ensure only one of two possible positions - normal or emergency. 1. All main contacts shall be the silver alloy wiping action type. They shall be protected by arcing contacts. They shall be of the blow-on configuration and of segmented or brush construction. The operating transfer time in either direction shall not exceed one sixth (1/6) of a second. 2. Sensing and control relays shall be continuous duty industrial control grade type with a minimum contact rating of ten amperes. 3. Automatic transfer switches utilizing components of molded-case circuit breakers, contactors, or parts thereof which have not been intended for continuous duty or repetitive load transfer switching are not acceptable. 4. The automatic transfer switch shall conform to the requirements of NEMA ICS 2-447 and Underwriters' Laboratories UL-1008.

D. Withstand current rating of the switch, when used with the specific protective devices shown on the drawings, and as defined by UL-1008, shall not be less than 42,000 RMS symmetrical amperes.

E. Automatic transfer switch shall include the following accessories: 1. Time delay normal to emergency, adjustable - 0.6 to 60 seconds. (Set at 2 seconds.) 2. Time delay on engine starting, fixed at 3 seconds. 3. Time delay emergency to normal, adjustable 1 to 30 minutes. (Set at 30 minutes.) 4. Frequency voltage relay for emergency source, monitoring 1-phase, non-adjustable. 5. Test switch, mounted on enclosure door. 6. Disconnect plug to prevent automatic operation during routine maintenance. 7. Main shaft auxiliary contact, closed on normal. 8. Main shaft auxiliary contact, closed on emergency. 9. Green pilot light, installed on enclosure door, indicating switch in emergency position. 10. Red pilot light, installed on enclosure door, indicating switch in emergency position. 11. Plant exerciser, 14-day period adjustable in 30 minute increments. Two position switch included to permit "loaded" or "unloaded" running. 12. Manual operator, for maintenance purposes and operation of the switch when unloaded, in conformance with UL-1008.

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market

16615-5 EMERGENCY ELECTRICAL GENERATOR (NATURAL GAS) AND ATS 02/13/17 20150922

13. In phase monitor control for in phase transfers.

F. Provide low-voltage control wiring per manufacturer’s recommendations.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 TESTING

A. Design prototype test: Components of the emergency system, such as the engine/generator set, transfer switch, and accessories shall not be subjected to prototype test since the tests are potentially damaging. Rather, similar design prototypes and reliability preproduction models, which will not be sold, shall be used for these tests. Upon request, the following certified test records shall be made available: 1. Maximum power (kW). 2. Maximum starting (kVA) at 30% instantaneous voltage dip. 3. Alternator temperature rise by embedded thermocouple and by resistance method per NEMA MG1- 22.40 and 16.40. 4. Governor speed regulation under steady-state and transient conditions. 5. Voltage regulation and generator transient response. 6. Fuel consumption at no load, 1/4, 1/4, 3/4, and full load. 7. Harmonic analysis, voltage waveform deviation, and telephone influence factor. 8. Three-phase line-to-line short circuit test. 9. Alternator cooling air flow. 10. Torsional analysis testing to verify that the generator set is free of harmful torsional stresses.

B. Final production tests: Each generator set shall be factory tested under varying loads with guards and exhaust system in place. Tests shall include: 1. Single-step load pickup. 2. Transient and steady-state governing. 3. Safety shutdown. 4. Voltage regulation. 5. Rated power. 6. Maximum power 7. Upon request, arrangements to witness this test will be made or a certified test record will be sent prior to shipment.

C. Site tests: An installation check, start-up and building load shall be performed by the manufacturer's local representative. The engineer, regular operators, and the maintenance staff shall be notified of the time and date of the site test.

D. The initial start-up of the engine/generator set shall be performed by a factory trained representative of the engine/generator set manufacturer. He shall furnish and install the recommended engine lubricants and fill the cooling system with a 50% solution of ethylene glycol antifreeze in accordance with the engine manufacturer's recommendations. He shall be present during the load test specified, and at the conclusion of the test shall supply the owner's representative with one complete set of operation, maintenance, and parts manuals for all equipment. Under this section of the specification, he shall instruct the owner's personnel in the proper operating and maintenance procedures for all components of the standby power system.

E. Accessories that normally function while the set is standing by shall be checked prior to cranking the engine. This shall include: engine heaters, battery charger, etc. 1. Start-up under test mode to check for exhaust leaks, path of exhaust gases, cooling air flow, movement during starting and stopping, vibration during running, normal and emergency line-to-line voltage and phase rotation.

Whole Foods Market Bidding Kennesaw, GA

EMERGENCY ELECTRICAL GENERATOR (NATURAL GAS) AND ATS 16615-6 20150922 02/13/17

F. Automatic start-up by means of simulated power outage to test remote automatic starting, transfer of load, and automatic shutdown.

G. Prior to this test, all transfer switch timers shall be adjusted for proper systems coordination. Engine temperature, oil pressure and battery charger level along with generator voltage, amperes, and frequency shall be monitored throughout the test.

H. Load test automatic transfer switch: The ATS’s shall be tested with full building load for two hours.

END OF SECTION

Kennesaw, GA Bidding Whole Foods Market